UM10724G00

Claudius Peters (Italiana) srl
Via Verdi, 2
24121 Bergamo
Italy

Phone: +39 035 237 196
Fax: +39 035 237 785
italiana@claudiuspeters.com
www.claudiuspeters.com

691611D
Ventomatic-IHI-Vietnam

storage silo

Technical Documentation

CP (Italiana) order n: 01/3951/06
Place of erection: BIM SON II - VIETNAM
Year of delivery: 2007
Supplier: Claudius Peters (Italiana) srl

691611D - Ventomatic-IHI-Vietnam Storage silo

Via Verdi, 2
24121 Bergamo
Italy

Phone: +39 035 237 196
Fax: +39 035 237 785

Contents

Chapter Title

1. Principal safety references
2. Spare parts keeping
3. Equipment legend
4. Motor list and process logic
5. Mechanical equipment
5.1. Storage silo - general recommendations CLAUDIUS PETERS
5.2. Aeroslide type 2 CLAUDIUS PETERS
5.3. Blower ROBUSCHI
5.4. Shut-off flaps with pneu.drive INTERAPP
5.5. Level switch ENDRESS & HAUSER
5.6. Pressure comp. valve WAM

Claudius Peters
Principal safety references

596.0009.1000A/05.en

596.0009.1000A/05.en
Release 5: 03.05.2005
Page 2 of 20

Contents
1 Preface to the Safety Instructions......................................................................................... 3
2 A Note on Intellectual Property and Other Protection Rights in Accordance with DIN ISO 16016. 3
3 Basic Safety Instructions....................................................................................................... 4
3.1 Warning Signs and Symbols................................................................................................. 4
3.2 Principle / Correct Intended Use........................................................................................... 5
3.3 Organisational Procedures.................................................................................................... 5
3.4 Selection and Qualification of Personnel / Principal Responsibilities ................................... 7
3.5 Safety Instructions Governing Specific Work Phases........................................................... 8
3.5.1 Normal Operation.................................................................................................................. 8
3.5.2 Maintenance and Other Special Work .................................................................................. 9
3.6 References to Particular Dangers......................................................................................... 10
3.6.1 Electrical Energy ................................................................................................................... 10
3.6.2 Gas / Dust / Steam / Smoke.................................................................................................. 10
3.6.3 Hydraulics / Pneumatics........................................................................................................ 11
3.6.4 Noise ..................................................................................................................................... 11
3.6.5 Oil / Grease / Other Chemical Materials ............................................................................... 11
3.7 Transport / Assembly / Commissioning of Plant Sections / Machines.................................. 12
3.7.1 Transport ............................................................................................................................... 12
3.7.2 Assembly............................................................................................................................... 13
3.7.3 Commissioning...................................................................................................................... 14
3.8 Special Instructions for Coal Grinding and Metering Equipment .......................................... 16
3.8.1 General.................................................................................................................................. 16
3.8.2 Safety From Coal Dust Explosions ....................................................................................... 17
3.8.3 Explosion Protection ............................................................................................................. 18
3.8.4 Division into Zones................................................................................................................ 18
3.8.5 Surface Temperature ............................................................................................................ 19
3.8.6 Monitoring the Fine Coal Silo................................................................................................ 19
3.8.7 Electrical Equipment ............................................................................................................. 19
3.8.8 Health Hazards ..................................................................................................................... 20
3.8.9 The Workplace...................................................................................................................... 20

596.0009.1000A/05.en
Release 5: 03.05.2005
Page 3 of 20

1 Preface to the Safety Instructions
These Basic Safety Instructions apply to all Claudius Peters Technologies products, as described more
precisely in individual operating instructions.
These Basic Safety Instructions will make it easier to operate the plant or machine safely, correctly and
economically.
Like the relevant operating instructions for Claudius Peters Technologies plant and machines, these Basic
Safety Instructions contain important information. Observing them will help to avoid risks, to minimise repair
costs and downtime, and to increase the reliability and service life of the plant or machine.
These Basic Safety Instructions are to be supplemented by further instructions based on national regulations
for accident prevention and for environment protection.
These Basic Safety Instructions must be permanently available at the place of operation of the plant or
machine.
These Basic Safety Instructions must be read and used by every person charged with working with or on the
plant or machine, e.g.:
operation
including setting-up, fault rectification during the course of work, removal of production waste, care,
disposal of operating and auxiliary materials
maintenance (servicing, inspection, repair)
and/or
transport.
In addition to these Basic Safety Instructions, the following must also be observed:
the accident prevention regulations mandatory in the country of use and at the place of operation of the
plant or machine
the generally recognised and applicable technical rules for safe and professional work in the country of
use and at the place of operation of the plant or machine.
2 A Note on Intellectual Property and Other Protection Rights in
Accordance with DIN ISO 16016
Copying this document or giving it to others, along with the use or communication of its contents, are
forbidden without express authority. Offenders are liable for the payment of damages. All rights are reserved
in the event of the grant of a patent or the registration of a utility model or design.

596.0009.1000A/05.en
Release 5: 03.05.2005
Page 4 of 20

3 Basic Safety Instructions
3.1 Warning Signs and Symbols
Particularly important information is identified in the operating instructions relevant to the plant or machine as
follows:
Note:
Special information regarding economical operation of the plant or
machine.
Attention
Special information, orders or prohibitions to prevent damage. "Attention" is
printed at those locations in these Basic Safety Instructions and in the Claudius
Peters Technologies operating instructions that call for particular attention in
order to satisfy guidelines, regulations, instructions and working procedures,
and in order to prevent damage to or destruction of the machine and/or other
parts of the plant.
DANGER
INFORMATION, ORDERS OR PROHIBITIONS TO PROTECT
PERSONS AND TO PROTECT AGAINST EXTENSIVE DAMAGE
TO PROPERTY!
Observe these "DANGER" instructions, and behave with particular care under the relevant circumstances.
Also inform other users of all safety instructions. General safety and accident prevention regulations must
also be observed in addition to the instructions provided in these Basic Safety Instructions and in the
Claudius Peters Technologies operating instructions.

596.0009.1000A/05.en
Release 5: 03.05.2005
Page 5 of 20

3.2 Principle / Correct Intended Use
Equipment and machines from Claudius Peters Technologies are constructed in accordance with up-to-date
good technical practice and the recognised technical rules for safety. Nevertheless, their operation may
cause damage or injury to the user or third persons, or damage to the plant, machine or other property.
Only use the plant or machine when in proper technical condition, according to its intended purpose,
conscious of safety and possible danger, and in accordance with the instruction manual. Functional
disorders that would prejudice safety, in particular, must be removed immediately.
The plant or machine is only to be used in accordance with the "Intended Purpose" section of the relevant
operating instructions. Any use differing from or exceeding the purpose of the plant or machine is considered
to contravene the intended purpose. Claudius Peters Technologies will not be liable for any damage
resulting from misuse of the product. The risk is borne entirely by the user.
Use in accordance with its intended purpose also includes observation of the operating instructions
belonging to the plant on machine, maintenance of the inspection and servicing conditions, and the use of
original spare parts.
3.3 Organisational Procedures
Keep the instruction manual and these Basic Safety Instructions permanently on hand at place of operation
of the plant or machine (in the tool box or in the box provided for this purpose).
In addition to the instruction manual, observe and provide instructions covering generally applicable legal
and other mandatory regulations governing accident prevention and protection of the environment.
Such responsibilities may also involve, for example, the handling of dangerous materials, the provision and
wearing of personal protection equipment, or traffic regulations.
The instruction manual is to be supplemented by instructions including obligatory control, supervision and
reporting relevant to features specific to the company, e.g. with respect to work organisation, work flow and
personnel.
Before starting work, the personnel in charge of any activities relating to the use of the plant or machine must
have read and understood the instruction manual, and in particular the chapter covering "Safety
Instructions".
It will be too late to do so once work has begun.
This applies in particular to personnel who only occasionally work with the plant or machine, e.g. during
setting-up or servicing.
It is necessary to check that personnel are working in a safety-conscious manner, aware of risks, and in
observance of the operating instructions.
Personnel must not allow long hair to hang open, and must not wear loose clothing or jewellery, including
rings. There is a risk of injury if such items become caught up or drawn into the machinery.

596.0009.1000A/05.en
Release 5: 03.05.2005
Page 6 of 20

Ensure that the working area at and around the machine is clear and clean.
Any personal protective equipment that is required must be used, in particular when this is called for by
regulations.
Safety equipment must never be dismantled or taken out of operation.
Observe and follow any safety or danger signs at the plant or machine.
All safety and danger signs at the plant or machine must be complete and maintained in a legible condition.
In the event of safety-related modifications to the plant or machine, or if the behaviour of the plant or
machine in operation is changed, immediately stop the plant or machine using the main command
equipment and notify the responsible body or person of the malfunction.
Changes, additions and modifications to the plant or machine must not be carried out without the approval of
Claudius Peters Technologies. This also includes the fitting and adjustment of safety devices and safety
valves, and to welding at supporting structures.
Spare parts must meet Claudius Peters Technologies' technical specifications. Conformity is only
guaranteed in the case of original spare parts.
Do not change plant or machine programs (software) for programmable control systems without contacting
the supplier.
Replace hydraulic hoses at the stated times, or at appropriate short intervals, even if no faults that could
endanger safety are visible.
Keep to the timetable of recurring tests and inspections specified or indicated in the instruction manual.
Regular servicing is the precondition for reliable operation of the machine or plant.
It is essential that the appropriate workshop equipment is used in order to carry out maintenance or repair
work.
Make the location and method of use of fire extinguishers known. Note what facilities exist for raising a fire
alarm and for fire fighting.
Hazardous areas are to be marked and guarded by a barrier. Only authorised personnel may enter such
areas.

596.0009.1000A/05.en
Release 5: 03.05.2005
Page 7 of 20

3.4 Selection and Qualification of Personnel / Principal Responsibilities
Any work on the plant or machine must only be performed by reliable and qualified personnel. Observe the
minimum legally permitted age.
Only use trained or instructed personnel. Make sure that the responsibilities of the personnel for operating,
setting up, servicing and repair are clearly specified.
Make sure that only personnel who have been charged with the job carry out work at the plant or machine.
Clearly specify the responsibilities of the operator of the plant or machine, and make it possible for him to
decline instructions from third parties that conflict with safety.
Personnel who are being trained, or are in the process of learning or being instructed, or who are involved in
general education may only work at the plant or machine under the constant supervision of an experienced
person.
Work on the plant or machine's electrical equipment must only be performed by an electrician or by
instructed persons under the guidance and supervision of an electrician, in accordance with electrical
engineering regulations.
Work on gas appliances (gas consumption equipment) must only be performed by specially trained
personnel.
Only persons with special knowledge and experience in hydraulics and pneumatics may work on the
hydraulic or pneumatic equipment.
Personnel who are operating coal grinding or coal dispensing equipment must immediately report any
changes in the fine coal system that could have an effect on safety to the works management.

596.0009.1000A/05.en
Release 5: 03.05.2005
Page 8 of 20

3.5 Safety Instructions Governing Specific Work Phases
3.5.1 Normal Operation
Refrain from any working method that would compromise safety.
Take measures to ensure that the plant or machine is only operated only in a safe and properly functioning
condition.
Only operate the plant or machine if all safety devices and safety-related equipment, e.g. removable guards,
emergency stops, sound insulation or suction devices are in place and operative.
DANGER
ONLY SWITCH THE PLANT OR MACHINE ON WHEN IT HAS
BEEN PROPERLY INSTALLED AND WHEN THE SAFETY
EQUIPMENT HAS BEEN FITTED! OPEN INLETS, OUTLETS OR
INSPECTION OPENINGS ARE EXTREMELY DANGEROUS
LOCATIONS WHEN THE MACHINE IS RUNNING!
If local rules or requirements from the operator make further safety procedures necessary, these must also
be implemented.
Check the plant or machine for externally detectable damage or defects at least once per shift. Notify the
responsible body or person immediately of any changes (including any deviations from the operating
behaviour). If necessary, stop and safeguard the plant or machine immediately.
In case of malfunction, stop and safeguard the plant or machine immediately. Have the malfunction rectified
immediately.
Observe monitoring indicators and the starting and stopping procedures in accordance with the operating
instructions.
The operator may only start the machine up when he has assured himself that it is in proper condition, that
there is nobody in the hazardous area, and that nobody can be put at risk when the plant or machine starts.
The selector switch must be positioned to NORMAL OPERATION and must be locked.
Do not switch off or remove vacuum or ventilation equipment during operation of plant or machine.

596.0009.1000A/05.en
Release 5: 03.05.2005
Page 9 of 20

3.5.2 Maintenance and Other Special Work
The timetable of adjustment, servicing and inspection tasks specified in the operating instructions must be
maintained. Observe the instructions on the exchange of parts or equipment sections. Only specialist staff
may carry out this work.
Inform operating staff before starting to carry out special and maintenance work. Nominate those responsible
for supervision.
In any work related to the operation, adaptation to manufacture, conversion or adjustment of the plant or
machine and its safety equipment, and for maintenance work, it is necessary to observe the procedures for
switching the equipment on and off in accordance with the operating instructions. Instructions must again be
followed. The procedures for switching on and for switching off and to be considered equally significant
during inspection, servicing, maintenance or repair.
Inasmuch as it may be necessary, secure plenty of room around the area where maintenance work will take
place.
If the plant or machine is completely switched off during maintenance and repair work, it must be
safeguarded against unexpectedly being switched on:
lock the main command equipment and withdraw the keys
and/or
affix a warning sign at the main switch.
During replacement, individual parts and large and/or heavy structural components must be carefully
attached to lifting appliances and secured in order to avoid any danger. Only use appropriate and technically
appropriate lifting equipment or lifting appliances with sufficient carrying capacity. Do not enter or work in the
area underneath a suspended load.
Only charge skilled personnel with suspending loads and instructing crane operators. The instructor must
keep within view of the operator or be in voice contact with him.
For any assembly work that cannot be reached from ground level, use stairs or working platforms that have
been provided for the purpose or are otherwise appropriately safe. Do not use parts of the machine to climb
on. Wear safety devices to prevent falling when carrying out maintenance work at greater heights.
Keep all handles, steps, side rails, platforms, stages and ladders free from dirt and from snow and ice.
Clean oil, fuel or maintenance agents off the plant or machine, in particular off cable connections and
screwed joints, prior to carrying out maintenance or repair work. Do not use aggressive cleaning agents. Use
lint-free cleaning rags.
Before cleaning the plant or machine with water, steam jet (high-pressure cleaners) or other cleansers, cover or
glue up all openings into which, for reasons of either safety or function, water, steam or cleanser must not
penetrate. Electric motors and control cabinets are at particular risk.
When cleaning the machine cabin, make sure that temperature sensors in the fire detection and
extinguishing appliance do not come into contact with the hot cleanser. Otherwise the fire extinguisher might
be activated.

596.0009.1000A/05.en
Release 5: 03.05.2005
Page 10 of 20

Completely remove covers and glue after cleaning.
After cleaning, check all fuel, motor oil or hydraulic oil hoses for leaks, loose joints, chafing or other damage.
Repair any faults discovered immediately.
After maintenance or repair work, always firmly tighten screwed joints that have been undone.
Should setup, servicing or repair make it necessary for safety appliances to be dismantled, the re-assembly
and checking of these safety appliances must follow as soon as the servicing and repair work has been
completed.
Make sure that operating materials, auxiliary materials and spare parts are disposed of safely and in an
environmentally friendly manner.
3.6 References to Particular Dangers
3.6.1 Electrical Energy
Only use original safety fuses with specified current rating. In case of malfunctions in the electrical energy
supply, switch off the plant or machine immediately.
Any work on the electrical plant, machines or operating material must only be performed by an electrical
specialist or under the guidance and supervision of an electrical specialist in accordance with the electrical
Plant or machine parts on which inspection, maintenance and repair is being performed, must, if so
specified, be disconnected from the electrical power. First check that the isolated parts are not live, then
connect to earth and attach circuit shorts, as well as isolating neighbouring live parts.
The electrical equipment of a plant or machine must be inspected and checked at regular intervals. Defects
such as loose connections or scorched cables must be repaired immediately.
If work on live parts does become necessary, call in a second person who can actuate the emergency or
main switch in case of emergency. Block off the working area with a red and white safety chain and a danger
sign. Only use electrically isolated tools.
When carrying out work on high voltage assemblies, connect the supply cable to ground after isolation from
the supply, and short circuit components such as capacitors using an earthing rod.
3.6.2 Gas / Dust / Steam / Smoke
Only perform welding, torch or grinding work on the plant or machine if this has been explicitly approved. A
risk of fire or explosion can arise.
Before welding, burning or grinding, clean dust and combustible materials from the plant or machine and its
surroundings, and provide sufficient ventilation (explosion hazard).
When working in small and narrow spaces, observe any national regulations that may apply.

596.0009.1000A/05.en
Release 5: 03.05.2005
Page 11 of 20

3.6.3 Hydraulics / Pneumatics
Check all conduits, hoses and screwed joints for leaks and externally visible defects at regular intervals.
Repair defects immediately. Spurting oil may cause injuries and fire.
Depressurise any parts of the system and pressure pipes (hydraulic, compressed air) that will have to be
opened, in accordance with the description of the relevant assemblies, before starting any repair work.
Lay and assemble hydraulic and compressed-air piping in a proper manner. Do not mix up connections.
Fittings and the length and quality of the hose pipes must satisfy the relevant requirements.
A check must be made to see that all relevant blocking units are appropriately switched or secured before
switching on or starting up individual parts of the plant (components). Safety valves must be fitted at the
prescribed positions.
Under no circumstances must safety equipment be prevented from operating.
Non-return valves are to be checked for correct assembly (flow direction).
3.6.4 Noise
Sound insulation appliances at the plant or machine must be in their protective position during operation.
Wear prescribed ear muffs.
3.6.5 Oil / Grease / Other Chemical Materials
When using oil, grease and other chemical materials, observe the safety regulations relevant to each
product.
Be careful when using hot process materials (burning or scalding hazard).

596.0009.1000A/05.en
Release 5: 03.05.2005
Page 12 of 20

3.7 Transport / Assembly / Commissioning of Plant Sections / Machines
3.7.1 Transport
DANGER
DO NOT ENTER OR WORK IN THE AREA UNDERNEATH A
SUSPENDED LOAD!
Attention
During transport it is important to ensure that components reach the assembly
location without having been twisted or deformed through the use of unsuitable
carrying devices or attachment methods.
Only use transport vehicles, lifting gear and load supporting equipment that is in proper technical condition
and has sufficient loading capacity for loading and unloading work.
Secure the load reliably. Use appropriate attachment points.
Nominate an experienced instructor for the lifting work.
Only charge experienced personnel with suspending loads and instructing crane operators. The instructor
must keep within view of the operator or be in voice contact with him.
Closed boxes should be kept closed for as long as possible, and should be transported as close as possible
to the fitting location.
Only lift plant components or machines using professional lifting equipment in accordance with the
instruction manual (attachment points for load suspension devices, etc.).
Secure plant components or machines against unintentional changes in position, using recommended or
supplied equipment, prior to or immediately after completing the loading work. Affix relevant warning signs.
Even if a change in its position is very small, isolate the plant component or machine from every external
source of energy. Before commencing operation again, reconnect the plant component or machine properly
to the mains.
Before starting operation again, carefully dismantle any items that have been attached for transport
purposes. Before restarting operation, carefully remount any items that have been detached for transport
purposes.
Carefully remove any auxiliary equipment before starting operation again.
Proceed only in accordance with the instruction manual to restart operation.

596.0009.1000A/05.en
Release 5: 03.05.2005
Page 13 of 20

3.7.2 Assembly
Any time that plant or machine parts are transported, raised or lowered, the work must only be done whilst
observing the basic safety instructions in accordance with Section 3.7.1.
During fitting, individual parts and large and/or heavy structural components must be carefully attached to
lifting appliances and secured in order to avoid any danger. Only use appropriate and technically correct
lifting equipment or lifting appliances with sufficient carrying capacity. Do not enter or work in the area
underneath a suspended load.
areas.
be installed.
Observe any applicable national regulations, particularly when working in restricted spaces.
been provided for the purpose or are otherwise required for safety. Do not use parts of the machine to climb
on. Wear safety devices to prevent falling when carrying out assembly work at greater heights.
Spurting oil may cause injuries and fire.
product.
Work at gas engineering appliances (gas consumption equipment) must only be performed by specially
trained personnel.

596.0009.1000A/05.en
Release 5: 03.05.2005
Page 14 of 20

Only use original safety fuses with specified current rating.
Clean oil, fuel or other maintenance materials from connections and screwed joints. Do not use aggressive
cleaning agents. Use lint-free cleaning rags.
3.7.3 Commissioning
Commissioning should be carried out under the leadership of a commissioning engineer from Claudius
Peters Technologies.
Before commissioning, the manufacturer's operating manuals for all the drive units and the data on the type
plates must be observed.
areas.
be taken into account and implemented.
In addition to the instruction manual, observe generally applicable legal and other mandatory regulations
governing accident prevention and protection of the environment.
Before starting work, the personnel in charge of commissioning the plant or machine must have read and
understood the instruction manual, and in particular the chapter covering "Safety Instructions".

596.0009.1000A/05.en
Release 5: 03.05.2005
Page 15 of 20

For any work that cannot be reached from ground level, use stairs or working platforms that have been
provided for the purpose or are otherwise required for safety. Do not use parts of the machine to climb on.
Wear safety devices to prevent falling when working at greater heights.
regulations.
Only commence operation of the plant or machine if all safety devices and safety-related equipment, e.g.
removable guards, emergency stops, sound insulation or suction devices are in place, operative and linked
into the control system.
instructions.
The operator may only start the machine up when he has convinced himself that it is in proper condition, that
DANGER
If the plant or machine is completely switched off during commissioning, it must be safeguarded against
being switched on again unexpectedly:
and/or
Always properly tighten screwed joints that have been loosened during commissioning work.
If it is necessary to dismantle safety equipment in the course of the commissioning work, then refitting and
inspection of the safety equipment must be carried out immediately this work has been completed.

596.0009.1000A/05.en
Release 5: 03.05.2005
Page 16 of 20

product.
trained personnel.
3.8 Special Instructions for Coal Grinding and Metering Equipment
3.8.1 General
Coal dust that is stirred up into the air presents a risk of fire and explosion. Coal dust should never therefore
be agitated.
Fires in coal dust stored in bunkers or heaps must not be fought with a water jet, but only using a suitable
extinguishing procedure. Appropriate involvement of the responsible fire service is necessary.
Even small quantities of accumulated coal dust tend to ignite spontaneously; such dust must be removed
with an appropriate vacuum cleaner.
Some types of coal release gases that are intoxicating and that present a risk of explosion.
Never open manholes or explosion flaps in the grinding and bunkering equipment during operation, because
the entry of air into the partially pressurised system can create an explosively hazardous mixture of dust and
air. For the same reasons, any leaks that might arise in containers or pipelines must be rectified immediately.
Never enter bunkers full of coal dust; only enter bunkers that have been emptied after obtaining approval
from the works management, after sufficient ventilation, and in the presence of a second person. Persons
who enter must be attached to ropes, and oxygen equipment must be kept ready.
And any kind of work (such as welding!) on pipes that carry coal dust is only permitted when the equipment
is switched off, after thorough cleaning, and whilst taking strict safety precautions. Approval must be
obtained from the works management.

596.0009.1000A/05.en
Release 5: 03.05.2005
Page 17 of 20

3.8.2 Safety From Coal Dust Explosions
Dust is created industrially through grinding procedures (flour, sugar, paint, plastic or coal), or may arise as a
waste product (abrasion, grinding). If the material is combustible, i.e. if it reacts exothermically with oxygen,
the powder product is referred to as "combustible dust".
Combustible dust has a tendency to ignite spontaneously when heated. Particular safety regulations must be
observed in order to avoid explosion or fire.
The following points in particular must be taken account when designing transport equipment for coal or coal
dust, coal grinding equipment, or storage silos for coal dust:
SR Coal Dust (SR-Kohlestaub)
TRD 413
VDI 2263, 3676
VDE 0165
AD Instruction Leaflets (AD-Merkbltter)
The circumstances that make a dust explosion likely are present when the three following conditions are
simultaneously present:
1. combustible dust that is sufficiently fine
2. a source of ignition with sufficient energy
3. an oxygen concentration above the critical limit.
A dust explosion cannot occur if even one of these preconditions is absent.

596.0009.1000A/05.en
Release 5: 03.05.2005
Page 18 of 20

3.8.3 Explosion Protection
A distinction is made between primary and secondary explosion protection.
Secondary explosion protection permits and explosion to occur. What is done, in this case, is that the effects
of the explosion are prevented from presenting a danger to the life or health of persons. Secondary
explosion protection can be achieved through appropriate construction (a method of construction, for
instance, that is resistant to blast) or through explosion suppression.
Primary explosion protection implies that the occurrence of an explosion is prevented. An explosion can be
reliably prevented if any one of the three following conditions is absent:
A. combustible dust that is sufficiently fine
B. a source of ignition with sufficient energy
C. an oxygen concentration above the critical limit.
A. Combustible dust that is sufficiently fine is generally present within the parts of the metering
equipment. Condition A is therefore always present.
B. To a large extent, sources of ignition with sufficient energy can be avoided by taking specific
measures (see the electrical engineering documentation). It is not, however, possible to avoid some
residual risk. Care must be taken to see that all pipes that carry coal dust are always grounded, so
that electrostatic discharges are avoided, and that any insulation locations are bridged by an earth
strap.
C. An inert atmosphere is maintained in all parts of the equipment in which coal dust is transported or
stored under all operating conditions. The oxygen concentration is maintained below the critical limit.
This reliably prevents a coal dust explosion.
If the equipment is operated and maintained in accordance with regulations using the available techniques,
the occurrence of a coal dust explosion can be ruled out as far as it is humanly possible to judge.
3.8.4 Division into Zones
In order to estimate the extent of the measures that need to be taken, areas at risk of explosion are divided
into zones [see ATEX 118 (137)].
For combustible dusts, these are:
Zone 20 A place in which an explosive atmosphere in the form of a cloud of combustible dust in air is
present continuously, or for long periods or frequently.
likely to occur in normal operation occasionally.
not likely to occur in normal operation but, if it does occur, will persist for a short period only.

596.0009.1000A/05.en
Release 5: 03.05.2005
Page 19 of 20

3.8.5 Surface Temperature
The maximum permissible surface temperature of plant components is specified according to the
smouldering temperature of the accumulated coal dust, T
GI

or the
ignition temperature of the coal dust, T
Z

For stored coal dust, the max. permissible surface temperature is (T
GI
75)C.
For hard coal dust, the lowest smouldering temperature of a layer of dust 5 mm thick is: T
GI,min
= 245 C.
The permissible surface temperature for a layer of dust 5 mm thick is therefore 170 C. If the layer of dust is
thicker, the permissible surface temperature must be further reduced.
For dust that has been stirred up, the max. permissible surface temperature is: 2/3 of the ignition
temperature T
Z
.
For hard coal dust, the lowest ignition temperature is given by T
Z,min
= 550 C.
This means that the permissible surface temperature for hard coal dust that has been stirred up is 367 C.
3.8.6 Monitoring the Fine Coal Silo
Monitoring the internal atmosphere inside the coal dust silo through continuous measurement of the
oxygen concentration.
Monitoring for the development of smouldering within the coal dust silo through continuous measurement
of the CO concentration.
Monitoring the temperature in the upper part of the coal dust silo through continuous temperature
measurement.
Supplementary injection of CO
2
into the coal dust silo if a specified limit for the CO concentration within
the silo is exceeded.
3.8.7 Electrical Equipment
Implemented to meet protection class IP 65
Within parts of the plant that carry coal dust the implementation is protected against explosion.
Surface temperatures of drives less than 120C.
All parts of the plant that carry coal dust are earthed.

596.0009.1000A/05.en
Release 5: 03.05.2005
Page 20 of 20

3.8.8 Health Hazards
Incorrect operation, servicing, assembly or conversion of the coal grinding and metering equipment can give
rise to the following hazards to personnel:
Burns through heat radiation, through touching a hot surfaces, or through the emergence of hot materials
Hearing loss through medium to high noise emission
Risk of fire or explosion through the emergence of coal dust, gas or oil
Electrical hazards through shorts to ground, short circuits or capacitative discharge
A risk of slipping, stumbling or falling presented by pools of oil, dust or coal, or through inadequate
lighting
Breathing in gases or coal dust released through faulty seals
Risks of being crushed or struck by parts of the machine, or resulting from missing protective equipment
or warnings
3.8.9 The Workplace
Throughout the entire coal grinding and metering area, work places, in the sense of workplace guidelines,
are the particularly identified, closed rooms such as control and operating rooms as well as other offices and
workshops that are not classified as being under the immediate influence of the coal grinding and metering
equipment, and which therefore must be protected from noise and dust.

691611D - Ventomatic-IHI-Vietnam Storage silo

Via Verdi, 2
24121 Bergamo
Italy
1/1
Phone: +39 035 237 196
Fax: +39 035 237 785

2. Spare Parts Keeping

The storage of the most important spare and wear parts at the site of installation is an important prerequisite for
the continuous function and readiness of your installation, and, of course, also for the Claudius Peters
aggregates.
Only the original spare parts delivered by us are subject to :
commitment of guarantee
material and quality control
further development
an availability of more than 10 to 20 years
DIN ISO 9001

We would like to point out that obligations cannot be claimed for spare parts and accessories, which have not
been delivered by us, as described before. The installation and/or the use of not original spare parts may
have a negative influence on structural characteristics of the aggregate and/or the installation and can therefore
considerably impair the active and/or passive safety of your installation.
Claudius Peters does not take over any liability or guarantee for damages caused by the use of spare parts
and accessories which are not original.
Please note that we often have special manufacturing specifications for our products, and that we always offer
you spare parts, which are in accordance with the latest technological developments and the latest legal
regulations.
For spare parts orders please indicate the following data for the correct identification of the parts:
designation of the aggregate and type
order-confirmation number of Claudius Peters
spare parts drawing
We will try our utmost to satisfy your spare parts requirements as soon as possible!

691611D - PARTLIST
Disegno assieme: 691611D
Peso Netto Kg : 25474,23

Liv Pos Boq Codice Descrizione Qta Normativa Fornitura Disegno assieme Peso netto kg
.1 10

670100DCP OPEN AEROSLIDE L=1606 4

LM
670100DCP,
670101DCP
102,36
..2 10 X 670101DCP AEROSLIDE CASING L=1606 1

LM

22,09
..2 80

HEXAGON NUT 46 VS00034 - M8 LM

0,24
..2 90

HEXAGON HEAD SCREW CL.8.8 32
VS00031 -
M8x20
LM

0,38
..2 100

670001DCP SPECIAL SCREW 14

VTM

0,21
..2 110

670002DCP AERATION FABRIC 260MM L=1606 1

VTM

1,60
..2 130

670003DCP BARREL NIPPLE 1" L=40 1

LM

0,18
..2 150 X 670004DCP AEROSLIDE FASTENING 2

LM

0,62
..2 160

VS00031 -
M10x16
LM

0,04
.1 20


LM
670100DCP,
670101DCP
107,04

LM

23,16
..2 80


0,25
..2 90

VS00031 -
M8x20
LM

0,41
..2 100


VTM

0,21
..2 110


VTM

1,66
..2 130


LM

0,18

LM

0,62
..2 160

VS00031 -
M10x16
LM

0,04
.1 30


LM
670100DCP,
670101DCP
95,76

LM

20,62
..2 80


0,23
..2 90

VS00031 -
M8x20
LM

0,36
..2 100


VTM

0,21
..2 110


VTM

1,46
..2 130


LM

0,18

LM

0,62
..2 160

VS00031 -
M10x16
LM

0,04
.1 40


LM
670100DCP,
670101DCP
84,44

LM

18,07
..2 80


0,21
..2 90

VS00031 -
M8x20
LM

0,31
..2 100


VTM

0,21
..2 110


VTM

1,26
..2 130


LM

0,18

LM

0,62
..2 160

VS00031 -
M10x16
LM

0,04
.1 50


LM
670100DCP,
670101DCP
37,48

LM

15,94
..2 80


0,19
..2 90

VS00031 -
M8x20
LM

0,26
..2 100


VTM

0,21
..2 110


VTM

1,10
..2 130


LM

0,18

LM

0,62
Pagina 1di 12
..2 160

VS00031 -
M10x16
LM

0,04
.1 60


LM
670100DCP,
670101DCP
37,84

LM

15,94
..2 80


0,19
..2 90

VS00031 -
M8x20
LM

0,26
..2 100


VTM

0,21
..2 110


VTM

1,10
..2 130


LM

0,36

LM

0,62
..2 160

VS00031 -
M10x16
LM

0,04
.1 70


LM
670100DCP,
670101DCP
27,34

LM

11,33
..2 80


0,16
..2 90

VS00031 -
M8x20
LM

0,19
..2 100


VTM

0,21
..2 110


VTM

0,76
..2 130


LM

0,18

LM

0,62
..2 160

VS00031 -
M10x16
LM

0,04
.1 80


LM
670100DCP,
670101DCP
27,34

LM

11,33
..2 80


0,16
..2 90

VS00031 -
M8x20
LM

0,19
..2 100


VTM

0,21
..2 110


VTM

0,76
..2 130


LM

0,18

LM

0,62
..2 160

VS00031 -
M10x16
LM

0,04
.1 90


LM
670100DCP,
670101DCP
47,88

LM

20,62
..2 80


0,23
..2 90

VS00031 -
M8x20
LM

0,36
..2 100


VTM

0,21
..2 110


VTM

1,46
..2 130


LM

0,18

LM

0,62
..2 160

VS00031 -
M10x16
LM

0,04
.1 100


LM
670100DCP,
670101DCP
47,88

LM

20,62
..2 80


0,23
..2 90

VS00031 -
M8x20
LM

0,36
..2 100


VTM

0,21
..2 110


VTM

1,46
..2 130


LM

0,18

LM

0,62
..2 160

VS00031 -
M10x16
LM

0,04
.1 110

670120DCP OPEN AEROSLIDE L=1956 H=35MM 2

LM
670102DCP,
670101DCP
48,54
..2 10 X 670121DCP
AEROSLIDE CASING L=1956
H=35MM
1

LM

20,33
Pagina 2di 12
..2 80


0,29
..2 90

VS00031 -
M8x20
LM

0,48
..2 100


VTM

0,21
..2 110


VTM

1,96
..2 140 X 670011DCP AIR CONNECTION SOCKET 1" 1

LM

0,22

LM

0,50
..2 160

VS00031 -
M10x16
LM

0,04
.1 120

670005DCP UNION ELBOW 1" 24

LM

12,00
.1 130


LM

20,44
.1 140

670009DCP PIPING 1" - DIAM.34X3,2 L=5500 1

LM

10,94
.1 145

670008DCP UNION 1" 8

LM

2,80
.1 150


LM

0,88
.1 160 X 670160DCP PIPE PART 1 DN65 2

LM

38,44
.1 170 X 670170DCP PIPE PART 2 DN65 2

LM

32,74
.1 200

670200DCP SILO BOTTOM DIAM.4500 1

LM 670200DCP 8889,65
..2 10 X 670201DCP SILO BOTTOM CASING DIAM.4500 1

LM

8887,24
..2 30

670202DCP
SEALING CORD ROUND 8MM
L=5000
1

LM

0,25
..2 40

VS00031 -
M12x45
LM

1,84
..2 50


0,51
.1 300

670300DCP SILO DIAM.6000 1

LM
670300DCP,
670302DCP,
670303DCP,
670304DCP,
670305DCP,
670306DCP
14463,72
..2 110 X 670311DCP SILO AND SILO HOPPER 1

LM

12244,03
..2 200

670320DCP LOAD CELL WITH FIXING BOLTS 1

LM

20,00
..2 210 X 670321DCP BEARINGS' LOWER PLATE 2

LM

56,66
..2 220 X 670322DCP BEARINGS' LOWER PLATE 1

LM

26,41
..2 230 X 670323DCP BEARINGS' UPPER PLATE 2

LM

43,74
..2 240 X 670324DCP BEARINGS' UPPER PLATE 1

LM

21,87
..2 250

670325DCP
HEXAGON HEAD SCREW CL.8.8
M24X45
12

LM

3,24
..2 260

670326DCP
HEXAGON HEAD SCREW CL.8.8
M24X80
12

LM

5,04
..2 261


1,44
..2 270

SPLIT PIN 6
VS00039 -
D8x80
LM

0,19
..2 280 X 670328DCP PLATE 1

LM

11,04
..2 290 X 670329DCP PLATE 3

LM

90,18
..2 310 X 670331DCP SILO ROOF BEAM 1

LM

157,92

LM

313,82

LM

181,50
..2 340

VS00031 -
M12x45
LM

1,22
..2 341


0,34
..2 350

VS00031 -
M16x50
LM

0,41
..2 351


0,15
..2 410 X 670341DCP SILO ROOF FLOORPLATE 1

LM

272,70
..2 411

SPLIT PIN 2
VS00039 -
D3,2x28
LM

0,00

LM

253,81

LM

253,81

LM

106,76

LM

106,76

LM

290,81
.1 400

670400DCP BLOWER 10M3/MIN-500MBAR-15KW 1

VTM

700,00
Pagina 3di 12

670101DCP - BILL OF QUANTITY
Peso Lordo Kg : 22,22




.1 401

670401DCP ROTATION SENSOR 1

LM

0,50
.1 510

670501DCP EL.-PNEUM. SHUT-OFF FLAP DN80 2

VTM

11,40
.1 520

670500DCP
SHUT-OFF FLAP WITH HAND LEVER
DN65
4

VTM

18,00
.1 530

670502DCP
BALL COCK WITH HAND LEVER
DN25
2

VTM

0,80
.1 600

670600DCP
PIPING AND FITTINGS DN100-DN80-
DN65-DN25
1

LM

380,00
.1 700 X 670700DCP CHUTE 1

LM

206,63
.1 800

670800DCP LEVEL SWITCH L=1M 1

VTM

2,00
.1 900

670900DCP
PRESSURE COMP.VALVE -
5MBAR...+28MBAR
1

VTM

10,00
.1 1000

670099DCP SPECIAL GLUE 7KG 1

VTM

7,00
.1 1001

VS00031 -
M12x50
LM

1,76
.1 1002


0,46
.1 1003

670098DCP
SEALING CORD ROUND 6MM
L=3000
1

LM

0,15
Pos Qt Descrizione Normativa Lung. Larg. Sez. Spess.
Peso lordo
kg
Peso netto
kg
1 1 PLATE PLATE 1550 432

PL3,2 16,38 16,33

PL3,2 1,50 1,50

PL3,2 1,10 1,10

PL3,2 2,88 2,84

PL3,2 0,36 0,32
Peso lordo
kg
Peso netto
kg

PL4,5 0,18 0,17

PL12 0,15 0,14
Peso lordo
kg
Peso netto
kg

PL3,2 17,36 17,30

PL3,2 1,50 1,50

PL3,2 1,10 1,10

PL3,2 2,98 2,94

PL3,2 0,36 0,32
Peso lordo
kg
Peso netto
kg

PL4,5 0,18 0,17

PL12 0,15 0,14
Pagina 4di 12






Peso lordo
kg
Peso netto
kg

PL3,2 15,19 15,14

PL3,2 1,50 1,50

PL3,2 1,10 1,10

PL3,2 2,61 2,56

PL3,2 0,36 0,32
Peso lordo
kg
Peso netto
kg

PL4,5 0,18 0,17

PL12 0,15 0,14
Peso lordo
kg
Peso netto
kg

PL3,2 13,02 12,97

PL3,2 1,50 1,50

PL3,2 1,10 1,10

PL3,2 2,23 2,18

PL3,2 0,36 0,32
Peso lordo
kg
Peso netto
kg

PL4,5 0,18 0,17

PL12 0,15 0,14
Peso lordo
kg
Peso netto
kg

PL3,2 11,39 11,34

PL3,2 1,50 1,50

PL3,2 0,88 0,88

PL3,2 1,95 1,90

PL3,2 0,36 0,32
Peso lordo Peso netto
Pagina 5di 12






Pos Qt Descrizione Normativa Lung. Larg. Sez. Spess. kg kg

PL4,5 0,18 0,17

PL12 0,15 0,14
Peso lordo
kg
Peso netto
kg

PL3,2 11,39 11,34

PL3,2 1,50 1,50

PL3,2 0,88 0,88

PL3,2 1,95 1,90

PL3,2 0,36 0,32
Peso lordo
kg
Peso netto
kg

PL4,5 0,18 0,17

PL12 0,15 0,14
Peso lordo
kg
Peso netto
kg

PL3,2 7,60 7,55

PL3,2 1,50 1,50

PL3,2 0,66 0,66

PL3,2 1,30 1,30

PL3,2 0,36 0,32
Peso lordo
kg
Peso netto
kg

PL4,5 0,18 0,17

PL12 0,15 0,14
Peso lordo
kg
Peso netto
kg

PL3,2 7,60 7,55

PL3,2 1,50 1,50

PL3,2 0,66 0,66

PL3,2 1,30 1,30

PL3,2 0,36 0,32
Pagina 6di 12






Peso lordo
kg
Peso netto
kg

PL4,5 0,18 0,17

PL12 0,15 0,14
Peso lordo
kg
Peso netto
kg

PL3,2 15,19 15,14

PL3,2 1,50 1,50

PL3,2 1,10 1,10

PL3,2 2,61 2,56

PL3,2 0,36 0,32
Peso lordo
kg
Peso netto
kg

PL4,5 0,18 0,17

PL12 0,15 0,14
Peso lordo
kg
Peso netto
kg

PL3,2 15,19 15,14

PL3,2 1,50 1,50

PL3,2 1,10 1,10

PL3,2 2,61 2,56

PL3,2 0,36 0,32
Peso lordo
kg
Peso netto
kg

PL4,5 0,18 0,17

PL12 0,15 0,14
Peso lordo
kg
Peso netto
kg

PL3,2 14,41 14,35

PL3,2 0,68 0,64
Pagina 7di 12






PL3,2 1,54 1,54

PL3,2 3,53 3,48

PL3,2 0,36 0,32
Peso lordo
kg
Peso netto
kg
1 1 THREAD PIPE THREAD PIPE 80

DN25

0,14 0,14
2 1 PIPE NUT PIPE NUT

1"

0,05 0,05
3 1 WASHER WASHER

1"

0,02 0,02
4 1 GASKET GASKET

DN25

0,01 0,01
Peso lordo
kg
Peso netto
kg

PL4,5 0,12 0,11

PL12 0,15 0,14
Peso lordo
kg
Peso netto
kg
10 1 PIPE PIPE 150

76,3X4,2

1,10 1,10
20 1 PIPE PIPE 2161

76,3X4,2

16,10 15,90
30 1 PIPE BEND 90 PIPE BEND 90

76,3X4,2

0,75 0,75

76,3X4,2

0,67 0,67
50 1 CAP CAP

DN65-76,3

0,50 0,50
60 1 PIPE PIPE 40

76,3X4,2

0,30 0,30
Peso lordo
kg
Peso netto
kg
10 1 PIPE PIPE 150

76,3X4,2

1,10 1,10
20 1 PIPE PIPE 1771

76,3X4,2

13,22 13,05

76,3X4,2

0,75 0,75

76,3X4,2

0,67 0,67
50 1 CAP CAP

DN65-76,3

0,50 0,50
60 1 PIPE PIPE 40

76,3X4,2

0,30 0,30
Peso lordo
kg
Peso netto
kg
1 1 SHEET VS00003 14104 1420

10 1582,19 1533,60
2 2 SHEET VS00003 720 620

12 83,92 83,68
Pagina 8di 12




3 2 SHEET VS00003 4447 1029

12 860,28 589,28
4 1 SHEET VS00003 3892 516

6 94,39 94,39
5 2 SHEET VS00003 4212 650

25 1073,22 1073,22
6 2 SHEET VS00003 4316 300

25 507,56 507,56
7 1 SHEET VS00003 4480 650

25 570,75 570,75
8 1 SHEET VS00003 4480 300

25 263,42 263,42
9 2 SHEET VS00003 4480 2270

25 3986,48 3025,64
11 4 SHEET VS00003 500 150

8 18,90 18,90
12 2 FLAT VS00001 620

60X10

5,84 5,76
13 2 FLAT VS00001 496

60X10

4,67 4,59
14 4 FLAT VS00001 720

60X12

16,28 16,21
15 4 FLAT VS00001 496

60X12

11,21 11,16
16 1 FLAT VS00001 14231

120X10

134,06 134,06
17 2 SHEET VS00003 500 50

8 3,15 3,15
18 2 SHEET VS00003 504 50

8 3,18 3,18
19 2 I PROFILE VS00008 3653

HE 320 B

924,94 924,94
20 4 SHEET VS00003 604 150

8 22,83 22,83
21 4 ROUND BAR VS00012 258

12

0,92 0,92
Peso lordo
kg
Peso netto
kg
4 1 L-SECTION L-SECTION 19239

L100X100X10

290,51 290,51

12 23,74 23,45

PL12 20,35 12,27
24 12 PLATE PLATE 590 2938

PL16 2612,60 1868,00
25 1 PLATE PLATE 685 20530

PL12 1324,74 1324,00

PL22 89,11 89,11
37 10 PLATE PLATE 2372 1878

PL12 4196,25 3418,82
38 3 PLATE PLATE 1440 6280

PL12 2555,81 2555,81
39 3 PLATE PLATE 1500 6280

PL12 2662,06 2662,06
Peso lordo
kg
Peso netto
kg
17 1 ROUND BAR ROUND BAR 130

RB70

3,92 3,87

PL15 2,40 1,92

PL22 9,20 7,36

PL22 15,54 15,18
Peso lordo
kg
Peso netto
kg

RB50

2,00 1,95

PL15 2,40 1,92

PL22 9,20 7,36

PL22 15,54 15,18
Pagina 9di 12







Peso lordo
kg
Peso netto
kg

PL22 15,54 15,18

PL40 8,36 6,69
Peso lordo
kg
Peso netto
kg

PL22 15,54 15,18

PL40 8,36 6,69
Peso lordo
kg
Peso netto
kg

PL30 11,40 11,04
Peso lordo
kg
Peso netto
kg

PL30 30,52 30,06
Peso lordo
kg
Peso netto
kg
14 1 H-SECTION H-SECTION 4866

H150X150X7/10

151,33 151,33

PL12 2,94 2,94

PL12 3,70 3,65
Peso lordo
kg
Peso netto
kg

H150X150X7/10

151,33 151,33

PL12 1,93 1,93

PL12 3,70 3,65
Peso lordo
kg
Peso netto
kg
Pagina 10di 12






H150X150X7/10

90,75 90,75
Peso lordo
kg
Peso netto
kg
1 3
ARTICULATED SCREW
DIAM.18-M18
ARTICULATED
SCREW
DIAM.18-M18

M18

0,30 0,30

RB32

0,73 0,59
3 1
CONVEX COVER - PLATE
4,5
CONVEX COVER
- PLATE 4,5
800 800

PL4,5 14,13 14,13

L75X75X5

9,05 9,05

L75X75X5

13,69 13,69

L75X75X5

15,95 15,95

RB13

0,18 0,18

PL9 0,23 0,13

PL4,5 3,36 3,36
40 1 PLATE PLATE 1592 5354

PL4,5 301,09 215,12
50 1 GASKET 3MM GASKET 3MM

0,20 0,20
Peso lordo
kg
Peso netto
kg

L75X75X5

9,05 9,05

L75X75X5

13,69 13,69

L75X75X5

15,95 15,95
40 1 PLATE PLATE 1592 5354

PL4,5 301,09 215,12
Peso lordo
kg
Peso netto
kg

L75X75X5

9,05 9,05

L75X75X5

13,69 13,69

L75X75X5

15,95 15,95
40 1 PLATE PLATE 1592 5354

PL4,5 301,09 215,12
Peso lordo
kg
Peso netto
kg

L75X75X5

2,38 2,38

L75X75X5

4,70 4,70

L75X75X5

7,05 7,05
42 1 PLATE PLATE 1743 3009

PL4,5 185,27 92,63
Pagina 11di 12


Peso lordo
kg
Peso netto
kg

L75X75X5

2,38 2,38

L75X75X5

4,70 4,70

L75X75X5

7,05 7,05
42 1 PLATE PLATE 1743 3009

PL4,5 185,27 92,63
Peso lordo
kg
Peso netto
kg

L75X75X5

6,21 6,21

L75X75X5

35,50 35,50

PL4,5 15,65 15,65

PL9 47,51 9,33
41 1 PLATE PLATE 1690 4495

PL4,5 268,34 224,12
Peso lordo
kg
Peso netto
kg
10 1 PLATE PLATE 2206 2242

PL4,5 194,12 194,12

PL12 63,34 12,02

RB6

0,49 0,49
Pagina 12di 12
ITEM Qty Customer Code DESIGNATION RATED RATED RATED RATED RATED NOTE INSU. PROTEC- TYPE REMARK
No. POWER SPEED VOLTAGE FREQU. CURRENT CLASS TION
Mechanical El. ext. kW min-1 (V) (Hz) (A)
510.1
510.2
2
SHUT OFF EL.-PNEUM. VALVE
(" INTERAPP" -DESPONIA DN 80
+ATTUAT.5/2)
EL.PN.
2 SOLENOID VALVE 0,009 24 DC IP 65
2 LIMIT SWITCH-OPEN IP 65
2 LIMIT SWITCH-CLOSE IP 65
400 1
Rotary piston blower
(" ROBUSCHI" - 10m/min - 500mbar)
1 ROTARY PISTON BLOWER MOTOR 15 2930 380 AC 50 30,5 DOL F+B IP 55 B3
1 LOCAL BOX LB
Loc/Rem - Start -Emerg./Stop - Run (Light)
CUSTOMER SUPPLY
1 COOLER FAN MOTOR 0,137 380 AC 50 DOL F+B IP 55 B3
401 1
ROTATION SENSOR
(" IFM/EFFECTOR"
Sensorll A2010 -FRKG(115489" )
CUSTOMER SUPPLY
800 1
SILO LEVEL SWITCH
(" ENDRESS+HAUSER" -FTC 52 with EC24Z
electronic insert) L=1m
24 DC IP 66 MAXIMUM LEVEL SWITCH
Storage silo
GLOSSARY:
DOL:Standard Direct On Line Start
DY : Delta Star Start
HS : Heavy Start (Use Electronic thermal relay for start
Class 10~30" Siemens 3B1246-xx o similar)
LB :Motor Local Box for maintenance (Drawings accord.
to VTM standard device Kraus+Naimer)
Client
Plant
CP Italiana Order n 01/3951/06
691611D
MOTOR AND INSTRUMENT LIST
VENTOMATIC S.p.A.
691611D motor and intrument list rev.1.xls Page 1/1
CC Silo aeration procedure
Procedura aerazione fondo silo CC

691611D-691612D Bim Son II - Vietnam

T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1
Start Item

VS 691612D-
1200.1 or
1200.2 or
1200.3 or
1200.4 or

S 691611D-
400

V1 691611D-
510.1

V2 691611D-
510.2

1
Second section
Secondo settore
691611D-510.2
2
T3
T3
T1 T1
Z
Periodo/
Cycle
Secondi/
Seconds
T1 300
T3 3

Cicli di aerazione -- Aerationcycle
S: Blower / Soffiante
V: Butterfly Valve
/Valvola a farfalla
VS: Flow control gate
/Valvola di scarico
T1
(1)
: Aeration time /T
aerazione
T3: Overlapping time
/T sovrapposizione

(1)
: Aeration time must
retained at each stop
and must resumed with
the next start
Il tempo di aerazione
deve essere ritenuto e
dopo ogni stop il ciclo
di aerazione deve
riprendere dove si era
interrotto.
Sudden Stop ex.
Blackout
Stop improvviso
Es.Blackout
Z
First section
Primo settore
691611D-510.1

691611D 691612D - BIM SON ll - VIETNAM

Via Verdi, 2
24121 Bergamo
Italy
1/2
Phone: +39 035 237 196
Fax: +39 035 237 785

PROCESS LOGIC PACKING PLANT LOADING rev.1A

1. Control air available
2. Power -ON
3. Control voltage - ON
4. Packing plant release ready
5. Over-flow filter ready and working packing plant filter ready
6. Open the solenoid valve for discharge aeration (691612D-1900.1, 1900.2, 1900.3, 1900.4)
7. Open the corresponding flaps for silo bottom aeration (691611D-510.1 or 510.2)
8. Start the feeding using pushbutton (START)
9. Start the aeroslide fan if needed (691612D-1820, 1830, 1840)
10. Open the flow control gate (691612D-1200.1, 1200.2, 1200.3, 1200.4) to XX%
(note: the XX% position is corresponding to the flow rate a little bit higher than nominal capacity of
packing machine)
11. Start the silo discharge
11.1 start the blower (691611D-400) and his cooler fan ; the sectors on silo bottom are aerated
alternately by opening the flap (691611D-510.1 or -510.2). For switching over from one
sector to the other, the corresponding flap has to be opened before the other flap, which is
still opened, closes. The time of aeration will be determined during the start-up.
11.2 after a delay time (approx. 10s) open the flow control gate to YY%
12. Feeding level control
12.1 packing plant hopper empty
12.2 packing plant hopper feeding by opening the flow control gate to XX% and after a delay time
to YY%, till the max level is reached (min level is ignored)
12.3 in case the hopper level goes under min level, reopen the flow control gate to XX% and after
a delay time to YY%
12.4 in case the hopper level goes over the min level, reduce the flow rate closing, after a delay
time, the flow control gate from YY% to XX%
12.5 the flow control gate is opened on position XX% till the max hopper level has been reached
12.6 in case the hopper max level has been reached (example: feeding ON and packing machine
OFF), close the corresponding flow control gate. If it was the last flow control gate opened,
stop the silo discharge
13. Stop procedure
13.1 stop the blower (691611D-400)
13.2 close the flaps for silo bottom aeration (691611D-510.1 and -510.2)
13.3 after a delay time (approx. 5s) close the flow control gate
13.4 after a delay time (cleaning time) stop the aeroslide fan (691612D-1820, 1830, 1840)
13.5 close the solenoid valve for discharge aeration (691612D-1900.1, 1900.2, 1900.3, 1900.4)


Via Verdi, 2
24121 Bergamo
Italy
2/2
Phone: +39 035 237 196
Fax: +39 035 237 785

NOTE:
Rotation sensor (691611D-401):
alarm for blowers belt break

Claudius Peters
Mixing and storage silos

General recommendation for the operation
619.0009.1001A/01.en

619.0009.1001A/01.en
Release 1: 01.02.2002
Page 2 of 5

Contents
1 Start-up.................................................................................................................................. 3
2 Troubleshooting..................................................................................................................... 4

619.0009.1001A/01.en
Release 1: 01.02.2002
Page 3 of 5

1 Start-up
1.1 The silo body must be absolutely dry and sealed against external moisture.
1.2 The aeration system must corresponded to the drawings and/or instructions for assembly.
1.3 Initial filling is effected in stages.
1.3.1 Charge the silo to approx. 20% of the max. filling level. Aeration of the silo bottom does
not take place until material is discharged from the silo.
- After 1 - 3 days of storage empty the silo entirely.
- Switch on filter and blower; the programme for all pneumatic butterfly valves functions auto-
matically.
1.3.2 Inspection of the completely emptied silo bottom.
1.3.3 Material caking >10 kg has to be removed manually.
If no material caking has taken place on the silo bottom and on the silo walls, the silo is charged
with a second filling to approx. 40% of the max. filling level.
After approx. 3 - 6 days of storage empty the silo completely (subsequently proceed acc. to 1.3.2).
1.3.4 If material caking >10 kg is visible again, it has to be removed manually. It has to be checked that
no rain water can leak through the silo roof or the silo wall.
If no material caking is visible, the silo is charged with a 3rd filling to approx. 60% of the max. filling
level.
1.3.5 After an approx. storage time of 4 weeks after the first filling and interim discharging, the silo has to
be emptied completely one more time. Should no material caking be visible, subsequently the silo
can be filled to 100%.
1.3.6 The next complete discharge with checking of silo bottom and silo wall should take place not later
than 1 year after the first 100% filling of the silo.
1.4 The aeration of the silo bottom should only be effected with simultaneous material discharge.
1.5 For silos with several discharge outlets, which are arranged on different levels, the following ap-
plies regarding the use of these outlets:
- In order to avoid foreign matter deposits and lump formation on the silo bottom, the lower
discharge outlet has to be used permanently, but at least alternately.

619.0009.1001A/01.en
Release 1: 01.02.2002
Page 4 of 5

2 Troubleshooting
Fault Repair
2.1 2.1.1
Influential factors resulting from
the equipment and silo process
Outlets clogged - Check flow control gates, safety
shut-off gates and possibly feed
bexes for foreign body deposits,
lumps etc.
2.1.2
Air supply to aeration bottom
impeded
- Check pipe system for free pas-
sage form blower to silo bottom
(slide and flap positions, contami-
nation);
- Check pressure difference on the
blowers;
- Check functioning of safety
valves;
- Check blower suction filter for air
permeability and clean, if neces-
sary.
2.1.3
Air distribution on aeration bot-
tom not optimal adjusted
- Check ball valve positions behind
the butterfly valves..
2.1.4
Material accumulation on silo
bottom and discharge of residual
material in silo
- Activate material aeration pref-
erably in range of outer sections
by:
- - Increasing the volumetric air
flow connecting the stand-by
blower to the outerring sec-
tions;
- Pulsating air supply, i.e. select
rest discharge program (regular or inten-
sive).
2.1 2.1.5
Influential factors resulting from
the equipment and silo process
Increased storage sensitivity of
bulk material due to absorption
of moisture with accompanying
danger of lump and deposit for-
mation
- Check silo body for penetration of
moisture (silo wall, ceiling, roof
connection frame and socket) and
seal if required;
- Reduce or stop residual building
moisture by drying out the silo
when empty or by discharging
remnants several times in suc-
cession (refer to 1.3.1).

619.0009.1001A/01.en
Release 1: 01.02.2002
Page 5 of 5

Fault Repair
2.1.6

Aeration of bulk material decrea-
ses due to air losses caused by
leaks on the silo body
- Interior silo sealing (e.g. by syn-
thetic coating).
2.2 2.2.1
Influential factors attributed to
physical and chemical properties
adherent to the bulk material
prior to silo entry
the bulk material due to strongly
deviating index grain fractions
caused by extremely fine frac-
tions
- Discharge some material from silo
and add a limited quantity of nor-
mal grain fraction; repeat the aer-
ating and discharging procedure
(refer to 2.1.5).
2.2.2
the bulk material due to chemical
reactions taking place in the silo
e.g. caused by temperature
resp. moisture
e.g. for cement:
- Reduce the moisture content to <
0,3% by dehydration of the gyp-
sum component gained by the
formation of a mixture containing
approx. 50% anhydrite CaSO
4

and
approx. 50% dehydrate CaSO
4
+
2H
2
O
or
- Add ground limestone in the ratio:
5% raw gypsum
7% limestone
88% clinker
or
- Dehydrate gypsum by increasing the
grinding temperate, i.e. discharge
temperate of the cement should be
120 C or more.
- Stronger venting of the mill, if
necessary
or
- Avoid cooling-off and conse-
quently condensation zones by:
- insulation of concrete/steel silo
body;
- avoid condensate in pipe-lines
(e.g. by weather protection or in-
sulation).

Claudius Peters
Fabric for
Aeration Elements
Description
621.0009.0022A/10.en

Contents
1 Polyester fabric ..................................................................................................................... 3
1.1 Changing the fabric............................................................................................................... 3
2 Meta and Para Aramide fabric ......................................................................................... 4
2.1 Characteristics of fabric......................................................................................................... 4
3 Sealing compound ................................................................................................................ 5
3.1 Chemical characterization..................................................................................................... 5
4 Protecting the Fabric During Welding ................................................................................... 5

621.0009.0022A/10.en

Release 10: 28.04.2006
Page 2 of 5

1 Polyester fabric
The aeration elements are regularly equipped with Polyester fabric.
Characteristics of fabric:
smooth surface
high temperature resistance up to 150 C
high tearing resistance in direction of warp
it does not rot
1.1 Changing the fabric
After removing of the old fabric and the remains of the sealing compound, the new fabric can be fitted. When
doing this, the following points should be observed:
All sealing surfaces which come into contact with the fabric have to be covered with a sealing compound
(e. g. highpressure Fermit brown", see paragraph 3).
The fabric should be stretched during fitting (maximum 2%).
Cut edges should be sealed with a soft flame. If the welding has been done properly, the cut edges will
have a lightbrown colour.
In case of other aeration elements it is sufficient to drill the fixing holes to a dia of 8 mm.
621.0009.0022A/10.en

Release 10: 28.04.2006
Page 3 of 5

2 Meta and Para Aramide fabric
Meta-Aramide fabric will be used for temperatures of up to 200C, and Para-Aramid fabric for temperatures
of up to 250C.
The air permeability corresponds to the one of the Polyester fabric.
2.1 Characteristics of fabric
smooth surface
high temperature resistance
high solidity
it does not rot
free of asbestos
As soon as the old fabric and the remains of the sealing compound have been removed, the new fabric can
be fitted. When doing so, the following points should be observed:
(e. g. high-pressure Fermit "brown", see paragraph 3).
The cutting edges of the fabric have also to be covered/glued with the sealing compound.
The fabric should be stretched during fitting (max. 2%).
The fixing holes should be drilled out to a dia. of 8 mm.
621.0009.0022A/10.en

Release 10: 28.04.2006
Page 4 of 5

3 Sealing compound
A sealing compound which is also suitable for sealing of threads, flanges and surfaces of highpressure
plants, turbine housings, etc. is to be used.
3.1 Chemical characterization
The sealing compound consists of mineral oil, abiettic acid and chalk.
Characteristics
ointment like
heat and highpressure resistant
non-drying
poisonless

4 Protecting the Fabric During Welding
In the event of subsequent welding or burning of cut-outs in existing sheet metal bodies at the construction
site, e.g., installation of loose supports provided or subsequent installation of an observation hatch, the fabric
must be protected against spatter by carefully covering it with fireproof material.
621.0009.0022A/10.en

Release 10: 28.04.2006
Page 5 of 5

10
INGRESSOARIA
Ak' Hel
505
l'!
N
'1
j
In
In
'"
j
i,
i
1
]
1
~
1
1
I
~
1
I
t
~
I
DN 100
81143
SOFFIA TORE
810- ~
0.033
Tipo: R6S (5/F J. /kg", Type
MOTORE B.ETTRICO
E/edrIt: IIOlor
Coslrutlere I SIEMENS ILA7
Hanufoctur",
IEC: 160MB I J -
J -- /kg0'1
1.'/hI I Tipo :
T",. 63
CkWIIPolenza I
Po-
15
(RI'f<J I VelocI/a': 2925 _
I
Poli, 2 I J -
Spoed Poi..
c.. "
f', "
I "''...~,
"
~
~":'"
9 (1" ::>... ~~ ",', ,"-< ,
~
)(
S
'"
o
!
,83
'fi1.e-a
TRASMSSIOIE
V_, aw.
PuleggiasalI.: 0
BIo- pulI.y
1150
I =~~ALsoo.o I
989
MASSA
~1lISfII 500
132 c-J I CAROt STATI(]
SIaIlt:I-
IPuleggia molere : 0 190 c-J
0<1" Ho/orpuI'.y
02- - _,
Il - 50 IC'/I A"'~~= ~;;-,:.-octrlcl;w'Y' ~~,::,~Inghle: SPA 1600
12 -106 IC'II Fas': 3 50 CHzI Numerocinghie: 2
V-s.I' nunber
CARCO DlNAl'lCO + O INI
I
Fasi:
[)ynotnIcload - _80S
[NII AII.onl~:78~'''~;'''~:~-~U;:Y~AJ
50-60 /Hz!
/kg",
/kg.'1
IWDAT A
60tI au/f.t
50
D
212
IR
I
~
eX
'E~
/kr1I1~TORE
Costrultor. :
Ho,..,focl.....
~
...
...
~
/fi
...
150 ,110
'"
...
~
c:>
VP
CLU 250-2T
3
In
'"
'"
1155
Commesso:
Work order No.
Cliente:
Cuslamer
Ordine:
Order
Impianto:
PianI
Localita' :
Piace
Servizio:
Servlce
Specifico:
Dolosh..1
ITEM:
Descr;z;one mod;/;che
"segnalo Conlrol/olo Approvalo
Dolo 07-05-2007 07-05-2007
F;rma LlKX>DrcI Golfi o.
A _tl'-d--'Q~/fJtI-'"
~ dello R08USCIf&C --
col tlvlllia ti rj1rotb1o o tllW!derlo noia a ioni
oQ- c:onc:orranH -- la~/ra -
110dN'
HODUSCHI@
007209081005
1/3952/07
CLAUDIUSPETERSUTALiANA) S.R.L.
l
l
!
l
!
l
!
!
l
!
l
1
.t
"FFjj;iZi N' modello
Smuss;
non quolah
Rugosdd
Ro In um
Dolo
VerliRo;:;;; Scola,
Fogho
ROBOX
ES 45/2P-RVP80-CAR-SPEC.
DISEGNO
N" 278716-0032
Perlala I
595
Copod/y
Polenza:
116
Po-
VelocI/a':
(210
Spoed
01 -1013 1.-/
A + 1(00
B + 1(00
C +
1100
D + 1100
1J 202.t457 PRESSACAva I Cable Dland PG:n
12 2026-0947 PRESSACAva I Cable Dland PG 36
11 202573-0000 HANOHETROI PressunI "".- D63
10 20257.t.()()()(J VUOTOHETROI Voa.uo DO.- D63
9 205Q12.()()()(J VEN7l.ATIJiI: a.U 2SO-2TOf
8 1tI7791-0958 RACCORDOELASTICOI E1Q$1fc: c:omecIor ER 100
7 HOTIJiI: ELETTRJCOI E1ec1rlr:/IIO/ar
IS 3V078-109.t TETTOCABW. I Rool
5 3V07.t-1094 PAI#El.LO POSTERJOREI RtNJr
.t 3V077-1094 PAI#El.LO POSTERJOREIF. Ilnferlor ret1r tiariel
3 n3OIJ2-1305 FRONTALNJ HAMJHETR1I FranI oantN
2 322843-1094 PIHEl.LO FRONTALEI FranI
l 3V073-013.t PEDE CA I Boee DIate
Poso NOD;segno
Denom,naz;one
El
-';;;;ce
m'
Q) @
0 @
0 0
0 @
ROBUSCHI&C. S.p.A.
43100 Parma Italy - Via S.Leonardo 71/A
Italia: Te!. +390521 274911
Export: Te!. +39 0521 274991
Fax +390521 771242
robuschi@robuschi.it
www.robuschi.it
nODUSCHI
E-mai!:
.Internet:
DICIDARAZIONE DEL PRODUTTORE
MANUFACTURER DECLARATION
Direttiva 98/37/CE Allegato nE Council Directive 98/37/CEAnnex nE
Noi ROBUSCHI & C. S.p.A.
Via S.Leonardo 711A
43100 PARMA
ITALIA
We ROBUSCHI & C. S.p.A.
Via S.Leonardo 711A
43100 PARMA
ITALY
Dichiariamo sotto la nostra responsabilit che
la macchina sotto indicata
Declare, under our responsability that
the machine described herein
Tipo/Type
ES 45I2P-RVP80-CAR-SPEC.
Numero di Serie/Serial Number 0710134
Anno di costruzionelManufacturing year
2007
Ordine/ Order acknowledgement
209081
stata costruita in conformit alle indicazioni
della direttiva 98/37/CE e 89/336/CE
Le norme applicate sono le seguenti:
has been manufactured in compliance with
the Council Directive 98/37/CE and
89/336/CE
The regulations applied are the following:
UNI EN lO12-1 Compressori
UNI EN 1012-2 Pompe per vuoto
EN 809 Pompe Centrifughe
UNI EN 292 Sicurezza delle macchina
UNI EN 60204.1 Allestimenti elettrici
UNI EN 1012-1 Compressor
UNI EN 1012-2 Vacuum pumps
EN 809 CentrifugaI pumps
UNI EN292 Safety of the machine
UNI EN 60204.1 Electrical equipment
La messa in esercizio di questa macchina
vietata prima che la macchina o l'impianto in
cui sar incorporata siano stati dichiarati
conformi alla Direttiva 98/37/CE.
This machine cannot be put in operation
before the machine or the plant in which it
will be incorporated have been declared in
conformity with the Directive
98/37/CE.
Nome/Name: Ing. Paolo Cavatorta Posizione/Position: Direttore Tecnico
Firma/Signature ~O /? jl P
PUMPSANO BLOWERS ~ a::t- ~ c:r-;;>f~
Parma, 06/0612007
FILIALE DI MILANO
20097 S. Donato (Milano)
Via XXV Aprile,2
Te!. +39 02 51628065
Fax +39 02 51620224
E-mail: robuschimi@robuschi.it
FILIALE DI PADOVA
35129 Padova
Piazza Zanellato, 5
Te!. +39 049 8078260
Fax +390498078183
E-mail: robuschipd@robuschi.it
Capitale sociale: 4.160.000 i.v. - R.I. Parma/C.F.jP.I. 00150140341 - R.E.A. PR 39274
Societa' a socio unico - soggetta alla direzione e al coordinamento di Robuschi SpA (art 2497 bis CC)
I:: 'I;
nODUSCHI
'---I
I I I I
, 1 '
, ! I
" i I I '
I I i I I i I f ~T ("C)
f---I I " l'' i I AA
1
,---, I l' ,l' ,-~
i l
, ' : I i I
" '
I i I
" "" ,"
L~
r-
IIII
~
iii l
1
/
L! I ! ! ' ' + '
, J
~.
-'
"
' ---!-
,
'
,
' I
I ' I ,- . l,i! I '
I I /,/ """, r-- i ' i
l
'
"
! I !
'
I I
, !: ! I I [-,--~I I ! I I ' I i ! , I I
I i i
~,! i , I
Blower type: RBS45- V
Job nO: 209081
Serialno: 0709989
RATED PERFORMANCES
Gas: Air
Speed (rpm): 4210
Capaeity (m3/h): 595
Absorbed power (kW): Il,6
Sue. tempo CC): 50
Dise, tempo (C): 106
Density (kg/m3): 1.112
Abs. sue. presso (mbar): 1013
Abs. dise. presso (mbar): 1513
Diff. presso (mbar): 500
Venturi item
Speed (rpm)
Venturi diff. presso (mmH20)
Abs. sue. presso (mbar)
Diff. presso dP (mbar)
Sue. temperature (OC)
FaI! in pressure (mrnH20)
Capaeity (m3/h)
Motor absorbed power (kW)
Motor efficieney (%)
Blower power absorbed (kW)
Capaeity Q (m3/h)
Capacity Q (Nm3/h)
Absorbed power W (kW)
Differential temperature dT (C)
750.0
700.0
650.0
600.0
550.0
500.0
o 100 200
40.0
30.0
20.0
10.0
0.0
o 100 200
200.0
150.0
100.0
50.0
0.0
o 100 200
TEST CERTIFICA TE
ROTARY BLOWER
ORDER REFERENCES
CJaudius Peters S.LI.
1/3951/07
Clienti
Order nO,
ltem:
"1 AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Gas: Air
Cp/Cv : lA
Temperature CC): 24
Pressure (mbar): 10]2.9
Umidity re1.(%):44.2
!PRIME MOVER
Motor type: 160 L2
Manufaeturer: ANSALDO
Serial n : ATOI03
Power (kW):] 8.5
VoJtage (V): 380
Current (A): 38
Freq.(Hz)-PoIes: 50- 2
Speed (rpm): 2950
Drive: Coupling
Drive effieieney (%): 100
TEST RESULTS
TE1.s.0015
par. 6.1
par. 6.8
par. 6.3
par. 9.3
par. 6.3
par. 6A
par. 6.3
par. 9.5
par. 6.7
par, 6.7
par. 9.6
I Doc. code -272087
I
[ Parma 04/06/2007
Paekage type:
Package sin (Visible s/n):
L07!OJ34 J
par. 10.1
Par. 10.2
par. 10.2
aro10.3
l
FE7
2980
540.00
964.34
900.00
24.00
495.00
347.35
14.60
90.20
13.17
DATA CORRECTION 'IO RATED CONDITIONS
553.08
467.51
19.52
104.90
~--1
+
OPERATOR
Signature
Test date:
QUALITY ASSURANCE
,.~,
!I
,
"
Slgnature I
!
t'i. ' . S.D.a.
-",,,,,,,. .
Q U?, LI T/\.' /
6
'--
I-' t ~ .~ i: -'
Date ,-"o i'1""h"S, {~
INSPECTOR
Signature
Date
INSPECTION AUTORITY
Signature
I
I
I
I
IDate
I NOTE
I
I Test carried out with shop electric molar.
I
I
!
i
I
I
i
i
--,
Q (m3/h)
592.3
(Nm3/h)
500.7
300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100
'
W (kW)
11.7
300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100
300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100
dP (mbar)
.. "
----
--------
------
-----
-----
---
ROBUSCHi
B]ower type: RBS45-V
Job nO: 209081
Serialno: 0709989
RATED PERFORMANCES
Gas: Air
Speed (rpm): 4210
Capaeity (m3/h): 595
Absorbed power (kW): 11.6
Sue. tempo (C): 50
Dise. tempo (C): 106
Density (kg/m3): 1.1 12
Abs. sue. presso (mbar): 1013
Abs. dise. presso (mbar): 1513
Venturi item
Speed (rpm)
Abs. sue. presso (mbar)
Diff. presso dP (mbar)
Sue. temperature (C)
Fa]] in pressure (mmH20)
Capaeity (m3/h)
Motor effieieney (%)
BIower power absorbed (kW)
Capaeity Q (m3/h)
Capaeity Q (Nm3/h)
Differential temperature dT (C)
TEST CERTIFICATE
ROTARY BLOWER
aRDER REFERENCES
CJaudius Peters S.1'.I. CEent:
Order nO: 1/395 !/07
Item: --
"-1 AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Gas: Air
Cp/Cv : 1.4
Temperature (C): 24
Pressure (mbar): 1012.9
Umidity re1.(%): 44.2
JPRIME MOVER
I Motor type: 160 L2
Manufaeturer: ANSALDO
Seria] n : ATOI03
Power (kW): 18.5
VoItage (V): 380
Current (A): 38
Freq.(Hz)-Poles: 50- 2
Speed (rpm): 2950
Drive: Coup]ing
Drive effieieney (%): 100
TEST RESULTS
TE1.s.0015
par. 6.]
par. 6.8
par. 6.3
par. 9.3
par. 6.3
par. 6.4
par. 6.3
par. 9.5
par. 6.7
par. 6.7
par. 9.6
l
FE7
2980
540.00
964.34
900.00
24.00
495.00
347.35
14.60
90.20
13.17
DATA CORRECTION TO RATED CONDITIONS
553.08
467.51
19.52
104.90
par. 10.1
Par. 10.2
par. 10.2
aro10.3
Q (m3/h)
592.3
(Nm3/h)
500.7
300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100
o 100 200
W (kW)
] 1.7
300 400 500 600 700 800 900 ]000 1100
o 100 200
dT (C)
54.4
I
L--!
, I I I i
I
i I I ! I
' I , I " '
I l' I I
I
i ! j l! I, I I '
I I , I : , I I
l
' 4
1 I "'I
~
II
L-I "
I
,
' ': I
:
-' 1
I , , I I
l
, ,I ! I
I
i i :
I
l' i I I
I ,I I I I ' ; : i lii
~
:
,
ill
,
'
I
'
,
I
I,
'
,,
'
,
1
1 . L I , , - , ,
I--[-I-i-', [i I i i i
i__~' : I ! I !-L I i
300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100
dP (ml1al')
o 100 200
I Doc. code -272087
I
i Parma 04/06/2007 j
Paekage type:
Package sin (VisibJe s/n):
L0710134J
'
,
'
,-
i
I I
I I
I
I
l
I
I
I
I
+
OPERATOR
Signature
Test date:
QUALITY ASSURANCE
,i
d
,-
Slgnature
I
,'i. ' . S.D.a.
-",,,,,,, ,"-..
Q U p, LI TA,' '
b
'
i-' t ~ ,~ i: -'
Date <,../,i'1",~.,.:<s. {~
INSPECTOR
Signature
Date
INSPECTION AUTORITY
Signature
I
I
I
I
IDate
I NOTE
I
I Test carried out with shap electric motar.
I
I
I
I
I
i
i
'-1
'
750.0
700.0
650.0
600.0
550.0
500.0
40.0
30.0
20.0
10.0
0.0
200.0
]50.0
100.0
50.0
0.0
---
--------
-----
-----
-----
--
ROBUSCHI
Vi a S. Leonar do 7l l A
43 i 00 PARtvf A
M^ccHrNA<1_\(l i
C
p
Macltine:
.'NTMESSA
JrLg S f
J ob;
MATRICOLA;
Serial Nutnber.
_------.---
RILIEVO TARATURA VALVOLA
DI SiCUREZZA
R.IFER}IENTi
DI VENTDITA
I
Order ref' erences
l { r i
{ ' - r
I
)
CLL.ttaner;
ORDINE:
Order:
SI GLA:
- ...- r'
'
E : i ? c ,
[enz.
CONTDIZIONII DI TARATURA
DELLA VALVOLA
SOVRAPRESSIONE
RICHIESTA
(mbar)
{* (-_
{
COMPRESSI ONE MOt I A I MMI
<->G
t
{*- \' /+\
o. , ,
21l
f .
/
c' i . -
QUALI T. \
i g$&H$$#ffiffifie c;"spal
rJ
U A L.I 1-A' !
C. navas't-j.-
I SPETTORE
i ns nt ct or
E\ TE Di COLI . . l . UDC)
I t i s : ; t ' i t i at i t u t I ro, " i i t
,w
1
'
1
!
,
I
"
1
.1
,
j
j
.,
1
j
i
I
10 505
INGRESSO ARIA
Ak' H~I
11\
....
N
11\
13
DN 100
81143
SOFFIA TORE
BlD-
T"o, RBS 45/F ~ Type (kg ""
MOTORE ELETTRICO
E/IrIt: /llD1Dr
CDstrullere: SIEMENS ILA7
HonuIacturor
Pertala'
~
Patenza ,
-
IEC,160MB I J .
J-- (kg""
595 C.'1h/ I Tipo ,
Type B3
/l<W/1~
Powor
It6 15
Veloclla' :
Speed
pl -1013 Cmbarl
CRPHJ I Velaclla': 2925 CRPHJ
I
Poli: 2 I J -
Speed Po,..
4210
<'''''...'',
I """::~"
~ ~~:.:.>,
9 ..:;:-~ ~~ ',', ...~ ....
~
)C
Il
-o
o
CI
HAN:lA T A
GaII QCJ/C.t
1150 50
I H'RONTA Al SUOLOI
FocI pml
989
::!
...
;t
~
D
TRASltSSIOI
v_, aw.
Puleggia soli., 0
8/0- pu/'ey
MASSA
tf-'rtll 500
132-I CAR1CIt STATICI
Slallt:IDDdtI
(kgJ I ~TORE
Costrullere,
HarxJfadurer
I Puleggia molore '0 190-
Cktl! HoI"" pu/I.y
pZ .1513 C--I 12.106 CC"I I Fasi, 3
_...
50
11 -50 CC"I I Allmonlazlono oIoltrlco...octrlc -Y'
I
Tipo cinghie,
360-660 CVI - CAI V-Bo/I
/Hz!
Numera cinghie:
V-Beli "'-"Iber
SPA 1600
Commessa:
"'DrIeorder No.
Cliente:
Cuslomer
Ordine:
Order
150,110
usar A VENTLAZIOIE
Ak' venllallon QCJ/C.,
Impianto:
PIDnl
Localila' :
Piace
Servizio:
Serv/ce
t3
1/'1
co
'"
Specifica:
Dalasheel
~
ITEM:
c:)
1155
VIP
CLU 250-2T
Descrizione modifiche
"segnalo Conlrol/olo Approvolo
Dolo 01-05-2001 01-05-2001
Formo LeMtJrrJ Galli o.
A- di /eggB d-- laproprlef/J di questa
disegno del/o ROBUSCH & C tIpO.
col_la dirtxfxIo Ddi-. naiaa -
D a -cancorrenN -- lanaefra -
Dolo
~
Mod.N'
(kg'"
q
' AUmonlazlono oIollrlca...loclrlc .upplr-
400-460 (VI 0,30-034 /AI
CARICODINAIICO+ O /NJ fasi, 3 50-60 /Hz!
0yna0I/c load - _se.
(kg.'1
ROBUSCHI@
007209083005
1/3952/07
CLAUDIUS PETERS (ITALIANA) S.R.L.
1
l
1
l
1
1
l
l
l
1
l
l
"
N" pezz; N' modello
5muss;
non qu%U
Scolo,
Foglio
Rugosil~
Ro,n um-
50sNluilo do,
~
50sUlu;sce,
Disegnolo Dolo Conl/ollolo Dolo,
'o e senza In 'COZlone d' o eronzo
ROBOX
::GNO278716-0033
" 202U5-D941 PRf'SSACAva I CabI. Dland PG29
12 202.f46-D941 PRf'SSACAva I Cabl Dland PG36
11 202S13"()()()o HANOITROI Pressunt/ lJtJUtJI> D63
10 202S1.f"()()()o VUOTOHETRO I Vacun lJtJUDII D63
9 Z05012"()()()o VENTI.A TORE a.U 250-2T01
Il 1111191-09511 RACCORDOELASTICOI Baslle c:onneclDt' ER 100
1 HOTOREELETTRICOI Bectrlc IIIOlDr
6 32301/J-1fW4 TETTOCA/JIoIAI Roof
5 323014-1fW4 PAJoIoEl.LOPOSTERIOREI Raar
4 323011-1fW4 PAJoIoEl.LOPOSTERIORENF. I /11- rear DO""
!1 323OIJ2-f3()5 FRONTIJ.NJ lWIOffTRI I FranI pa,..,
2 322U3-1fW4 PAJoIoEl.LOFRONTALEI FranI
l 3230 PEDE CA/JIoIAI &J". DIa'"
Poso W Diseano Denominazione
A + 1400
B + 1400
C + 1100
D + 1100
E3
-';;;;ce
m "
CD eD
eD 0
il> 0
() @
ROBUSCHI &C. S.p.A.
43100 Parma Italy - Via S.Leonardo 71/A
Italia: Tel. +390521274911
Export: Te!. +390521 274991
Fax +39 0521 771242
robuschi@robuschi.it
www.robuschi.it
nORUSCHI
.E-mail:
Internet:
DICIDARAZIONE DEL PRODUTTORE MANUFACTURER DECLARATION
Direttiva 98/37/CE Allegato IIB
Council Directive 98/37/CE Annex IIB
Noi ROBUSCHI & C. S.p.A.
Via S.Leonardo 71/A
43100 PARMA
ITALlA
We ROBUSCHI & C. S.p.A.
Via S.Leonardo 71/A
43100 PARMA
ITALY
Dichiariamo sotto la nostra responsabilit che
la macchina sotto indicata
Declare, under our responsability that
the machine described herein
Tipo/Type
Numero di Serie/Serial Number 0710650
Anno di costruzione/Manufacturing year
2007
Ordine/ Order acknowledgement
209083
stata costruita in conformit alle indicazioni
della direttiva 98/37/CE e 89/336/CE
Le norme applicate sono le seguenti:
has been manufactured in compliance with
the Council Directive 98/37/CE and
89/336/CE
The regulations applied are the following:
UNI EN 1012-1 Compressori
UNI EN 1012-2 Pompe per vuoto
EN 809 Pompe Centrifughe
UNI EN 292 Sicurezza delle macchina
UNI EN 60204.1 Allestimenti elettrici
UNI EN 1012-2 Vacuumpumps
EN 809 CentrifugaI pumps
UNI EN 292 Safety of the machine
UNI EN 60204.1 Electrical equipment
La messa in esercizio di questa macchina
vietata prima che la macchina o l'impianto in
cui sar incorporata siano stati dichiarati
conformi alla Direttiva 98/37/CE.
This machine cannot be put in operation
before the machine or the plant in which it
will be incorporated have been declared in
conformity with the Directive
98/37/CE.
Nome/Narne: Ing. Paolo Cavatorta
PosizionelPosition: Direttore Tecnico
Firma/Signature c---I--;o /? jl fl
PUMPSANDBLOWERS ~a::t- ~~~
Parma, 06/06/2007
FILIALE DI MILANO
20097 S. Donato (Milano)
Via XXVAprile,2
Te!. +3902 51628065
Fax +39 02 51620224
E-mail: robuschimi@robuschi.it
FILIALE DI PADOVA
35129 Padova
Piazza Zanellato, 5
Tel. +39 049 8078260
Fax +390498078183
E-mail: robuschipd@robuschi.it
pUBUSCHI
.................
~
y
Capitale sociale: 4.160.000 Lv. - R.J. Parma/C.F./P.I. 00150140341 - R.E.A. PR 39274
Societa' a socio unico - soggetta alla direzione e al coordinamento di Robuschi SpA (art 2497 bis CC)
19O_.""'~O'"
,"""",~""~~~,~""",~"","~~~",",,,' '~"'''.-',''~' H '-,, ._,. '-.
i
. - ., ._~~=".- -.....--
~ ROBUSCHI
Via S.Leonardo 711 A
43100PAM-!A
RILIEVO TARA TURA VAL VOLA DI SICUREZZA
RIFERiMENTI DI VENDITA
. MACCHINAC ~,t( -S- '- {J
Machine: '
COMMESSA :2Dq 08 )
Job:
MATRICOLA:
Serial Number:
-
.
Order refe~ences
CLIENTE:eCV C) lJS
Cuslomer:
, "(' .o-
2
'
1t
''1
ORDI~) --H
Order:
SIGLA:
Item:
CONDIZIONI DI TARATURA DELLA VALVOLA
SOVRAPRESSIONERICHIESI A (mbar)
SOQ
.,
2./ ''1~J
Data: ~/ <). / U 'r
OPERATORE
ODerGtOr
C)
~
'
I /', ~ - ..
(S:Ct?c "\ A--
COMPRESSIONEMOLLA(mm)
2
- ~ r-
<:)/'-'
~
"
ISPETTORE
lll.mec;or
&' rI'~,f.
QUALITA' 'l ,
C. Ravasi
""~.~>, ~-. "'"'''7',.'~""""""''''"""""'''''''''",,~,=,~..,.,~,",,,,""-~'''''''~..r'_~,,,, .-", ~..,..'
1005
P.
E:--iTEDI COLLAUDO
[,tSDectioll 1l1llwrin
'---"-"'--
",~~,~~"""'~""--." ,.,...",.",
i
i Doc. code -2720ii7
ROTARY BLOWEH ~ ' P'!!~l1LiJ4/()620~ :
ORDER REFERENCES '
Claudiu:Peters S.;'.1. Packug~!ypc;
RpeUSCIJj
Bio\'fer type:
Job ne:
Seria! nO:
CEen:: RBS45-V
209083
0709944
O,der ne:
Item:
! 13952107
r RATED PERFORfvIANCES
I Gas: Air
I Speed (rpm): 4210
I Capacity (m3/b): 595
i Absorbed pawer (kW): ] 1.6
i Suc. tempo ("C): 50
I Disc. tempo (C): 106
i Density (kglm3): 1.112
l
' Abs. SUC.presso (mbar): 1013
Abs. disco presso (mbar): 1513
i
I Venturi ;tem
I Speed (rpm)
I
Abs. SUC.presso (mbar)
Diff. presso dI' (mbar)
I
Suc. temperature (C)
. Fa]] in pressure (mmH20)
Capacity (m3/h)
Motor efficiency (%)
Blower power absorbed (kW)
JY AMBIENT CONDITIONS
Gas: Air
Density (kglm3): 1.182
Cp/C\' . !.4
Temperature ("C): 24
Pressure (mbar): lO12.9
Umidity re!.(%): 44.2
Capacity Q (m3/h)
Capacity Q (Nm3/h)
Di fferential temper~ture dT (C)
750.0
700.0
650.0
600.0
550.0
500.0
TEST CERTIFICATE
iPRIME ..\'1OVER
I Motor type: 160 L2
I Manufacturer: ANS.A.LDO
I Seria] n . AT0103
, Power (kW): 18.5
l
' Voltage (V): 380
I Current (A): 38
I Freq.(Hz)-Poles: 50- 2
I Speed (rpm): 2950
. Drive: Coupling
Drive efficiency (%): 100
TEST RESUL TS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
i
I
I
I
Q (m3/h)
591.7
(Nm3/h)
500.2
i
~~' ,_-:-=e J"-~-~;
," -t'- !' i ~ +---1--~
I ' ,-T-T- ,- ~' 1 " I
~"J-/~/rr --r--i-- j--l-I--"~ --~ -_J L' ! '-- . --~
200.0
54.5
50.0
IOO.O
50.0
c..O
,.
'J OO "00 700 '\00 600 200 3()()
dT (C)
800 900 1000 l JOO
dI'
=',." ,, .. ~,=._~-,,=,~ ==-~ """,,T'~'~'~ ,<'. ,.,--'-'~"'~ "-~~~,",~'.
-----------.-----------------
-----..
i'ack"g S.:,.(\'ls;h!c sin::
~~7 r(},~~---~
,-------..----------.--.
+
C
f
s.nc.,
OUP,L1T>.' ,'-'
C. ,qa\/~~i j ,,-
j "
"'" .1
~-"
I
I
i
IDate
l
i INSPECTOR
Signature
I
i
,
,
i
I
i Date
IINSPECTION AUTORITY
i Signature
f
i Dare
i i\;OTE
!
~--_.-._------._.._..
i T~sl ~arned aut \vith s;-,op eectr:c ;!lc"',y
~,
"-,,-,.,
o 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100
40.0 I
, W (k\V)
Il.4
30.0
20.0
10.0
0.0
.,
100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 v
1
I
Manuale di uso e manutenzione per gruppi elettrosoffiatori
Operating and maintenance instructions for blower compact units

Istruzioni per

- Trasporto
- Installazione
- Esercizio
- Manutenzione
Instruction for

- Transport
- Installation
- Operation
- Maintenance

Costruttore
Manufacturer
ROBUSCHI & C. S.p.A.
Indirizzo
Adress
Via S. Leonardo 71/A
43100 PARMA Italy
Tel.
Italia: +39/0521/274911 Export: +39/0521/274991
Fax.
+390521774212
e.mail robuschi@robuschi.it

Tipo
Type

N di serie
S/N

Anno di costruzione
Manufacturing year

Documento importante! :
Conservare per futuri riferimenti
Important document! :
Conserve for future references

S20-2A05-I

ITALIANO

ENGLISH

GB

2
INFORMAZONI GENERALI

Questo manuale parte integrante della macchina, seguire le
istruzioni vi contenute prima di installare e mettere in esercizio
ROBOX.
Per una lettura rapida e razionale di questo manuale osservare i
seguenti simboli e definizioni :

Attenzione : Segnala il rischio di lesioni
gravi alle persone e/o danni gravi a ROBOX

Nota : Segnala una informazione tecnica
importante per il funzionamento di ROBOX

Seguire attentamente le INFORMAZIONI DI SICUREZZA a
pagina 3 prima di ogni operazione su ROBOX

Personale qualificato
Si intendono quelle persone che, in base alla loro preparazione,
esperienza, istruzione e alla loro conoscenza delle principali
norme e specifiche, delle regole antinfortunistiche e delle
condizioni di lavoro sono stati autorizzati dai responsabili della
sicurezza dellimpianto ad eseguire gli interventi su ROBOX e
che sono in grado di riconoscere ed evitare ogni possibile
pericolo.
E richiesta anche la conoscenza delle principali nozioni di pronto
soccorso e delle locali strutture di pronto soccorso.

ROBOX un compressore rotativo a lobi per
impiego professionale secondo i modi previsti in
questo Manuale.
Ogni altro modo di impiego da considerarsi
improprio e quindi proibito.

ROBOX deve essere installato in zona sicura, accessibile solo da
parte di personale qualificato.

Attenzione : Il personale non qualificato non
autorizzato a lavorare vicino o su ROBOX

Portare questo manuale a conoscenza del personale di servizio e
conservarlo con cura in un luogo noto in modo che sia sempre
disponibile per future consultazioni.

Le operazioni di manutenzione devono essere eseguite da
personale qualificato seguendo le istruzioni contenute in
questo Manuale ed utilizzando solo ricambi originali.

La Robuschi & C. S.p.A. non sar responsabile di
inconvenienti, rotture e incidenti dovuti alla mancata applicazione
delle indicazioni contenute nel Manuale, alla non osservanza delle
norme correnti e alla mancata applicazione della dovuta diligenza
durante la manovra, le operazioni di manutenzione o di
riparazione, anche se non espressamente menzionate in questo
Manuale.

Il Manuale compilato con le conoscenze tecniche note al
momento della vendita di ROBOX, non pu pertanto essere
considerato inadeguato in caso di nuove conoscenze conseguite
dopo la commercializzazione di ROBOX.

In caso di richiesta di ulteriori informazioni o aggiornamenti
contattare :

Tel.: +390521274911
Fax.: +390521771242
e-mail robuschi@robuschi.it

indicando sempre il tipo ed il numero di matricola riportati sulla
targhetta applicata sul soffiatore.
La Robuschi & C. S.p.A. si riserva tutti i diritti sul presente
manuale. Nessuna riproduzione totale o parziale permessa
senza lautorizzazione scritta della Robuschi.
GENERAL INFORMATIONS
This manual is integral part of the machine follow strictly the
instructions given in this Manual prior to positioning and
operating ROBOX .
For a quick and rational reading of this manual observe the
following statements and definitions :

Warning : Signals the risk of serious injuries
to people and/or serious danger to ROBOX

Note : Signals important technical
information for the operation of ROBOX

Follow strictly the SAFETY INFORMATIONS at page 3 prior any
operation on ROBOX

Qualified personnel
It means these persons who, on account of their training,
experience and instruction and their knowledge of relevant
standards, specifications, accident prevention rules and
operating conditions, have been authorised by those responsible
for the safety of the plant to carry out the necessary work on
ROBOX and who can recognise and avoid any possible
dangers.
Acknowledge of first aid is also required as of information about
local rescue facilities.

ROBOX is a rotary lobe compressor suitable only
for professional use as described in this Manual.

Any other use is to be considered improper and is
therefore forbidden.

ROBOX must be installed in a safe area, accessible only by
qualified personnel.

Warning : Non-qualified personnel are not
permitted to work on or near ROBOX

The personnel in charge must be well acquainted with this
Manual, and then conserve carefully the Manual in a known site
in order that it be available for future consultations.

The maintenance operations are to be carried out by qualified
personnel following the instructions given in this Manual and
using only original spare parts.

Robuschi & C. S.p.A. will not be liable for any damage,
breakdown, injury deriving from the non-pursuance of the
instructions and directives stated in this Manual, from the non-
pursuance of the current regulations and from the non-
pursuance of the due care during the handling, service
operations or repair, also if they are not specially indicated in this
Manual .

The Manual is prepared with the technical knowledge known at
the moment of sale of ROBOX, therefore it cannot be
considered inadequate in case of new knowledge achieved after
the sale of ROBOX

In case further information or revisions are requested please
contact :

Tel.: +390521274911
Fax.: +390521771242
e-mail robuschi@robuschi.it

quoting always the type and the serial number printed on the
nameplate fixed to the blower.
All rights on this Manual are reserved to Robuschi & C. S.p.A..
Total or partial reproduction of this manual is permitted only with
Robuschi written authorization.
3
INFORMAZIONI DI SICUREZZA

La fornitura ROBUSCHI non include il progetto
dellambiente operativo dove ROBOX verr installato, n il
circuito di potenza, il circuito di controllo e altri controlli o
equipaggiamenti richiesti dalla specifica funzione di
ROBOX.
Il CLIENTE pertanto deve verificare che lambiente
operativo, il circuito di potenza, il circuito di controllo e gli
altri controlli o equipaggiamenti relativi alla funzione di
ROBOX soddisfino i requisiti essenziali di sicurezza della
Direttiva Europea delle Macchine 98/37/CEE e/o delle
corrispondenti legislazioni del paese in cui ROBOX
installato.
Il CLIENTE deve inoltre assicurare che sia seguita la
legislazione sulla sicurezza elettrica (Direttiva Bassa
Tensione 73/23 CEE ) e sulla compatibilit elettromagnetica
( Direttiva EMC 89/336 CEE )

Attenzione : Tutto il personale che viene a
contatto con ROBOX deve seguire le
seguenti norme di sicurezza

Durante il funzionamento di ROBOX
Non aprire la cabina di insonorizzazione
Non smontare la protezione della trasmissione.
Non toccare le superfici esterne del soffiatore e del silenziatore di
mandata : superficie a temperatura > 70 C
Non aprire i tappi olio durante il funzionamento.
Non avvicinarsi a ROBOX con abbigliamento inadeguato (evitare
indumenti larghie, cravatte, bracciale o collane ecc.).
Non esporsi al rumore emesso da ROBOX EL (senza cabina)
senza cuffie di protezione antirumore.
Non utilizzare ROBOX per condizioni di funzionamento differenti
da quelle previste nella conferma d'ordine.
Non toccare i dispositivi alimentati da tensione elettrica.
Disporre di un sistema antincendio vicino ROBOX.

Prima di ogni intervento su ROBOX
Fermare ROBOX e i sistemi ausiliari come descritto al par 5.4
Isolare ROBOX dallimpianto e riportarlo alla pressione
atmosferica

Attenzione : Il gas contenuto nellimpianto
pu essere caldo, tossico e irritante

Attenzione : Sezionare lalimentazione elettrica,
bloccare il sezionatore generale in posizione aperta
con la chiave e conservarla durante lintervento.

Attenzione : Attendere che ROBOX ritorni
alla temperatura ambiente

Durante gli interventi su ROBOX
Assicurarsi di aver compiuto tutte le operazioni descritte al
paragrafo precedente
Sollevare ROBOX utilizzando attrezzature adeguate
Durante i lavori di pulizia con spray o detersivi osservare
scrupolosamente le corrispondenti istruzioni per evitare
avvelenamenti per via respiratoria dovuti ai fumi o bruciature da
contatto

Attenzione : Non consentito luso di ricambi
ed accessori non originali.

Nota : ROBUSCHI non sar responsabile di
inconvenienti, rotture e incidenti dovuti allimpiego di
ricambi o accessori non originali
SAFETY INFORMATIONS

Delivery of ROBUSCHI does not include the design of the
operating environment where ROBOX will be installed, nor
the power circuits, control circuits and other controls or
equipment required by the specific function of ROBOX.

The CUSTOMER therefore must verify that the operating
environment, the power circuits, the control circuits and
the other controls or equipment related to the function of
ROBOX satisfy the essential safety requirements of the
European Machinery Directive 98/37/EEC and/or of the
corresponding legislation of the country where ROBOX is
used.
The CUSTOMER must also ensure that the valid legislation
on electric safety ( Low-Voltage Directive 73/23 EEC ) and
Electromagnetic Compatibility of equipment (EMC Directive
89/335 EEC ) is followed.
Warning : All the personnel that come in
contact with ROBOX must observe following
safety regulations

During ROBOX operation
Do ot open the sound enclosure
Do not disassemble transmission guard.
Do not touch external surfaces of the blower and of the outlet
silencer : surfaces temperature > 70 C.
Do not open oil plugs during operation.
Do not approach ROBOX without suitable clothing (avoid large
clothes, neckties, bracelets or necklaces).
Avoid exposure to the noise produced by ROBOX EL (without
sound enclosure) without wearing suitable noise protectors.
Do not use ROBOX in operating conditions different fromthe
ones rated in the order confirmation.
Do not touch components under electric supply.
Dispose of fire-fighting equipment close to ROBOX

Before any staff service on ROBOX
Stop ROBOX and auxiliary systems as described at par. 5.4
Insulate ROBOX from the plant and restore the atmospheric
pressure into it.

Warning : The gas contained in the plant may
be hot, toxic and irritant

Warning : Disconnect the electric supply, lock the
general switching open position with the key and
conserve it during service operation

Warning : Wait until ROBOX returns at the
ambient temperature

During staff service on ROBOX
Check that all the operations indicated above have been
completed.
Lift ROBOX and the main piping by a suitable equipment only.
During cleaning operations involving the use of sprays or
cleaning agents special attention is to be paid to relevant user
information to avoid the possibility of injury i.e. poisoning due to
fumes or burns due to caustic substances.

Warning : Do not use non-original spare parts
or accessories .

Note : ROBUSCHI will not be liable for any
damage, breakdown, injury deriving from the
use of non-original spare parts or accessories
4
IDENTIFICAZIONE DI ROBOX

ROBOX IDENTIFICATION

Costruttore
Manufacturer
Indirizzo
Adress
Via S. Leonardo 71/A
43100 PARMA Italy
Tel.
Italia: +39/0521/274911 Export: +39/0521/274991
Fax.
+390521774212
e.mail robuschi@robuschi.it

Tipo
Type

N di serie
S/N

Anno di costruzione
Manufacturing year

Gas convogliato
Conveied gas

Pressione assoluta di aspirazione P1
Absolute intake pressure
mbar
Temperatura di aspirazione T1
Intake temperature
C
Portata aspirata Q1
Inlet capacity
m3/h
Pressione assoluta di mandata P2
Discharge absolute pressure
mbar
Pressione differenziale P2 P1
Differential pressure
mbar
Temperatura di mandata T2
Discharge temperature
C
Velocit di rotazione del soffiatore n
Blower speed
rpm
Potenza assorbita N
Absorbed power
kW
Potenza del motore
Motor power
kW
Velocit di rotazione del motore
Motor speed
rpm
Rumore emesso SPL
Noise
dB(A)

CONDIZIONI DI GARANZIA

ROBOX, se non diversamente stabilito dalle disposizioni
contrattuali garantito per non pi di 12 mesi di funzionamento e
comunque non oltre 18 mesi dopo la consegna.
La garanzia valida solo se si in regola con le norme
contrattuali ed amministrative, se linstallazione ed il successivo
impiego di ROBOX avvengono in ottemperanza alle istruzioni
contenute in questo manuale.
Le parti usurate o difettose allorigine sono riparate o sostituite
gratuitamente.
Sono escluse dalla garanzia tutte le parti sottoposte ad usura
(Filtro, Cuscinetti ecc.), le spese di trasporto ed i costi di
intervento dei nostri tecnici per anomalie di funzionamento non
dipendenti da difetti di origine.
La garanzia esclude qualsiasi responsabilit per danni diretti o
indiretti a persone e/o cose causati da uso o manutenzione
inadeguati del compressore ed limitata ai soli difetti di
fabbricazione.
La garanzia decade in caso di manomissioni o modifiche (anche
lievi) e con luso di ricambi non originali.
WARRANTY CONDITIONS
ROBOX, if not stated otherwise by the contract, is guaranteed
for 12 months of operation and in any case for a maximum of 18
months after the delivery.
The warranty apply only if the contractual and administrative
norms have been observed and if the installation of ROBOX and
its use comply with the instructions of this manual.

The damaged or defective parts due to manufacturing faults will
be repaired or replaced free of charge.
The following are excluded from this warranty : all parts subject
to wear (air filter, bearings etc..), transport costs and the costs of
the intervention of our technicians for operational faults not due
to manufacturing defects.
The warranty excludes any responsibility for direct or indirect
damage to people and/or objects caused by improper use or
inadequate maintenance of the ROBOX and is limited only to
manufacturing defects.
The warranty is considered void in the event of tampering or
changes (even small ones) and use of non-original spare parts.
5
ITALIANO ( for english see page 23)

1 CARATTERISTICHE DI ROBOX.............................................................................................................. 6
1.1 Targheta di identificazione............................................................................................................................................................ 6
1.2 ROBOX ES.................................................................................................................................................................................. 6
1.3 ROBOX EL................................................................................................................................................................................... 7

2 CAMPO DI IMPIEGO E CONDIZIONI DI ESERCIZIO ........................................................................... 8
2.1 Ambiente operativo e gas convogliato........................................................................................................................................... 8
2.2 Limiti di funzionamento................................................................................................................................................................. 8
2.3 Regolazione della portata.............................................................................................................................................................. 8
2.4 Emissioni acustiche...................................................................................................................................................................... 8
2.5 Usi proibiti..................................................................................................................................................................................... 9
2.6 Rischi residui................................................................................................................................................................................ 9

3 IMMAGAZZINAGGIO............................................................................................................................... 10
3.1 Movimentazione e trasporto........................................................................................................................................................ 10
3.2 Disimballaggio............................................................................................................................................................................ 10
3.3 Conservazione............................................................................................................................................................................ 10

4 INSTALLAZIONE..................................................................................................................................... 11
4.1 Ingombro e Disposizione............................................................................................................................................................ 11
4.2 Collegamenti delle tubazioni ....................................................................................................................................................... 11
4.3 Posa in opera.............................................................................................................................................................................. 12
4.3.1 ROBOX ES...................................................................................................................................................................... 12
4.3.2 ROBOX EL ...................................................................................................................................................................... 12
4.4 Installazione allinterno................................................................................................................................................................13
4.5 Installazione allaperto................................................................................................................................................................. 13
4.6 Collegamenti elettrici................................................................................................................................................................... 13

5 ESERCIZIO............................................................................................................................................... 14
5.1 Controlli preliminari..................................................................................................................................................................... 14
5.2 Primo avviamento....................................................................................................................................................................... 14
5.3 Esercizio..................................................................................................................................................................................... 14
5.4 Regolazione della valvola limitatrice............................................................................................................................................ 15
5.4.1 Funzionamento in pressionevalvola RVP ........................................................................................................................ 15
5.4.2 Funzionamento in pressione valvola VSM /P................................................................................................................... 15
5.4.3 Funzionamento in vuoto valvola RVV...............................................................................................................................15
5.5 Regolazione del silenziatore di aspirazione................................................................................................................................. 16
5.5.1 Silenziatore di aspirazione ROBOX 1-2-3 ........................................................................................................................ 16
5.5.2 Silenziatore di aspirazione ROBOX 4-5............................................................................................................................ 16
5.6 Fermata...................................................................................................................................................................................... 16
5.7 Mancanza dellalimentazione elettrica (Black-out)....................................................................................................................... 16

6 MANUTENZIONE..................................................................................................................................... 17
6.1 Cambio olio................................................................................................................................................................................. 17
6.1.1 Tipo di olio e viscosit...................................................................................................................................................... 17
6.1.2 Oli minerali consigliati....................................................................................................................................................... 17
6.2 Sostituzione del filtro................................................................................................................................................................... 18
6.2.1 ROBOX 1-2-3 .................................................................................................................................................................. 18
6.2.2 ROBOX 4-5...................................................................................................................................................................... 18
6.3 Verifica della tensione delle cinghie............................................................................................................................................ 19
6.4 Sostituzione delle cinghie e/o delle pulegge................................................................................................................................19
6.5 Sostituzione del motore.............................................................................................................................................................. 19
6.6 Manutenzione del soffiatore........................................................................................................................................................ 20
6.6.1 Sostituzione della tenuta dellalbero.................................................................................................................................. 20
6.6.2 Pulizia della camera di compressione...............................................................................................................................20
6.6.3 Rilievo dei giochi dellingranaggio..................................................................................................................................... 20
6.6.4 Rilievo dei giochi dei rotori................................................................................................................................................ 20
6.7 Ricambi ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 21
6.8 Demolizione................................................................................................................................................................................ 21

7 INCONVENIENTI DI FUNZIONAMENTO.............................................................................................. 22

8 TABELLE TECNICHE ............................................................................................................................. 41
8.1 Ingombro per ROBOX ES 1-2-3................................................................................................................................................. 41
8.2 Ingombro per ROBOX EL 1-2-3................................................................................................................................................ 41
8.3 Ingombro per ROBOX ES 4-5.................................................................................................................................................... 42
8.4 Ingombro per ROBOX EL 4-5 ................................................................................................................................................... 42
8.5 Sezione del soffiatore................................................................................................................................................................. 43
8.6 Rilievo dei giochi......................................................................................................................................................................... 44

9 INFORMAZIONI SPECIALI ..................................................................................................................... 45
6
1 CARATTERISTICHE DI ROBOX

1.1 Targhetta di identificazione

1) Configurazione di ROBOX
ES con cabina
EL con cabina

2) Grandezza del soffiatore da 15 a 155

3) Grandezza di ROBOX da 1 a 5

4) Tipo di funzionamento
P in pressione
V in vuoto
C in circuito chiuso

5) Accessori
VSM valvola di avviamento
SNT Sistema di monitoraggio SENTINEL

6) Esecuzione 0001

Nota : Per la descrizione dei materiali vedere il catalogo o consultare il nostro servizio commerciale.

7) Dati tecnici

1.2 ROBOX ES
VISTA FRONTALE

Tetto apribile

SENTINEL (solo versione SNT)

Griglia uscita dellaria di ventilazione

Chiave di apertura del tetto

Manometro (versione standard)

Indicatore intasamento filtro(versione standard)

Chiave di apertura del pannello frontale

Etichetta VIETATO APRIRE LA CABINA DURANTE
IL FUNZIONAMENTO

Pannello frontale apribile

Fig. 1

VISTA POSTERIORE

Griglia ingresso aria

Tubo di ingresso (solo versione /C e /V)

Etichetta ATTENZIONE SCARICO GAS CALDO
(solo versione /P e /C)

Griglia scarico valvola (solo versione /P e /C)

Pannello posteriore superiore

Passacavi

Tubo di scarico

Pannello posteriore inferiore

Fig. 2
CE
Parma
Italy

Type ES 65 / 2 P - VSM

S/N 0405116 exec. 0001
m3/h 1000 kW 37
dp 500 n 1450
mbar RPM
(3)
(1)
(2)
(4)
(5)
(6) (7)
7
1.3 ROBOX EL
VERSIONE / P e /C

Silenziatore/Filtro

Etichetta INDOSSARE PROTEZIONI ACUSTICHE

Etichetta LEGGERE IL MANUALE

Valvola di sicurezza RVP (Valvola VSM ---/P versione VSM)


Etichetta ATTENZIONE SUPERFICIE CALDA

Valvola di ritegno

Tronchetto elastico
Fig. 3

VERSIONE / V

Silenziatore/Filtro

Etichetta INDOSSARE PROTEZIONI ACUSTICHE

Tronchetto elastico di aspirazione

Valvola di ritegno



Valvola di sicurezza in vuoto RVV


Tronchetto elastico di mandata

Fig. 4

VISTA FRONTALE

Soffiatore RBS

Motore elettrico

Protezione della trasmissione

Dispositivo tendicinghia


Etichetta PUNTO DI SOLLEVAMENTO CON CARRELLO


Silenziatore di mandata
Fig. 5
8
2 CAMPO DI IMPIEGO E CONDIZIONI DI ESERCIZIO

2.1 Ambiente operativo e gas convogliato
ROBOX adatto a funzionare esclusivamente in ambiente esente da polveri, con atmosfera non-esplosiva o corrosiva e a convogliare
esclusivamente aria atmosferica oppure azoto.

Attenzione : ROBOX non adatto a convogliare gas esplosivi, tossici o comunque pericolosi.

Attenzione : Laspirazione di liquidi danneggia gravemente ROBOX.

2.2 Limiti di funzionamento

RPM P1
[mbar]
P2-P1
[mbar]
P2/P1 T1
[C]
T2
[C]
T2-T1
[C] Soffiatore MAX MIN
(1) MAX MIN MAX MAX MAX MIN MAX MAX
15 900 110
25
5000 1200 P0+50 P0-500
700
2 50 -25 130
90
35 1000 130
45 1000 110
46
4800 1000 P0+100 P0-500
700
2 50 -25 150
90
55 1000 130
65 1000 110
66
4800 900 P0+100 P0-500
700
2 50 -25 150
90
75 1000 130
85 1000 110
86
3800 700 P0+100 P0-500
700
2 50 -25
150
(2)
90
95 1000 130
105 1000 110
106
3000 550 P0+100 P0-500
700
2 50 -25
150
(2)
90
115 1000 130
125 1000 110
126
2400 450 P0+100 P0-500
700
2 50 -25
150
(2)
90
135 1000 130
145 1000 110
155
1800 350 P0+100 P0-500
700
2 50 -25
150
(2)
90

Po Pressione atmosferica
P1 Pressione assoluta di aspirazione del soffiatore T1 Temperatura di aspirazione del soffiatore
P2 Pressione assoluta di mandata del soffiatore T2 Temperatura di mandata del soffiatore
(1) Per velocit prossime al valore minimo sono possibili fenomeni di risonanza nellimpianto
(2) 160 C per soffiatori /R-F

2.3 Regolazione della portata
Modificare il rapporto di trasmissione delle pulegge
Variare la frequenza di alimentazione del motore elettrico
Impiegare un motore a due velocit
Sfiatare leccesso di portata, silenziare lo scarico della portata in eccesso

Attenzione : Non utilizzare la valvola limitatrice per lo scarico della portata in eccesso

Attenzione : Non ricircolare la portata in eccesso allaspirazione di ROBOX.

Attenzione : Non regolare la portata mediante lo strozzamento del condotto di aspirazione o di mandata.

2.4 Emissioni acustiche
Il livello di rumore emesso dalla superficie di ROBOX riportato sulla tabella di identificazione a pagina 4 come Livello di Pressione Sonora
misurato in campo libero e alla distanza di 1 m secondo la norma ISO 3746 (tolleranza +/- 2 dB(A))

Attenzione : Per rapporti di compressione e velocit elevati il livello di pressione sonora di ROBOX EL
(senza cabina) supera 85 dB(A).

Nota : Il rumore emesso dai tubi collegati a ROBOX pu essere diverso da quanto indicato in questo
manuale e dipende dalla configurazione dellimpianto.
9
2.5 Usi proibiti

Uso proibito Rischio Misure
Funzionamento in zona con atmosfera
potenzialmente esplosiva
Aspirazione di gas esplosivo
Esplosione ed incendio
Aspirazione di gas tossici, pericolosi
Inquinamento dellambiente
Pericolo per la salute degli operatori
Funzionamento con la valvola di
intercettazione chiusa
Surriscaldamento
Incendio
Bloccaggio del soffiatore ed eiezione di parti
Uso vietato
Aspirazione di liquidi Bloccaggio del soffiatore ed eiezione di parti
Installare un separatore di liquido sulla
bocca di aspirazione del soffiatore
Funzionamento con senso di rotazione
contrario
Emissione di sostanze pericolose
Istruire il personale qualificato addetto alla
conduzione di ROBOX
Funzionamento con velocit di rotazione
superiore alla massima
Funzionamento con velocit di rotazione
inferiore alla minima
Prevedere limiti adeguati alla velocit del
motore elettrico quando viene alimentato con
convertitore di frequenza
Funzionamento con pressione P1
Emissione di sostanze pericolose
Funzionamento con pressione P1
Funzionamento con pressione P2-P1
Istruire il personale qualificato addetto alla
conduzione di ROBOX
Funzionamento con rapporto P2/P1
maggiore di 2
Funzionamento con temperatura T1
Surriscaldamento
Incendio
Surriscaldamento
Incendio
Funzionamento con temperatura T2-T1
Termostato di sicurezza posto sul gas di
scarico del compressore tarato a 150 C

2.6 Rischi residui

Rischio residuo
Pericolo
UNI EN 1012-1 Compressori
ROBOX ES ROBOX EL
Taglio, trascinamento,
intrappolamento, frizione,
abrasione
Nessuno con cabina chiusa
Con cabina aperta vedi ROBOX EL
Non avvicinarsi alla protezione della trasmissione
e alla bocca di SPF con indumenti non adeguati.
Segnalazione sul libretto
Eiezione di fluido
Scarico della valvola limitatrice
Etichetta sulla cabina
Scarico della valvola limitatrice
Etichetta C.9 sul corpo valvola
Eiezione di parti
Il superamento dei limiti indicati al par. 2.2 pu
portare al pericolo di eiezione di parti
Perdita di stabilit Nessuno
Installazione elettrica
Fenomeni elettrostatici
Influenze esterne
sullequipaggiamento elettrico
Nessuno limitatamente alleventuale motore
principale fornito direttamente da ROBUSCHI e al
motore del ventilatore
Nessuno limitatamente alleventuale motore
principale fornito direttamente da ROBUSCHI
Temperature elevate
La superficie del soffiatore e del silenziatore di
mandata pu superare i 70 C
Etichetta C.7 sulle superfici
Rumore
Il livello di pressione sonora pu superare il valore
di 85 dB(A)
Indossare le protezioni antirumore
Etichetta C.2 sul filtro di aspirazione
Liquidi Luso proibito pu portare al pericolo di aspirazione di liquidi
Gas Luso proibito pu portare al pericolo di aspirazione di gas pericolosi
Incendio ed esplosione
Il superamento dei limiti di funzionamento (par. 2.2) pu portare al pericolo di incendio
Il funzionamento prolungato a bocca chiusa pu portare al pericolo di incendio
La mancanza di corretta manutenzione pu provocare ilsurriscaldamento ed il pericolo di incendio
Interruzione energia elettrica Nessuno
10
3 IMMAGAZZINAGGIO

3.1 Movimentazione e trasporto

Attenzione : Non rimuovere il dispositivo che blocca il motore durante la movimentazione.

Movimentare ROBOX utilizzando il pallet di cui dotato come indicato in figura 6, la massa riportata a pagina 41

Fig. 6
Attenzione : Se non possibile utilizzare il carrello elevatore richiedere istruzioni a ROBUSCHI

Trasportare ROBOX mediante un mezzo protetto dagli agenti atmosferici, in caso di trasporto via mare proteggere ROBOX con sacco
barriera e sali igroscopici.
Durante il trasporto ancorare il pallet di ROBOX al pianale del mezzo di trasporto mediante cinghie per evitare ogni possibile danno.

Attenzione : Rimuovere ogni corpo libero dal pianale di trasporto per evitare ogni danno a ROBOX

3.2 Disimballaggio
Alla ricezione di ROBOX controllare la corrispondenza tra i documenti e la merce ricevuta e controllare gli eventuali danni da trasporto .

Attenzione : Comunicare a ROBUSCHI i danni rilevati per valutare le condizioni di sicurezza di ROBOX

Attenzione : Rimuovere limballo con cura, smaltire tutti gli elementi pericolosi (chiodi, schegge, ecc.)

3.3 Conservazione
Allentare le cinghie di trasmissione impiegando la sicurezza di trasporto e conservare ROBOX in un luogo protetto dalla radiazione solare,
privo di polvere e nelle seguenti condizioni climatiche :

Temperatura da 20 C a 40 C
Umidit relativa da 10 % a 80 %

Attenzione : Se durante il periodo di conservazione le condizioni climatiche superano i limiti indicati
controllare i giochi del soffiatore, lallineamento delle cinghie ed il serraggio delle viti.

Attenzione : Non conservare ROBOX in atmosfera contenente sostanze anche debolmente corrosive

Attenzione : conservare ROBOX a terra senza porre pesi sopra di esso

Rinnovare lo stato di conservazione del soffiatore ogni 6 mesi o pi frequentemente se lumidit relativa supera il 80 % utiliz zando

Olio antiruggine
Particolari
AGIP ESSO SHELL
Parti esterne lavorate Rustia 27 Rust Ban 397 V-Produkt 9703
Rotori Corpo Cuscinetti,
ingranaggio
Rustia C 100 Antiruggine MZ 110 Ensis Motor Oil 20

Attenzione : Usare solo olio antiruggine con punto di infiammabilit superiore a 200 C .

Attenzione : Smaltire lolio antiruggine in ottemperanza alle prescrizioni locali vigenti.
11

4 INSTALLAZIONE

4.1 Ingombro e Disposizione
Le dimensioni e la massa di ROBOX sono riportate a pagina 41, la superficie di appoggio deve essere piana ed orizzontale (max 0,5 mm su 1
m) esente da vibrazioni ed in grado di sopportare il peso del gruppo, non esistono carichi dinamici .

Nota : Per fissare ROBOX a strutture metalliche contattare ROBUSCHI o un rivenditore autorizzato.

La figura 7 rappresenta la disposizione consigliata di pi ROBOX con evidenziate le dimensioni consigliate per linstallazione e le operazioni di
manutenzione di ROBOX.
E possibile sostare nellarea utile per la manutenzione anche durante il funzionamento di ROBOX.

Attenzione : Non sostare nellarea di scarico della valvola limitatrice durante il funzionamento

Le porte o le aperture di accesso al locale devono essere adeguatamente dimensionate per consentire il passaggio dei carrelli elevatori

Nota : La quota L deve consentire il movimento del carrello elevatore per la posa in opera di ROBOX

Collettore cumune

Valvola di intercettazione

ROBOX ROBOX ROBOX
Area di manutenzione

1000
1000

1000
200 300 L

I E I E I E

Armadi elettrici Carrello elevatore
Fig. 7

4.2 Collegamenti delle tubazioni
Prevedere i tubi terminali dellimpianto secondo le dimensioni indicate nel disegno di ingombro a pagina 41
Installare sempre una valvola di intercettazione sui terminali dellimpianto per isolare ROBOX dallimpiantodurante la manutenzione.

L 20 30 mm
Inserire i manicotti elastici e le relative fascette sui tubi terminali dellimpianto come
mostrato in figura 8.1.
Il terminale dellimpianto deve avere un tratto rettilineo di lunghezza uguale o superiore ad L

ROBOX 1 2 3 4 5
L 200 200 230 230 300

Posizionare il tubo terminale di ROBOX alla distanza indicata in Fig. 8.1

Fig. 8.1

Spostare il manicotto elastico nella posizione definitiva e serrare le fascette (Fig. 8.2)

Attenzione : Fissare i tubi terminali dellimpianto vicino ai
manicotti elastici

Dimensionare il diametro del collettore comune di mandata in modo che la velocit del gas
risulti inferiore a 30 m/s
Fig. 8.2
12

4.3 Posa in opera

4.3.1 ROBOX ES
ROBOX ES 1-2-3 rimuovere il pannello o i pannelli anteriori della
cabina utilizzando la chiave in dotazione
ROBOX ES 4 rimuovere i portelli posti alla base della cabina L
Inforcare ROBOX ES per la lunghezza L come indicato in Fig. 9.1

ROBOX 1 2 3 4
L 650 900 1200 1800

Posizionare ROBOX ES di fronte al tubo terminale dellimpianto come
indicato al paragrafo 4.2

Fig. 9.1

E possibile fissare ROBOX ES a terra
Togliere anche il pannello o i pannelli posteriori
Forare il pavimento come indicato in Fig. 9.2
Fissare i piedi mediante tasselli ad espansione

Foratura pavimento
ROBOX
Tassello ad
espansione
D
mm
L
mm
1 8 x 71 8 65
2 12 x 112 12 105
3 12 x 112 12 105
4 12 x 112 12 105

Fig. 9.2

Per la grandezza 5 la cabina fornita separatamente per cui installare ROBOX seguendo le istruzioni del paragrafo 4.3.2 e le istruzioni
specifiche che accompagnano la cabina

4.3.2 ROBOX EL
Trasportare ROBOX EL sul luogo di installazione come indicato nel
paragrafo 3.2.2 .
Posizionare ROBOX EL come indicato al paragrafo 4.5 e fissare i
supporti antivibranti con viti ad espansione

Foratura pavimento
R
O
B
O
X

Tassello ad
espansione
Q.t
D
mm
L
mm
1 8 x 71 8 8 65
2 8 x 71 8 8 65
3 8 x 71 8 8 65
4 12 x 112 8 12 105
5 12 x 112 16 12 105

Fig. 9.3
D
L
L
D
13

4.4 Installazione allinterno
Prevedere la corretta ventilazione del locale compressori, nella figura 10 sotto riportata mostrato lo schema dei flussi

Silenziatore di ingresso Silenziatore di uscita

Ventilatore

ROBOX 2000

Qv

1000 Qa Qv

Fig. 10

Qa ( m3/h ) la portata totale aspirata dai soffiatori calcolata come somma delle portate aspirate dai soffiatori che funzionano
contemporaneamente.
Qv ( m3/h ) la portata di ventilazione, calcolata a partire dalla somma No ( kW ) delle potenza dei motori funzionanti contemporaneamente
nel locale con la relazione seguente :

Qv = 30 x No

4.5 Installazione allaperto

CONDIZIONI CLIMATICHE PROVVEDIMENTI TECNICI
Radiazione solare intensa Proteggere con una tettoia
Pioggia / Neve Proteggere con una tettoia
Temperatura < - 20 C Usare solo ROBOX ES e riscaldare linterno prima dellavviamento
Vento > 20 m/s Proteggere con pareti frangivento
Formazione di brina Riscaldare il silenziatore di aspirazione
Polvere / Tempesta di sabbia Filtro speciale con preseparatore

Nota : Per condizioni climatiche diverse contattare ROBUSCHI ( o un rivenditore autorizzato)

4.6 Collegamenti elettrici
Fare eseguire il collegamento dellalimentazione elettrica da specialisti autorizzati secondo le norme vigenti nel luogo di installazione e
secondo le prescrizioni dell Ente erogatore dellenergia elettrica.

Nota : Robuschi & C. S.p.A. declina ogni responsabilit per allacciamenti elettrici non conformi alle
disposizioni di legge vigenti.

Controllare sulle targhette del motore elettrico principale e del ventilatore : Tensione, Corrente nominale, Frequenza, numero di Fasi.
Controllare lo schema di collegamento contenuto nella morsettiera dei motori, se non disponibile richiederlo ai costruttori dei motori.
Dimensionare i cavi elettrici in funzione della corrente nominale.
Non disporre i cavi vicino a sorgenti di calore o a spigoli acuti
Collegare il motore del ventilatore in modo che parta e si fermi insieme con il motore principale che aziona il soffiatore.

Nota : Con temperatura ambiente superiore a 30 C ritardare lo spegnimento del ventilatore di 15 minuti.

Proteggere ambedue i motori con un interruttore automatico tarato sulla corrente nominale dei motori.
Installare un quadro locale dotato di un interruttore generale I (vedi Fig. 7) dotato di chiave per poterlo blocare in posizione aperta durante le
operazioni di manutenzione e di un pulsante di emergenza E (vedi fig. 7)

Attenzione : Il pulsante di emergenza E deve essere facilmente raggiungibile dalloperatore.

Proteggere limpianto mediante un adeguato sistema di messa a terra, collegarsi al morsetto PE di fig. 6.3 e 7

Attenzione : Ogni operazione su ROBOX deve essere condotta in assenza di tensione dal circuito di
alimentazione.
14
5 ESERCIZIO

5.1 Controlli preliminari
ROBOX ES Togliere le sicurezze di trasporto dei supporti antivibranti
(vedi Fig. 12) , conservare le sicurezze per movimentazioni future.

Attenzione : Controllare la corrispondenza tra i dati
del processo e le caratteristiche riportate sulla
targhetta di ROBOX.

Attenzione : Verificare la corretta posizione delle
cinghie e la loro corretta tensione (paragrafo 6.3)

Attenzione : Rifornire di olio il soffiatore (par. 6.1),
ingrassare i cuscinetti del motore

Attenzione : Verificare lefficienza delle protezioni
di sicurezza.
Fig. 11

5.2 Primo avviamento

Attenzione : Il personale deve indossare le protezioni contro leccessivo rumore.

Aprire la valvola di intercettazione posta sul condotto di mandatao di aspirazione.
ROBOX ES, togliere il pannello frontaledella cabina e togliere le cinghie di trasmissione(vedi paragrafo 6.4).
ROBOX EL, togliere le piastrine per il bloccaggiodel motore durante il trasporto (vedi paragrafo 6.4)
Controllare che il senso di rotazione del motore sia antiorario visto frontalmentedando un breve impulso di corrente.

Attenzione : ROBOX EL, non far funzionare il compressore nel senso errato per pi di qualche giro.

ROBOX ES, riposizionare le cinghie di trasmissione (vedi paragrafo 6.4) e togliere le piastrine di bloccaggio motore durante il trasporto.

Nota : Conservare le piastrine di bloccaggio motore per le operazioni di manutenzione (vedi par. 6.4)

Controllare il senso di rotazione del ventilatore deve essere antiorario visto dal lato motore
Aprire la valvola del circuito di raffreddamento (solo per RF)

Avviare ROBOX.

Verificare il funzionamento della valvola limitatrice (vedi paragrafo 5.6) ed il funzionamento della valvola di avviamento (solo per -VSM)
Aumentare la pressione di funzionamento progressivamente sino al valore di contratto.
Controllare, durante le prime 8 ore di funzionamento, che non vi siano rumori anomali, perdite di olioo surriscaldamenti, in caso contrario
fermare ROBOX e contattare ROBUSCHI, o un rivenditore autorizzato.

5.3 Esercizio

FREQUENZA
CONTROLLO PARAMETRO
h G S M
NOTE
Pressione 1
Temperatura 1
Potenza assorbita 1
Portata del liquido di raffreddamento 1
VISIVO
Rumori 1
ROBOX in
funzione
Livello olio 500
Perdite di olio 1
Viscosit 500
LUBRIFICAZIONE
Cambio olio 4000 6
ROBOX fermo
Depressione 1 < 35 mbar
FILTRO
Intasamento 2 > 60 mbar
Usura 2000
Tensione delle cinghie 2000 TRASMISSIONE
Sostituzione delle cinghie 15000 24
ROBOX fermo
h ore di funzionamento S settimane calendariali
G giorni calendariali M mesi calendariali
Nota : dove sono riportate due indicazioni vale quella che scade prima
15
5.4 Regolazione della valvola limitatrice
ROBOX ES Togliere il pannello posteriore della cabina e la protezione della valvola

Attenzione : Seguire le norme antinfortunistiche, indossare occhiali e guanti di sicurezza

Attenzione : Durante la taratura della valvola non inserire le dita o altri elementi fra le spire della molla
perch pu essere causa di lesioni.

Attenzione : Non avvicinarsi allapertura del silenziatore SPF con indumenti stracci o altri elementi che
possono essere risucchiati.

5.4.1 Funzionamento in pressione valvola RVP
Caricare completamente la molla avvitando il dado 219 219
Strozzare la mandata di ROBOX sino alla pressione di contratto
Svitare il dado 219 sino a che la valvola inizia ad aprire
Riavvitare il dado 219 di un giro e bloccarlo con il controdado
ROBOX ES riposizionare la protezione della valvolaed il pannello posteriore

Attenzione : Dalla valvola fuoriesce gas caldo che pu
causare danni fisici.

Fig. 12

5.4.2 Funzionamento in pressione valvola VSM /P
Regolare il tempo di chiusura della valvola a circa 10-15 secondi agendo 219 85 204
sul grano di regolazione 85, avvitando il grano il tempo diminuisce svitando
il grano il tempo aumenta.

Nota : La valvola si chiude solo in presenza di una
contropressione statica di almeno 300 mbar

Dopo la regolazione bloccare il grano 85 con il dado 204
Caricare completamente la molla avvitando il dado 219
Strozzare la mandata di ROBOX sino alla pressione di contratto.
Svitare il dado 219 sino a che la valvola inizia ad aprire

Attenzione : Dalla valvola fuoriesce gas caldo che
pu causare danni fisici.

Riavvitare il dado 219 di un giro e bloccarlo con il controdado
ROBOX ES riposizionare la protezione della valvola ed il pannello
posteriore
Fig. 13

5.4.3 Funzionamento in vuoto valvola RVV
Allentare il dado 219 e caricare completamente la molla avvitando lo stelo
Strozzare laspirazione di ROBOX sino alla pressione di contratto.
Svitare lo stelo sino a che la valvola inizia ad aprire.

Attenzione : Non avvicinarsi allapertura della
valvola con indumenti stracci o altri elementi che
possono essere risucchiati.

Riavvitare lo stelo per un giro e bloccarlo con il controdado 219 219
ROBOX ES riposizionare il pannello posteriore

STELO

Fig. 15
16
5.5 Regolazione del silenziatore di aspirazione
Il silenziatore di aspirazione regolato alla consegna sulle condizioni di funzionamento indicate nella conferma dordine, le seguenti operazioni
di regolazione vanno eseguite solo se cambiano le condizioni di lavoro.

Nota : Per funzionamento a velocit variabile regolare il silenziatore alla velocit pi bassa.

5.5.1 ROBOX 1-2-3
ROBOX ES Aprire il tetto della cabina utilizzando lapposita
chiave in dotazione
Svitare il pomolo e rimuovere il coperchio del silenziatore
Posizionare il setto mobile in corrispondenza della nuova
velocit di rotazione
Riposizionare il coperchio del silenziatore.
ROBOX ES Riposizionare il tetto della cabina

Scala delle velocit

Setto mobile

Fig. 15

5.5.2 ROBOX 4-5
ROBOX ES Aprire le porte frontali della cabina
Togliere il pannello del silenziatore POS 312
Allentare la vite di bloccaggio del setto mobile POS 315
Posizionare il setto mobile sulla nuova velocit di rotazione
riferendosi alla scala graduata allinterno del silenziatore(vedi
particolare ingrandito).
Fissare il setto mobile avvitando il dado POS 315
Riposizionare il pannello POS 312 del silenziatore
ROBOX ES Chiudere le porte della cabina

Scala delle velocit

Fig. 16

5.6 Fermata
Togliere, se possibile, la pressione differenziale di lavoro
Interrompere lalimentazione elettrica e chiudere il circuito di raffreddamento (solo per -RF)

Attenzione : Verificare che la decelerazione di ROBOX sia uniforme e senza vibrazioni.

5.7 Mancanza di energia elettrica (black-out)
In caso di mancanza di energia elettrica ROBOX non subisce danni e non genera pericolo di innesco di esplosione.

Attenzione : Durante il periodo di black-out proibito eseguire lavori di manutenzione su ROBOX

Attenzione : Seguire la procedura di avviamento del par. 5.2 quando ripristinata lenergia elettrica.
17
6 MANUTENZIONE

Fermare ROBOX e gli eventuali sistemi ausiliari come descritto al paragrafo 5.7.
Isolare ROBOX dall'impianto e riportarlo alla pressione atmosferica.

Attenzione : Il gas contenuto nellimpianto pu essere caldo, tossico e irritante

Attenzione : Sezionare lalimentazione elettrica, bloccare il sezionatore generale in posizione aperta con
la chiave e conservarla durante lintervento di manutenzione

Attenzione : Attendere che ROBOX ritorni alla temperatura ambiente (< 40 C)

Attenzione : Seguire le norme antinfortunistiche, indossare occhiali e guanti di sicurezza

6.1 Cambio olio
Il primo cambio olio va effettuato dopo 500 ore di lavoro, i successivi
secondo la tabella del paragrafo 5.3

Drenare lolio di lubrificazione
ROBOX ES Drenare lolio utilizzando i tubi come indicato in figura 17

Attenzione : Smaltire lolio esausto in
ottemperanza alle vigenti prescrizioni locali

Dopo aver drenato lolio esausto riposizionare i tubi sulla parete della
cabina seguendo le indicazioni della etichetta.

Fig. 17

Rifornire ambedue i carters del soffiatore con il quantitativo di olio indicato
nella tabella sotto riportata
ROBOX ES Utilizzare gli appositi tubi come indicato in figura 18

Nota : Verificare che il livello dellolio raggiunga la
mezzeria del livello come mostrato in figura 18.

Fig. 18

6.1.1 Tipo di olio e viscosit
Olio minerale per applicazioni generali, per circuiti idraulici, per motori endotermici o olio sintetico a base di polialfaolefine(PAO).

Attenzione : Non usare olio minerale con additivi EP o olio sintetico a base di siliconi o diesteri

Impiego
Olio tipo Viscosit
T ambiente T2 Tolio Note
Minerale
Sintetico PAO
100 < 0 < 90 < 50
Il punto di scorrimento deve essere inferiore alla
temperatura minima prevista
Minerale 150 < 35 < 110 < 80
Minerale 220 < 50 < 130 < 110 Installazione in cabina
Sintetico PAO 220 > 50 > 130 > 110
Quantit olio ( lt )
Grandezza
Lato
ingranaggio
Lato
comando
Totale
15-25 0,40 0,32 0,72
35-45-46 0,75 0,40 1,15
55-65-66 1,20 0,60 1,80
75-85-86 2,00 0,90 2,90
95-105-106 3,50 1,60 5,10
115-125-126 4,80 2,80 7,60
135-145-155 10,50 6,00 16,50
18
6.2 Sostituzione del filtro

6.2.1 ROBOX 1-2-3
ROBOX ES Aprire il tetto della cabina
Svitare il pomolo e rimuovere il coperchio del silenziatore
Sostituire lelemento filtrante.
Riposizionare il coperchio del silenziatore.
ROBOX ES Chiudere il tetto della cabina

Elemento filtrante

Fig. 19

6.2.2 ROBOX 4-5
ROBOX ES Aprire le porte frontali della cabina
Togliere il pannello del silenziatorePOS 312
Allentare la vite di bloccaggio del setto mobilePOS 315
Muovere il setto mobile nel senso della freccia sino a portarlo al centro
dellapertura del silenziatore come indicato in Fig. 20.1.

Fig. 20.1

Fissare lelemento filtrante nuovo allelemento filtrante esausto come
indicato in Fig. 20.2
Rimuovere lelemento filtrante esausto (tratteggiato in figura) nel senso
indicato dalla freccia di Fig. 20.2
Fissare i lembi dellelemento filtrante nuovo
Riposizionare il setto mobilecome indicato al paragrafo 6.2.2
Fissare il setto avvitando il dado POS 315
Riposizionare il pannelloPOS 312 del silenziatore
ROBOX ES Chiudere le porte frontali

Fig. 20.2

Elemento filtrante esausto

19
6.3 Verifica della tensione delle cinghie
Verificare la flessione e delle cinghie secondo i parametri della tabella, eventualmente correggerla agendo sulla molla del tendicinghia
e = I x E / 100

Attenzione : Una tensione eccessiva pu provocare danni al soffiatore e al motore

Controllare lallineamento delle cinghie mediante una riga (Fig.21)

Sezione

cinghia
Forza F

[ daN ]
Diametro
Dp

[ mm ]
Freccia
E

[ mm ]
SPZ
XPZ
2.5
95 125
> 132
1.45
1.30
SPA
XPA
5.0
100 140
150 200
> 224
2.30
2.10
2.00
SPB
XPB
7.5
160 224
236 355
> 375
1.55
1.20
1.10
SPC
XPC
12.5
250 355
375 - 560
1.80
1.60
Fig. 21

6.4 Sostituzione delle cinghie e/o delle pulegge
ROBOX ES Togliere il pannello anteriore
ROBOX EL Smontare la protezione della trasmissione svitando i
tasselli neri con una chiave grandezza 17 (vedi Fig. 22)

Fig. 22

Allentare completamente la molla del dspositivo tendicinghia svitando
i dadi 51(vedi figura 23)
Sistemare le piastrine di sicurezza di trasporto 54 come indicato in
figura 23
Bloccare la piastrina di sicurezza pi bassa con il dado 61 pi basso
Svitare il dado 61 superiore sino a sollevare il motore a sufficienza
per sostituire le cinghie
Assicurare il motore in questa posizione con un sopporto in legno Fig. 23
Sostituire le cinghie
Togliere il sopporto di legno delle slitte
Togliere le piastrine di sicurezza di trasporto 54 e bloccare i dadi 61tra di loro
Mettere in tensione le cinghie seguendo la proceura di paragrafo 6.3
ROBOX ES Riposizionare il pannello frontale della cabina
ROBOX EL Riposizionare la protezione della trasmissione
51

54

61

61

54

6.5 Sostituzione del motore
Smontare le cinghie come descritto al par. 6.4
Smontare la puleggia del motoreseguendo le istruzioni del costruttorre
Svitare le viti di fissaggio del motore
Sostituire il motore
Fissare il nuovo motore e verificare lallineamento con lasse delle slitte.
Installare la puleggia sul motore
Allineare le pulegge spostando la puleggia lungo lalbero del mtore
Rimontare la tasmissione come descritto nel paragrafo 6.4
e
F

I
D
p
17
20
6.6 Manutenzione del soffiatore
Non consentito lo smontaggio del soffiatore durante il periodo di garanzia pena la decadenza della stessa.
Nel presente manuale vengono fornite unicamente le indicazioni per la manutenzione ordinaria.
In caso di smontaggio, leventuale riparazione ed il rimontaggio, devono essere eseguiti solo da personale qualificato con lausilio
dellapposito manuale di smontaggio e di attrezzature adeguate.
Per lidentificazione dei particolari riferirsi alla sezione a pagina 42 di questo manuale

Attenzione : Prima di ogni operazione di manutenzione fermare ROBOX come indicato al paragrafo 6.

Nota : Non sono coperti da garanzia i danni causati da operazioni non corrette.

6.6.1 Sostituzione della tenuta dellalbero
Smontare il filtro di aspirazione
Smontare la trasmissione come indicato al paragrafo 6.3

Attenzione : Non assestare colpi sullalbero, sul giunto o sulla puleggia.

Svuotare il circuito di raffreddamento (solo per /RF) e sconnettere le relative tubazioni
Drenare lolio lubrificante contenuto nel carter 12A

Attenzione : Smaltire lolio esausto in ottemperanza alle vigenti prescrizioni locali

Smontare la linguetta 30 ed il carter 12A
Sostituire lanello paraolio 43, pulire accuratamente la sede dellanello paraolio 43 ed eventualmente sostituire lanello 37

Attenzione : Non danneggiare il labbro di tenuta dellanello 43 durante questa operazione.

Rimontare il carter 12A sul fianco 5A interponendo una guarnizione 50 nuova
Riempire di nuovo il carter 12A con olio lubrificante nuovo secondo quanto indicato al paragrafo 6.1.
Rimontare la trasmissione come indicato al paragrafo 6.4

6.6.2 Pulizia della camera di compressione
Pulire la superficie interna del corpo e la superficie dei rotori utilizzando solventi e raschietto

Attenzione : Seguire le norme antinfortunistiche prescritte per il solvente utilizzato, indossare occhiali e
guanti di sicurezza

Nota : Non danneggiare la superficie interna del corpo e la superficie dei rotori con il raschietto.

6.6.3 Rilievo dei giochi dellingranaggio
Drenare lolio lubrificante contenuto nel carter 12B


Smontare il carter 12B
Misurare il gioco tra i fianchi delle ruote dentate secondo le indicazioni della tabella 264468 allegata. Per fare questo bloccare una delle due
ruote dentate e ruotare laltra sino a portare i denti a contatto.
Rimontare il carter 12B interponendo una guarnizione 50 nuova
Riempire di nuovo il carter 12B con olio lubrificante nuovo secondo quanto indicato al paragrafo 6.1
Inviare la tabella 264468 compilata con i giochi rilevati alla ROBUSCHI & C. S.p.A. (oppure ad un rivenditore autorizzato) per la verifica.

6.6.4 Rilievo dei giochi dei rotori
Smontare il filtro di aspirazione
Misurare il gioco tra i fianchi dei rotori nelle varie posizioni indicate nella tabella 264468 mediante spessimetri introdotti attraverso la bocca di
aspirazione del soffiatore e ruotando i rotori a mano.

Attenzione : Durante questa operazione prestare molta attenzione ai rotori che possono causare lo
schiacciamento delle mani e degli arti

Rimontare il silenziatore di aspirazione
Inviare la tabella 264468 compilata con i giochi rilevati alla ROBUSCHI & C. S.p.A. (oppure ad un rivenditore autorizzato) per la verifica.
21
6.7 Ricambi
Nella tabella sotto riportata sono indicati i ricambi consigliati per il normale impiego di ROBOX in funzione della durata utile prevista.
Per i particolari del soffiatore riferirsi alla sezione a pagina 42.

Esercizio
Particolare Pos. Descrizione
Avviamento 2 anni 5 anni 10 anni
SP 306 Elemento filtrante 1 2 5 10
SL 998 Cinghie di trasmissione (set) 1 1 2 4
SL 995 - 997 Puleggia di trasmissione (coppia) 1 1 2 4
BAS 66 - 74 Manicotti elastici per /P (set) 1 1 2 4
Manicotti elastici per /V (set) 1 1 2 4 BAS 66 - 74
BAS 102-129 Manicotti elastici per /C (set) 1 1 2 4
BAS 65 Battente valvola di ritegno 1 1 2 4
4523 Guarnizione della valvola di avviamento 1 1 2 4
ROBOX
4521 Membrana della valvola di avviamento 1 1 2 4
11 A - B Ruota dentata (coppia) - - - 1
16 A - B Dischi di lubrificazione (coppia) - - - 1
20 Camera di tenuta (set) - - - 1
23 A - B - C Disco paraolio (set) - 2 4 8
25 Distanziali di tenuta (set) - 1 2 4
26 Ghiera (coppia) - - 1 2
27 A Ghiera (RBS 115155) - - 1 2
31 - 32 - 33 Cuscinetti (set) - - 1 2
37 Anello JR 1 2 4 8
43 Anello di tenuta 1 2 4 8
45 Segmento di tenuta (RBS 35155) (set) - 1 2 4
50 Guarnizione (set) 1 2 4 8
63 63 A Anello di compensazione (set) - 1 2 4
75 76 - 77 Tappo di scarico olio (set) 1 2 4 8
Soffiatore
78 Tappo livello olio (set) 1 2 4 8

Per ordinare i particolari di ricambio citare sempre i riferimenti di ROBOX :Tipo , numero di serie e anno di costruzione (che sono indicati nella
pagina di copertina) e la posizione indicata nella tabella .

Attenzione : Non consentito luso di ricambi ed accessori non originali.

Nota : ROBUSCHI non sar responsabile di inconvenienti, rotture e incidenti dovuti allimpiego di
ricambi o accessori non-originali

6.8 Demolizione di ROBOX
Nel caso di demolizione verificare leventuale presenza di sostanze esplosive, tossiche o pericolose allinterno o allesterno di ROBOX e
provvedere al loro smaltimento in ottemperanza delle disposizioni vigenti sul luogo di installazione.


Attenzione : Smaltire lelemento filtrante in ottemperanza alle vigenti prescrizioni locali

Demolire ROBOX in modo che non sia possibile riutilizzare ROBOX come unit completa, n sia possibile riutilizzare una o pi delle sue
parti.

Nota : Distruggere le targhette di identificazione di ROBOX e ogni altro documento relativo.
22
7 INCONVENIENTI DI FUNZIONAMENTO

Inconveniente Lista delle cause
Il motore non parte e non si sente nessun rumore 1-3-4
Il motore non parte, ma si sente un ronzio 2-3-4-5-6-7
La protezione automatica interviene subito dopo la partenza 3-4-5-6-7-13-14-15-16
Pressione di aspirazione diversa dal valore di contratto 13-14
Portata nulla o scarsa

ATTENZIONE : FERMARE IMMEDIATAMENTE ROBOX
13-14-17-18-20-21-22
Pressione di mandata diversa dal valore di contratto

5-8-13-14-15-16
Temperatura di mandata diversa dal valore di contratto

15-19-20-22-23
Potenza assorbita troppo elevata 3-5-6-7-15-16-17-18-19-20-21-22
Perdite di olio e/o di liquido 5-23
Temperatura dellolio elevata 5-6-9-14-15-18-23
Vibrazioni e/o rumorosit elevate

5-6-7-9-24-25
Valvola limitatrice sfiata 15-16-17-18-19-20
Valvola di avviamento non chiude 26-27-28

Pos Causa Rimedio Rif.
1 Interruzione di almeno due collegamenti elettrici Verificare i fusibili, i morsetti ed i cavi di collegamento e se
necessario sostituirli.
4.6
2 Interruzione di un collegamento elettrico. Vedi punto 1. 4.6
3 Alimentazione elettrica difettosa Controllare limpianto di alimentazione 4.6
4 Motore elettrico difettoso Controllare il motore elettrico. 4.6
5 Strisciamento dei rotori Controllare i giochi del compressore 6.6.4
6 Incrostazioni nella camera di compressione Pulire la camera di compressione ed i rotori 6.6.2
7 Ingestione di corpi estranei Eliminare il corpo estraneo e verificare i giochi 6.6.4
8 Usura dei rotori Controllare i giochi 6.6.4
9 Usura dei cuscinetti Sostituire i cuscinetti (1)
10 Usura delle guarnizioni Sostituire le guarnizioni (1)
11 Usura della tenuta dellalbero di comando Sostituire la tenuta 6.6.1
12 Rottura dei livelli olio Sostituire i livelli olio
13 Filtro intasato Pulire o sostituire 6.2
14 Tubo di aspirazione ostruito (solo /C) Eliminare lostruzione (2)
15 Tubo di scarico ostruito Eliminare lostruzione (2)
16 Saracinesca chiusa Aprire (2)
17 Valvola di ritegno installata in senso errato Correggere (2)
18 Taratura della valvola limitatrice errata Ritarare 5.5
19 Sezioni dei tubi insufficiente Aumentare 4.1
20 Rapporto di trasmissione errato Correggere 6.4
21 Trasmissione a cinghie Verificare ed eventualmente sostituire 6.3
22 Senso di rotazione errato Ripristinare il senso corretto 5.2
23 Livello dellolio elevato Ripristinare il livello corretto 6.1
24 Fissaggio del motore Fissare 6.4
25 Fissaggio di ROBOX Fissare
4.2
4.3
26 Manca la contropressione Regolare la valvola di avviamento
Generare la contropressione
5.5.2
(2)
27 Membrana difettosa Sostituire
28 Vano membrana perde Rendere ermetico

(1) Vedi il manuale di riparazione
(2) Agire sullimpianto

23
ENGLISH (per litaliano vedi pagina 5)

1 ROBOX CHARACTERISTICS................................................................................................................ 24
1.1 General description.................................................................................................................................................................... 24
1.2 ROBOX ES.................................................................................................................................................... ........................... 24
1.3 ROBOX EL..................................................................................................................................................... ........................... 25

2 PERFORMANCE LIMITS AND WORKING CONDITIONS.................................................................. 26
2.1 Operating eEnvironment and conveyed gas ...............................................................................................................................26
2.2 Performance limits...................................................................................................................................................................... 26
2.3 Flow adjustment ......................................................................................................................................................................... 26
2.4 Noise level .................................................................................................................................................................................. 26
2.5 Forbidden uses........................................................................................................................................................................... 27
2.6 Residual risks............................................................................................................................................................................. 27

3 STORAGE................................................................................................................................................. 28
3.1 Handling..................................................................................................................................................................................... 28
3.2 Unpacking.................................................................................................................................................................................. 28
3.3 Preservation................................................................................................................................................................................ 28

4 INSTALLATION........................................................................................................................................ 29
4.1 Lay-out........................................................................................................................................................................................ 29
4.2 Pipe-lines.................................................................................................................................................................................... 29
4.3 On-site positioning...................................................................................................................................................................... 30
4.3.1 ROBOX ES...................................................................................................................................................................... 30
4.3.2 ROBOX EL ...................................................................................................................................................................... 30
4.4 Indoor installation........................................................................................................................................................................ 31
4.5 Outdoor installation..................................................................................................................................................................... 31
4.6 Electric connections................................................................................................................................................................... 31

5 OPERATION............................................................................................................................................. 32
5.1 Preliminary controls.................................................................................................................................................................... 32
5.2 First start up............................................................................................................................................................................... 32
5.3 Operation.................................................................................................................................................................................... 32
5.4 Relief valve setting...................................................................................................................................................................... 33
5.4.1 Pressure operation RVP valve......................................................................................................................................... 33
5.4.2 pressure operation VSM /P valve.................................................................................................................................... 33
5.4.3 Vacuum operation RVV valve.......................................................................................................................................... 33
5.5 Inlet silencer setting.................................................................................................................................................................... 34
5.5.1 ROBOX 1-2-3 .................................................................................................................................................................. 34
5.5.2 ROBOX 4-5...................................................................................................................................................................... 34
5.6 Stopping the ROBOX................................................................................................................................................................. 34
5.7 Black-out .................................................................................................................................................................................... 34

6 MAINTENANCE........................................................................................................................................ 35
6.1 Oil change.................................................................................................................................................................................. 35
6.1.1 Oil type and viscosity........................................................................................................................................................ 35
6.2 Filter replacement....................................................................................................................................................................... 36
6.2.1 ROBOX 1-2-3 .................................................................................................................................................................. 36
6.2.2 ROBOX 4-5...................................................................................................................................................................... 36
6.3 Check the V-belt tension ............................................................................................................................................................ 37
6.4 V-belt and/or pulleys replacement............................................................................................................................................... 37
6.5 Motor replacement...................................................................................................................................................................... 37
6.6 Blower maintenance................................................................................................................................................................... 38
6.6.1 Replacing the shaft seal................................................................................................................................................... 38
6.6.2 Cleaning of compression chamber................................................................................................................................... 38
6.6.3 Check of the gear clearance............................................................................................................................................. 38
6.6.4 Check of the rotors clearance........................................................................................................................................... 38
6.7 Spare parts................................................................................................................................................................................. 39
6.8 Demolition................................................................................................................................................................................... 39

7 TROUBLESHOOTING............................................................................................................................. 40

8 TECHNICAL TABLES ............................................................................................................................. 41
8.1 ROBOX ES 1-2-3 overall dimension.......................................................................................................................................... 41
8.2 ROBOX EL 1-2-3 overall dimension........................................................................................................................................... 41
8.3 ROBOX ES 4-5 overall dimension.............................................................................................................................................. 42
8.4 ROBOX EL 4-5 overall dimension.............................................................................................................................................. 42
8.5 Blower section............................................................................................................................................................................ 43
8.6 Clearances ................................................................................................................................................................................. 44

9 SPECIAL INFORMATION....................................................................................................................... 45
24
1 ROBOX CHARACTERISTICS

1.1 Name plate

1) ROBOX configuration
ES with sound hood
EL without sound hood

2) Blower size from 15 to 155

3) ROBOX size from 1 to 5

4) Operation
P pressure
V vacuum
C closet circuit

5) Accessories
VSM starting valve
SNT electronic monitorino unit SENTINEL

6) Execution 0001

Note : For the description of the materials see the catalog or contact ROBUSCHI.

7) Technical data

1.2 ROBOX ES
FRONT VIEW

Roof panel

SENTINEL (only SNT version)

Ventilation air exit opening

Roof key

Pressure gauge (standard version)

Clogging filter indicator (standard version)

Front panel key

Label : FORBIDDEN TO OPEN THE NOISE HOOD
DURING OPERATION

Front panel

Fig. 1

REAR VIEW

Air inlet opening

Inlet pipe (only /C and /V version)

Label ATTENTION HOT GAS DISCHARGE
(only /P and /C version)

Discharge valve opening (only /P and /C version)

Upper rear panel

Cables glands

Discharge pipe

Lower rear panel

Fig. 2
CE
Parma
Italy

Type ES 65 / 2 P - VSM

S/N 0405116 exec. 0001
m3/h 1000 kW 37
dp 500 n 1450
mbar RPM
(1)
(2)
(4)
(5)
(6) (7) (3)
25
1.3 ROBOX EL
/ P e /C VERSION

Silencer/Filter

Label WEAR ACUSTIC PROTECTIONS

Label READ THE OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS MANUAL

RVP relief valve (VSM ---/P valve VSM version)

Label ATTENTION HOT GAS DISCHARGE

Label ATTENTION HOT SURFACE

Check valve

Elastic connection
Fig. 3

/ V VERSION

Silencer/Filter

Label WEAR ACUSTIC PROTECTIONS

Suction elastic connection

Check valve


label ATTENTION HOT GAS DISCHARGE

RVV vacuum relief valve


Discharge elastic connection

Fig. 4

FRONT VIEW

RBS blower

Electric motor

V-belt guard

V-belt tension device


Label FORK LIFT HOISTING POINT


Discharge silencer
Fig. 5
26
2 PERFORMANCE LIMITS AND WORKING CONDITIONS

2.1 Operating environment and conveyed gas
ROBOX is suitable to operate only in dust free environment, with no-explosive or corrosive atmosphere and to convey only atmospheric Air or
Nitrogen.

Warning : ROBOX is not suitable to convey explosive, toxic or dangerous gases.

Warning : The suction of liquids damages the blower.

2.2 Performance limits

RPM P1
(mbar)
P2-P1
(mbar)
P2/P1 T1
(C)
T2
(C)
T2-T1
(C)
Size

MAX MIN
(1) MAX MIN MAX MAX MAX MIN MAX MAX
15 900 110
25
5000 1200 P0+50 P0-500
700
2 50 -25 130
90
35 1000 130
45 1000 110
46
4800 1000 P0+100 P0-500
700
2 50 -25 150
90
55 1000 130
65 1000 110
66
4800 900 P0+100 P0-500
700
2 50 -25 150
90
75 1000 130
85 1000 110
86
3800 700 P0+100 P0-500
700
2 50 -25
150
(2)
90
95 1000 130
105 1000 110
106
3000 550 P0+100 P0-500
700
2 50 -25
150
(2)
90
115 1000 130
125 1000 110
126
2400 450 P0+100 P0-500
700
2 50 -25
150
(2)
90
135 1000 130
145 1000 110
155
1800 350 P0+100 P0-500
700
2 50 -25
150
(2)
90
Po Atmospheric pressure
P1 Blower inlet absolute pressure T1 Blower inlet temperature
P2 Blower outlet absolute pressure T2 Blower outlet temperature
(1) Resonance phenomena in the plant are possible when speed of rotation is close to the minimum one
(2) 160 C for blowers /R-F

2.3 Flow adjustment
Change transmission ratio
Change the frequency supply of the motor
Use a two speed motor
Discharge excess flow and silence it

Warning : Do not use relief valve to discharge excess flow

Warning : Do not recirculate flow to ROBOX inlet.

Warning : Do not adjust flow by throttling inlet or outlet pipe.

2.4 Noise level
Noise level radiated from the surface of ROBOX is indicated at page 4 as Sound Pressure Level measured according to ISO 3476 at 1 m
distance from ROBOX and in free air (tolerance +/- 2 dB(A))

Warning : For high compression ratio and for high speed of rotation noise level of ROBOX EL (without
noise enclosure) can be higher than 85 dB(A).

Note : The noise radiated from the piping connected to ROBOX can be different from the value indicated
in this manual because it depends by the piping configuration.
27
2.5 Forbidden uses

Forbidden use Risk Measures
Operation in explosive atmosphere
Suction of explosive gases
Fire and explosion
Suction o toxic and dangerous gases
Environment pollution
Risk of operators health
Operation with shut off valve locked
Overheating
Fire
Blower stall and ejection of parts
Forbidden use
Suction of liquids Blower stall and ejection of parts
Install a liquid separator on the suction
nozzle of the blower
Operation with wrong direction of rotation Ejection of dangerous substances
Inform the qualified personnel charged
with ROBOX
Operation with speed higher than the
maximum one
Operation with speed lower than the
minimum one
Use suitable limits to the motor speed when
it is supplied with frequency converter
Operation with pressure P1
higher than the maximum one
Ejection of dangerous substances
Operation with pressure P1
lower than the minimum one
Operation with pressure P2-P1
Inform the qualified personnel charged
with ROBOX
Operation with pressure ratio P2/P1
higher than 2
Operation with temperature T1
Overheating
Fire
lower than the minimum one
Overheating
Fire
Operation with temperature T2-T1
Use a safety temperature switch on the
discharge gas set at 150C

2.6 Residual risks

Residual risk
Hazard
ROBOX ES ROBOX EL
Cutting, severing, drawing in,
trapping, entanglement, friction
and abrasion
None whit sound hood closed
With open sound hood see ROBOX EL
Do not approach the transmission guard and SPF
nozzle with no suitable clothes
Advice in the manual
Fluid ejection
Discharge of relief valve
Label C.9 on the sound hood
Discharge of relief valve
Label C.9 on the valve body
Ejection of parts
None whit sound hood closed
Overcoming the operation limits (par. 2.2) can
cause the risk of ejection of parts
Loss of stability None
Electric installation
Electrostatic phenomena
External influences on electrical
equipment
None only for the principal motor supplied directly
by ROBUSCHI and for the fan motor
None only for the principal motor supplied directly
by ROBUSCHI
Thermal safety
None with sound hood closed
The surface of the blower and of the discharge
silencer can be higher than 70 C
Label C.7 on the surfaces
Noise
None with sound hood closed
The sound pressure level can be higher than 85
dB(A)
Wear the noise protection devices
Label C.2 on the inlet filter
Suction of liquids Forbidden use can cause the risk of suction of liquids
Gas Forbidden use can cause the risk of suction of dangerous gases
Fire and explosion
Overcoming the operation limits (par. 2.2) can cause the risk of fire and explosion
Operation with shut-off valve locked can produce the risk of fire
The not correct maintenance can cause the overheating and the risk of fire
Failure of energy supply None
28
3 STORAGE

3.1 Handling

Warning : Do not remove the arrangement to lock motor brackets during handling.

To handle the ROBOX use the wooden pallet as indicated in the figure 6 below, the weight is indicated at page41

Fig. 6
Warning : If it is not possibile to use the fork lift contact ROBUSCHI

Transport ROBOX in a closed mean protected against the atmospheric agents, in case of sea transport protect ROBOX by the sacco barrier
with igroscopic salts
During transport fix the pallet of the pump to the base of transport devices using belts in order to avoid any possible damage to the pump

Warning : Remove any free body from the transport device in order to avoid any possible

3.2 Unpacking
Check always the correspondence between documents and materials and thepresence of eventual damages due to transport.

Warning : Please refer to ROBUSCHI any damage to evaluate the safety conditions of ROBOX

Warning : Remove with care the packing and clearing all the dangerous elements (nails, splits, etc)

3.3 Preservation
Keep ROBOX in a place protected against solar radiation and at following climatic conditions :

Temperature from 20 C to 40 C
Relative humidity from 10 % to 80 %

If different climatic conditions are forecast contact ROBUSCHI.

Warning : If, during storage, the climatic conditions overcame the indicated limits check the pump
clearances, the coupling alignment and the screws tightening.

Warning : Do not preserve ROBOX in atmosphere with any substance also feebly corrosive

Warning : Preserve ROBOX onto ground without any weight onto it

Renew preservation every 6 months or more frequently if humidity is higher than 80% using anti -rust oil

Anti-rust oil
Parts
AGIP ESSO SHELL
Shiny external parts Rustia 27 Rust Ban 397 V-Produkt 9703
Rotors Casing Bearing
Gear
Rustia C 100 Antiruggine MZ 110 Ensis Motor Oil 20

Warning : Use anti-rust oil with fire point over 200 C

Warning : Dispose the used anti-rust oil in accordance with local regulations
29

4 INSTALLATION

4.1 Lay out
The dimension and weight of ROBOX are ndicated in the drawings at page 41, basement has to be flat and level (max 0.5 mm on 1 m), free
from vibrations and suitable to support the weight of unit, no dynamic loads are involved.

Note : To fix ROBOX on metallic frame contact ROBUSCHI or an authorised distributor.

Figure 7 shown the recommended lay-out for one or more ROBOX inside a chamber and the dimensions recommended for installation and
for maintenance of ROBOX.
It is possible to stay in the maintenance area during ROBOX operation.

Warning : Do not stay in the discharge area of relief valve discharge during ROBOX operation

The doors or the openings of the ROBOX room must be suitable for the passage of the fork lift.

Note : The dimension L must allow the fork lift operation during the on-site positioning of ROBOX.

Collettore cumune

Valvola di intercettazione

ROBOX ROBOX ROBOX
Area di manutenzione

1000
1000

1000
200 300 L

I E I E I E

Armadi elettrici Carrello elevatore
Fig. 7

4.2 Pipe-lines
Provide terminal pipes of the plant following the dimensions indicated in the drawings at page 41.
Install always a shut-off valve on the terminal pipes of the plant to insulate ROBOX from the plant during service operations.

L 20 30 mm
Insert the elastic connectors and relevant hose clamps on the terminal pipes as indicated in figure 9.1.
The straight terminal of the pipe must be long L as per table below

ROBOX 1 2 3 4 5
L 200 200 230 230 300

Position ROBOX terminal pipe at the distance indicated in Fig. 8.1

Fig. 8.1

Position the elastic connectors in the final position and fasten the hose clamps Fig. 8.2

Warning : Support pipe-line terminal near elastic connection

The diameter of the discharge manifold must be chosen in order to obtain an average gas
speed < 30 m/s
Fig. 8.2
30

4.3 On-site

4.3.1 ROBOX ES
For the sizes ROBOX ES 1-2-3-4 remove the front panel or the front
panels of the noise hood using the key
Lift ROBOX ES using a fork lift and respect strictly the lenght L indicated
in the table L

ROBOX 1 2 3 4
L 650 900 1200 1800

Position ROBOX ES as indicated at paragraphe 4.2

Fig.9.1

It is possible to fix ROBOX ES on the floor
Remove also the rear panel
Drill the floor as indicated in Fig. 9.2
Fix the feet by expansion bolts

Floor drilling
ROBOX
Expansion
anchor bolt
D
mm
L
mm
1 8 x 71 8 65
2 12 x 112 12 105
3 12 x 112 12 105
4 12 x 112 12 105

Fig. 9.2

For the size 5 the noise hood is deliverd separately and then install ROBOX following the instructions of the paragraph 4.3.2 and the specific
instructions attached to the hood

4.3.2 ROBOX EL
Transport ROBOX EL on site of installation as indicated in par.
3.2.2.
Position ROBOX EL as indicated at par. 4.5 and fix the shock
insulating feet by means of expansion anchor bolt (Fig. 7)

Floor drilling
R
O
B
O
X

Expansion
anchor bolt
Q.ty
D
mm
L
mm
1 8 x 71 8 8 65
2 8 x 71 8 8 65
3 8 x 71 8 8 65
4 12 x 12 8 12 105
5 12 x 12 16 12 105

Fig. 9.3
D
L
L
D
31

4.4 Indoor installation
Provide a correct ventilation of the blower room, in the figure 11 below is indicated the flow schema

Inlet silencer Outlet silencer

Fan

ROBOX 2000

Qv

1000 Qa Qv

Fig. 10

Qa ( m3/h ) total flow rate sucked by the blowers is the sum of the suction flows of the blowers operating simultaneously
Qv ( m3/h ) total ventilation flow rate is calculated from the sum No ( kW ) of the motors operating simultaneously in the local following this
relation :

Qv = 30 x No

4.5 Outdoor installation

CLIMATIC CONDITIONS MEASURES
Strong sunlight Protect with a canopy
Rainy / Snow Protect with a canopy
Temperature < - 20 C Use only ROBOX ES and heat inside air before any start-up
Wind > 20 m/s Protect with windbreak walls
Hoarfrost Heat inlet silencer
Dust / Sand storm Special filter with preseparator

Note : For different climatic conditions contact ROBUSCHI ( or an authorised distributor )

4.6 Electrical connections
Electric connections must be set up by authorised specialists in compliance with regulations applying to the place of installation and in
accordance with the requirements of the Body supplying electrical energy.

Note : Robuschi & C. S.p.A. refuses all responsibility for electric connections not complying with the
law in force.

Check on the principal motor plate and on the fan motor plate : Voltage, Absorbed current, Frequency, number of phases.
Wiring diagram accompanies the terminal board of the motors , if the diagram has not been supplied request it from the motor manufacturers.
Use suitable electric cables depending on the nominal current of the electric motor.
Keep the electric cables away from heat sources and/or pointed edges
Wire the fan motor to switch-on and switch-off together with blower motor

Note : If the ambient temperature is above 30 C delay the switch-off of fan motor of 15 minutes.

Protect the motor by means of automatic switch set at the rated value of the motor current .
Install a local control panel with a general switch I (see Fig. 7) with a key in order to lock it in open position during service operations and an
emergency push-button E (see Fig. 7)

Warning : The emergency push-button E must be easily reached by the operator.

Protect the system by means a suitable grounding device, use the terminal PE in the drawings at page 41

Warning : Blower service must be carried out after disconnecting the electrical supply.
32
5 OPERATION

5.1 Preliminary controls
ROBOX ES Remove the transport safety devices of the elastic feet (see
Fig. 12) and conserve them for future handling.

Warning : Check the correspondence between the
process data and the ROBOX characteristic
indicated in the nameplate.

Warning : Check the correct position of the V-belt
and their correct tensioning (see paragrph 6.3)

Warning : Fill both blower sumps with lubricating
oil (par. 6.1), grease the motor bearings

Warning : Check the efficiency of safety devices.
Fig. 11

5.2 First start up

Warning : The personnel must wear the noise protection devices.

Open the shut-off valve on the discharge pipe or on the suction pipe.
ROBOX ES remove the front panel of noise hood and remove the V-belt (see paragraph 6.4)
ROBOX EL remove the motor safety transport device (see paragraph 6.4)
Check the direction of rotation of the motor by means of a short current pulse, it must be counter clockwise viewed from the shaft.

Warning : ROBOX EL do not rotate the blower in the wrong direction for more than a few revolutions.

ROBOX ES Reinstall the V-belts (see paragraph 6.4) and remove the motor transport safety device

Nota : Conserve the motor safty transoprt device for the following service operations (see par. 6.4)

Check the direction of rotation of the fan, it must be counterclockwise seen from the motor.
Open the valve of the cooling circuit (only for -RF)

Start-up ROBOX.

Check the operation of the relief valve (see paragraph 5.6) and the operation of the starting valve (only for VSM)
Increase the operating pressure gradually until the rated value is reached.
During the first 8 hours of operation check that there are no strange noises, vibrations, oil leakage or overheating, if such problems are found
stop ROBOX immediately and contact ROBUSCHI or an authorized distributor.

5.3 Operation

FREQUENCY
CHECK PARAMETER
h G S M
NOTE
Pressure 1
Temperature 1
Absorbed power 1
Cooling liquid flow 1
VISUAL
Noise 1
ROBOX in
operation
Oil level 500
Oil Leakage 1
Viscosity 500
LUBRIFICATION
Oil change 4000 6
ROBOX out of
operation
Vacuum 1 < 35 mbar
FILTER
Clogging 2 > 60 mbar
Wear 2000
Belt tension 2000 TRANSMISSION
Belt change 15000 24
ROBOX out of
operation
h operation hours S weeks
G days M months
Note : in case of double indication follow the most limiting one for the application
33
5.4 Relief valve setting
ROBOX ES Remove the rear panel of the noise hood and the valve protection

Warning : Keep to prescribed safety rules and wear protection glasses and safety gloves

Warning : When setting the valve dont introduce fingers or any other element between turns of the
spring because can produce injuries or it can hinder proper operation of the valve.

Warning : Do not approach opening of SPF silencer with clothes or other elements which could be
sucked inside the pipe.

5.4.1 Pressure operation RVP valve
Load completely the spring by screwing down the nut 219 219
Throttle outlet flow of ROBOX to reach the rated outlet pressure.
Unscrew the nut 219 until the valve begins to open.
Screw the nut 219 one turn and lock it with the lock nut.
ROBOX ES position the valve protection and the rear panel

Warning : Air coming from the valve is hot and can hurt.

Fig. 12

5.4.2 Pressure operation VSM /P valve
Set the valve closing time at 10-15 seconds by the nut 85 219 85 204
screwing the nut the time reduces unscrewing the nut the time increases.

Note : The valve close only with a static
counterpressure of 300 mbar

After the closing time setting lock the nut 85 by the nut 204
Load completely the spring by screwing down the nut 219
Throttle outlet flow of ROBOX to reach the rated outlet pressure.
Unscrew the nut 219 until the valve begins to open.

Warning : Air coming from the valve is hot and
can hurt.

Screw the nut 219 one turn and lock it with the lock nut .
Fig. 13

5.4.3 Vacuum operation RVV valve
Unloose nut 219 and load completely the spring by screwing the rod.
Throttle inlet flow of ROBOX to reach the rated inlet pressure.
Unscrew the rod until valve begins to open.

Warning : Do not approach opening of the valve
with clothes or other elements which could be
sucked inside the pipe.

Screw the rod one turn and lock it with the lock nut 219. 219

STELO

Fig. 15
34
5.5 Inlet silencer setting
The suction silencer is set before delivery for the working conditions confirmed in order acknowledgement.
Following setting operations are requested only by different working conditions.

Note : In case of variable speed operation set the silencers for the lowest speed.

5.5.1 ROBOX 1-2-3
ROBOX ES Open the roof panel using the key
Unloose cover knob and remove silencer cover
Position adjustable baffle at the new speed referring to the
scale inside silencer.
Position silencer cover .
ROBOX ES Close the roof panel

Meter scale

Adjustable baffle

Fig. 15

5.5.2 ROBOX 4-5
ROBOX ES Open the doors of the noise hood
Remove the rear panel of silencer POS 312
Unloose locking screw on adjustable bafflePOS 315.
Position the adjustable baffle at the new speed referring to
the scale inside silencer (see the notch in the detail).
Fix the adjustable bafflescrewing the nut POS 315.
Position the rear panel POS 312.
ROBOX ES Close the doors of the noise hood

Meter scale

Fig. 16

5.6 Stopping the ROBOX
Remove, if possible, the differential pressure.
Stop the electric supply and close the cooling water circuit ( only for -RF)

Warning : Check that the deceleration of ROBOX is even and without vibrations.

5.7 Black-out
In case of black out ROBOX is not damaged and not induces any risk of explosion.

Warning : During the black-out it is forbidden to carry out the any staff service on ROBOX

Warning : Follow the starting procedure at paragraph 5.2 when the electric supply is restored.
35
6 MAINTENANCE

Stop ROBOX and auxiliary system as indicated in the paragraph 5.4.
Insulate ROBOX from the plant and restore the atmospheric pressure into it

Warning : The gas contained in the plant may be hot, toxic and irritant

Warning : Disconnect the electric supply, lock the general switch in open position with the key and
conserve it during service operation

Warning : Wait until ROBOX returns at ambient temperature (< 40 C)

Warning : Keep to prescribed safety rules and wear protection glasses and safety gloves

6.1 Oil change
The first oil change must be performed after 500 working hours, further
changes as per table in the paragraph 5.3

Drain the lubricating oil
ROBOX ES Drain oil using the hoses as indicated in the figure

Warning : Dispose the used oil in accordance with
local regulations

Position the hoses on the hood wall following the label indications.

Fig. 17

Fill both the oil sumps of the blower with the quantit of oil as indicate in
the table below
ROBOX ES Use the hoses as indicated in fig. 18

Nota : Check that the oil level reach the half of the
level plug as indicated in the figure 18

Fig. 18

6.1.1 Oil type and viscosity
Mineral oil for general use, mineral oil for hydrostatic circuits, mineral oil for internal combustion engines or polialfaolefine synthetic oil (PAO).

Warning : Do not use mineral oil with EP additives or silicon or diester base synthetic oils.

Use
Oil type Viscosity
T ambient T2 Tolio Note
Mineral
Synthetic PAO
100 < 0 < 90 < 50
The pour point must be lower than the minimum
ambient temperature
Mineral 150 < 35 < 110 < 80
Mineral 220 < 50 < 130 < 110 Installation in sound proof enclosure
Synthetic PAO 220 > 50 > 130 > 110
Oil quantity ( lt )
Size
Gear side Drive side Total
15-25 0,40 0,32 0,72
35-45-46 0,75 0,40 1,15
55-65-66 1,20 0,60 1,80
75-85-86 2,00 0,90 2,90
95-105-106 3,50 1,60 5,10
115-125-126 4,80 2,80 7,60
135-145-155 10,50 6,00 16,50
36
6.2 Filter replacement

6.2.1 ROBOX 1-2-3
ROBOX ES Open the roof panel
Unloose cover knob of inlet silencer and remove the cover
Replace the filter element
Position the silencer cover and tighten cover knob
ROBOX ES Close the roof panel

Filter element

Fig. 19

6.2.2 ROBOX 4-5
ROBOX ES Open the doors of the noise hood
Remove the rear panel of the silencer POS 312
Unloose locking screw of the adjustable baffle POS 315
Position the adjustable baffle in the centre of side window of silencer as
given in Fig. 20.1.

Fig. 20.1

Fix the new filter element on to the old filter element like shown in the Fig.
20.2.
Remove the old filter element (dashed in the Fig. 20.2) following the arrow
of the Fig. 20.2
Fix the edges of the new filter element
Position the adjustable baffle as iper paragraph 6.2.2
Fix the nut POS 315
Position the rear panel of the silencr POS 312
ROBOX ES Close the doors of the noise hood

Fig. 20.2

Old filter element

37
6.3 Check the V-belts tension
Check the V-belt tension following the parameters in the table, eventually correct it by the spring of the tightening device
e = I x E / 100

Warning : Excssive V-belt tension could damage the blower and the motor

Check the V-belts alignement by using a scale as indicated in Fig.21

V-belt

section
Force F

[ daN ]
Diameter
Dp

[ mm ]
Deflection
E

[ mm ]
SPZ
XPZ
2.5
95 125
> 132
1.45
1.30
SPA
XPA
5.0
100 140
150 200
> 224
2.30
2.10
2.00
SPB
XPB
7.5
160 224
236 355
> 375
1.55
1.20
1.10
SPC
XPC
12.5
250 355
375 - 560
1.80
1.60
Fig. 21

6.4 V-belt and/or pulleys replacement
ROBOX ES Remove the front panel of the noise hood.
ROBOX EL Remove the V-belt guard unscrewing the black dowel
with a key size 17 (see Fig. 22)

Fig. 22

Release completely the spring of the tightening deviceunscrewing
the nuts 51 (see figure 23)
Fit the safety transport plates 54 as indicate in figure 23
Lock the lower safety transport plate with the lower nut 61
Unscrew the upper nut 61 till to lift the motor enough for V-belts
replacement
Secure the motor in this position by means of a wooden support Fig. 23
Replace the V-belts
Remove the wooden support
Remove the safety transport plates 54 and lock the nuts 61
Tighten the V-belts following the procedure of the paragraph 6.3
ROBOX ES position the front panel of the noise hood
ROBOX EL position the V-belt guard
51

54

61

61

54
6.5 Motor replacement
Disassemble theV-belts as described in par. 6.4
Disassemble the motor pulley following the manufacturer instructions
nscrew fixing bolts of the motor
Replace the electric motor
Fix the new motor on motor brackets, check its alignment with motor brackets pivot.
Reassemble the motor pulley
Align the pulley by moving the pulley along the the motor shaft
Reassemble the V-belt transmission as describe in par. 6.4
e
F

I
D
p
17
38
6.6 Blower maintenance
Disassembly the blower within the guarantee period results in the cancellation of the guarantee.
Disassembly, repair work and reassembling of the blower must be carried out only by qualified personnel and with the aid of suitable
equipment and relevant manual.
For the identification of the parts see section at page 42 of the manual.

Warning : Before any service operation stop ROBOX as indicated at paragraph 6.

Note : Guarantee does not cover damages caused by operations carried out incorrectly .

6.6.1 Replacing the shaft seal
Disassemble the inlet filter
Disassemble the V-belts as indicated in the paragraph 6.3

Warning : Do not hammer the shaft coupling or pulley.

Empty the cooling circuit (only /RF) and disconnect the relevant piping
Empty the lubricating oil out of the sump 12A

Warning : Dispose the used oil in accordance with local regulations.

Remove the key 30 and disassemble the sump 12A
Replace the seal ring pos. 43, clean the housing of seal ring 43 and eventually replace the ring 37.

Warning : Do not damage the lip of the ring 43 during this operation.

Reassemble the sump 12A onto the cover 5A using a new gasket 50 in between
Refill the sump 12A with new lubricating oil as per paragraph 6.1.
Reassemble the V-belts as indicated in the paragraph 6.4

6.6.2 Cleaning of compression chamber
Clean the internal surface of the chamber and the surface of the rotors from any deposits and rust by using solvents and a scraper

Warning : Keep to prescribed safety rules when using solvents and wear protection glasses and safety
gloves

Note : Do not damage the internal surface of the chamber and the surface of the rotors with the scraper.

6.6.3 Check of the gear clearance
Empty the lubricating oil out of the sump 12B

Warning : Dispose the used oil in accordance with local regulations

Disassemble the gear sump 12B
Measure the clearance between the gear teeth according to the attached table 264468 . In order to do this secure one of the gears and rotate
the other until there is no contact.
Reassemble the sump 12B using a new gasket 50 in between
Refill the sump 12B with new lubricating oil as shown in paragraph 6.1
Send the table 264468 filled out with measured clearances to ROBUSCHI & C. S.p.A. (or any authorised distributor) for their review.

6.6.4 Check of the rotors clearance
Disassemble the inlet silencer
Insert gauges into the inlet opening to measure the clearance of the rotors in various positions, turning the drive shaft by hand according to
the attached table 264468.

Warning : During this operation pay attention to rotors which can cause the squeezing of the finger and
hands.

Reassemble the inlet silencer
Send the table filled out with measured clearance to ROBUSCHI & C. S.p.A. (or any authorised distributor) for their review.
39
6.7 Spare parts
In the table below are indicated the recommended spare parts for normal use of ROBOX according forecast timing.
For the spare parts of blower spare parts refer to section at page 42.

Operation
Parts Pos. Description
Start-up 2 year 5 year 10 year
SP 306 Filter element 1 2 5 10
SL 998 V-belt (set) 1 1 2 4
SL 995 - 997 Transmission pulleys 1 1 2 4
BAS 66 - 74 Elastic connectors for /P (set) 1 1 2 4
Elastic connectors for /V (set) 1 1 2 4 BAS 66 74
BAS 102-109 Elastic connectors for /C (set) 1 1 2 4
BAS 65 Shutter of the check valve 1 1 2 4
4523 Starting valve gasket 1 1 2 4
ROBOX
4521 Starting valve diaphragm 1 1 2 4
11 A - B Gears (couple) - - - 1
16 A - B Lubricating disc (couple) - - - 1
20 Sealing chamber (set) - - - 1
23 A - B - C Oil splash disc (set) - 2 4 8
25 Sealing spacers (set) - 1 2 4
26 Nut (couple) - - 1 2
27 A Nut (RBS 115 155) - - 1 2
31 - 32 - 33 Bearing (set) - - 1 2
37 Shaft sleeve 1 2 4 8
43 Seal ring 1 2 4 8
45 Piston rings (RBS 35155) (set) - 1 2 4
50 Gaskets (set) 1 2 4 8
63 - 63 A Compensating ring (set) - 1 2 4
75 - 76 - 77 Oil draining plugs (set) 1 2 4 8
Blower
78 Oil level plugs (set) 1 2 4 8

In case of order please quoting always Type, serial number and year of construction of ROBOX (these elements are indicated in front page of
this manual) and relevant position of spare part indicated in the table above.

Warning : Do not use non-original spare parts or accessories .

Note : ROBUSCHI will not be liable for any damage, breakdown, injury deriving from the use of non-
original spare parts or accessories

6.8 ROBOX demolition
In case of demolition of ROBOX verify the eventual presence of explosive, toxic or dangerous substances and dispose them in accordance
with local regulations.

Warning : Dispose the used oil in accordance with local regulations.

Warning : Dispose the filter element in accordance with local regulations.

Demolish ROBOX in such a way to make impossible to use again ROBOX as complete unit, or to use again one or several parts of ROBOX.

Note : Destroy the name-plate of ROBOX and any other document
40
7 TROUBLESHOOTING

Operating problems List of causes
The motor does not start up and there is no noise 1-3-4
The motor does not start up, but humming noise heard 2-3-4-5-5-6-7
Automatic cut off just after start up 3-4-5-6-7-13-14-15-16
Inlet pressure different from the rated value 13-14
Capacity zero

WARNING : STOP ROBOX IMMEDIATELY
13-14-17-18-20-21-22
Outlet pressure different from the rated value

5-8-13-14-15-16
Outlet temperature different from the rated value

15-19-20-22-23
High absorbed power 3-5-6-7-15-16-17-18-19-20-21-22
Oil and/or liquid leakage 5-23
High oil temperature 5-6-7-9-24-25
Unusual noises and/or vibrations

5-6-7-9-24-25
Relief valve does not close 15-16-17-18-19-20
Start valve does not close 26-27-28

Pos Cause Solution Rif.
1 At least two of electric connections have been cut off Check the fuses, terminal boards and connection cables and
if required replace them
4.6
2 One electric connection has been cut off See point 1 4.6
3 Incorrect electric connection Check electric system 4.6
4 Faulty motor Check the electric motor 4.6
5 Rotors making contact Check the internal clearances of the rotors and of the gears 6.6.4
6 Scale deposits in the compression chamber Clean the compression chamber and the rotors 6.6.2
7 Intake of foreign particles Remove the foreign particles and check the clearances 6.6.4
8 Rotors are worn Check the internal clearances 6.6.4
9 Bearing are worn Replace the bearings (1)
10 Gaskets are worn Replace the gaskets (1)
11 Drive shaft seal is worn Replace the seal 6.6.1
12 Oil level plugs are broken Replace the oil levels
13 Filter clogged Clean or replace it 6.2
14 Inlet piping is clogged (only /C) Check piping and remove obstruction (2)
15 Outlet piping is clogged Check piping and remove obstruction (2)
16 Shut-off valve closed Open it (2)
17 Check valve positioned in wrong direction Correct it (2)
18 Wrong relief valve setting Reset it 5.5
19 Small pipe line section Increase it 4.1
20 Wrong transmission ratio Correct it 6.4
21 V-belts drive Check V-belts tension / replace V-belts 6.3
22 Wrong direction of rotation Correct it 5.2
23 High oil level Correct it 6.1
24 Motor securing Fix it 6.4
25 ROBOX securing Fix it
4.2
4.3
26 No counterpressure Adjust the starting valve
Generate the counterpressure
5.6
(2)
27 Faulty diaphragm Replace it
28 Diaphragm chamber leaking Make it air tight

(1) See the repair manual
(2) Check the plant

41
8 TABELLE TECNICHE 8 TECHNICAL TABLES

8.1 Ingombro ROBOX ES 1-2-3 8.1 ROBOX ES 1-2-3 overall dimensions

8.2 Ingombro ROBOX EL 1-2-3 8.2 ROBOX EL 1-2-3 overall dimensions

960 1164 170 1342 295 1150 150 168.3 245 1560 1654 1600
ROBOX
1
2
3
C
815
1150
D
860
1207
E
760
1155
I1
172
196
M
76.1
114.3
DN
65
100
H1
562
840
X1 X2 Y1 Y2
135
212 989 100 1019
634 96 697
Massa
460
147
Weight
(kg)
evolution
D1
1400
2000
2283
144
Y3
119
116
K1
/C /V
467
722
961
457
707
946
Y
3
Y
2
Y
3
E
D
I
1
X2
D
1

m
a
x
X1
Y
1
C
D
N
M
H1
K
1
42
8.3 Ingombro ROBOX ES 4-5 8.3 ROBOX ES 4-5 overall dimensions

8.4 Ingombro ROBOX EL 4-5 8.4 ROBOX EL 4-5 overall dimensions

43
8.5 Sezione del soffiatore 8.5 Blower section

27A 24
1 Oil draining plug (only RBS 35-66) 75 1 Tappo scarico olio (solo RBS 35-66) 75
75 10B
78
76
16A
11A
12B
11B
22 304 10B 69 45 2B 1 20 5A 50 23A
32
17
27B
30
37
43
31 12A 68A 64 23C 2C 68B 25 10A 23B
5B
35
33
16B
26
77 25
68 63A
22A
10A
69 1 Spina di centratura (solo RBS 75-106) 69 1 Centering pin (only RBS 75-106)
Spina di centratura (solo RBS 75-106) 2 68 68 2 Centering pin (only RBS 75-106)
4 Piastrina di regolazione 304
17 Disco bloccaggio cuscinetto 1
2
2
Piede SX
Piede DX
10B
10A
37 Anello JR 1
Cuscinetto
Cuscinetto
16 45
Guarnizione 2 50
Spina di centratura (RBS 35-66 N 4)
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
2
4
1
4
2
2
1
1
2
2
1
76
43
35
33
32
31
30
27B
26
25
23C
20
16A-16B
12A-12B
11B
11A
5A-5B
2B-2C
1
DENOMINAZIONE POS.
PEZZI
N
2
Corpo
Albero+Rotore
Fianco
Ingranaggio conduttore
Ingranaggio condotto
Carter
Disco di lubrificazione
Camera di tenuta
Disco paraolio
Distanziale di tenuta (solo RBS 35-155)
Ghiera
Vite bloccaggio cuscinetto
Linguetta
Cuscinetto
Coperchio cuscinetto
Anello di tenuta
Segmento (solo RBS 35-155)
Anello di compensazione
Tappo carico olio
2
1
22
23A
Distanziale ingranaggio (solo RBS 35-155)
Disco paraolio
68B 1
2 68A
Spina di centratura (RBS 35-66 N 2)
63A 6
Disco paraolio 23B 2
77 4 Tappo scarico olio (RBS 35-66 N 3)
78 4 Tappo livello olio
1 Anello di compensazione 64
PART DESCRIPTION
N.
PART.
PARTS
No OF
304
17
10B
10A
37
45
50
76
43
35
33
32
31
30
27B
26
23C
20
11B
11A
5A-5B
2B-2C
1
22
23A
68B
68A
63A
23B
77
78
64
4
1
2
2
1
16
2
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
2
4
1
4
2
2
1
1
2
2
1
2
2
1
1
2
6
2
4
4
1
25
16A-16B
12A-12B
Adjustment plate
Bearing lock disc
Left foot
Right foot
Shaft sleeve
Rolling bearing
Rolling bearing
Gasket
Centering pin (RBS 35-66 No 4)
Casing
Shaft+Rotor
Cover
Driving gear
Driven gear
Sump
Lubricating disc
Sealing chamber
Oil splash disc
Sealing spacer (only RBS 35-155)
Gear locking nut
Bearing locking screw
Key
Rolling bearing
Bearing cover
Seal ring
Flexible piston ring (only RBS 35-155)
Compensating ring
Oil filling plug
Gear spacer (only RBS 35-155)
Oil splash disc
Centering pin (RBS 35-66 No 2)
Oil splash disc
Oil draining plug (RBS 35-66 No 3)
Oil level plug
Compensating ring
RBS 115-155
24 Distanziale disco lubrif. (solo RBS 115-155) 1 24 Disc spacer (only RBS 115-155) 1
27A Gear locking nut (only RBS 115-155) 1 1 Ghiera (solo RBS 115-155) 27A
44
8.6 Rilievo giochi 8.6 Clearances

Note
Notes
Firma
Signature
Data
Date
Matricola
Serial N.
Soffiatore
Blower
Giochi espressi in 1/100 mm - Tolerances in 1/100 mm
Gioco cuscinetti
Bearing tolerances
TABELLA RILIEVO DEI GIOCHI
TABLE FOR TOLERANCES CHECK
Tabella N - Table N.
264468
Albero conduttore
Drive shaft
Albero condotto
Driven shaft
Lato comando
Drive side
Lato ingranaggio
Gear side
Radiale
Radial
Assiale - Axial
Ruotare l'albero conduttore in senso antiorario-Rotate drive shaft counterclockwise
Gioco tra i fianchi dei denti dell'ingranaggio
Tolerances between gear sides
1 2
3
5
4
6
45
9 INFORMAZIONI PARTICOLARI

9 SPECIAL INFORMATION

Nessuna informazione No information

46

ROBUSCHI & C. S.p.A. via S. LEONARDO, 71/A 43100 PARMA ITALY
Italia: Tel. +39.0521.274911 Export: Tel. +39.0521.274991 Fax +39.0521.771242
Filiale di Milano, Milan branch, via XXV Aprile,2 20097 S.Donato (Milano) Tel. +39.02.51628065 Fax +39.02.51620224
Filiale di Padova piazza Zanellato,25 35129 Padova Tel. +39.049.8078260 Fax +39.049.8078183
E-mail: robuschi@robuschi.it - internet: http://www.robuschi.com

Copyright by InterApp IA Motion 0607
Keeps your valve in motion
IA m tion
InterApp AG Tel. +41 (0)41 798 22 33

Grundstrasse 24 Fax +41 (0)41 798 22 34
CH-6343 Rotkreuz http://www.interapp.net
Switzerland info@ch.interapp.net
Pneumatic actuators
IA Motion 2/8 (0607) Copyright by InterApp
IA m tion
InterApp AG Tel. +41 (0)41 798 22 33

Pneumatic actuators
Characteristics:
IA Motion Rack and Pinion pneumatic actuators
Function
IA...D double acting IA...S single acting
Nominal torque 20 3110 Nm (double acting at 6 bar air supply)
Supply pressure 2 8 bar
Supply fuids Filtered air or neutral gas, lubricated or dry, or light hydraulic oil
Working temperature -20C 80C
Connection
Mounting face for valves according to EN ISO 5211,
for solenoid valves and accessories to VDI/VDE 3845 (NAMUR)
Lubrication Factory lubricated for the life of actuator under normal working conditions
ATEX
Actuator IP67, standard in compliance with ATEX 94/9/EC
Design properties:
Compact design with identical body and end caps for double acting and spring return types, allowing feld conversion by adding or removing
spring cartridges.
Body made of extruded aluminium with internal and external ALODUR
corrosion protection, with honed cylinder surface for a higher cycle life
and lower coeffcient of friction.
Symmetric rack and pinion design for high-cycle life and fast operation. Reverse rotation can be accomplished by inverting the pistons.
Two independent external travel stop adjustments, enabling an easy and precise adjustment of 4 for both positions, in order to get a precise
valve positioning.
One-piece blow-out proof, electroless nickel-plated drive shaft with bearing guided one-piece pinion for improved safety and max. cycle life.
Fully machined piston teeth for accurate low backlash rack and pinion engagement and maximum effciency.
Pistons standard anodised for higher life.
Mounting fange for valve with multiple circles and square or star, according to EN ISO 5211.
Squared shaft end with metallic NAMUR slot to ft and drive without mechanical wear accessories such as position indicators and positioners.
Multifunction position indicator, adaptable to all kinds of limit and proximity switches.
Preloaded spring cartridges with coated springs for simple versatile range and corrosion resistance. Spring return actuator can be disassembled
without danger on feld.
High quality bearings and seals for low friction, high cycle life and a wide operating temperature range.
End caps, chromatized and Polyester
coated (RAL 5021).

All used screws in stainless steel for life time corrosion resistance.
Full compliance to the latest specifcations: EN ISO 5211, VDI/VDE 3845, NAMUR and ATEX (Directive 94/9/CE).
Every single actuator is tested and provided with a unique serial number for traceability.
The rack and pinion pneumatic actuator IA Motion combines innovative design features with the latest technology, materials and
protection coatings available, resulting in one of the highest grade pneumatic actuators on the market.
High quality actuator designed for high-cycle
life.
Multiple mounting circles and shafts to ft
most quarter turn valves.
Easy conversion from double to single acting
and vice versa.
Lower inventory with greater fexibility.
Two external travel stop adjustments for
easy valve positioning.
Extensive size range to ft the requested
torque at lowest costs.
Full compliance to latest worldwide
standards.
Your benefts:
Copyright by InterApp IA Motion 3/8 (0607)
IA m tion

IA200 D . F05-F07 14

InterApp AG Tel. +41 (0)41 798 22 33
Modifcations without notice
Pneumatic actuators
IAD... double acting actuator
Air supplied to port moves pistons
toward endposition.
(-> 90 counterclockwise rotation).
IAS... single acting actuator
Air supplied to port moves pistons toward
endposition, compressing springs:
(-> 90 counterclockwise rotation).
Function:
Air supplied to port moves pistons
toward center position.
(-> 90 clockwise rotation).
Air failure allows springs to move pistons
toward center position:
(-> 90 clockwise rotation).
Code key:
Actuator size IA050 - IA700
Function
D Double acting
S10 Single acting + number of springs
Mounting face for valve F03 - F16 According to EN ISO5211
Shaft connection [mm] Dimension of shaft connection

Parts Materials
Body
Extruded aluminium EN AW-6063,
ALODUR
corrosion protected
End caps
EN AC-46000, chromatized and
Polyester
coated (RAL 5021)

Pistons EN AC-46000, anodised
Springs SiCr spring alloy steel, Epoxy coated
Shaft C22, nickel plated
Position
indicator
PA66 + 30%GF + carbon black
Available options:
6 different external coatings.
Stainless steel AISI 303 or 316 drive shaft.
High and low temperature versions.
0 90 adjustable travel stop.
Cost effcient lock out capability.
Other drive shaft connections.
Rotation 120 and 180 and intermediate such as 135.
3 position actuators.
Stainless steel actuators.
Please contact our technical department for more information about these
options.
0 90 adjustable travel stop:
IA m tion
IA050 D 8,3 10,0 11,6 13,3 14,0 15,0 16,6 18,3 19,9 21,6 23,3 24,9 26,6
IA100 D 14,7 17,6 20,5 23,5 24,6 26,4 29,3 32,2 35,2 38,1 41,0 44,0 46,9
IA200 D 29,1 34,9 40,7 46,5 48,9 52,4 58,2 64,0 69,8 75,6 81,4 87,3 93,1
IA250 D 45,8 54,9 64,1 73,2 76,9 82,4 91,5 101 110 119 128 137 146
IA300 D 66,5 79,8 93,1 106 112 120 133 146 160 173 186 199 213
IA350 D 107 129 150 172 181 193 215 236 258 279 301 322 344
IA400 D 138 166 194 222 233 249 277 305 332 360 388 415 443
IA450 D 217 261 304 348 365 391 435 478 522 565 609 652 696
IA500 D 284 340 397 454 477 511 567 624 681 737 794 851 908
IA 550 D 383 459 536 613 643 689 766 842 919 995 1072 1148 1225
IA 600 D 532 638 745 851 893 957 1064 1170 1276 1382 1489 1595 1702
IA 650 D 893 1072 1251 1430 1501 1608 1787 1966 2144 2323 2502 2680 2859
IA 700 D 1297 1556 1815 2075 2179 2334 2594 2853 3112 3371 3631 3890 4150
IA050 S 04 5,6 4,4 7,3 6,1 8,9 7,7 10,6 9,4 11,3 10,1 12,3 11,1 13,9 12,7 15,6 14,4 17,2 16,0 20,6 19,4 23,9 22,7 3,9 2,7
S 05 4,9 3,4 6,6 5,1 8,3 6,8 9,9 8,4 10,6 9,1 11,6 10,1 13,2 11,7 14,9 13,4 16,6 15,1 19,9 18,4 23,2 21,7 4,9 3,4
S 06 4,3 2,5 5,9 4,1 7,6 5,8 9,3 7,4 9,9 8,1 10,9 9,1 12,6 10,8 14,2 12,4 15,9 14,1 19,2 17,4 22,5 20,7 5,8 4,0
S 07 3,6 1,5 5,3 3,1 6,9 4,8 8,6 6,5 9,2 7,1 10,2 8,1 11,9 9,8 13,6 11,5 15,2 13,1 18,5 16,4 21,9 19,8 6,8 4,7
S 08 4,6 2,2 6,2 3,8 7,9 5,5 8,6 6,2 9,6 7,2 11,2 8,8 12,9 10,5 14,6 12,1 17,9 15,5 21,2 18,8 7,8 5,4
S 09 3,9 1,2 5,6 2,9 7,2 4,5 7,9 5,2 8,9 6,2 10,6 7,8 12,2 9,5 13,9 11,2 17,2 14,5 20,5 17,8 8,8 6,1
S 10 4,9 1,9 6,6 3,5 6,4 4,1 8,2 5,2 9,9 6,9 11,5 8,5 13,2 10,2 16,5 13,5 19,8 16,8 9,7 6,7
S 11 5,9 2,6 5,8 3,3 7,5 4,2 9,2 5,9 10,9 7,6 12,5 9,2 15,9 12,5 19,2 15,9 10,7 7,4
S 12 6,9 3,3 8,5 4,9 10,2 6,6 11,9 8,2 15,2 11,6 18,5 14,9 11,7 8,1
IA100 S 04 10,2 7,9 13,1 10,8 16,1 13,8 19,0 16,7 20,2 17,9 21,9 19,6 24,9 22,6 27,8 25,5 30,7 28,4 36,6 34,3 42,5 40,2 6,7 4,4
S 05 9,1 6,2 12,0 9,2 15,0 12,1 17,9 15,0 19,1 16,2 20,8 17,9 23,8 20,9 26,7 23,8 29,6 26,7 35,5 32,6 41,4 38,5 8,4 5,5
S 06 8,0 4,5 10,9 7,5 13,9 10,4 16,8 13,3 18,0 14,5 19,7 16,3 22,7 19,2 25,6 22,1 28,5 25,1 34,4 30,9 40,2 36,8 10,1 6,7
S 07 6,9 2,8 9,8 5,8 12,8 8,7 15,7 11,6 16,9 12,8 18,6 14,6 21,5 17,5 24,5 20,4 27,4 23,4 33,3 29,2 39,1 35,1 11,8 7,8
S 08 8,7 4,1 11,6 7,0 14,6 10,0 15,7 11,1 17,5 12,9 20,4 15,8 23,4 18,7 26,3 21,7 32,2 27,5 38,0 33,4 13,5 8,9
S 09 7,6 2,4 10,5 5,3 13,5 8,3 14,6 9,4 16,4 11,2 19,3 14,1 22,3 17,1 25,2 20,0 31,1 25,9 36,9 31,7 15,2 10,0
S 10 9,4 3,6 12,4 6,6 12,2 7,0 15,3 9,5 18,2 12,4 21,1 15,4 24,1 18,3 29,9 24,2 35,8 30,0 16,9 11,1
S 11 11,2 4,9 11,2 5,5 14,2 7,8 17,1 10,8 20,0 13,7 23,0 16,6 28,8 22,5 34,7 28,3 18,6 12,2
S 12 13,1 6,1 16,0 9,1 18,9 12,0 21,9 14,9 27,7 20,8 33,6 26,7 20,2 13,3
IA200 S 04 20,2 15,2 26,1 21,1 31,9 26,9 37,7 32,7 40,0 35,0 43,5 38,5 49,3 44,3 55,1 50,1 61,0 56,0 72,6 67,6 84,2 79,2 13,8 8,8
S 05 18,0 11,8 23,8 17,6 29,7 23,4 35,5 29,2 37,8 31,6 41,3 35,0 47,1 40,9 52,9 46,7 58,7 52,5 70,4 64,1 82,0 75,8 17,3 11,1
S 06 15,8 8,3 21,6 14,1 27,5 19,9 33,3 25,8 35,6 28,1 39,1 31,6 44,9 37,4 50,7 43,2 56,5 49,0 68,2 60,7 79,8 72,3 21 13,3
S 07 13,6 10,7 19,4 10,7 25,2 16,5 31,1 22,3 33,4 24,6 36,9 28,1 42,7 33,9 48,5 39,8 54,3 45,6 66,0 57,2 77,6 68,8 24,2 15,5
S 08 11,4 7,2 17,2 7,2 23,0 13,0 28,8 18,8 31,2 21,2 34,7 24,7 40,5 30,5 46,3 36,3 52,1 42,1 63,7 53,7 75,4 65,4 27,7 17,7
S 09 15,0 3,7 20,8 9,6 26,6 15,4 29,0 17,7 32,5 21,2 38,3 27,0 44,1 32,8 49,9 38,6 61,5 50,3 73,2 61,9 31 19,9
S 10 18,6 6,1 24,4 11,9 26,8 13,7 30,2 17,7 36,1 23,6 41,9 29,4 47,7 35,2 59,3 46,8 71,0 58,5 34,6 22,1
S 11 22,2 8,5 24,7 10,4 28,0 14,3 33,8 20,1 39,7 25,9 45,5 31,7 57,1 43,4 68,7 55,0 38,1 24,3
S 12 25,8 10,8 31,6 16,6 37,5 22,4 43,3 28,3 54,9 39,9 66,5 51,5 41,5 26,5
IA250 S 04 31,1 22,7 40,2 31,8 49,4 41,0 58,5 50,1 62,2 53,8 67,7 59,3 76,8 68,4 86,0 77,6 95,2 86,7 113,5 105,0 131,8 123,3 23,1 14,7
S 05 27,4 16,9 36,6 26,0 45,7 35,2 54,9 44,3 58,5 48,0 64,0 53,5 73,2 62,6 82,3 71,8 91,5 80,9 109,8 99,2 128,1 117,6 28,9 18,3
S 06 23,8 11,1 32,9 20,3 42,1 29,4 51,2 38,6 54,9 42,2 60,4 47,7 69,5 56,9 78,7 66,0 87,8 75,2 106,1 93,5 124,4 111,8 34,7 22,0
S 07 20,1 5,3 29,2 14,5 38,4 23,6 47,5 32,8 51,2 36,4 56,7 41,9 65,8 51,1 75,0 60,2 84,2 69,4 102,5 87,7 121 106 40,4 25,7
S 08 16,4 -0,4 25,6 8,7 34,7 17,9 43,9 27,0 47,5 30,7 53,0 36,2 62,2 45,3 71,3 54,5 80,5 63,6 98,8 81,9 117 100 46,2 29,3
S 09 21,9 2,9 31,1 12,1 40,2 21,2 43,9 24,9 49,4 30,4 58,5 39,5 67,7 49 76,8 57,8 95,1 76,1 113 94 52,0 33,0
S 10 27,4 6,3 36,5 15,5 41,7 19,6 45,7 24,6 54,8 33,8 64,0 42,9 73,1 52,1 91,5 70,4 110 89 57,8 36,7
S 11 32,9 9,7 38,7 14,4 42,0 18,8 51,2 28,0 60,3 37,1 69,5 46,3 87,8 64,6 106 83 63,5 40,3
S 12 38,4 13,1 47,5 22,2 56,7 31,4 65,8 40,5 84,1 58,8 102 77 69,3 44,0
IA300 S 04 46,2 35,0 59,5 48,3 72,8 61,6 86,1 74,9 91,4 80,2 99,4 88,1 113 101 126 115 139 128 166 155 192 181 31,5 20,3
S 05 41,1 27,1 54,4 40,4 67,7 53,7 81,0 67 86,3 72,3 94,3 80,3 108 94 121 107 134 120 161 147 187 173 39,4 25,3
S 06 36,1 19,2 49,4 32,5 62,7 45,8 76,0 59,1 81,3 64,4 89,3 72,4 103 86 116 99 129 112 156 139 182 165 47,3 30,4
S 07 31,0 11,3 44,3 24,6 57,6 37,9 70,9 51,2 76,2 56,5 84,2 64,5 97 78 111 91 124 104 151 131 177 158 55,1 35,5
S 08 25,9 3,5 39,2 16,7 52,5 30,0 65,8 43,3 71,1 48,7 79,1 56,6 92,4 69,9 106 83,2 119,0 96,5 146 123 172 150 63 40,5
S 09 34,2 8,9 47,5 22,2 60,8 35,5 66,1 40,8 74,0 48,8 87,3 62,1 101 75,3 113,9 88,6 141 115 167 142 70,9 45,6
S 10 42,4 14,3 55,7 27,6 63,1 32,9 69,0 40,9 82,3 54,2 95,6 67,5 109 80,8 135 107 162 134 78,8 50,7
S 11 50,6 19,7 58,3 25,0 63,9 33,0 77,2 46,3 90,5 59,6 104 72,9 130 99 157 126 86,7 55,7
S 12 58,8 25,1 72,1 38,4 85,4 51,7 99 65 125 92 152 118 94,5 60,8
Md
[Nm]
0 90
Md
[Nm]
0 90
IA...D IA...S
InterApp AG Tel. +41 (0)41 798 22 33
Pneumatic actuators
Torques [Nm] - double acting actuators:
Torques [Nm] - single acting actuators:
Pneumatical torque at air supply of
2,5 bar 3 bar 3,5 bar 4 bar 4,2 bar 4,5 bar 5 bar 5,5 bar 6 bar 6,5 bar 7 bar 7,5 bar 8 bar
Pneumatical torque at air supply of Spring
2,5 bar 3 bar 3,5 bar 4 bar 4,2 bar 4,5 bar 5 bar 5,5 bar 6 bar 7 bar 8 bar [Nm]
0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 90 0
Opening angle
T
o
r
q
u
e
Opening angle
T
o
r
q
u
e
Pneum. torque Spring torque
IA m tion
IA350 S 04 74,7 55,0 96,1 76,5 117,6 98,0 139 120 148 128 161 141 182 162 204 184 225 205 268 248 311 291 52,4 32,8
S 05 66,5 41,9 87,9 63,4 109,4 84,9 131 106 140 115 152 128 174 149 195 171 217 192 260 235 303 278 66 41,0
S 06 58,3 28,8 79,7 50,3 101,2 71,8 123 93,3 131 102 144 115 166 136 187 158 209 179 252 222 295 265 78,6 49,2
S 07 50,1 15,7 71,5 37,2 93,0 59 115 80,2 123 88,8 136 102 158 123 179 145 200 166 243 209 286 252 91,7 57,4
S 08 41,9 2,6 63,3 24,1 84,8 45,6 106 67,1 115 75,7 128 88,6 149 110 171 132 192 153 235 196 278 239 105 65,6
S 09 55,1 11,0 76,6 32,5 98,1 54,0 106,7 62,6 120 75 141 97 163 118 184 140 227 183 270 226 118 73,8
S 10 68,4 19,4 89,9 40,9 98,5 49,5 111 62 133 83,9 154 105 176 127 219 170 262 213 131 82,0
S 11 81,7 27,8 90,3 36,4 103 49 125 71 146 92,3 168 114 211 157 254 200 144 90,2
S 12 95 36 117 58 138 79 159 101 202 144 245 187 157 98,4
IA400 S 04 96 73 124 100 152 128 180 156 191 167 207 183 235 211 263 239 290 266 346 322 401 377 65,9 42,0
S 05 86 56,1 114 84 141 111 169 139 180 150 197 167 224 195 252 222 280 250 335 305 391 361 82,4 52,5
S 06 75,5 39,6 103 67,3 131 95,0 159 123 170 134 186 150 214 178 242 206 269 233 325 289 380 344 99 63,0
S 07 65,0 23,1 93 50,8 120 78,5 148 106 159 117 176 134 203 162 231 189 259 217 314 272 370 328 115 74
S 08 54,5 6,6 82 34,3 110 62 138 89,7 149 101 165 117 193 145 221 173 248 201 304 256 359 311 132 84,0
S 09 72 17,9 99 46 127 73 138 84,3 155 101 182 129 210 156 238 184 293 239 349 295 148 94,5
S 10 89 29 117 57 128 68 144 84 172 112 200 140 227 168 283 223 338 278 165 105
S 11 106 40 117 51 134 68 161 96 189 123 217 151 272 206 328 262 181 116
S 12 123 52 151 79 179 107 206 135 262 190 317 245 198 126
IA450 S 04 152 114 195 158 238 201 282 245 299 262 325 288 369 332 412 375 456 419 543 506 630 593 103 65,9
S 05 135 89 179 132 222 176 265 219 283 236 309 262 352 306 396 349 439 393 526 480 613 567 129 82,4
S 06 119 63 162 106 206 149,7 249 193 266 211 293 237 336 280 379 324 423 367 510 454 597 541 155 98,8
S 07 102 37 146 80 189 124 233 167 250 185 276 211 320 254 363 298 406 341 493 428 580 515 180 115
S 08 86 11 129 55 173 98 216 142 233 159 260 185 303 229 347 272 390 316 477 403 564 490 206 132
S 09 113 29 156 72 200 116 217 133 243 159 287 203 330 246 374 290 460 377 547 464 232 148
S 10 140 47 183 90 201 108 227 134 270 177 314 221 357 264 444 351 531 438 258 165
S 11 167 64 184 82 210 108 254 151 297 195 341 238 428 325 515 412 283 181
S 12 194 82 237 126 281 169 324 213 411 299 498 386 309 198
IA500 S 04 194 151 251 207 307 264 364 321 387 344 421 378 477 434 534 491 591 548 704 661 818 775 133 90
S 05 171 118 228 174 285 231 342 288 364 310 398 344 455 401 512 458 569 515 682 628 795 742 166 112
S 06 149 84 206 141 262 198 319 255 342 277 376 311 433 368 489 425 546 481 660 595 773 708 199 135
S 07 127 51 183 108 240 165 297 221 319 244 353 278 410 335 467 391 524 448 637 562 751 675 233 157
S 08 104 18 161 75 218 131 274 188 297 211 331 245 388 302 444 358 501 415 615 528 728 642 266 180
S 09 138 41 195 98 252 155 275 178 309 212 365 268 422 325 479 382 592 495 706 609 299 202
S 10 173 65 229 122 252 144 286 178 343 235 400 292 456 349 570 462 683 575 332 224
S 11 207 88 230 111 309 212 320 202 377 259 434 315 547 429 661 542 365 247
S 12 241 112 298 169 355 225 411 282 525 396 638 509 399 269
IA550 S 05 225 146 301 223 378 299 455 376 485 406 531 452 608 529 237 158
S 06 193 99 270 175 346 252 423 329 454 359 500 405 576 482 653 558 284 190
S 07 238 128 315 205 391 281 422 312 469 358 544 434 621 511 698 587 332 221
S 08 283 157 360 234 390 264 436 310 513 387 589 464 666 540 819 693 379 253
S 09 328 187 358 217 404 263 481 340 557 416 634 493 787 646 940 799 426 285
S 10 373 216 450 292 526 369 603 445 756 599 909 752 474 316
S 11 418 245 495 321 571 398 724 551 877 704 521 348
S 12 463 174 540 351 693 504 846 657 568 379
IA600 S 05 319 217 426 323 532 430 638 536 681 578 745 642 851 749 315 213
S 06 277 154 383 260 489 367 596 473 638 515 702 579 808 686 915 792 378 255
S 07 341 197 447 304 553 410 596 453 660 516 766 623 872 729 979 835 441 298
S 08 404 241 511 347 553 390 617 453 723 560 830 666 936 772 1149 985 504 340
S 09 468 284 511 327 575 390 681 497 787 603 894 709 1106 922 1319 1135 567 383
S 10 532 327 638 434 745 540 851 646 1064 859 1277 1072 630 425
S 11 596 371 702 477 809 583 1021 796 1234 1009 693 468
S 12 660 414 766 520 979 733 1192 946 756 510
IA650 S 05 533 372 712 551 890 730 1069 908 1141 980 1248 1087 1426 1266 521 360
S 06 461 268 640 447 818 625 997 804 1068 876 1176 983 1354 1162 1533 1340 625 433
S 07 568 343 746 521 925 700 996 771 1104 879 1282 1057 1461 1236 1640 1415 730 505
S 08 674 417 853 596 924 667 1032 774 1210 953 1389 1132 1568 1310 1925 1668 834 577
S 09 781 491 852 563 959 670 1138 849 1317 1028 1495 1206 1853 1564 2210 1921 938 649
S 10 887 566 1066 745 1245 923 1423 1102 1781 1459 2138 1817 1042 721
S 11 994 640 1173 819 1351 998 1709 1355 2066 1713 1146 793
S 12 1101 715 1279 894 1637 1251 1994 1608 1251 865
IA700 S 05 751 496 1011 755 1270 1015 1529 1274 1633 1378 1789 1533 2048 1793 801 546
S 06 642 336 902 595 1161 854 1420 1114 1524 1217 1680 1373 1939 1632 2198 1892 961 655
S 07 792 435 1052 694 1311 954 1415 1057 1570 1213 1830 1472 2089 1732 2349 1991 1121 764
S 08 943 534 1202 793 1306 897 1461 1053 1721 1312 1980 1571 2239 1831 2758 2350 1281 873
S 09 1093 633 1197 737 1352 893 1612 1152 1871 1411 2130 1671 2649 2189 3168 2708 1442 982
S 10 1243 732 1503 992 1762 1251 2021 1510 2540 2029 3059 2548 1602 1091
S 11 1393 832 1653 1091 1912 1350 2431 1869 2950 2388 1762 1200
S 12 1544 931 1803 1190 2322 1709 2840 2228 1922 1309
InterApp AG Tel. +41 (0)41 798 22 33
Pneumatic actuators
Pneumatical torque at air supply of Spring
2,5 bar 3 bar 3,5 bar 4 bar 4,2 bar 4,5 bar 5 bar 5,5 bar 6 bar 7 bar 8 bar [Nm]
0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 90 0
IA m tion
IA ... D IA ... S
A B C D F L M N O P R S T Z1 V
O
[l] V
C
[l] t
O
t
C
[kg] t
O
t
C
[kg]
IA 050 137 69 74,5 M5x8 80 33,5 45 11 31,5 20 32 24 1/8 40 0,09 0,15 0,2 0,25 1,15 0,25 0,3 1,27
IA 100 154 85 87 M5x8 80 40 51,5 11 38,5 20 32 24 1/8 40 0,16 0,26 0,25 0,3 1,7 0,3 0,35 1,9
IA 200 204 102 100,5 M5x8 80 46,5 58,5 17 46 20 32 24 1/8 40 0,31 0,49 0,3 0,4 2,9 0,35 0,5 3,3
IA 250 241 115 113 M5x8 80 53,5 65 17 50 20 32 24 1/8 40 0,51 0,78 0,4 0,5 4,1 0,5 0,6 4,7
IA 300 259 127 125,5 M5x8 80 59,5 71 17 53 20 32 24 1/4 40 0,71 1,11 0,5 0,7 5,6 0,6 0,9 6,5
IA 350 304 145 142,5 M5x8 80 69 79,5 27 58 30 32 24 1/4 65 1,19 1,80 0,7 0,9 8,7 0,8 1,1 10
IA 400 333 157 151,5 M5x8 80 74 85 27 62 30 32 24 1/4 65 1,54 2,34 0,9 1,2 11 1,1 1,4 13
IA 450 395 177 173 M5x8 80 86 96,5 27 72 30 32 24 1/4 65 2,61 3,78 1,2 1,5 15 1,4 1,8 18
IA 500 423 196 187 M5x8 80 94,5 106 27 80 30 32 24 1/4 65 3,14 4,92 1,5 1,8 18 1,7 2,1 23
IA 550 473 220,5 213 M5x8 130 106 117 36 107,5 50 32 24 1/4 115 4,26 6,89 2 2,4 27 2,2 2,8 33
IA 600 528 245 236 M5x8 130 116,5 128 36 116 50 32 24 1/4 115 5,94 9,46 2,7 3,5 35 3,2 4 44
IA 650 605 298,5 272,5 M6x10 130 137 147 36 150,5 50 45 40 3/8 115 10,0 15,2 3,5 4,1 56 4 4,6 70
IA 700 710 330 300 M6x10 130 154 165 36 165 50 45 40 1/2 115 14,50 21,28 4 4,5 78 4,5 5 97
InterApp AG Tel. +41 (0)41 798 22 33
Pneumatic actuators
Dimensions:
V(l) Volume in litre, V
O
= OPEN, V
C
= CLOSE
To calculate the air consumption, multiply the volume in litre by the supply pressure.
t
O
/ t
C
t
O
= opening time / t
C
= closing time, in seconds
The above mentioned operating times are obtained under the following conditions:
- Air supply pressure min. 5,5 bar (80 psi) - at room temperature - medium clean air - actuator stroke 90 - actuator without resistance load
- Actuator size, solenoid valve and air supply pipe according table below
Actuator size Solenoid valve Air supply pipe
IA050 - 350 DN 4 DN 4
IA400 - 600 DN 8 DN 6
IA650 - 700 DN 8 DN 8
Caution: obviously, during operation, if one or more of the
above listed criteria differ, the operating time will be different.
IA m tion
ISO Q Q1 W W1 CH x I CH x I d x I K Y
IA 050
F03-F05 36 50 M5 M6 11 x 12 - - - -
F04 42 - M5 - 11 x 12 - - - -
IA 100
F04 42 - M5 - 11 x 19 - - - -
F05-F07 50 70 M6 M8
11 x 19 - - - -
14 x 16 - - - -
IA 200 F05-F07 50 70 M6 M8
14 x 19
11 x 19
- - -
17 x 19 - - -
IA 250 F05-F07 50 70 M6 M8 17 x 19 14 x 19 - - -
IA 300 F07-F10 70 102 M8 M10
17 x 25
14 x 19
- - -
22 x 25 - - -
IA 350 F07-F10 70 102 M8 M10
17 x 25
14 x 19
- - -
22 x 24 - - -
IA 400 F07-F10 70 102 M8 M10
22 x 32
17 x 25
- - -
27 x 29 - - -
IA 450 F10-F12 102 125 M10 M12 27 x 29 22 x 32 - - -
IA 500 F10-F12 102 125 M10 M12 27 x 40 22 x 40 - - -
IA 550
F10-F12 102 125 M10 M12 27 x 40 22 x 40 - - -
F14 140 - M16 - 36 x 38 - - - -
IA 600
F10-F12 102 125 M10 M12 27 x 40 22 x 40 - - -
F14 140 - M16 - - - d45 x 65 14 49
IA 650
F12 125 - M12 - -
22 x 40 - - -
27 x 40 - - -
F14 140 - M16 - - - d45 x 65 14 49
IA 700
F12 140 - M16 - - 27 x 40
F14 140 - M16 - - 27 x 40 d45 x 65 14 49
F16 165 - M20 - - - d65 x 80 18 69,5
InterApp AG Tel. +41 (0)41 798 22 33
Pneumatic actuators
Dimensions:
Our wide range of accessories includes all kinds of position indicators, solenoid valves, positioners, Bus systems, manual
emergency overdrives, etc. Please refer to the corresponding documentation or download it from our website.
Accessories:
Limit switches Solenoid valve Proximity switch AS-Interface
InterApp AG Tel. +41 (0)41 798 22 33
CH-6343 Rotkreuz
InterApp Ges.m.b.H. Tel. +43 (0)1 616 23 71 0
Kolpingstrae 19 Fax +43 (0)1 616 23 71 99
A-1230 Wien
Austria info@at.interapp.net
InterApp Italiana S.r.l. Tel. +39 02 33 93 71
Via A. Gramsci 18 Fax +39 02 33 93 7200
I-20016 Pero (Milano)
Italy info@it.interapp.net
InterApp Vlvulas S.A. Tel. +34 (0)91 6584360
Igarsa 40 Fax +34 (0)91 6581430
E-28860 Paracuellos de Jarama
Spain info@es.interapp.net
InterApp Kft Tel. +36 (1) 250 9253
Bcsi t 100 Fax +36 (1) 250 9252
H-1034 Budapest
Hungary info@hu.interapp.net
The technical data are noncommittal and do not assure you of any properties. Please refer to our
general sales conditions.
Copyright by InterApp DESPONIA 0609
Investments in our
products pay off
DESPONIA
InterApp AG Tel. +41 (0)41 798 22 33
Butterfy valve
DESPONIA 2/8 (0609) Copyright by InterApp
DESPONIA
DN 25 - 400 DN 450 - 1400
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
InterApp AG Tel. +41 (0)41 798 22 33
Butterfy valve DN25-1400
Characteristics:
Construction:
O
Body (extended valve neck allowing insulation)
O
Blow out proof shaft with position indication
O
Disc
O
Exchangeable liner with sealing grooves on the tightening face
O
Shaft bearing (DN25-400 rilsan, DN450-1400 bronze)
O
Square driven disc
O
External shaft sealing
O
Retaining washer (blow out protection)
DESPONIA Centric butterfy valve with elastomer liner
Application felds For liquids and gases in the industrial range, general services, water treatment, ...
Body construction
D1 Wafer DN 25-800 D3 LUG DN 25-400 D4 U-section DN 150-1400
Face to face dimension according to ISO 5752/20, EN 558-1/20
Top fange according to EN ISO 5211
Max. working pressure 10/16 bar
Rating PN6, PN10, PN16, ANSI cl. 150
Temperature range
Standard -10C 95C with EPDM liner, max. -10C 200C according to material,
other temperatures on request
Tightness test according to EN 12266-1/P12 leakage rate A, test fuid water
The butterfy valves DESPONIA meet the safety requirements of the pressure Equipments Directive 97/23/EC
(PED) appendix 1 for fuids of the groups 1 and 2.
Copyright by InterApp DESPONIA 3/8 (0609)
DESPONIA
D1 0100 . 33 - 2AR . 4A . 2AR . E
O O OO O O O O
DESPONIA DN 2
5
3
2
4
0
5
0
6
5
8
0
1
0
0
1
2
5
1
5
0
2
0
0
2
5
0
3
0
0
3
5
0
4
0
0
4
5
0
5
0
0
6
0
0
7
0
0
8
0
0
9
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
2
0
0
1
4
0
0
D1
PN6 3
PN10 3 2
PN16 3
D3
PN10 3 2
PN16 3
D4
PN10 3 2
PN16 3
InterApp AG Tel. +41 (0)41 798 22 33
Code key:
**
Rating (Code)
*
Working pressure (Code)
O
Body type
D1 Wafer DN25-800
D3 LUG body DN25-400
D4 U-section body DN150-1400
O
Nominal diameter 0025-1400 mm
O
Working pressure
1 6 bar (special execution with reduced disc diameter)
*
10/16 bar, see table below
O
Rating
**
PN6/10/16 see table below. Other ratings on request
O
Body
1AR Cast iron GG25, Rilsan coated 250 DN250-400
1AE Cast iron GG25, Epoxy coated 70 DN450-1400
2AR Ductile iron GGG40, Rilsan coated 250 DN25-400
2AE Ductile iron GGG40, Epoxy coated 70 DN450-1400
O
Shaft
4A Stainless steel 1.4028, AISI420
4B Stainless steel 1.4401, AISI316
O
Disc
2AR Ductile iron GGG40, Rilsan coated 250 (max.90C) DN25-700
2AC Ductile iron GGG40, Chrome coated
4C0 Stainless steel 1.4408, AISI316
4CP Stainless steel 1.4408, AISI316, polished
4CH Stainless steel 1.4408, AISI316, Halar coated min.600
4D0 Uranus B6
5C0 Alubronze G-Cu Al 10 Fe
7H0 Hastelloy C
O
Liner
E EPDM (max.95C) N Nitrile (NBR) B Butyl SV Silicone for steam
EW EPDM KTW NC Nitrile carboxylit H Hypalon SA Silicone for food industry
(max.130C) RN Natural rubber S Silicone V Viton
Other materials and white liners on request
When mounting the valve at the end of a line please note:
- Body type D3 or D4 (D4 only PN10/16 possible)
- Body material 2A (GGG40)
- Medium only for liquids, 1030C
- Max. working pressure DN25-200 10 bar
DN250-600 6 bar
DN700-1400 2,5 bar
- no water hammer !!!
please consult our document Flanges
Other executions on request !
Pressure and temperature limits of application
are dependent of the working conditions.
Body material DN 2
5
3
2
4
0
5
0
6
5
8
0
1
0
0
1
2
5
1
5
0
2
0
0
2
5
0
3
0
0
3
5
0
4
0
0
4
5
0
5
0
0
6
0
0
7
0
0
8
0
0
9
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
2
0
0
1
4
0
0
GG25 (1A) 10 bar 2
GGG40 (2A)
10 bar 2
16 bar 3
DESPONIA
DN A B1 C D1 E H* [kg]
25/32 110 50 30 72 19 17,0 1,4
40 130 60 33 86 19 27,0 2,0
50 135 72 43 101 19 30,0 3,0
65 150 82 46 121 19 49,0 3,6
80 160 92 46 138 19 68,5 4,0
100 180 102 52 160 19 88,5 5,5
125 195 120 56 189 19 114,5 7,5
150 210 133 56 214 19 142,0 8,6
200 240 163 60 272 25 193,5 12,7
250 280 196 68 324 32 243,5 22,2
300 315 232 78 378 32 292,5 30,8
350 330 257 78 425 40 329,5 41,5
400 365 292 102 475 40 375,5 57,2
450 400 359 114 538 65 426 95,0
500 440 397 127 595 65 477 125
600 525 467 154 695 80 572 180
700 565 518 165 800 80 663 280
800 632 562 190 908 80 780 387
DN 25/32 DN 40/50/65 DN 80/100 DN 125/150/200
DN 450-800 DN 250-400
DN 25/32 40 50 65 80 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1200 1400
kv 40 50 100 210 360 650 1050 1770 3400 5090 7360 9800 12900 16800 21700 29800 35100 45900 59300 82100 102700 170000
InterApp AG Tel. +41 (0)41 798 22 33
D1 Wafer, DN 25-800
* When using plastic stubs please check dimension H to avoid damaging of disc
Kv values m
3
/h
DESPONIA
25/32 110 50 30 72 19 17,0 1,4
40 130 60 33 86 19 27,0 2,0
50 135 72 43 117 19 30,0 3,2
65 150 82 46 130 19 49,0 4,0
80 160 88 46 188 19 68,5 6,1
100 180 102 52 219 19 88,5 8,5
125 195 116 56 248 19 114,5 10,0
150 210 128 56 274 19 142,0 11,0
200 240 161 60 332 25 193,5 19,6
250 280 199 68 402 32 243,5 28,7
300 315 234 78 472 32 292,5 41,2
350 330 258 78 520 40 329,5 55,0
400 365 290 102 584 40 375,5 75,0
DN A B4 C D4 H* J E [kg]
150 210 143 56 285 142,0 10,0 19 15,0
200 240 170 60 340 193,5 12,5 25 19,5
250 280 200 68 406 243,5 15,0 32 30,5
300 315 239 78 482 292,5 15,0 32 44,0
350 330 265 78 533 329,5 18,0 40 59,0
400 365 296 102 596 375,5 20,0 40 82,0
450 400 359 114 640 426 24,0 65 118
500 440 397 127 715 477 26,0 65 175
600 525 467 154 840 572 28,5 80 260
700 565 503 165 927 663 31,5 80 345
(750) 590 541 170 985 712 34,0 80 435
800 630 580 190 1060 780 36,5 80 510
900 695 650 203 1170 855 38,0 100 660
1000 748 696 216 1255 960 44,0 100 790
(1100) 768 738 218 1340 1055 44,0 100 850
1200 882 809 254 1485 1150 47,0 120 1180
1400 990 938 280 1680 1340 40,0 120 1350
DN E G d e f ISO a b n x y
25/32 19 O 8 - - 12 F07 90 70 4 x 9
40 19 O 8 - - 12 F07 90 70 4 x 9
50 19 O 11 - - 12 F07 90 70 4 x 9
65 19 O 11 - - 12 F07 90 70 4 x 9
80 19 O 11 - - 12 F07 90 70 4 x 9
100 19 O 11 - - 12 F07 90 70 4 x 9
125 19 O 14 - - 12 F07 90 70 4 x 9
150 19 O 14 - - 12 F07 90 70 4 x 9
200 25 O 17 - - 12 F07 90 70 4 x 9
250 32 O 22 - - 18 F10 125 102 4 x 10
300 32 O 22 - - 18 F10 125 102 4 x 10
350 40 O 22 - - 18 F12 155 125 4 x 13
400 40 O 27 - - 18 F12 155 125 4 x 13
450 65 45 14 9 25 F14 175 140 4 x 18
500 65 45 14 9 25 F14 175 140 4 x 18
600 80 70 20 12 25 F16 220 165 4 x 22
700 80 70 20 12 25 F25 300 254 8 x 18
(750) 80 70 20 12 30 F25 300 254 8 x 18
800 80 70 20 12 30 F25 300 254 8 x 18
900 100 80 22 14 30 F30 350 298 8 x 22
1000 100 80 22 14 30 F30 350 298 8 x 22
(1100) 100 80 22 14 30 F30 350 298 8 x 22
1200 120 100 28 16 30 F30 350 298 8 x 22
1400 120 120 32 18 35 F30 350 298 8 x 22
DN 450-1400 DN 25-400
InterApp AG Tel. +41 (0)41 798 22 33
D3 LUG body, DN 25-400
D4 U-section body, DN 150-1400
Top fange according to ISO 5211
DESPONIA
DN A B C (kg)
25-40 HLA.F0708.180 180 45,5 41 0,4
50-65 HLA.F0711.180 180 45,5 41 0,4
80-100 HLA.F0711.240 243 45,5 43 0,5
125-150 HLA.F0714.340 340 45,5 51 0,6
200 HLA.F0717.340 340 45,5 51 0,6
250-300 HLA.F1022.500 500 77,5 40 2,2
DN A B C (kg)
25-40 HLP.F0708.240 243 45,5 41 0,3
50-65 HLP.F0711.240 243 45,5 41 0,3
80-100 HLP.F0711.240 243 45,5 43 0,3
125-150 HLP.F0714.340 340 45,5 51 0,5
200 HLP.F0717.340 340 45,5 51 0,5
DN G H
25-40 PO.F0708.30 30 65
50-100 PO.F0711.30 30 65
125-150 PO.F0714.30 30 65
200 PO.F0717.30 30 65
DN I J
25-40 HW.F0708.200 200 52
50-100 HW.F0711.200 200 52
125-150 HW.F0714.250 250 52
HLA / HLP
InterApp AG Tel. +41 (0)41 798 22 33
Handlever (DN25-300):
Aluminium, Epoxy coated
Plumber square (DN25-200):
Handwheel (DN25-150):
Polyamide PA 6, 30% glass fbers reinforced
DESPONIA
DN A B C D E H R n* [kg]
25-40 GB232-05.F05-F0711.100(R08) 80 110,5 42,5 44,5 109 52 100 10 0,8
50-100 GB232-05.F05-F0711.100 80 110,5 42,5 44,5 109 52 100 10 0,8
125-150 GB232-05.F05-F0714.100 80 110,5 42,5 44,5 109 52 100 10 0,8
200 GB232-07.F05-F0717.160 100 133 50 58 130 58 160 9,25 1,8
250-300 GB232-10.F10-F1222.250 148 177,5 60 82,5 205 75 250 11,25 3,3
350 GB232-12.F10-F1222.315 175 218 80 91 229 88 315 10 7
400 GB232-12.F10-F1227.315 175 218 80 91 229 88 315 10 7
450 GB880N.F1445.500-SH100 200 227 86 101 305 92 500 9,5 14
500 GB1250N.F1445.400-SH100 220 258 105 110 426 100 400 13,75 22
600 GB1250N.F1665.600-SH100 220 258 105 110 446 100 600 13,75 22
700 GB1950N/HR.F2570.400-SH100 285 402,5 211 142,5 467 155 400 21 32
750 GB1950N/HR.F2570.400-SH100 285 402,5 211 142,5 467 155 400 21 32
800 GB1950N/HR.F2570.500-SH100 285 402,5 211 142,5 487 155 500 21 32
900 GB6800N/SP4.F3080.500 370 482 263 170 500 160 500 79,25 70
1000 GB6800N/SP4.F3080.500 370 482 263 170 500 160 500 79,25 70
1100 GB6800N/SP4.F3080.500 370 482 263 170 500 160 500 79,25 70
1200 GB6800N/SP4.F30100.500 370 482 263 170 500 160 500 79,25 70
1400 GB6800N/SP9.F30120.500 370 584 357 170 578 160 500 176 100
http://www.interapp.net
GB 232
GB880-6800
InterApp AG Tel. +41 (0)41 798 22 33
Gearbox:
* n = Handwheel turns ON/OFF Material:
GB232 : Aluminium, Polyurethan coated
GB880-GB6800 : Cast iron, Polyurethan coated
pmax DN25-200 ...16 bar, DN250-1400 ... 10 bar
Further documentation: - pneumatic actuators
- electric actuators
- Accessories
according separate data sheets
Important guides: - Installation guide
- Maintenance guide
- Flanges
Please consult these guides for the installation and maintenance of our butterfy valves
You can fnd most of these documents as well as the declaration of conformity and other certifcates in several langua-
ges at our homepage
InterApp AG Tel. +41 (0)41 798 22 33
CH-6343 Rotkreuz
A-1230 Wien
Via A. Gramsci 18 Fax +39 02 33 93 7200
Igarsa 40 Fax +34 (0)91 6581430
Bcsi t 100 Fax +36 (1) 250 9252
H-1034 Budapest
Copyright by InterApp IAmotion-Acc 0605
IA m tion
InterApp AG Tel. +41 (0)41 798 22 33
Accessories for
IAmotion-Acc 2/12 (0605) Copyright by InterApp
InterApp AG Tel. +41 (0)41 798 22 33
Accessories
Page
IA..19B
Multifunction indicator
4 - 5
341N, 553A
Solenoid valve
6
ES2 P
Limit switch box
7
ES2 A/B/F/S
Limit switch box metal
8-9
IA m tion
Copyright by InterApp IAmotion-Acc 3/12 (0605)
InterApp AG Tel. +41 (0)41 798 22 33
Accessories
Page
ES2 PFF31
Proximity switch
Pepperl&Fuchs
10
ES2 IFM
Proximity switch
IFM
11
Positioner 12
Fieldbus systems 12
IA m tion
IA0519B IA2019B IA4519B IA6519B
IA0519B-L IA2019B-L IA4519B-L IA6519B-L
IA0519B-T IA2019B-T IA4519B-T IA6519B-T
IA..19B
InterApp AG Tel. +41 (0)41 798 22 33
Application
for actuator size ...
IA050 - IA100
d = 40mm
h = 20mm
v = 11mm
IA200 - IA300
d = 40mm
h = 20mm
v = 17mm
IA350 - IA500
d = 65mm
h = 30mm
v = 27mm
IA550 - IA800
d = 115mm
h = 50mm
v = 36mm
Standard indicator
for 2-way valves
delivered with
IA motion
Indicator for
3-way valves
L-type
Indicator for
3-way valves
T-type
IA..19B
IA0519B-M IA2019B-M IA4519B-M IA6519B-M
IA0519B-S IA2019B-S IA4519B-S IA6519B-S
IA0519B-P IA2019B-P
IA4519B-S IA6519B-S
InterApp AG Tel. +41 (0)41 798 22 33
Application
for actuator size ...
IA050 - IA100
d = 40mm
h = 20mm
v = 11mm
IA200 - IA300
d = 40mm
h = 20mm
v = 17mm
IA350 - IA500
d = 65mm
h = 30mm
v = 27mm
IA550 - IA800
d = 115mm
h = 50mm
v = 36mm
for limit switches
open mounted
for proximity switch
IFM
Pepperl&Fuchs F25
Pepperl&Fuchs F31
341N, 553A
IA050 - IA350
341 N 01, 488980-230/50 341 N 01, 482606-230/50 230V 50Hz 2W
146,7 106,2 46 31,6
341 N 01, 488980-24V/= 341 N 01, 482606-24V/= 24V = 2,5W
IA400 - IA600
341 N 02, 488980-230/50 341 N 02, 482606-230/50 230V 50Hz 2W
160,6 115,1 55 40,2
341 N 02, 488980-24V/= 341 N 02, 482606-24V/= 24V = 2,5W
IA650 - IA800
553A001 SC 230/50 553A001 PV 230/50 230V 50Hz 5W
197,5 126,7 72,3 49,2
553A001 SC 24V/= 553A001 PV 24V/= 24V = 5W
IA050-250
341 N 01
IA300-350
341 N 01
IA400-600
341 N 02
IA650-800
553A001
5/2
IA...D
3/2
IA...S
341 N -> EEx m II T5 (Ex II 2 G/D)
553A -> EEx m II T3 (Ex II 2 G/D)
InterApp AG Tel. +41 (0)41 798 22 33
Solenoid valve
Characteristics:
Dimensions:
Changing the 5/2 - 3/2 function:
Changing the function from 5/2 to 3/2 (or 3/2 to 5/2) is simply done by 180 rotation of the intermediate plate.
Intermediate plate
341N, 553A
5/2 (3/2) Solenoid valve (spoolvalve), Interface NAMUR, Body Aluminium hard anodised,
Pressure diff. min. 2 bar, max. 10 bar, Temperature range -25C 50C
341N01 341N02 553A001
Orifce / Nominal fow 4mm / 600 l/min 8mm / 1400 l/min 13mm / 3000 l/min
Air connection (1) G G G
Exhaust connection (3+5) G G G
IA motion Solenoid valve IP65 Solenoid valve IP65 AC / DC [Watt] L L1 B H
ES2.P
ES2.P01H ES2.P70L ES2.P73H
ES2.P75H
InterApp AG Tel. +41 (0)41 798 22 33
Limit switch box
ES2P
The limit switch box is for direct mounting on pneumatic actuators IA050-IA800. The mounting brackets
can be used for all standard NAMUR (VDI/VDE3845) top mounting hole spacing 80x30mm and
130x30mm and standard NAMUR shaft hights 20, 30, 40 and 50mm.
Housing cover Polycarbonate clear, UV resistant, self estinguishing rate V0
Housing base PPE (Polyphenyl Ether) black, self estinguishing rate V0
Limit switches 1x ON, 1x OFF
Cam with 2 independent adjustable cams
Cable gland M20 x 1,5
Characteristics:
Dimensions:
Box with mechanical microswitches
max. 5A@250V~ - 3A@24=
min. 50mA@250V~ - 50mA@24=
IP65, T = -15C ....80C
Box with proximity switches, NAMUR
P+F NJ2 V3 N
EEx ia IIC T6, 2-wire
IP65, T = -15C ....80C
Box with proximity switches, PNP
P+F NBB2 V3 E2
10-30V=, 200mA, 3-wire
IP65, T = -15C ....70C
Box with proximity switches
IFM IS 5026
5-36V=, 4-200mA, 2-wire NC/NO
IP65, T = -15C ....80C
ES2.P03H ... with gold contacts
max. 3A@250V~ - 1A@24=
min. 5mA@250V~ - 1mA@24=
ES2.A/B/F/S
ES2A ES2F, ES2S ES2B
a b c IA motion
MB 01 80 20 45 IA 050 - 300
MB 03 80 30 55 IA 350 - 500
MB 04 130 50 75 IA 550 - 800
ES2B
MB
IA motion
InterApp AG Tel. +41 (0)41 798 22 33
Limit switch box (metal)
Characteristics:
Dimensions:
ES2A, ES2B
ES2F, ES2S
The limit switch box is for direct mounting on pneumatic actuators IA050-IA800. The mounting brackets can
be used for all standard NAMUR (VDI/VDE3845) top mounting hole spacing 80x30mm and 130x30mm and
standard NAMUR shaft hights 20, 30, 40 and 50mm.
ES2B (standard) ES2F ES2A ES2S
Housing base Aluminium Aluminium Aluminium Stainless steel AISI316 (CF8M)
Housing cover
Polycarbonate clear,
UV resistant,
self estinguishing rate V0
Aluminium Aluminium Stainless steel AISI316 (CF8M)
Optical position indicator
UV resistant,
UV resistant,
UV resistant,
Shaft and fasteners Stainless steel Stainless steel Stainless steel Stainless steel
Limit switches, cams 1x ON 1x OFF (see keycode next page), with 2 independent adjustable cams
Weather proof, Temperature IP67, -20C ... +80C or maximum temperature of the installed limit switch
Mounting bracket MB for actuators
ES2.A/B/F/S
ES2 . B 01 H

InterApp AG Tel. +41 (0)41 798 22 33
Limit switch box (metal)
Code key:
Construction
ES2.B
ES2.F
ES2.A
ES2.S
Limit switch box with 2 limit switches
Executions A, B, F, S see previous page
limit switch type

01 electromech SPDT silver plated contacts
max. 5A@250VAC - 3A@24VDC
min 50mA@250VAC - 50mA@24VDC
02
electromech SPDT gold plated contacts
hermetically sealed
03 electromech SPDT gold plated contacts
17
electromech DSPDT gold plated contacts
hermetically sealed
max 0,1A@250VAC - 0,1A@24VDC
min 1mA@24VDC
18
electromech DPDT silver plated contacts
hermetically sealed
max 2A@250VAC - 2A@24VDC
min 50mA@24VDC
C3 proximity SPST bifurcated inert gas hermetically sealed
max. 1,5A@120VAC - 0,5A@24VDC
(resisitve / inductive)
C4 proximity SPDT inert gas hermetically sealed max. 1A@120VAC - 1A@24VDC - max. 25Watt
32 proximity NO P+F NBN4 12GM40 Z0 2 wire amplifed 5-60VDC, 2 -100mA
73 proximity PNP NO P+F NBB2 V3 E2 3 wire amplifed 10-30VDC, 100mA
75 proximity NO / NC programmable IFM IS5026 2 wire amplifed 5-36VDC, 200mA
83 proximity NO P+F NBB3-V3-Z4 2 wire amplifed 5-60VDC, 100mA
91 4-20mA Transmitter 10-30VDC
Terminal strips
(depends on
switch type)
H standard PCB + extra solenoid terminals
7 cage clamp blue + extra solenoid terminals
8 cage clamp blue
ES2.PFF31
IA 050 80 x 30 11 x 20
BT65
(d=65mm)
ES2.PFF31...
P&F
NBN3-F31...
IA 100 80 x 30 11 x 20
IA 200 80 x 30 17 x 20
IA 250 80 x 30 17 x 20
IA 300 80 x 30 17 x 20
IA 350 80 x 30 27 x 30
IA 400 80 x 30 27 x 30
IA 450 80 x 30 27 x 30
IA 500 80 x 30 27 x 30
IA 550 130 x 30 36 x 50
BT115
(d=115mm)
IA 600 130 x 30 36 x 50
IA 650 130 x 30 36 x 50
IA 700 130 x 30 36 x 50
IA 800 130 x 30 36 x 50
InterApp AG Tel. +41 (0)41 798 22 33
Proximity switches (Pepperl & Fuchs)
3-wire, PNP, Dual Make function
ES2.PFF31E80AZ-V1
(P&F: NBN3-F31-E8-V1)
ES2.PFF31E80AZ-K
(P&F: NBN3-F31-E8-K)
ES2.PFF31E80AZ-K-K
(P&F: NBN3-F31-E8-K-K)
Connection system Connector M12x1 PVC-cable 5m PVC-cable 5m
valve - - PVC-cable 0,5m
LED display operating voltage LED green LED green LED green
switching state LED yellow LED yellow LED yellow
valve status - - LED yellow
Operating distance : 3 mm
Operating voltage U
B
: 10...30 V
Operating current I
L
: 0...100 mA
Voltage drop D
U
: 3 V
No-load supply I
0
: 25 mA
Ambient temperature : -25...70C
Protection degree : IP67
EMV according to : EN 60947-5-2
Reverse polarity
protection
: all connections
Short circuit protection : pulsing
IA motion F x E N x L Actor Proximity switch
Dimensions:
Proximity switch - executions and technical data
2-wire, NAMUR, Dual Brake function
ES2.PFF31N40AZ-V1
(P&F: NCN3-F31-N4-V1)
ES2.PFF31N40AZ-K
(P&F: NCN3-F31-N4-K)
ES2.PFF31N40AZ-K-K
(P&F: NCN3-F31-N4-K-K)
Connection system Connector M12x1 PVC-cable 5m PVC-cable 5m
valve - - PVC-cable 0,5m
LED display switching state LED yellow LED yellow LED yellow
valve status - - LED yellow
Nominal voltage U
0
: 8 V
Current consumption measuring plate
detected : 1 mA
not detected : 3 mA
ATEX
: II 2G EEx ia IIC T6
EMV according to : EN 60947-5-2; NE 21
Standards (NAMUR) : DIN EN 60947-5-6
Reverse polarity
protection
: yes
Short circuit protection ; yes
ES2.IFM
IA 050 80 x 30 11 x 20 IA0519B-S
(d=53mm)
ES2.IFM...
IA 100 80 x 30 11 x 20
IA 200 80 x 30 17 x 20
IA2019B-S
(d=53mm)
IA 250 80 x 30 17 x 20
IA 300 80 x 30 17 x 20
IA 350 80 x 30 27 x 30
IA4519B-S
(d=65mm)
IA 400 80 x 30 27 x 30
IA 450 80 x 30 27 x 30
IA 500 80 x 30 27 x 30
IA 550 130 x 30 36 x 50
IA6519B-S
(d=115m)
IA 600 130 x 30 36 x 50
IA 650 130 x 30 36 x 50
IA 700 130 x 30 36 x 50
IA 800 130 x 30 36 x 50
InterApp AG Tel. +41 (0)41 798 22 33
Proximity switches (IFM)
3-wire, PNP, Dual Make function
ES2.IFM IN5225 0AZ-V1
(IFM: IN5225)
ES2.IFM IN5251 0AZ-K
(IFM: IN5251)
ES2.IFM IN5334 0AZ-Rd24-V1
(IFM: IN5334)
Connection system Connector M12x1 PVC-cable 2m Rd 24x1/8
valve - - M12x1
LED display switching state 2x LED yellow 2x LED yellow 2x LED yellow
Operating voltage U
B
: 10...36 V
Operating current I
L
: 0...250 mA
Voltage drop D
U
: 2,5 V
No-load supply I
0
: 15 mA
Reverse polarity
protection
: yes
Short circuit protection : pulsing
IA motion F x E N x L Actor Proximity switch
Dimensions:
Proximity switch - executions and technical data
2-wire, NAMUR, Dual Brake function
ES2.IFM NN5008 0AZ-V1
(IFM: IN5008)
ES2.IFM IN5009 0AZ-K
(IFM: IN5009)
ES2.IFM N95001 0AZ-Rd24-V1
(IFM: N95001)
Connection system Connector M12x1 Silicone-cable 2m Rd 24x1/8
valve - - M12x1
LED display switching state 2x LED yellow 2x LED yellow 2x LED yellow
Supply voltage U
B
: 7,5 - 15 V
Nominal voltage U
0
: 8,2 V (1k)
Current consumption : 1 mA
ATEX
: II 2G EEx ia IIC T6
Standards (NAMUR) : DIN EN 60947-5-6
InterApp AG Tel. +41 (0)41 798 22 33
Positioner
Fieldbus systems
PMV-P5
pneumatic positioner
PMV-EP5
electro-pneumatic positioner
GEM 1436 cPos
electro-pneumatic positioner
digital
GEM 4221 AS-Interface PEPPERL & FUCHS NCN3-F31 AS-Interface
Postioners and feldbus systems from other manufacturers can be used as well. Please consult our technical
department.
TI362F/00/en
52010868
Technical Information
Solicap M FTC51, FTC52, FTC53
Capacitance Limit Detection
Level limit switches for bulk solids
Applications
The Solicap M FTC.. is used for limit detection in silos
containing bulk solids (for minimum or maximum level
indication).
Three versions cover almost any measuring application:
FTC51 with rod probe 25 mm,
for mounting laterally or from above.
Mainly for maximum detection of fine-grained or
powdery bulk solids.
For minimum detection in small silos with light bulk
solids.
For use in the food processing industry.
FTC52 with rope probe 10 mm,
for mounting from above.
Mainly for maximum detection.
For minimum detection with light bulk solids.
FTC53 with rope probe 14 mm,
for mounting from above.
For maximum and minimum detection with heavy bulk
solids.
Your Benefits
Complete unit consisting of probe with plug-in
electronic insert:
simple mounting, low installation costs
for automation and control systems
(PLC, PCS, PC, relays, contactors, etc.)
High functional safety thanks to cable monitoring up to
sensor with EC27Z
No moving parts in silo:
no wear, long operating life
no maintenance
Simple calibration:
variable switchpoint with probes mounted from
above
Rope version can be easily shortened:
can be used for various limit values
short delivery time
2 Endress + Hauser
Contents
Function and System Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Application Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Measuring System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Fail-Safe Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Main Features of the Different Electronic Inserts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Mechanical Construction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Probe Characteristics, Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Project Planning FTC51 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Project Planning FTC52, FTC53 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Wiring Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Connecting the EC20Z . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Adjustment and Calibration Features . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Adjustment and Calibration Features at EC2xZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Capacitance Calibration, Initial Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Capacitance Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Adjusting for Material Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Function Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Technical Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Operating Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Process connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Solicap M FTC51 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Solicap M FTC52 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Solicap M FTC53 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Butterfly Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Protective sun cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Supplementary Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Technical Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Details When Ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Endress + Hauser 3
Function and System Design
Application Examples Sand, Glass aggregate, Gravel, Moulding sand, Lime, Ore (crushed), Plaster, Aluminium shavings, Cement,
Grain, Pumice, Flour, Dolomite, Sugar beet chips, Kaolin, Fodder and similar bulk solids
Note:
Bulk solids should have dielectric constants
r
2.5.
Measuring System The Solicap M are switches for limit detection in solids.
Operation
The compact instrumentation consists of:
Solicap M FTC.. with EC2xZ
power supply and
connected control systems, switches, signal
transmitters (e.g. process control systems, PLC,
relays, microcontactors, lamps, sirens etc.)
The separate instrumentation consists of:
Solicap M FTC.. with EC17Z/EC27Z/EC61Z
a separate transmitter, e.g. FTC325, FTC625 for
installation in cabinets and
connected control systems, switches, signal
transmitters (e.g. process control systems, PLC,
relays, microcontactors, lamps, sirens etc.) on the
evaluation device
The capacitance level limit switches Solicap M
FTC51FTC53 in practice
1) Electronic insert in probe head
2) 2- or 3-wire connecting cable
3) Transmitter
4) Compact instrumentation
L00-FTC5xxxx-14-06-xx-en-001
FTC52/53
FTC51
4)
3)
2) 1)
Power
supply
Power
supply
or
Evaluation device,
e.g. FTC325
The probe (rod or rope) and the silo wall form the
two electrodes of a capacitor, with a high frequency
voltage between them.
The limit value is based on the principle of a
discharge circuit:
As long as the probe is in air with a dielectric
constant of
r
= 1 then the discharge time constant is
= R x C
A
where R is the resistance of the circuit
and C
A
the capacitance of the capacitor formed by
the probe and silo wall.
If bulk material with a high dielectric constant moves
into the electrical field between the probe and silo
wall, then C
A
increases and with it the time
constant .
The change in the time constant is evaluated and the
Solicap M is activated according to its switching
mode.
The Solicap M is extremely insensitive to low build-
up on the probe and silo wall as long as the material
does not form a bridge between the probe and wall
(e.g. on the threaded boss).
L00-FTC5xxxx-15-06-xx-xx-001
The capacitor consisting of the silo wall and probe
r
= 1
r
> 1
4 Endress + Hauser
Fail-Safe Mode Compact instrumentation with EC20Z, EC22Z, EC24Z
Main Features of the Different
Electronic Inserts
Electronic Insert EC20Z
Two-wire AC connection 21 V250 V
Electronic switch, max. 350 mA
Three-wire DC connection 10 V55 V
Transistor circuit,
load connection PNP, max. 350 mA
with potential-free relay output,
AC voltage operation 21 V250 V or
DC voltage operation 20 V125 V
PFM Electronic Insert EC17Z
300 kHz for connection to separate evaluation devices
FTC520Z, FTC521Z, FTC470Z, FTC471Z, FTC325 PFM, FTC625
PFM Electronic Insert EC27Z
120 kHz ... 380 kHz (depending on the probe capacitance)
for connection to a capacitance sensor FTC625
3-wire Electronic Insert EC61Z
500 kHz for connection to separate evaluation
FTC420, FTC421, FTC422, FTC325 3-WIRE
The built-in feature for minimum/maximum fail-
safe switching allows the Solicap M to be used in all
applications requiring high operational safety:
Maximum Fail-Safe:
The current circuit is blocked if the probe is
covered or the power supply fails.
Minimum Fail-Safe:
The current circuit is blocked if the probe is
uncovered or the power supply fails.
A red LED on the electronic insert indicates
switching status.
The electronic switch operates according to the fail-safe
switching and the level
Safety
Switching
Maximum-
fail-safe mode
Minimum-
fail-safe mode
Power failure
disconnected
disconnected
disconnected
connected
connected
(load circuit open)
(load circuit open)
(load circuit open)
(load circuit closed)
(load circuit closed)
Level
full
empty
Electronic Switch
Endress + Hauser 5
Mechanical Construction
Probe Characteristics,
Dimensions
!
Note!
All dimensions in mm.
Solicap M FTC51
Rod probe, 25 mm
Insulation PE
Probe length max. 4 m
Solicap M FTC52
Seilsonde, 10 mm
Insulation PA
Tensile load max. 3 t
Solicap M FTC53
Seilsonde, 14 mm
Insulation PVC, PA
Tensile load max. 6 t
L00-FTC5Xxxxx-06-06-xx-en-001
Dimensions FTC51
Dimensions FTC52
Dimensions FTC53
max. 88
max. 80
G 1
55
L
=
3
5
0
(
S
t
a
n
d
a
r
d
)
60 AF
Elastomer/fibre
gasket
(asbestos-free)
18 (without insulation)
a
p
p
r
o
x
.
1
4
0
5
0
0
.
.
.
2
2
0
0
0
5
5
40
max. 88
max. 80
20
G 1
55
a
p
p
r
o
x
.
2
5
0
a
p
p
r
o
x
.
1
4
0
Insulation
60 AF
Elastomer/fibre
gasket
(asbestos-free)
40
24
max. 80
1
0
0
5
0
0
.
.
.
2
2
0
0
0
max. 88
G 1
55
a
p
p
r
o
x
.
2
5
0
a
p
p
r
o
x
.
1
5
5
Insulation
60 AF
Elastomer/fibre
gasket
(asbestos-free)
6 Endress + Hauser
Installation
General Information
Filling the Silo
The filling stream should not be directed onto the
probe.
Angle of Material Flow
Note the angle of material flow or the outlet funnel
when determining the measuring point or probe
length.
Distance Between Probes
If more than one probe is mounted in a silo, then a
minimum distance of 0.5 m must be allowed for in
order to avoid mutual interference.
Threaded Socket for Mounting
Use the shortest possible threaded socket when
mounting the Solicap M FTC51FTC53.
Condensation and build-up can be formed in long
threaded sockets and interfere with correct operation
of the probe.
Heat Insulation
With high silo temperatures:
Insulate the outside silo wall to avoid exceeding the
max. permissible temperature of the Solicap M
housing.
This insulation also prevents condensation near the
threaded boss and so reduces build-up and the
danger of error switching.
Installation in the Open
A protective sun cover as an accessory protects the
Solicap M with the aluminium housing from
excessive temperatures and from condensation
which may form in the housing due to large
temperature variations.
Installation in a Building
Install an easily accessible power switch in the
proximity of the device.
Mark the power switch as a disconnector for the
device.
General information for installing the capacitance
Solicap M FTC.. level limit switch
FTC52 / FTC53
FTC51
FTC51
min.
500
min.
500
m
i
n
.
5
0
0
max. 80 C
max. 60 C
Angle of
slope
Protection
sun cover
Protective
roof
a
p
p
r
o
x
.
2
0
0
Distance
Angle of
slope
Endress + Hauser 7
Project Planning FTC51
Correct Installation:
a. Maximum level detection; Short threaded socket (ideally 25 mm = half standard length socket).
b. Light build-up on silo wall: threaded socket welded internally.
The probe tip points slightly downwards so that material falls off more easily.
c. Protective roof to protect against collapsing mounds or high strain on the rod probe caused by the material
filling curtain with the Solicap M FTC51 used for minimum detection.
Incorrect Installation:
d. Threaded socket too long. Material can settle and lead to error.
e. Error switching caused by high build-up on the silo wall is best avoided by mounting the Solicap M
FTC52 or FTC53 with rope probe in the roof of the silo.
f. In areas where material can settle, the instrument cannot recognise an empty silo. The FTC52 or
FTC53 is recommended.
Correct Installation Incorrect Installation
Silo with metal walls
This mounting example shows a steel plate as
counter electrode.
Heat insulation prevents condensation and build-up
on the steel plate.
Silo with concrete walls
360
a) d)
b)
e)
c)
f)
Metal wall
short
approx.
200
a
p
p
r
o
x
.
2
0
0
Concrete wall
Sheet metal plate with
threaded socket
Heat insulation
m
i
n
.
3
0
0
o
r
3
0
0
8 Endress + Hauser
Probe Length
The lengths given are minimum lengths to be added to that from the seal of the flange or thread to the limit
level required. Probe length tolerances - see Page 21.
It is important for safe operation that the difference in capacitance between the covered and uncovered parts
of the probe is at least 10 pF.
Contact us for advice in cases where the dielectric constant of the material is unknown.
When mounting in a silo made of plastic material,
a sheet metal plate should be attached to the outside
of the silo as a counter electrode.
This plate can be either square or round.
The dimensions with thin silo walls and low
dielectric constant should be 0.5 m on each side
or 0.5 m. This should be 0.7 m along each side
or 0.7 m for silos with thicker walls or for
materials with higher dielectric constants.
Silo with plastic walls
The minimum distance required can be maintained
by staggered mounting.
For small differences in level
Type of material,
relative dielectric constant
r
L00-FTC5Xxxxx-06-06-xx-xx-001
* additional length to be immersed
electrically conductive 10 mm
non conductive
r
> 10 100 mm
r
> 5...10 200 mm
r
> 2...5 500 mm
Plastic wall
Sheet metal plate
Ground connection
Electrical
HF field
m
i
n
.
5
0
0
e
.
g
.
3
0
0
e
.
g
.
3
0
0
*
Endress + Hauser 9
Project Planning
FTC52, FTC53
Correct Installation:
a. The correct distance from the silo wall, the material filling curtain and the material outlet.
For reliable switching with products having low dielectric constants, mount the probe very close to the
wall (not for use with pneumatic filling systems).
For pneumatic filling systems, the distance of the probe from the wall should not be too small as the probe
may swing against it.
b. Solicap M FTC52, FTC53 with screening against condensation and material build-up on the silo roof.
Incorrect Installation:
c. The probe can be damaged by the inflowing material if mounted too near the inlet.
When mounted near the centre of the outlet, the high tensile forces present at this point may damage the
probe or subject the silo roof to excessive strain
d. Threaded socket too long; Condensation and dust may penetrate and cause errors.
e. Too near silo wall; When swinging gently the probe can hit the wall or touch any build-up which may
have formed. This can result in error switching
Silo Roof
Ensure that the silo roof is strong enough!
Very high tensile forces, up to 100.000 N (10 t) may occur at the material outlet especially with heavy,
powdery bulk materials which tend to form build-up.
Coarse Grained Materials
The Solicap M FTC52 or FTC53 should only be used for maximum detection in silos with very coarse or
abrasive material.
Correct Installation Incorrect Installation
Silo with metal walls
Distance D between the probe and the wall is approx. 10 % and 25 % of the diameter of the silo
max. 4 t
c)
a) b)
d)
e)
D
min. 0.2 m
10 Endress + Hauser
Distance between Probes
A minimum distance of 0.5 m between probes must be maintained to ensure that there is no mutual
interference; this also applies to all Solicap M units which are mounted next to one another in silos with non-
conducting walls.
The 25 mm long threaded socket should project into
the silo so as to minimise effects due to condensation
and material build-up.
Heat insulation prevents condensation and build-up
on the steel plate.
Silo with concrete walls
Recommended:
Use the FTC52, FTC53 with screening.
Screening prevents the effects of moisture and build-up
between the active part of the probe and the silo roof
Steel plate;
connected to the
reinforcing steel
Concrete roof
Recommended with condensation:
Heat insulation
Steel plate
active part of
probe
Endress + Hauser 11
Different probe lengths
When mounting in a silo made of plastic, a counter
electrode must be mounted on the outside and at the
same height as the weight.
The length of the edge of the counter electrode
should be roughly the same length as the distance of
the weight to the silo wall.
Silo with plastic walls
Electrically conductive
bulk solid
(e.g. coal)
Bulk solid with high
dielectric constant
(e.g. meal)
Bulk solid with low
dielectric constant
(e.g. dried grain)
* L
B
(covered length):
With non-conductive materials having low dielectric constants, the rope probe must be approx. 5 %
(or minimum 250 mm) longer than the distance from the roof of the vessel to the switch point.
If it is not possible to select the correct L
B
for minimum detection with very long probes then a special version
with butterfly weight can be supplied as an accessory. The increased surface area of this weight ensures
that there is a large enough change in capacitance when the probe is covered by material. An L
B
of 250 mm
is normally sufficient.
Ground connection
Electrical
HF field
Surface area
e.g. 1 m
Distance
e.g. 1 m
Counter electrode
e.g. sheet metal plate
Weight
m
i
n
.
2
5
0
L
B
m
i
n
.
2
0
0
L L L
*
L
B
Limit
12 Endress + Hauser
Wiring Connections
General Information Load Limit Values
Note the limit values of the loads to which you want to connect the Solicap M.
Exceeding the load can destroy the electronic insert (or the relay contact in the EC24Z).
Fuse
Ensure that the rating of the fine-wire fuse corresponds to the maximum load to be connected;
the fine-wire fuse does not protect the electronic insert of the Solicap M.
Diameter of Wiring
Because of the small currents used, only small diameter cabling is required.
Low-cost cabling with diameters of 0.5 mm
2
to max. 1.5 mm
2
is recommended.
Grounding
The Solicap M must be grounded to give reliable operation free from interference. This is done by either
connecting it to a grounded silo with metal or reinforced concrete walls or else to the earth conductor PE.
If a counter electrode is connected to a silo made of plastic material then there must be a short ground
connection from the Solicap M to the counter electrode.
Explosion Protection
All local regulations and instructions given in certificates must be observed especially in regard to the creation
of an equipotential plane (earth bonding).
Cable Gland
Housing IP66: Cable gland in PA with Neoprene seal for cable diameter 59 mm.
Electronic Inserts
Terminal connections: for max. 2.5 mm
2
Measuring frequency: approx. 750 kHz for short probes, up to 4 m, switchable to approx. 450 kHz
for long probes
Initial capacitance, adjustable: to approx. 400 pF
Switching delay: approx. 0.5 s
Minimum/Maximum Fail-Safe Switching: selectable with rotary switch
Switching indication: red LED
Endress + Hauser 13
Connecting the EC20Z
Connecting in series to a load
The level limit switch Solicap M with electronic insert EC20Z must - like all switches - be connected in series
with the load (e.g. relays, microcontactors, lamps) to the power supply.
Connection voltage
The voltage across Terminal 1 and 2 of the electronic insert must be at least 21 V.
The power voltage must be correspondingly higher to compensate for the voltage drop across the connected
load.
Load cutoff
Note that loads connected in series are not completely disconnected from the power supply if the electronic
switch in the electronic insert of the Solicap M cuts off (blocks) with the level alarm.
Because of the current requirements of the electronics, a small residual current still flows through the
external load.
When the load is a relay with a very small retaining current, then the relay may not de-energise. In this case
connect an additional load in parallel to the relay, e.g. a resistor or signal lamp.
Power supply U~: 21 V250 V, 50/60 Hz
Connected loads, short-term (max. 40 ms):
max. 1.5 A;
max. 375 VA with 250 V;
max. 36 VA with 24 V
Maximum voltage drop: 11 V
Connected loads, continuous:
max. 350 mA;
max. 87 VA with 250 V;
max. 8.4 VA with 24 V
Minimum load current with 250 V: 10 mA (2.5 VA)
Minimum load current with 24 V: 20 mA (0.5 VA)
Residual current (eff.): < 5 mA
U
1-2
~:
R:
F:
M:
E:
U
R
:
21 V...250 V
across Terminals 1 and 2 of the EC20Z
Connected (external) load; e.g. relay
Fine-wire fuse, load-dependent
Ground connection to silo or to counter
electrode
Grounding
Voltage drop between the load R and the
fine-wire fuse
Connecting the Solicap M with EC20Z electronic insert
EC20Z
U
R
R
L1 N
min. 21 V + U
max. 250 V
R
U~:
E
M
PE
F
1 2
U ~
1 - 2
Power supply
14 Endress + Hauser
Transistor circuit for load
The load connected to Terminal 3 is switched by a transistor, contactless and therefore without bouncing.
Terminal 3 has a positive signal with normal switching.
The transistor is blocked on level alarm or with a power failure.
Protection against voltage peaks
Connecting to an instrument with a high inductance: a voltage limiter should be connected.
Power supply U=: 10 V55 V
Superimposed AC voltage Upp: max. 5 V
Current consumption: max. 15 mA
Load connection: Open Collector; PNP
Switching voltage: max. 55 V
Connected load, short-term (max. 1 s): max. 1 A
Connected load, continuous: max. 350 mA
Protected against reverse polarity
PNP connection
F:
R:
M:
E:
Fine-wire fuse, load-dependent
Connected load, e.g. PLC, PCS, relay
electrode
Grounding
EC22Z
R
L+ L
F
1 2 3
U=: 10 V...55 V
E
M
PE
(+)
Endress + Hauser 15
Relay contact for load
The load is connected over a potential-free relay contact (change-over contact).
The relay contact breaks the connection between Terminal 3 and Terminal 4 on level alarm or with a power
failure.
Protection against voltage peaks and short-circuiting
Protect the relay contact by connecting a spark barrier to instruments with high inductance.
A fine-wire fuse (load-dependent) can protect the relay contact if a short-circuit occurs.
Power supply:
U=: 20 V125 V (in hazardous area)
U=: 20 V200 V (in non hazardous area)
or
U~: 21 V250 V, 50/60 Hz
Current consumption (eff.): max. 5 mA
Peak inrush current: max. 200 mA, max. 5 ms
Pulse current: max. 50 mA, max. 5 ms
Pulse frequency: approx. 1.5 s
Output: potential-free change-over contact
Contact load capacity:
U~ max. 250 V, I~ max. 4 A,
P~ max. 1000 VA (cos = 1) or P~ max. 500 VA, cos = 0.7
U= max. 100 V, I= max. 4 A,
P= max. 100 W
Operating life: min. 10
5
switchings at max. contact load
Additional switching delay: max. 1.5 s
Relay output
F1:
F2:
M:
E:
Fine-wire fuse
200 mA, semi-time lag recommended
Fine-wire fuse to protect the relay contact,
load-dependent
electrode
Grounding
E
M
(PE)
EC24Z
r u a +
L1 N
F
2
F
1
1 2 4 3 5
U~
U=
: 21 V...250 V
or
: 20 V...125 V
U=: 20 V...200 V
U~
U=
or
Power supply Potential-free
change-over contact
(in hazardous area)
(in non hazardous area)
16 Endress + Hauser
Connecting the EC17Z Normally the white electronic insert EC17Z is fitted in the probe head and screwed tight.
Before fitting, connect the earth connection between terminal 6 and the probe head housing. It is important to
select the correct bridge to terminals 3 to 5:
Bridge 45 is standard for connecting to Nivotester FTC470Z, FTC471Z, FTC520Z, FTC521Z,
Silometer FMC671Z, FMC676Z and Prolevel FMC661.
Bridge 34 should be connected if the probe projects into conductive material that forms a build-up.
Use a two-wire screened installation cable for wiring up the Nivotester, Silometer or Prolevel.
Ground the screen at both ends; if this is not possible, ground the screen to the sensor housing at one end.
Comply with explosion protection regulations.
Screw the housing lid and the cable entries tight to prevent the ingress of moisture into the probe head housing.
For the greatest possible accuracy, recalibrate after replacing the electronic insert.
Connection to the Nivotester, Silometer or Prolevel
1 2 3 4 5 6
EC17Z
7 8
11 12
z4 z2
91 92
d4 d2
+
Nivotester FTC470Z, FTC471Z
Nivotester FTC520Z, FTC521Z
Nivotester FTC625, FTC325 PFM
Bridge 4-5 when connecting
FTC470Z, FTC471Z,
FTC625, FTC325 PFM,
FMC671Z, FMC676Z,
FMC661
Silometer FMC671Z, FMC676Z
(Input level limit)
Prolevel FMC661
(Input level limit)
or
or
or
or
Bridge 3-4 with conductive
build-up on the probe
Earth connection
Electronic insert
Probe
Endress + Hauser 17
Connecting the EC27Z Connect the probe in accordance with the following figures. Connect the probe in accordance with the
following figures.
If the electronic insert is used in the protection housing, then the cable to the probe should be as short as
possible because the capacitance of the coaxial cable is approx. 50 pF/m.
If the equipment is connected to monitor the probe, then ensure that the metal vessel or the counter electrode
has a galvanic connection with the boss of the probe.
In place of the small round probe head housing with one cable entry, a large square probe head housing with
two cable entries may also be fitted. In this case a separate connection box is no longer necessary.
Standard two-core installation cable or two cores of a multi-core cable can be used for connecting the
Nivotester, provided nothing else is specified for explosion-hazardous area operation.
Screw the housing lid and the cable entries tight to prevent the ingress of moisture into the probe head housing.
For the greatest possible accuracy, recalibrate after replacing the electronic insert.
Any sensor with monitoring of the electronic insert and
the cable to the Nivotester
Any sensor with monitoring of the electronic insert,
the cable to the Nivotester and the earth connection to the
metal vessel or the counter electrode
Any fully insulated sensor with monitoring of the electronic
insert, the cable to the Nivotester, the probe insulation and
the earth connection to the metal vessel or the counter
electrode
1 2 3 4 5 6
EC27Z
11 ()
12 (+)
Connection to Nivotester
FTC625
Bridges
Earth connection
in probe head
Metal vessel
1 2 3 4 5 6
EC27Z
11 ()
12 (+)
FTC625
Earth connection
in probe head
Probe head housing
with 1 cable entry
Earth connection
on metal vessel or
counter electrode
Connection box
1 2 3 4 5 6
EC27Z
11 ()
12 (+)
FTC625
Earth connection
in probe head
Probe head housing
with 2 cable entries
Earth connection
on metal vessel or
counter electrode
Connection box
18 Endress + Hauser
Adjustment and Calibration Features
Adjustment and Calibration
Features at EC2xZ
For calibrating, the Solicap M should be adjusted to the capacitance value of the capacitor formed by the probe
and wall of the silo.
The rotary switches and adjusting elements for calibration are on the electronic insert in the housing.
Directly beside these calibration elements are the power connections with voltages up to 250 V.
Only use a screwdriver which has insulation as far as the blade or else tape over the terminals with insulating
tape before calibration.
Capacitance Calibration
For capacitance calibration, the silo must be empty or the level of material must be at least 200 mm below the
probe.
Turn on the power supply.
Carry out the calibration according to the next three diagrams (Page 19/20).
Ensure that no water gets into the housing while calibrating.
Connect EC61Z and Nivotester with 3-wire
instrument cable with resistance of up to 25
per wire.
When routing through strong electromagnetic
fields, use a screened cable, if possible with
twisted wires.
Only earth the screening on one side.
Earth the probe at terminal 6 of the electronic
insert.
10 9 8
121113
1 2 3 4 5 6
EC61Z
+15 V
Nivotester
FTC420,
FTC421,
FTC422
Nivotester
FTC325 3-WIRE
Signal 3...12 V
or
Bridge 1-2
for conductive
deposit on
probe
(FTC420/421)
or two-point
control
(FTC422)
L00-FTC5xxxx-03-06-06-xx-001
Operating elements on the electronic insert
Rotary switch for fail-safe mode
Rotary switch for probe length
Adjusting elements for capacitance, fine and coarse
LED to indicate switching mode
Endress + Hauser 19
Capacitance Calibration,
Initial Settings
These initial settings must be done before the capacitance calibration
Capacitance Calibration
Capacitance calibration must be carried out both slowly and carefully
MAX
< 4m
min. 200
Silo empty
Power supply
On
Switch on power supply
Set the maximum fail-safe mode
Set the probe length
Turn coarse adjuster
clockwise
until it reaches the stop
Turn fine adjuster
counterclockwise
until it reaches the stop
LED off
Coarse
Fine
When using products that cause build-up, turn the fine adjuster further clockwise by approx. 2 index marks
Turn the coarse adjuster
- slowly -
counterclockwise
until
Turn the fine adjuster
- slowly -
clockwise
until
the LED goes out
the LED lights up
20 Endress + Hauser
Adjusting for Material
Characteristics
Accurate adjustment ensures high switching reliability
When the probe is covered with non-conductive bulk solid having a low dielectric constant, then the
Solicap M only switches when the probe is completely covered with the material.
The degree of covering depends on the calibration.
Turning the fine calibrating element clockwise causes the Solicap M to become less sensitive.
Function Control With the probe uncovered, touch the central retaining screw of the electronic insert with a screwdriver,
holding it by the insulated handle. This simulates the bulk solid covering the probe.
The LED indicates a change of status.
This is only a function control test of the instrument.
Please also check for the correct operation for limit detection by filling and emptying the silo at the installation
point!
Turn the fine adjuster clockwise
through
High dielectric constant,
high conductivity
with build-up approx. 1 to 2 divisions
no build-up approx. 2 to 4 divisions
with build-up approx. 4 to 6 divisions
Low dielectric constant,
low conductivity
no build-up approx. 1 division
Material characteristics (Bulk solid)
Endress + Hauser 21
Technical Data
Operating Data
* non-Ex with steel rope
Probes
Process connections Parallel thread: G 1 A acc. to DIN ISO228/I
Material: steel or stainless steel 1.4571
Probe length tolerances:
Solicap M FTC51 FTC52 FTC53
Process temperature in silo
20...+70 C 20...+ 80 C 20...+ 60 C
compact instrumentation
with EC20Z, EC22Z, EC24Z
separate instrumentation
20...+80 C 20...+120 C 20...+120 C
Process pressure p
e
,
acc. to process temperature
up to10 bar/60 C
up to 5 bar/80 C
pressureless pressureless
Max. permissible load on probe
30 Nm lateral
30 kN vertical * 60 kN vertical *
20 kN vertical 40 kN vertical
Min. dielectric constant
r
of material 2.5
Ambient temperature for housing 20...+60 C
Storage temperature 40...+85 C
Protection class IP65/IP66 according to EN 60529
Solicap M FTC51 FTC52 FTC53
Material Rod or Rope Steel /
1.4571
Steel /
1.4401
Steel /
1.4401
Probe diameter (without insulation) 18 mm 8 mm 12 mm
Insulation / Dimensions
PE /
25 mm
PA /
10 mm
PVC /
16 mm
EC2xZ
PA /
14 mm
EC17Z/61Z
EC27Z
fully insulated
partial insulated PE /
25 mm
EC17Z/61Z
EC27Z
POM /
25 mm
EC2xZ
Polyolefin /
12 mm
Polyolefin /
15 mm
Electrical connection to bulk solid fully / partial insulated Steel rope connected to weight
Probe length Tolerance
to 1 m +0 mm, 5 mm
to 3 m +0 mm, 10 mm
to 6 m +0 mm, 20 mm
to 22 m +0 mm, 30 mm
22 Endress + Hauser
Ordering Information
Solicap M FTC51
10 Approval
A Non-hazardous area
D ATEX 1/3 D
E ATEX 1/2 D
Y Special version
20 Process connection
G1 Thread ISO228 G 1, steel
G2 Thread ISO228 G 1, 316Ti
Y9 Special version
30 Inactive section
A Not selected
Y Special version
40 Rod material
A Steel
B 316Ti
Y Special version
50 Probe insulation
1 fully insulated
5 100 mm L2, partial insulated
9 Special version
60 Probe length, L=200-4000 mm
1 ...... mm L,
2 350 mm L,
9 Special version
70 Housing, Cable entry
C Aluminium IP66, Thread NPT
D Aluminium IP66, Thread G
E Aluminium IP66, Gland M20
L Polyester IP66, Thread NPT
M Polyester IP66, Thread G
O Polyester IP66, Gland M20
Y Special version
80 Electronics, Output
0 Not selected (for EC2xZ)
A Not selected (for EC61Z/17Z/27Z)
C EC17Z, PFM limit switch
D EC27Z, PFM limit switch
B EC61Z, 3-wire limit switch
1 EC20Z, 2-wire 21...250 V AC, limit switch
2 EC22Z, 3-wire PNP 10... 55 V DC, limit switch
4 EC24Z, Relay 21...250 V AC / 125 V DC, limit switch
Y Special version
FTC51- Product designation
Endress + Hauser 23
The Solicap M FTC51 is designed using these basic modules:
with EC2xZ with EC2xZ
L00-FTC5Xxxxx-06-06-xx-en-006 L00-FTC5Xxxxx-06-06-xx-en-007
25
18
2
5
9
5
a
c
t
i
v
e
p
r
o
b
e
r
o
d
P
r
o
b
e
l
e
n
g
t
h
L
18
25
2
5
Partial insulation
Steel rod
a
p
p
r
o
x
.
1
4
0
P
r
o
b
e
l
e
n
g
t
h
L
P
a
r
t
i
a
l
i
n
s
u
l
a
t
i
o
n
L
2
Electronic insert
in housing
Housing
Process connection
Probe
P
r
o
b
e
l
e
n
g
t
h
L
24 Endress + Hauser
Solicap M FTC52
10 Approval
D ATEX 1/3 D
E ATEX 1/2 D
Y Special version
Y9 Special version
30 Inactive section, L3=100-2000 mm
A Not selected
B ...... mm L3, steel
C ...... mm L3, 316Ti
Y Special version
40 Rope, Tension weight
C Steel, Cast iron, blank
D 316, 316Ti, blank
Y Special version
50 Probe insulation, L2=250-500 mm
1 Rope, fully insulated
2 ...... mm L2, partial insulated
9 Special version
1 ........ mm L
2 2500 mm L
3 6000 mm L
9 Special version
Y Special version
Y Special version
Endress + Hauser 25
with EC2xZ
with EC17Z, EC27Z, EC61Z with EC17Z, EC27Z, EC61Z
Electronic insert
in housing
Housing
Process connection
Probe
P
r
o
b
e
l
e
n
g
t
h
L
Weight
20
2
5
1
0
2
P
r
o
b
e
l
e
n
g
t
h
L
Cable 8
Steel or 316Ti
Steel or 316Ti
P
a
r
t
i
a
l
i
n
s
u
l
a
t
i
o
n
L
2
38
34
2
5
2
0
1
0
2
P
r
o
b
e
l
e
n
g
t
h
L
Cable 8
Steel or 316Ti
Steel or 316Ti
P
a
r
t
i
a
l
i
n
s
u
l
a
t
i
o
n
L
2
S
c
r
e
e
n
i
n
g
L
3
26 Endress + Hauser
Solicap M FTC53
10 Approval
D ATEX 1/3 D
E ATEX 1/2 D
Y Special version
Y9 Special version
30 Inactive section, L3=100-2000 mm
A Not selected
B ...... mm L3, steel
C ...... mm L3, 316Ti
Y Special version
40 Rope, Tension weight
E Steel, Cast iron, blank
G 316, 316Ti, blank
Y Special version
50 Probe insulation, L2=250-500 mm
1 Rope, fully insulated
2 ...... mm L2, partial insulated
9 Special version
1 ........ mm L
2 2500 mm L
3 6000 mm L
9 Special version
Y Special version
Y Special version
Endress + Hauser 27
with EC2xZ
with EC17Z, EC27Z, EC61Z with EC17Z, EC27Z, EC61Z
Electronic insert
in housing
Housing
Process connection
Probe
P
r
o
b
e
l
e
n
g
t
h
L
Weight
Insulation
24
2
5
m
a
x
.
1
1
2
P
r
o
b
e
l
e
n
g
t
h
L
Cable 12
Steel or 316Ti
Weight
Cast iron or
316Ti
Housing and
cover in
Alu or PBT
Steel or 316Ti
Partial
insulation
in PC
P
a
r
t
i
a
l
i
n
s
u
l
a
t
i
o
n
L
2
38
34
2
5
2
0
m
a
x
.
1
1
2
P
r
o
b
e
l
e
n
g
t
h
L
Cable 12
Steel or 316Ti
Weight
Cast iron or
316Ti
Housing and
cover in
Alu or PBT
Steel or 316Ti
Steel screening
P
a
r
t
i
a
l
i
n
s
u
l
a
t
i
o
n
L
2
S
c
r
e
e
n
i
n
g
L
3
28 Endress + Hauser
Accessories
Seal for thread G 1 A
in elastomer/fibre (asbestos-free)
supplied
Butterfly Weight for FTC52 or FTC53
Material: steel
Weight: approx. 3.2 kg
Protective sun cover for aluminium housing
Material: polyamide
Dimensions of butterfly weight (accessory).
This weight provides a larger capacitance difference
for rope probes.
2
1
0
2
5
0
1
8
0
Dimensions of protective sun cover (accessory).
This cover prevents condensation in the housing.
92
7
7
1
3
2
Endress + Hauser 29
Supplementary Documentation
Technical Information Electronic insert EC17Z
TI268F
Electronic insert EC27Z
TI269F
Electronic insert EC61Z
TI267F
Nivotester FTC625
TI370F
Nivotester FTC325
TI380F
Minicap FTC260, FTC262
for applications where high material build-up is expected.
TI287F
Safety Instructions Safety Instructions (ATEX)
4 0 II 1/2 D or II 1 D, EEx ia IIC
XA094F
Safety Instructions (ATEX)
4 0 II 1/3 D, [EEx ia] IIB
XA137F
Details When Ordering
Order Code
Probe length for FTC51, FTC52, FTC53
or special version
Accessories (e.g. protective sun cover)
Length of screening
Length of part insulation
30 Endress + Hauser
Endress + Hauser 31
International Head Quarter
Endress+Hauser
GmbH+Co. KG
Instruments International
Colmarer Str. 6
79576 Weil am Rhein
Deutschland
Tel. +49 76 21 9 75 02
Fax +49 76 21 9 75 34 5
www.endress.com
info@ii.endress.com
TI362F/00/en/11.04
52010868
SL/FM+SGML6.0 ProMoDo
52010868
8+2
PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES
BER - UNTERDRUCKVENTILE
SOUPAPES DE SECURITE
VALVOLE DI SICUREZZA CONTROLLO PRESSIONE
A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d

W
A
M
G
R
O
U
P
CATALOGUE No. 03041
ISSUE
A2
DATE OF LATEST UPDATE
02.01
CREATION DATE
CIRCULATION
100
VCP
PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE - BER - UNTERDRUCKKLAPPE
SOUPAPE DE SECURITE - VALVOLA DI SICUREZZA CONTROLLO PRESSIONE
TECHNICAL DATA - TECHNISCHE DATEN - DONNEES TECHNIQUES - DATI TECNICI
* calibration by manufacturer:
werksseitig tariert auf:
calibre par le constructeur :
tarata dal costruttore a:
-20 mm H
2
O / 500 mm H
2
O
1 = mild steel
Normalstahlahrung
acier normal
acciaio al carbonio
2 = St.st 304
Edelstahl 1.4301
INOX 304
AISI 304
Type
Pressure
Ubrdruck
Surpression
Sovrapressione
Negative pressure
Unterdruck
Depression
Depressione
kg
VCP273 B 280 1000 mm H
2
O * -20 120 mm H
2
O * 9.5
.
All the products described in
this catalogue are manufac-
tured according to WAM S.p.A.
Quality System procedures.
The Companys Quality System,
certified in July 1994 according to
International Standards UNI EN
ISO 9002-94 and extended to UNI
EN ISO 9001-94 in November,
1999, ensures that the entire pro-
duction process, starting from the
processing of the order to the
technical service after delivery, is
carried out in a controlled man-
ner that guarantees the quality
standard of the product.
Alle in diesem Katalog beschrie-
benen Erzeugnisse werden in
Konformitt mit dem Qualitts-
system der WAM S.p.A. herge-
stellt.
Das im Juli 1994 zertifizierte Qua-
littssystem entspricht der Norm
UNI EN ISO 9002-94 (im Novem-
ber 1999 auf UNI EN ISO 9001-
94 erweitert) und gewhrleistet
dem Kunden eine strenge Quali-
ttskontrolle in jeder Phase des
Produktionprozesses bis hin zum
Kundendienst nach Auslieferung
der Ware.
Tous les produits dcrits dans ce
caetalogue ont t ralis selon
les modalits oprationnelles d-
finies Systme de Qualit de
WAM S.p.A.
Le systme de Qualit de len-
treprise, certifi au mois de juillet
1994 en conformit aux Normes
Internationales UNI EN ISO
9002-94 et successivement ten-
du UNI EN ISO 9001-94 au
mois de novembre 1999, est en
mesure dassurer que le proc-
d entier de production, partir
de la formulation de la comman-
de jusquau service technique
aprs la livraison, soit effectu de
manire contrle et approprie
afin de garantir le standard de
qualit du produit.
Tutti i prodotti descritti in questo
catalogo sono stati realizzati se-
condo modalit operative definite
Sistema Qualit di WAM S.p.A.
Il Sistema Qualit aziendale, cer-
tificato dal luglio 1994 in confor-
mit alle Normative Internazionali
UNI EN ISO 9002-94 e successi-
vamente esteso alle Normative In-
ternazionale UNI EN ISO 9001-94
nel novembre 1999, in grado di
assicurare che lintero processo
produttivo, dalla formulazione del-
lordine fino allassistenza tecnica
successiva alla consegna, venga
effettuato in modo controllato ed
adeguato a garantire lo standard
qualitativo del prodotto.
Possible deviations due to modi-
fications and/or manufacturing
tolerances are reserved.
Abweichungen infolge nderun-
gen und/oder aufgrund von Ferti-
gungstoleranzen sind vorbehal-
ten.
Nous nous rservons des carte-
ments ventuels ds des modifi-
cations et/ou des tolrances
dusinage.
Ci riserviamo eventuali scosta-
menti dovuti a modifiche e/o tol-
leranze di lavorazione.
INDEX
INHALTSVERZEICHNIS
INDEX
INDICE
03041.T. INDEX
INDEX INDEX INHALTSVERZEICHNIS INDEX INDICE
TECHNICAL TECHNISCHER CATALOGUE CATALOGO
CATALOGUE KATALOG TECHNIQUE TECNICO
T.01. DESCRIPTION AND BESCHREIBUNG UND DESCRIPTION ET DESCRIZIONE E
TECHNICAL TECHNISCHE MERKMALE CARACTERISTIQUES CARATTERISTICHE
CHARACTERISTICS TECHNIQUES TECNICHE
T.02. ORDER CODES BESTELLCODES CODES DE CODICI DI
COMMANDE ORDINAZIONE
MAINTENANCE WARTUNGS- CATALOGUE CATALOGO DI
CATALOGUE KATALOG DENTRETIEN MANUTENZIONE
M.01.-- PACKAGING DATA KOLLIMASSE UND EMBALLAGES ET USO E MANUTENZIONE
GEWICHTE ENTRETIEN
M.02. OPERATION AND BETRIEBS- UND UTILISATION USO E
MAINTENANCE WARTUNGSANLEITUNG ET ENTRETIEN MANUTENZIONE
SPARE PARTS ERSATZTEIL- CATALOGUE PIECES CATALOGO
CATALOGUE KATALOG DE RECHANGE RICAMBI
R.01. SPARE PARTS ERSATZTEILE PIECES DE RICAMBI
RECHANGE
1
2
3
VCP -
VCP -
VCP -
VCP -
03.00
1
T
E
C
H
N
I
C
A
L

C
A
T
A
L
O
G
U
E
8+2
TECHNICAL CATALOGUE
TECHNISCHER KATALOG
CATALOGUE TECHNIQUE
CATALOGO TECNICO
A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d

W
A
M
G
R
O
U
P
CATALOGUE No. 03041.T
ISSUE
A2
02.01
CREATION DATE
CIRCULATION
100
VCP -
VCP -
VCP -
VCP -
03.00
DESCRIPTION AND TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS
BESCHREIBUNG UND TECHNISCHE MERKMALE
DESCRIPTION ET CARACTERISTIQUES TECHNIQUES
DESCRIZIONE E CARATTERISTICHE TECNICHE 03041.T. 01.01
1
DESCRIPTION
VCP - Pressure relief valve
BESCHREIBUNG
VCP - ber-Unterdruckventil
DESCRIPTION
VCP - Soupape de securit
DESCRIZIONE
VCP - Valvola di sicurezza con-
trollo pressione
NOMINAL SIZES
NENNWEITEN
TAILLES NOMINALES
GRANDEZZE NOMINALI
VCP 273
FLANGES
- According to WAM
VALVE BODY
- Carbon steel powder coated RAL
7001
- Stainless steel AISI 304
- Stainless steel AISI 316
VALVE DISC
- With valve made from carbon
steel = black neoprene
- With valve made from stainless
steel 304 and 316 = DURAC
white
WEATHER PROTECTION COVER
- Stainless steel 304
Unless otherwise specified, all
the dimensions are given in milli-
metres.
FLANSCHE
- Gem WAM-Werksnorm
GEHUSE
- Stahl pulverbeschichtet in RAL
7001
- Edelstahl 1.4301
- Edelstahl 1.4401
VENTILTELLER
- Bei Ventil aus Stahl = Neopren
schwarz
- Bei Ventil aus Edelstahl 1.4301
und 1.4401 = DURAC wei
WETTERHAUBE
- Edelstahl 14301
Wenn nicht anders angegeben,
alle Maangaben in Millimetern.
BRIDE
- Suivant les normes WAM
CORPS
- Acier au carbone peint pou-
dre RAL 7001
- Inox AISI 304
- Inox AISI 316
DISQUE DE FERMETURE
- Soupape en acier au carbone =
neoprne noir
- Soupapes en AISI 304 et en AISI
316 = DURAC blanc
COUVERCLE
- Aisi 304
Sauf indication contraire, toutes
les dimensions sont exprimes
en millimtres.
FLANGE
- Secondo norme WAM
CORPO
- Acciaio al carbonio, verniciato a
polvere RAL 7001
- AISI 304
- AISI 316
DISCO CHIUSURA
- Valvola in acciaio al carbonio con
neoprene nero
- Valvola in AISI 304- AISI 316 con
DURAC bianco
COPERCHIO
- Aisi 304
Se non specificato altrimenti, tut-
te le dimensioni sono in millime-
tri.
03.00
VCP -
VCP -
VCP -
VCP -
03041.T. 02.01
ORDER CODES
BESTELLCODES
CODES DE COMMANDE
CODICI DI ORDINAZIONE
VCP 273
Variant
Variante
Variante
Variante
1- Carbon steel / Stahl / Acier au carbone / Acciaio al carb.
2- AISI 304 / 1.4301
3- AISI 316 / 1.4401
1 B
Valve body material
Gehusewerkstoff
Matriau corps soupape
Materiale corpo valvola
External pipe diameter
Auenrohrdurchmesser
Diamtre tube extrieur
Diametro tubo esterno 273 mm
Pressure relief valve
ber-Unterdruckventil
Soupape de scurit
Valvola controllo pressione
1
2
M

A

I

N

T

E

N

A

N

C

E
8+2
INSTALLATION, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
EINBAU-, BETRIEBS-UND WARTUNGSANLEITUNG
INSTALLATION, UTILISATION ET ENTRETIEN
INSTALLAZIONE, USO E MANUTENZIONE
A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d

W
A
M
G
R
O
U
P
CATALOGUE No. 03041.M
ISSUE
A2
02.01
CREATION DATE
CIRCULATION
100
VCP -
VCP -
VCP -
VCP -
03.00
03041.M. 01.01
2
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
BETRIEBS- UND WARTUNGSANLEITUNG
UTILISATION ET ENTRETIEN
USO E MANUTENZIONE
A) ADDRESS OF LOCAL
DEALER OR SERVICE POINT
A) ANSCHRIFT DES LOKALEN
HNDLERS ODER KUNDEN-
DIENSTES
A) ADRESSE DU REVENDEUR
OU DU SERVICE APRES -VEN-
TE LOCAL
A) INDIRIZZO RIVENDITORE O
PUNTO DI ASSISTENZA
LOCALE
B) EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
For a correct identification of the
equipment please refer to the code
number in the acknow ledgement
of order, the invoice and on the
equipment itself.
C) CONTRA-INDICATIONS
If the customer follows normal pre-
cautions for this type of equipment
together with the instructions given
in this manual, operation is safe.
It is to be noted, however, that sticky
or corrosive materials may damage
the VCP valve by obstructing the
flow of the material or corroding
parts of the valve that affect its op-
eration.
WAM does not accept responsibili-
ty for mal functi on or damages
caused to things or persons if VCP
valve is used with sticky or corro-
sive materials.
Note also that safety systems for
toxic and/or poisonous products
have to include means that make it
impossible for the product to es-
cape into the environment in ac-
cordance wi th appl i cabl e heal th
and safety regulations.
The plant manufacturer or fitter has
to provide for suitable safety meas-
ures in accordance with the stand-
ards in force in order to avoid the
emission of toxic, flammable, ex-
plosive and contaminating prod-
ucts into the environment. This is
parti cul arl y i mportant because
emi ssi ons take pl ace when the
VCP Pressure Relief Valve is acti-
vated.
The val ve must not be put i nto
service before the machine or plant
it has been fitted to has been de-
clared in conformity with the regu-
lations of the directive 14/06/1982
(89/392/ECC).
It is the plant designers / plant fit-
ters responsibility to design and
install all necessary protection in
order to avoid that breaking and/or
yielding of the quipment or of parts
of it might damage people and/or
parts of the plant.
B) IDENTIFIKATION
Zur korrekten Identifikation auf den
Bestellcode in der Auftragsbest-
tigung, in der Rechnung und auf
der Verpackung Bezug nehmen.
C) KONTRAINDIKATIONEN
Keine, sofern alle allgemeinen Si-
cherheitsvorschriften sowie die in
dieser Betriebs- und Wartungsan-
leitung gemachten Angaben be-
folgt werden.
Kl ebri ge oder korrosi ve Medi en
knnen das VCP Ventil beschdi-
gen, indem sie entweder den Ma-
terialflu behindern oder wichtige
Funktionsteile korrodieren.
Der Herstel l er berni mmt kei ne
Haftung fr Schden an Personen
oder Dingen, wenn das VCP Ventil
fr klebrige oder korrosive Medien
eingesetzt wird.
Des weiteren ist zu beachten, da
i m Ei nvernehmen mi t den ei n-
schl gi gen Si cherhei tsbesti m-
mungen bei toxischen und/oder
giftigen Medien Vorrichtungen vor-
gesehen werden mssen, die ein
Entweichen des Staubes in die At-
mosphre unmglich machen.
Der Anlagenbauer bzw. -aufsteller
mu in Vereinbarung mit den am
Aufstel l ungsort gel tenden Vor-
schriften entsprechende Schutz-
manahmen treffen, damit giftige,
feuergefhrl i che, expl osi ve und
ansteckende Produkte nicht an die
Umwelt abgegeben werden. Dies
ist deshalb besonders wichtig, weil
beim Ansprechen des VCP-Druck-
ausgleichsventils Emissionen er-
folgen.
Das Gert darf nicht in Betrieb ge-
nommen werden, bevor die Anla-
ge oder Maschine, in die es einge-
baut wurde mit den Vorschriften der
Besti mmungen vom 14.06.1982
(89/392/ECC) fr konform erklrt
wurden.
Es liegt in der Verantwortung des
Anlagenplaners bzw. aufstellers,
alle notwendigen Schutzvorrichtun-
gen vorzusehen, welche es verhin-
dern, dass durch einen Gerte-
oder Teiledefekt Personen- und/
oder Sachschden verursacht wer-
den.
B) PLAQUE DIDENTIFICATION
Pour identifier correctement la van-
ne, vous devez vous rfrer au code
qui se trouve sur la confirmation
de commande, sur la facture et sur
la plaque qui se trouve sur lem-
ballage.
C) CONTRE-INDICATIONS
POUR LUTILISATION DE LA VANNE
Il nexiste aucune contreindication
pour lutilisation de la vanne si vous
prenez les prcautions normales
pour les machines de ce genre et
les indications contenues dans ce
catalogue.
Il faut particulirement attention
avec des matriaux adhsifs et/ou
corrosifs puisquils pourraient cau-
ser des dommages la soupape
en obstruiant le passage de flux
ou en corrodant des lments fon-
damentaux pour le fonctionnement
de la soupape.
Au cas o la VCP est utilise pour
des poussires corrosives et/ou
adhsives WAM dcline toute res-
ponsabilit pour des malfonction-
nements et des dommages des
personnes et des choses.
Nous rappelons quen prsence
de produits dangereux, nocifs au
contact et/ou linhalation, inflam-
mables, explosifs et dangereux du
point de vue sanitaire et/ou bact-
riologique et/ou viral le construc-
teur de la centrale ou linstallateur
devra prvoir des dispositifs appro-
pris pour viter que tels produits
sont mis dans lenvironnement
(en accord avec les prscrptions
sanitaires de lendroit dinstalla-
tion) parce que la soupape VCP
prvoit lmission du produit com-
me scurit.
Il faut aussi rappeler que, selon les
normes sanitaires en vigueur, les
systmes de scuri t pour des
produits toxiques doivent rendre
impossible la fuite de poussire
dans latmosphre.
Il est interdit de mettre en fonction
la vanne avant que linstallation
dans laquelle elle doit tre instal-
le soit dclare conforme aux dis-
posi ti ons de l a di recti ve 14/06/
1982 (89/392/ECC).
Dans ce cadre il est la responsabi-
lit du constructeur de linstallation
ou de linstallateur de projeter et
dinstaller tout quipement de pro-
tection ncessaire afin dviter que
des ruptures et/ou des tassements
de la machine et/ou des parties del-
le puissent causer de dgts des
personnes et/ou des choses.
B) INTERPRETAZIONE DELLA TAR-
GHETTA
Per una corretta identificazione del-
la macchina, bisogna fare riferi-
mento al codice che si trova sulla
conferma dordine, sulla fattura e
sulla targhetta posta sullimballo.
C) CONTROINDICAZIONI
ALLUSO
Non vi nessuna controindicazio-
ne alluso, se vengono osservate
le normali precauzioni per compo-
nenti di sicurezza di questo tipo uni-
tamente alle indicazioni riportate su
questo manuale.
Particolare attenzione deve tuttavia
essere posta in presenza di mate-
riali adesivi e/o corrosivi in quanto
possono arrecare danni alla valvo-
la VCP ostruendo il passaggio del
flusso o corrodendo elementi fon-
damentali ai fini del funzionamen-
to, perci la ditta WAM declina ogni
responsabi l i t per mal funzi ona-
menti e danni arrecati a cose e per-
sone.
Ricordiamo che in presenza di pro-
dotti pericolosi nocivi al contatto e/
o allinalazione, infiammabili, esplo-
sivi e pericolosi dal punto di vista
sanitario e/o batteriologico, e/o vi-
rale, limpiantista e/o linstallatore
dovranno prevedere idonei dispo-
sitivi ad evitare che tali prodotti sia-
no sparsi nellambiente circostan-
te (in accordo con le prescrizioni
sanitarie nel luogo dellinstallazio-
ne) perch la VCP prevede proprio
lemissione del prodotto come si-
curezza.
E inoltre vietato mettere in funzio-
ne prima che la macchina/impian-
to nel quale devono essere instal-
late sia dichiarato conforme alle di-
sposizioni della direttiva 14/06/1982
(89/392/ECC).
In questambito cura dellimpian-
tista / installatore predisporre ed in-
stallare tutti gli accorgimenti / pro-
tezioni al fine di evitare danni a cose
o persone in caso di rotture e con-
seguente caduta di pezzi della mac-
china.
02.01/
03.00
VCP -
VCP -
VCP -
VCP -
03041.M. 01.02
D) TRASPORTO - RICEVIMEN-
TO
Al ricevimento della merce con-
trollare se la tipologia e la quanti-
t corrispondono con i dati della
conferma dordine.
Eventuali danni devono essere fat-
ti presenti immediatamente per
iscritto nellapposito spazio della
lettera di vettura. Lautista ob-
bligato ad accettare un tale recla-
mo e lasciarne una copia a Voi.
Se la fornitura franco destino,
inviate il Vs. reclamo a noi, altri-
menti direttamente allo spedizio-
niere. Il risarcimento avviene sol-
tanto se avete fatto presente il
danno allatto del ricevimento.
Evitate ogni tipo di danneggiamen-
to durante lo scarico e le movimen-
tazioni; a tale scopo sollevare le
valvole impiegando i golfari previ-
sti. Tenete conto che si tratta di
materiale meccanico che deve es-
sere movimentato con cura.
Le valvole sono interamente as-
semblate presso il ns. stabilimen-
to ed inserite e spedite, unitamen-
te allanello sottovalvola, nellap-
posito imballo di cartone.
D1) IMBALLI E PESI
N.B.: I dati riportati non compren-
dono il peso di un eventuale im-
ballo cumulativo (pallet o altro).
Packaging - Dimensions
Verpackungmae
Emballage - encombrements
Imballo - Dimensioni
D) TRANSPORT AND RECEIPT
OF GOODS
On delivery, check that the na-
ture and quantity of the goods
comply with the acknowledge-
ment of order.
If any parts are damaged during
transport, immediately state your
claim in writing in the space pro-
vided on the consignment note
(way bill). The driver is obliged to
accept such a claim and to leave
you a copy. If you received the
goods free destination send your
claim directly to us or to your
shipping agent. If you fail to state
your claim immediately on re-
ceipt of the goods, acceptance
may be denied.
Avoid damaging the parts during
the unloading and handling oper-
ations; the valves should be lifted
using the eyebolts provided. The
components are mechanical parts
that have to be handled with care.
The valves are assembled at the
factory and packed in a cardboard
box with its connector spout.
D1) PACKAGING DATA
N.B.: The weights below do not
include any additional packaging
such as pallets or similar.
D) TRANSPORT - WARENEMP-
FANG
Bei Wareneingang vor dem Abla-
den prfen, ob die Ware in Be-
schaffenheit und Menge mit den
Angaben auf Lieferschein, Rech-
nung und Auftragsbesttigung
bereinstimmt.
Eventuelle Schden sofort schrift-
lich im Frachtbrief reklamieren, da
sptere Ansprche nicht mehr gel-
tend gemacht werden knnen. Der
Fahrer ist dazu verpflichtet, die Re-
klamation entgegenzunehmen und
dem Empfnger eine Kopie dieser
zu berlassen. Bei Lieferung frei
Haus Reklamation an den Lieferan-
ten schicken, in allen anderen Fl-
len an den Spediteur.
Beim Abladen Ware nicht be-
schdigen.
Bercksichtigen, da es sich um
mechanische Teile handelt, die
mit Vorsicht zu behandeln sind.
D1) KOLLIMASSE UND
GEWICHTE
N.B.: Die u.a. Gewichte beinhal-
ten keine zustzlichen Verpackun-
gen wie Paletten o..
D) TRANSPORT - RECEPTION
DE LA MARCHANDISE
Au moment o vous recevez la
marchandise, vrifiez bien que le
modle et la quantit correspon-
dent aux donnes indiques sur
le bulletin de livraison, sur la fac-
ture et sur la confirmation de
commande.
Si vous constatez des domma-
ges, vous devez immdiatement
le faire savoir en lcrivant dans
lemplacement prvu cet effet
sur la lettre de voiture. Le chauf-
feur a lobligation daccepter vo-
tre rclamation et de vous en lais-
ser une copie. Si la fourniture a
t livre franco destination, en-
voyez-nous votre rclamation, si-
non, envoyez-la directement au
transporteur.
Si vous ne rclamez pas les dom-
mages et intrts immdiate-
ment aprs avoir reu la mar-
chandise, votre rclamation ris-
que de ne pas tre accepte.
Veillez ne pas endommager la
marchandise durant le dcharge-
ment et la manutention.
Faites toujours extrmement at-
tention quand vous la dpla-cez.
D1) EMBALLAGES ET POIDS
N.B.: Les donnes ci-dessous ne
comprennent pas le poids dun
ventuel emballage supplmen-
taire (palette ou autre).
USO E MANUTENZIONE
Valve
Ventil
Soupape
Valvola
Weight - Gewicht - Poids - Peso (kg)
Nominal diameter - Nennweite - Diamtre nominal - Diametro nominale
VCP
273.1B
9.5
Single packaging included - Einzelverpackung inbegriffen - Emballage simple compris - Imballo singolo compreso
* Connecting ring included / Einschweizarge inklusive / Anneau de raccordement compris / Incluso anello sottovalvola
Valve
Ventil
Soupape
Valvola
Nominal diameter - Nennweite
Diamtre nominal - Diametro nominale
VCP
273
A B C
273.2B
9.5
400 400 340
04.00 /
2
VCP -
VCP -
VCP -
VCP -
03.00
03041.M. 01.03
USO E MANUTENZIONE
E) INSTALLATION
The valves have been preassem-
bled and tested at the factory.
E1 ) PREPARATION
Remove packing.
Check locking of the liftying eye.
Use the connector sleeve to trace
the hole to be made in the top of
silo.
Once the hole has been made
weld the connector sleeve to the
silo so that it is perfectly horizon-
tal (Fig.1).
Fasten the body of the valve to
the connector sleeve by tighten-
ing the clamp provided assembled
with the seal as shown in Fig.2.
E) EINBAU
Die Klappen sind werksseitig kom-
plett vormontiert und getestet.
E1) VORBEREITUNG
Gert auspacken.
Verschlu Kranse kontrollieren.
Einschweizarge zum Anreien
der ffnung im Silo- oder Behl-
terdach verwenden.
Nach dem Ausbrennen der ff-
nung die Zarge in waagerechter
Lage einschweien (Abb.1).
Ventil mittels der gelieferten
Spannschellenhlften an der Zar-
ge befestigen, nachdem zuvor die
Dichtung ordnungsgem einge-
legt wurde (Abb.2).
E) INSTALLATION
Nous fournissons nos vannes
dj quipes et testes.
E1) PREPARATION
Enlever lemballage.
Vrifier le serrage doeillet.
Utiliser lanneau de raccordement
pour tracer le trou prvoir sur la
sommit du silo.
Une fois effectu le trou souder
lanneau au silo de manire par-
faitement horizontale (fig.1).
Ensuite fixer le corps de la sou-
pape sur laanneau de raccorde-
ment en utilisant les deux demi-
colliers avec boulon aprs avoir
plac correctement le joint gar-
niture (fig.2).
E) INSTALLAZIONE:
Le valvole vengono fornite gi com-
plete e collaudate prima della con-
segna.
E1) PREPARAZIONE
Togliere limballo.
Verificare serraggio golfari.
Utilizzare lanello sottovalvola per
tracciare il foro da praticare sulla
sommit del silo.
Una volta eseguita la foratura sal-
dare al silo lanello sottovalvola in
modo perfettamente orizzontale
(fig.1).
Fissare quindi il corpo della valvo-
la allanello sottovalvola utilizzan-
do le due semifasce con bulloni
in dotazione e avendo cura di in-
terporre la apposita guarnizione
come indicato in fig.2.
Chiudere progressivamente le viti
da entrambe le parti della semi-
flangia contemporaneamente.
Fig. 1/A Silo with inclined roof
Silo mit schrgem Dach
Silo avec toit inclin
Silo con coperchio inclinato
Fig. 1/B Silo with flat roof
Silo mit flachem Dach
Silo avec toit horizontal
Silo con coperchio orizzontale
VCP2731B
VCP2732B
VCP2733B
04.00 /
2
03.00
VCP -
VCP -
VCP -
VCP -
USO E MANUTENZIONE
03041.M. 01.04
E2) TARATURA
La casa costruttrice fornisce la
valvola gi tarata alle pressioni di
500 mm H
2
O (norme DIN 4119
F.1 6.1.2.2) ed alla depressio-
ne di circa 20 mm H
2
O. Lutilizza-
tore dovr comunque aver cura di
verificare se la pressione, cui
stata tarata la valvola VCP 273,
corrisponde alla massima pressio-
ne tollerata dal silo. In caso con-
trario lutilizzatore dovr modifica-
re la taratura e farla corrisponde-
re alla pressione massima tolle-
rabile del caso specifico, agendo
sui dadi di regolazione (vedi tabella
e fig.3).
Nessuna responsabilit potr es-
sere attribuita alla ditta produttri-
ce in caso di guasti e danni che
dovessero verificarsi a seguito di
un errato utilizzo della valvola.
La massima sovrappressione con-
trastabile risulta essere comunque
pari a 1000 mm H
2
O; la massima
depressione pari a 120 mm H
2
O
Pressure Negative pressure
berdruck Unterdruck
Surpression Dpression
Sovrapressione Depressione
Qualora il silo su cui applicata la
valvola di sicurezza VCP 273 rag-
giunga pressioni inferiori a 400 mm
H
2
0, si consiglia di sostituire le
molle esterne (lettera A in fi-
gura) con quelle fornite come al-
ternativa nella confezione della val-
vola, che assicurano il raggiungi-
mento dei valori riportati nella se-
guente tabella; la molla interna
(pos. B) non deve essere sosti-
tuita, pertanto i valori di apertura in
depressione rimangono invariati.
A (mm) mm H
2
0 B (mm) mm H
2
0
45 1000 35 120
50 920 45 90
60 660 55 50
65 520 65 20
70 380
Pressure settings
Einstellwerte
Valeurs de rglage
Regolazioni valvola
E2) SETTING
The valves are supplied with a
pressure setting of 500 mm H
2
O
(according to DIN 4119 F.1
6.1.2.2) and for negative pres-
sure of approximately 20 mm
H
2
O.
The user has to verify that the
pressure setting of the VCP valve
corresponds with the maximum
pressure allowed in the silo. If
this is not the case the pressure
setting of the valve has to be ad-
justed by tightening or loosening
the adjustment nuts (see table and
Fig. 3).
The supplier does not accept re-
sponsibility for malfunctions or
damages arising from incorrect
use of the valve.
The maximum operating pres-
sure is 1000 mm H
2
O, the maxi-
mum negative pressure is 120
mm H
2
O.
If the pressure in the silo on
which the valve is mounted
reaches pressures of below
400 mm H
2
O, it is recommended
to substitute the external
springs (letter A in Fig. 3) with
the alternative springs supplied
with the valve, ensuring that the
values given in the table are
reached. The internal spring (B
in Fig. 3) should not be substi-
tuted and the opening pressure
in underpressure remains un-
changed.
E2) EINSTELLUNG
VCP Ventile sind werksseitig
auf einen berdruck von 500
mm H
2
O (nach DIN 4119 F.1
6.1.2.2) und fr einen Unter-
druck von ca. 20 mm H
2
O ein-
gestellt.
Der Betreiber mu sicherstellen,
da der eingestellte berdruck
dem maximalen berdruck ent-
spricht, der im Silo herrschen
kann. Ist dies nicht der Fall, kann
der Wert durch das Verstellen
der Reguliermuttern verndert
werden (siehe Tabelle sowie
Abb. 3).
Der Hersteller bernimmt keine
Haftung fr Schden, die aus ei-
ner unsachgemen Verwen-
dung des VCP Ventils resultieren.
Der maximale berdruck, auf
den das Ventil eingestellt wer-
den kann, betrgt 1000 mm H
2
O,
der maximale Unterdruck 120
mm H
2
O.
E2) TARAGE
Le constructeur fournit la sou-
pape dj tare la pression de
500 mm H
2
O (norme DIN 4119 F.1
6.1.2.2) et une dpression
de 20 mm H
2
O. Lutilisateur de-
vra avoir soin de vrifier si la
pression sur laquelle la soupa-
pe VCP 273 a t tare corres-
pond la pression maximum to-
lre du silo. Au cas contraire
lutilisateur devra modifier le ta-
rage et le faire correspondre
la pression maximum tolrable
du cas spcifique en ageant sur
les crous de rglage (voir le
tableau et fig. 3).
Aucune responsabilit pourra
tre attribui au constructeur en
cas de pannes et dommages
causs par une utilisation erro-
ne de la soupape.
La pression maxi contrastable
est de 1000 mm H
2
O, la dpres-
sion maxi est de 120 mm H
2
O.
Si lintrieur du silo sur lequel
la soupape VCP 273 est instal-
le arrivait une pression inf-
rieure 400 mm H
2
0, il est con-
seill de substituer les ressorts
extrieurs (lettre A dans la
figure) avec ceux fournis com-
me alternative dans la confection,
qui assurent darriver aux valeurs
indiques dans le tableau sui-
vant. Le ressort intrieur (pos. B)
ne doit pas tre substitu, pour-
tant les valeurs douverture en d-
pression restent invaries.
Falls im Silo, auf dem das VCP
Ventil installiert ist, nur ein maxi-
maler Druck von weniger als 400
mm H
2
0 erreicht wird, ist es emp-
fehlenswert, die auenliegen-
den Federn (siehe Abb. 3, Pos.
A) gegen die in der Konfekti-
on enthaltenen alternativen
Federn auszutauschen. Damit
ist gesichert, da das Ventil bei
den in der Tabelle angegebenen
Werten anspricht. Die innenlie-
gende Feder (Pos. B) wird nicht
ausge-tauscht. Das Ventil spricht
damit immer bei dem selben Un-
terdruck an.
FIG. 3
04.00 /
2
VCP -
VCP -
VCP -
VCP -
03.00
USO E MANUTENZIONE
03041.M. 01.05
Tabella regolazioni valvola
VCP 273 con molle aventi co-
stante elastica inferiore a quel-
le secondo fornitura standard.
N.B: I valori di sovrappressione
o di depressione indicati in ta-
bella risentono delle tolleranze
costruttive; perci lecito atten-
dersi uninerzia (o un anticipo)
fino ad una percentuale massi-
ma pari al 5 % dei valori riportati.
Qualora sia indispensabile un va-
lore esatto necessario effettua-
re una taratura del precarico mol-
la sulla base di valori strumentali.
Pressure
berdruck
Surpression
Sovrapressione
A (mm) mm H
2
0
25 600
35 470
45 360
55 280
N.B.: Pressure and negative
pressure values shown in the ta-
ble are subject to variation due to
manufacturing tolerances; it is
thereby normal to expect an iner-
tia (advance) of up to 5% of the
value given in the table.
Valve settings for VCP 273
with weaker springs.
Tableau de rglage pour
des ressorts plus doux que
ceux monts standard.
Einstelltabelle fr weichere
Federn als serienmig einge-
baut.
N.B.: Les valeurs de surpres-
sion et de dpression indiqus
dans le tableau resentent des
tolrances de fabrication. Il est
donc possible noter des antici-
pations ou des retards jusqu
5% maxi des valeurs nomins.
N.B.: Die in der Tabelle aufgefhr-
ten ber- und Unterdruckwerte
sind fertigungsbedingten Toleran-
zen unterworfen. Es ist demzu-
folge ein verfrhtes oder aber auch
ein verzgertes Ansprechen des
Ventils im Bereich von 5% der
o.g. Werte mglich.
2
03.00
VCP -
VCP -
VCP -
VCP -
USO E MANUTENZIONE 03041.M. 01.06
E3) PRECAUZIONI GENERALI
Mai mettere le mani tra la parte in
movimento e il corpo valvola per-
ch la valvola pu entrare in fun-
zione.
F) AVVIAMENTO
Al primo avviamento controllare il
funzionamento della valvola per
verificare lidoneit di intervento
della stessa (UNA TARATURA
NON OTTIMALE PUO PROVO-
CARE: squilibri di pressione ec-
cessivi con conseguente esplosio-
ne ed implosione del silo, fuoriu-
scite eccessive di polvere dalla
valvola tendenti a formare incro-
stazioni sulla stessa oltre ad in-
quinamento dellambiente circo-
stante).
G) FUNZIONAMENTO
La valvola VCP non controllata
da nessun dispositivo esterno.
Entra in funzione automaticamen-
te ogni qualvolta vi sia uno squili-
brio di pressione allinterno del silo
dovuta al riempimento o allo svuo-
tamento del silo con qualsiasi si-
stema.
(UNI ISO 8456 5.1.1.4.2 e
5.1.1.4.2. e 5.1.1.4.3).
N.B.: si aumenta notevolmente la
durata della valvola pulendola
periodicamente.Questo partico-
larmente importante quando il pro-
dotto trattato tende ad indurirsi o
a compattarsi se rimane fermo per
un certo periodo di tempo.
E3 ) SAFETY NOTICE
Never introduce hands into the
valve because it could be activat-
ed at any time.
F) START-UP
At the first start up, check that
the operation of the valve is suita-
ble for the purpose for which it is
intended. UNSUITABLE PRES-
SURE SETTINGS can cause ex-
cessive pressure imbalance with
consequent implosion or explosion
of the silo, leakage of dust from
the valve, possibly forming crusts
on the valve itself and polluting the
surrounding environment.
G) OPERATION
The VHS valve is not controlled
by any external device.
The valve opens automatically in
function of the pressure in the silo
which varies with the loading and
unloading operations (UNI ISO
8456 5.1.1.4.2 e 5.1.1.4.2. e
5.1.1.4.3).
N.B.: Regular cleaning increas-
es the life of the valve. This ap-
plies in particular to applications
where materials are handled
which either tend to harden or
become sticky when stored for a
longer period.
E3) SICHERHEITSHINWEIS
Niemals mit den Hnden in das
Ventil greifen, da dieses jederzeit
in Betrieb gehen kann.
F) INBETRIEBNAHME
Bei der ersten Inbetriebnahme
prfen, ob das Ventil funktionsf-
hig ist. EINE NICHT KORREKTE
EINSTELLUNG kann zur Explo-
sion oder Implosion des Silos
oder zumindest zu Verkrustungen
des Ventils und zu Umweltver-
schmutzung fhren.
G) BETRIEB
Das VCP Ventil wird durch keine
externe Vorrichtung gesteuert.
Das Ventil ffnet sich automa-
tisch je nach im Silo herrschen-
den Druck, der sich beim Befl-
len und beim Entleeren jeweils
verndert (UNI ISO 8456 5.1.1.4.2
und 5.1.1.4.2. und 5.1.1.4.3).
N.B.: Regelmige Reinigung er-
hht die Lebensdauer des Ven-
tils. Dies gilt insbesondere fr
Medien, die bei lngerer Lagerung
aushrten oder klebrig werden.
E3) PRECAUTIONS GENERALES
Jamais introduire les mains en-
tre le corps et les parties mobi-
les de la vanne puisqelle pour-
rait entrer en fonction.
F) MISE EN MARCHE
A la premire mise en marche con-
trler le fonctionnement de la sou-
pape pour vrifier si elle est prte
lintervention. UN TARAGE PAS
OPTIMAL PEUT PROVOQUER:
dsquilibrations de pression avec
explosion consquente ou implo-
sion du silo, sorties excessives de
poussire travers la soupape
avec tendence de forme des incros-
tations sur la soupape mme et
en endommageant lambient.
G) FONCTIONNEMENT
La soupape VCP nest contrle
daucun dispositif extrieur.
Elle entre en fonction automati-
quement chaque fois quand il y a
une condition dsquilibre de
pression entre lintrieur du silo
de au remplissage ou du dchar-
gement de quelconque type.
(UNI ISO 8456 5.1.1.4.2 e
5.1.1.4.2. e 5.1.1.4.3).
N.B. : La vie de la soupape aug-
mente notablement si on la net-
toie priodiquement. Cela est
particulirement important quand
le produit tend se durcir ou
se compacter sil reste ferme
pour une certaine priode.
2
02.01/
VCP -
VCP -
VCP -
VCP -
03.00
BETRIEBS - UND WARTUNGSANLEITEN
USO E MANUTENZIONE
03041.M. 01.07
H) MONTAGGIO - SMONTAGGIO
H1) SMONTAGGIO DELLA VAL-
VOLA DALLANELLO SOTTO-
VALVOLA
Agire sulle due semifasce che
uniscono valvola e anello svitando
semplicemente le 2 viti VTCEI
M10.
H2) SMONTAGGIO DELLE MOL-
LE E DELLE MEMBRANE
- Svitare i golfari di sollevamento
e rimuovere il coperchio.
- Svitare i dadi posti nella parte
superiore delle 3 viti esterne
(fig.4).
- Rimuovere nellordine: rondelle
di guida, soffietti e molle (per
leventuale sostituzione delle
molle stesse).
- Sfilare le 2 membrane dalle 3 viti
esterne (per leventuale sostitu-
zione delle stesse).
- Svitare i dadi posti sulla parte
superiore della vite centrale e ri-
muovere nellordine: rondella di
guida, soffietto e molla centrale
(per sostituzione di molla e/o
membrana centrale).
H) ASSEMBLY-DISASSEMBLY
H1) DISASSEMBLY OF THE
VALVE FROM THE CON-
NECTOR SPOUT
Remove the clamp by unscrewing
the two M10 socket screws.
H2) DISMANTLING OF SPRIN-
GS AND DIAPHRAGMS
- Unscrew eyebolts and remove
cover.
- Unscrew upper nuts from 3 ex-
ternal screws (Fig. 4).
- Remove (in this order): spacers,
bellows and springs.
- Slip off the two membranes
from the three external screws.
- Unscrew the upper nuts from
the central screw and remove (in
this order): spacer, bellows and
central spring (if replacing the
central spring and/or mem-
brane).
H) MONTAGE - DEMONTAGE
H1) DEMONTAGE DES VENTILS
VON DER EIN-SCHWEISSZAR-
GE
Die zwei M10er Schrauben von
der Spannschelle entfernen.
H2) DEMONTAGE VON FEDERN
UND MEMBRANEN
- Ringmuttern lsen und Wetterhau
be entfernen.
- Obere 3 Muttern entfernen (Fig. 4).
- In Reihenfolge entfernen:
Fhrungsunterlegscheibe,
Kompensatoren sowie Federn
zwecks eventuellem Austausch.
- Die 2 Membranen zwecks even-
tuellem Austausch von den au-
enliegenden 3 Schrauben abzie-
hen.
- Muttern von der mittigen Schrau-
be entfernen und in Reihenfolge
entfernen: Fhrungsunterlegschei-
be, Kompensator und zentrale Fe-
der und/oder zentrale Membran
zum eventuellen Austausch.
H) MONTAGE - DEMONTAGE
H1) DEMONTAGE DE LA SOU-
PAPE DE LANNEAU DE RAC-
CORDEMENT
Agir sur les deux demi-colliers qui
unient la soupape et lanneau en
dvissant simplement les deux
boulons M10.
H2) DEMONTAGE DES RES-
SORTS ET DES MEMBRANES
- Devisser les illets de soul-
vement et enlever le couvercle.
- Dvisser les 3 crous sup
rieurs (fig. 4).
- Enlever dans lordre: rondelle
de guide, soufflets et ressorts
(pour lventuelle substitution
des ressorts-mmes).
- Dfiler les 2 membranes des 3
bo ulons extrieurs (pour lven-
tuelle substitution des membra-
nes-mmes).
- Dvisser les crous sur la partie
suprieure de la vis centrale e
enlever dans lordre: rondelle de
guide, soufflet et ressort central
(pour substitution du ressort et /
ou de la membrane centrale.
Fig. 4
ADJUSTMENT NUTS
STELLMUTTERN
ECROUS SUR LESQUELS INTERVENIR
DADI SU CUI INTERVENIRE
2
03.00
VCP -
VCP -
VCP -
VCP -
BETRIEBS - UND WARTUNGSANLEITEN
USO E MANUTENZIONE
03041.M. 01.08
H3) RIMONTAGGIO
- Seguire in base al tipo di inter-
vento effettuato le operazioni ci-
tate ai punti H1 e H2 nellordine
inverso prestando particolare at-
tenzione a:
- posizionare correttamente le
membrane assicurandosi che le
guarnizioni delle stesse aderisca-
no al relativo piano di appoggio
- collocare le molle e le rondelle
di guida al centro delle viti di re-
golazione
- serrare i dadi sulle viti di regola-
zione in modo corretto seguen-
do i valori di taratura indicati
- montare il coperchio rimettendo
le rondelle in gomma nella cor-
retta posizione onde evitare infil-
trazioni di acqua.
- serrare correttamente i golfari si
sollevamento.
I) MANUTENZIONE
Il non attenersi strettamente
alle seguenti istruzioni pu
causare problemi ed invalida-
re la garanzia sulle macchine
fornite.
E necessario seguire scrupolosa-
mente le seguenti indicazioni:
- Settimanalmente controllare la
presenza di polvere nella zona
circostante alla valvola, togliere
il coperchio per rimuovere even-
tuali incrostazioni, verificare la
libert di movimento delle due
membrane.
- Annualmente effettuare la revi-
sione completa della valvola (vedi
smontaggio/rimontaggio) con so-
stituzione delle membrane e pu-
lizia accurata di tutti gli elemen-
ti; dopo la revisione E INDISPEN-
SABILE RITARARE LA VALVO-
LA seguendo le istruzioni al pun-
to E2.
- Ogni 2 anni effettuare comun-
que la sostituzione delle molle.
I1) SOSTITUZIONE DEI PEZZI DI
USURA
- DISCO DI CHIUSURA
(seguire istruzioni come punto H2).
H3) RE-ASSEMBLY
- To reassemble the valve follow
steps H1 and H2 in the inverse
order being careful to:
- position the membrane correctly
making sure that the seals
adhere at their point of contact.
- position the springs and spa-
cers centrally with respect to
the setting up screws
- tighten the nuts on the screws
correctly, following the setting
up data given in the table.
- put on the cover placing the rub-
ber washers correctly to seal
against water infiltration.
- screw in the eyebolts
I) MAINTENANCE
Failure to follow the mainte-
nance instructions may cause
problems and invalidate the
guarantee.
It is important to perform the fol-
lowing operations:
- Once a week check the area
near the valve is free from mate-
rial. Remove the cover to remo-
ve any crusts that have formed.
Check the diaphragm moves fre-
ely.
- Once a year the valve needs to
be overhauled completely (see
disassembly - reassem-bly),
replacing the diaphragm and cle-
aning all elements. After the
overhaul, THE PRESSURE
SETTING OF THE VALVE
MUST BE CHECKED AND
READJUSTED following the pro-
cedure described in paragraph
E2.
- Every 2 years replace the
springs.
I1) REPLACEMENT OF WEAR
PARTS
- CLOSING DISC
(follow instructions as H2).
H3) ZUSAMMENBAU
- Das Ventil in umgekehrter Rei-
henfolge zusammenbauen wie
unter H1 und H2 beschrieben.
Hierbei besonders achten auf:
- korrekte Position der Membra-
nen, soda diese plan aufliegen
- korrekten Einbau von zentraler
Feder und Unterlegscheibe
- korrektes Anziehen der Einstell-
muttern nach Tabelle
- korrektes Einlegen der Dichts-
scheiben der Wetterhaube, um
Wassereintritt zu vermeiden
- korrektes Anziehen der Ring-
muttern.
I) WARTUNG
Das Nichtbefolgen der War-
tungsvorschriften kann zu St-
rungen fhren und die Ge-
whrleistung auer kraft set-
zen.
Die nachstehenden Vorschriften
sind strikt zu befolgen:
- Einmal pro Woche kontrollie-
ren, ob sich im Bereich um das
Ventil herum Staub angesam-
melt hat. Wetterhaube abneh-
men und Verkrustungen, sofern
vorhanden, entfernen. Kontrol-
lieren, ob die Membran sich frei
bewegen kann.
- Einmal im Jahr eine komplet-
te Revision vornehmen (siehe
Kapitel Demontage/Montage).
Dabei die Membran austau-
schen und alle Ventilteile grnd-
lich reinigen. Nach erfolgter Re-
vision UNBEDINGT DAS VEN-
TIL ERNEUT TARIEREN (gem.
Punkt E2).
- Alle 2 Jahre die Federn aus-
tauschen.
I1) AUSTAUSCH VON VER-
SCHLEISSTEILEN
- VENTILSCHEIBE
(Vorgehensweise wie unter H2
beschrieben).
H3) REMONTAGE
- Suivre les instructions des
paragraphes H1 et H2 dans lor-
der inverse en faisant particu-
liremement attention :
- positioner correctement les
membranes sassurant que les
garnitures adhrient au plan
dappui relatif
- placer les ressorts et les ron-
delles de guide au centre des
vis de rgulation
- serrer les crous sur les vis de
rgulation de manire correcte
suivant les valeurs de tarage in-
diques
- monter le couvercle remettant
les rondelles en caoutchouc
dans la position correcte afin
dviter des infiltrations deau
- serrer correctement les illets
de soulvement.
I) ENTRETIEN
Si vous ne respectez pas
exactement les consignes sui-
vantes vous pouvez avoir de
graves problmes et invalider
la garantie des machines four-
nies.
Il est ncessai re de sui vre
scrupuleusement les indications
suivantes:
- Une fois par semaine contr-
ler la prsence de poussire
dans la zone autour de la sou-
pape, enlever le couvercle et
emporter des incrostations
ventuelles et vrifier si la mem-
brane est libre.
- Une fois par an effectuer la rvi-
sion complte de la soupape (voir
dmontage/remontage) avec su-
bstitution de la membrane et le
nettoyage soigneux de tous les
lments. Aprs la rvision IL
EST INDISPENSABLE DE RE-
TARER LA SOUPAPE suivant
les instructions au point E2.
- Une fois tous les 2 ans substi-
tuer les ressorts.
I1) SUBSTITUTION DES
PIECES DUSURE
- DISQUE DE FERMETURE
(suivre les instructions comme
point H2).
2
USO E MANUTENZIONE 03041.M. 01.09
I2) LUBRICATION
No lubrication required.
J) NOISE
No noise at all.
K) DISAMANTLING AND
DISPOSAL
Storage of equipment for longer
periods.
Clean the equipment thoroughly,
especially inside.
Store the equipment in a container.
SCRAPPING
Recycle plastic materials (e.g.
weather protection cover, seals,
coatings etc.) and dispose ac-
cording to regulations.
Dispose of metal parts at the
scrap yard.
L) FAULT FINDING
Minor problems can be resolved
without consulting a specialist.
Here are a few examples of pos-
sibles causes and solutions.
I2) SCHMIERUNG
Keinerlei Schmierung erforder-
lich.
J) BETRIEBSGERUSCHE
Es treten keinerlei Betriebsge-
rusche auf.
K) DEMONTAGE UND
VERSCHROTTUNG
Lagerung des Gerts ber ln-
gere Zeitrume.
Gert grndlich subern, beson-
ders innen.
Gert in einem Behlter lagern.
VERSCHROTTUNG
Kunststoffteile (z.B. Wetterhau-
be, Dichtungen, Beschichtungen
etc.) gem den Vorschriften re-
cyclen.
Metallteile beim Schrotthndler
abgeben.
L) BETRIEBSSTRUNGEN UND
ABHILFE
Kleinere Strungen knnen ohne
die Einschaltung eines Fach-
manns behoben werden. Im fol-
genden einige Beispiele mglicher
Ursachen und Abhilfen.
I2) LUBRIFICATION
Aucune opration de lubrification
prvue.
J) BRUIT
Aucun bruit
K) DEMONTAGE ET
DEMOLITION
Mise en entrept de la machine
pendant une longue priode:
Nettoyez soigneusement la ma-
chine, surtout lintriedur;
protgez-la en la mettant dans
un conteneur.
DEMOLITION
Rcuprez les pices en matire
plastique (par ex. couvercle, re-
vtements, j oi nts, etc.) et
remettez-les aux centres de r-
colte spcialiss.
Remettez les autres pices en
acier aux centres de rcupra-
tion des mtaux.
L) PROBLEMES EVENTUELS
Vous pouvez rsoudre vous
mme les petits problmes sans
devoir consulter un spcialiste.
De suite on donne quelques
exemples des cuses ventuelles
et des solutions possibles.
I2) LUBRIFICAZIONE
Nessuna operazione di lubrifica-
zione prevista.
J) RUMORE
Nessun rumore
K) SMANTELLAMENTO E
DEMOLIZIONE
Immagazzinaggio della macchina
per periodo prolungato
Pulire accuratamente la macchina.
Immagazzinare la macchina den-
tro un contenitore.
ROTTAMAZIONE
Riciclare i pezzi in plastica (per
es. guarnizioni, rivestimenti etc.)
a norma di legge.
Consegnare i pezzi in metallo ai
centri di raccolta.
L) POSSIBILI INCONVENIENTI
I problemi minori possono essere
risolti senza consultare uno spe-
cialista. Diamo qui sotto un elen-
co degli inconvenienti pi comuni
con le eventuali cause e i possibi-
li rimedi.
Pos. STRUNG Pos. MGL. URSACHE Pos. LSUNG
1 Nach pneumatischem 1 Membran verkrustet. 1 Wetterhaube abnehmen
BefIlen herrscht hhe- und Krusten entfernen.
rer Druck als Ventil-
Einstellwert
2 Nach pneumatischem 1 Membran verkrustet. 1 Wetterhaube abnehmen
BefIlen herrscht niedri- und Krusten entfernen.
gerer Druck als Ventil-
Einstellwert
Pos. PROBLEMA Pos. CAUSA Pos. SOLUZIONE
1 Il silo dopo il carico 1 La membrana 1 Togliere il coperchio
pneumatico rimane in ricoperta di e rimuovere le
pressione oltre il valore incrostazioni incrostazioni
di taratura
2 Il silo dopo lo svuota- 1 La membrana 1 Togliere il coperchio
mento rimane in ricoperta di e rimuovere le
depressione oltre il incrostazioni incrostazioni
vaore di taratura
Pos. PROBLEME Pos. CAUSE Pos. SOLUTION
1 Aprs le remplissage 1 Membrane est couverte 1 Enlever couvercle
pneumatique le silo dincrostations et liminier les
reste en pression incrostations
outre tarage soupape
2 Aprs le remplissage 1 Membrane est couverte 1 Enlever couvercle
pneumatique le silo dincrostations et liminier les
reste en dpression incrostations
outre tarage soupape
Pressure in silo
remains higher than
overpressure setting of
valve after loading.
Membrane encrusted. Take off cover and
remove crust.
Pressure i n si l o re-
mains lower than neg-
ative pressure setting of
valve after emptying.
Membrane encrusted. Take off cover and
remove crust.
Item PROBLEM Item POSSIBLE REASON Item SOLUTION
1
2
1
2
1
2
2
VCP -
VCP -
VCP -
VCP -
03.00
VCP -
VCP -
VCP -
VCP -
02.01
03041.M. 01.10
USO E MANUTENZIONE
2
List of hazards
Gefhrdungsliste
Liste des risques
Lista dei rischi
Safety Measures
Sicherheitsmanahmen
Consignes de scurit
Misure di sicurezza
Norm Reference
Bezugsnormen
Normes de rfrence
Norme di Riferimento
Operating Instruction Ref.
Bez. Betriebsanleitung
Rf. instructions de
fonctionnement
Rif. istruzioni operative
Residual Risk
Restrisiken
Risque rsiduel
Rischio residuo
1. Mechanical Hazards - Mechanische Gefhrdungenen - Risques mcaniques - Rischi meccanici
1.1
Crushing - Quetschen
Ecrasement - Schiacciamento
User warning! Never introduce hands
between valve casing and moving parts.
Warnhinweis an den Bediener! Niemals
mit den Hnden in den Bereich zwischen
Vent i l ge hu s e und bewe gl i c he
Ventilteile greifen!
Avertissement lutilisateur. Jamais
introduire les mains dans lespace entre
le corps et les parties mobiles de la
soupape
Indi cazi one al l ' uti l i zzazi one: mai
mettere le mani tra corpo valvola e parte
in movimento
EN 292 - 1
EN 294
EN 349
03441M0196
NO - NEIN
NON - NO
1.2
Shearing - Scheren
Troncature - Troncamento
1.3
Cutting - Schneiden
Coupe - Taglio
1.4
Entanglement
Erfassen - Aufwickeln
Entortillement Attorcigliamento
1.5
Drawing-in - Trapping
Einziehen - Fangen
Entranement - Encastrement
Trascinamento - Intrappolamento
1.6
Impact - Sto
Impact - Impatto
1.7
Stabbing - puncture
Stich
Perforation - perage
Perforazione - foratura
1.8
Friction - abrasion
Reibung - Abrieb
Frottement - abrasion
Frizione - abrasione
1.9
High pressure fluid injection
Flssigkeiten unter Druck
Injection de fluide haute pression
Iniezione fluido ad alta pressione
1.10
Ejection of parts
Ausstoung von Teilen
Ejection des pices
Espulsione di pezzi
1.11
Loss of stability
Stabilittsverlust
Perte de stabilit
Perdita di stabilit
Not applicable - Nicht anwendbar
Non applicable - Non applicabile
1.12
Slip Trip and fall
Rutschen oder Fallen
Glissement et chute
Scivolamento e caduta
03041.M. 01.11
List of hazards
Gefhrdungsliste
Liste des risques
Lista dei rischi
Safety Measures
Sicherheitsmanahmen
Consignes de scurit
Misure di sicurezza
Norm Reference
Bezugsnormen
Normes de rfrence
Norme di
Riferimento
Rf. instructions de
fonctionnement
Residual Risk
Restrisiken
Risque rsiduel
Rischio residuo
2. Electrical Hazard - Elektrische Gefhrdungen - Risques lectriques - Rischi elettrici
2.1
Electrical contact
Elektrischer Kontakt
Contact lectrique
Contatto elettrico
2.2
Electrostatic phenomena
Elektrostatische Erscheinungen
Phnomnes lectrostatiques
Fenomeni elettrostatici
2.3
Thermal radiation
Wrmestrahlung
Radiation thermique
Radiazione termica
2.4
External influence on equipment
uere Einwirkungen auf die Gerte
Influence extrieure sur les appareillages
Influenza esterna sulle apparecchiature
3. Thermal Hazards - Thermische Gefhrdungen - Risques thermiques - Rischi termici
3.1
Burns and scalds
Verbrennungen und Branwunden
Brlures et lsions
Bruciature e ustioni
3.2
Health -damaging effects by hot/cold
environment
Gesundheitsschdliche Auswirkungen
infolge warmer/kalter Umgebungen
Effets nocifs pour la sant dus aux
environnement chauds/froids
Effetti dannosi per la salute dovuti ad
ambienti caldi/freddi
USO E MANUTENZIONE
VCP -
VCP -
VCP -
VCP -
02.01
2
03041.M. 01.12
List of hazards
Gefhrdungsliste
Liste des risques
Lista dei rischi
Safety Measures
Sicherheitsmanahmen
Consignes de scurit
Misure di sicurezza
Norm Reference
Bezugsnormen
Normes de rfrence
Norme di Riferimento
Rf. instructions de
fonctionnement
Residual Risk
Restrisiken
Risque rsiduel
Rischio residuo
4. Hazard generated by noise - Gefhrdungen durch Lrm - Risque drivant de la pollution acoustique - Rischio da inquinamento acustico
4.1
Hearing losses
Gehrverlust
Pertes de l'oue
Perdite dell'udito Not applicable - Nicht anwendbar
4.2
Interference with speech
Verstndigungsschwierigkeiten
Difficult de communication
Difficolt di comunicazione
5. Hazard generated by vibration - Gefhrdungen durch Schwingungen - Risque d aux vibrations - Rischio dovuto alle vibrazioni
6. Radiation Hazards - Gefhrdungen durch Strahlung - Risques de radiation - Rischi di radiazione
7.
Hazards generated by materials processed - Gefhrdungen duch die behandelten Materialien
Risques dus aux matriaux traits - Rischi dovuti ai materiali trattati
7.1
Contact or inhalation
Berhren oder Einatmen
Contact ou inhalation
Contatto o inalazione
Indicazione all'impiantista e/o
all'installatore
EN 292-1 0341M0101
YES-JA
OUI-SI
7.2
Fire and explosion
Brand oder Explosion
Incendie et explosion
Incendio ed esplosione
7.3
Biological (viral/bacterial)
Biologisch (durch Viren/Bakterien)
Biologique (viral/bactrien)
Biologico (virale/batterico)
8.
H.generated by neglecting ergonomic principles - Gefhrdungen durch die Nichtbeachtung der ergonomischen Richtlinien
Risques dus l'inobservation des principes ergonomiques - Rischi dovuti all'inosservanza dei principi ergonomici
9. Hazards combination - Kombination der Gefhrdungen - Combinaison de risques - Combinazione di rischi
10.
H. generated by failure of energy supply - Gefhrdungen durch eine Strung der Energieversorgung
Risques produits par une panne du secteur d'alimentation - Rischi generati da un guasto nella rete di alimentazione
10.1
Failure of energy supply
Strung im Versorgungsnetz
Panne dans le secteur d'alimentation
Guasto nella rete di alimentazione
10.2
Unexpected ejection of parts
Unerwartetes Ausstoen von Teilen
Ejection inattendue de pices
Espulsione inaspettata di pezzi
10.3
Failure of control system
Strung des Steuersystems
Avarie du systme de contrle
Avaria del sistema di controllo
10.4
Errors of fitting - Passungsfehler
Erreurs d'accouplement - Errori di
accoppiamento
11.
H. generated by missing of safety related measures - Gefhrdungen durch die Nichtbeachtung der entsprechenden Sicherheitsnanahmen
Risques dus l'absence de mesures concernant la scurit - Rischi dovuti alla mancanza di misure legate alla sicurezza
USO E MANUTENZIONE
01.01
VCP -
VCP -
VCP -
VCP -
2
03041.M. 01.13
M) CHECK-LIST IN CASO DI
GUASTO
1) Domande generali
Descrizione del guasto
a) La valvola apre e chiude sen-
za problemi anche dopo lunghi
periodi di sosta?
b) Pare che le condizioni atmosfe-
riche contribuiscano al malfun-
zionamento?
2) Controlli parte silo
a) Il silo viene caricato pneumati-
camente, con press. > 1,5 bar?
b) In presenza di pi sili, sono tutti
muniti di valvola di sicurezza?
c) I sili sono collegati tra loro?
d) Sono dotati di un filtro ciascuno?
3) Controllo della Valvola
a) La valvola viene montata perfet-
tamente verticale?
b) Verificare periodicamente la
condizione della membrana;
4) Controllo del Prodotto
a) denominazione del prodotto?
b) densit?(Kg/dm
3
)
c) granulometria?
d) umidit % ?
e) scorrevolezza?(fare scorrere il
materiale su una lamiera au-
mentando lentamente linclina-
zione!)
f) comprimibilit?( possibile fare
una palla di neve?)
g) abrasivit?(fa male quando si
sfrega il prodotto tra le dita?)
M) CHECK-LIST EN CAS DE VIS
EN PANNE
1) Demandes gnrales
Description de la panne
a) La soupape souvre et se fer-
me sans problmes mme
aprs des longues priodes
dinactivit?
b) Semble-t-il que les conditions
atmosphriques contribuisent
au malfonctionnement?
2) Contrles du silo
a) Est-ce que le silo est rempli
pneumatiquement avec une
pression > 1,5 bar?
b) Avec plus silos, est-ce que
chaque silo est muni dune
soupape de scurit?
c) Est-ce que les silos sont con-
nects entre eux?
d) Est-ce que chaque silo est
muni dun filtre dpoussi-
reur?
3) Contrles de la soupape
a) Est-ce que la soupape a t
monte de manire parfaite-
ment verticale?
b) Vrifiez priodiquement les
conditions de la membrane.
4) Contrle du matriau
a) Dsignation du matriau
b) Densit? (kg/dm
3
)
c) Granulomtrie? (m/mm)
d) Humidit? (%)
e) Fluidit? (faites couler le ma-
triau sur une tle en aug-
mentant linclinaison de la-
mme)
f) Compressibilit? (est-il possible
de faire une boule de neige?)
g) Abrasivit? (est ce quil fait mal
quand on frotte le matriau
dans les doigts?)
M) CHECK LIST IN CASE OF
TROUBLE
1) General questions
Fault description
a) Does valve open and close
also after long shutdown pe-
riods without problems?
b) Do weather conditions nega-
tively influence feeder ope-ra-
tion?
2) Silo check
a) Is silo pneumatically filled with
> 1,5 bar?
b) With more silos, are all of
them equipped with a separa-
te pressure relief valve?
c) Are silos connected between
each other?
d) Does each silo have its own
dust filter?
3) Valve check
a) Is valve installed perfectly ver-
tically?
b) Check diaphragm at regular
intervals.
4) Material check
a) Material description?
b) Bulk density? (kg/dm
3
)
c) Particle size? (m/mm)
d) Humidity? (%)
e) Flowability? (make material
slide down a metal plate by
varying the angle from low to
steep)
f) Compressible material? (can
you make a snowball?)
g) Abrasive material? (does it hurt
when rubbing it between fin-
gers?)
M) CHECKLISTE BEI
BETRIEBSSTORUNGEN
1) Allgemeine Fragen
Beschreibung der Fehlfunk-
tion
a) ffnet und schliet das Ventil
problemlos auch nach lnge-
rer Betriebsunterbrechung?
b) Spielen beim Auftreten der
Strungen Witterungseinfls-
se eine Rolle?
2) Kontrolle des Silos
a) Wird Silo pneumatisch mit
> 1,5 bar befllt?
b) Bei mehreren Silos, sind alle
mit einem separaten Druck-
ausgleichsventil ausgestattet?
c) Sind Silos miteinander verbun-
den?
d) Ist jeder Silo mit einem sepa-
raten Entstaubungsfilter au-
sgestattet?
3) Kontrolle des Ventils
a) Ist das Ventil exakt senkrecht
eingebaut?
b) In regelmigen Abstnden
die Membran kontrollieren.
4) Prfung des Materials
a) Materialbezeichnung?
b) Schttgewicht? (kg/dm
3
)
c) Krnung? (m/mm)
d) Feuchte? (%)
e) Fliefhigkeit?(Materialprobe
auf einem geneigten Blech
zum Flieen bringen)
f) Komprimierbarkeit? (Kann ein
Schneeball geformt werden?)
g) Abrasivitt? (Schmerzt es,
wenn man Material zwischen
den Fingern reibt?)
USO E MANUTENZIONE
2
VCP -
VCP -
VCP -
VCP -
03.00
3
S
P
A
R
E

P
A
R
T
S
8+2
SPARE PARTS CATALOGUE
ERSATZTEILKATALOG
PIECES DE RECHANGE
PEZZI DI RICAMBIO
A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d

W
A
M
G
R
O
U
P
CATALOGUE No. 03041.R
ISSUE
A2
02.01
CREATION DATE
CIRCULATION
100
VCP -
VCP -
VCP -
VCP -
03.00
SPARE PARTS
ERSATZTEILE
PIECES DE RECHANGE
RICAMBI 03041.R. 01.01
N) RICAMBI
Per lidentificazione dei pezzi di
ricambio vedi tabelle riportate qui
a seguito.
N) SPARE PARTS
To identify parts proceed accor-
ding to the following table.
N) PIECES DE RECHANGE
Pour identifier les pices de re-
change voir le tableau suivant.
N) ERSATZTEILE
Zur zweifelsfreien Identifikation der
Ersatzteile so wie in der nachfol-
genden Tabelle beschrieben vor-
gehen.
04.00 /
3
03.00
VCP -
VCP -
VCP -
VCP -
SPARE PARTS
ERSATZTEILE
PIECES DE RECHANGE
RICAMBI
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E

C
O
N
T
R
O
L

S
A
F
E
T
Y

V
A
L
V
E
D
R
U
C
K
A
U
S
G
L
E
I
C
H
S
V
E
N
T
I
L
S
O
U
P
A
P
E

D
E

H
A
U
T
E

S
E
C
U
R
I
T
E
V
A
L
V
O
L
A

A
L
T
A

S
I
C
U
R
E
Z
Z
A
C
o
d
e
V
C
P
S
i
z
e

/

G
r
e
T
a
i
l
l
e

/

G
r
a
n
d
e
z
z
a
V
C
P

2
7
3
.
1
B
03041.R. 01.02
B
e
n
e
n
n
u
n
g
D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
D
s
i
g
n
a
t
i
o
n
S
t
a
n
d
a
r
d
s
N
o
r
m
e
n
N
o
r
m
e
s
N
o
r
m
e
Q
u
a
n
t
.
M
e
n
g
e
Q
u
a
n
t
.
Q
u
a
n
t
.
I
t
e
m
P
o
s
.
P
o
s
.
P
o
s
.
12345678
8
a
9
1
0
1
1
1
2
1
3
1
4
1
5
1
6
1
7
1
8
1
9
111837
1
7
337114
1
0
131112
V
a
l
v
e

c
a
s
i
n
g
V
a
l
v
e

c
l
o
s
i
n
g

p
l
a
t
e

s
i
z
e

2
7
3
D
i
s
c
W
a
s
h
e
r
T
h
r
e
a
d
e
d

s
t
u
d
B
e
v
e
l
l
e
d

w
a
s
h
e
r

U
N
I

6
5
9
2
N
u
t

U
N
I

5
5
8
8
C
o
m
p
r
e
s
s
i
o
n

s
p
r
i
n
g

t
y
p
e

C
o
m
p
r
e
s
s
i
o
n

s
p
r
i
n
g

t
y
p
e

W
a
s
h
e
r
H
e
x
.

h
e
a
d

s
c
r
e
w
C
o
m
p
r
e
s
s
i
o
n

s
p
r
i
n
g

t
y
p
e

P
r
o
t
e
c
t
i
v
e

b
e
l
l
o
w
s
W
a
s
h
e
r

U
N
I

6
5
9
3
W
e
a
t
h
e
r

p
r
o
t
e
c
t
i
o
n

c
o
v
e
r
E
y
e
b
o
l
t

U
N
I

2
9
4
8
C
o
n
n
e
c
t
o
r

s
l
e
e
v
e
S
e
a
l

w
i
t
h

o
n
e

s
l
o
p
i
n
g

s
i
d
e
P
a
i
r

o
f

c
l
a
m
p
i
n
g

e
l
e
m
e
n
t
s
S
o
c
k
e
t

s
c
r
e
w

8
.
8

U
N
I

5
9
3
1
G
e
h
u
s
e
V
e
r
s
c
h
l
u
s
c
h
e
i
b
e
S
c
h
e
i
b
e
F
h
r
u
n
g
s
u
n
t
e
r
l
e
g
s
c
h
e
i
b
e
G
e
w
i
n
d
e
s
t
a
n
g
e
U
n
t
e
r
l
e
g
s
h
e
i
b
e
S
e
c
h
s
k
a
n
t
m
u
t
t
e
r
F
e
d
e
r

T
y
p

F
e
d
e
r

T
y
p

G
u
m
m
i

-

U
n
t
e
r
l
e
g
s
c
h
e
i
b
e
S
e
c
h
s
k
a
n
t
s
c
h
r
a
u
b
e
F
e
d
e
r

T
y
p

K
o
m
p
e
n
s
a
t
o
r
U
n
t
e
r
l
e
g
s
c
h
e
i
b
e
W
e
t
t
e
r
h
a
u
b
e
R
i
n
g
m
u
t
t
e
r
S
t
u
t
z
e
n
D
i
c
h
t
u
n
g

a
b
g
e
s
c
h
r
g
t
P
a
a
r

S
p
a
n
n
s
c
h
e
l
l
e
n
h
l
f
t
e
n
S
c
h
r
a
u
b
e
C
o
r
p
s

s
o
u
p
a
p
e
D
i
s
q
u
e

d
e

f
e
r
m
e
t
e
u
r
e
D
i
s
q
u
e
R
o
n
d
e
l
l
e

d
e

g
u
i
d
e
B
a
r
r
e

f
i
l
e
t
e
R
o
n
d
e
l
l
e

b
i
s
e
a
u
t
e
E
c
r
o
u

h
e
x
a
g
o
n
a
l
R
e
s
s
o
r
t

t
i
p
e

R
e
s
s
o
r
t

t
i
p
e

R
o
n
d
e
l
l
e

p
a
r
a
V
T
H
R
e
s
s
o
r
t

t
y
p
e

S
o
u
f
f
l
e
t

d
e

p
r
o
t
e
c
t
i
o
n
R
o
n
d
e
l
l
e

d
a
p
p
u
i
C
o
u
v
e
r
c
l
e
O
e
i
l
l
e
t
M
a
n
c
h
o
n
G
a
r
n
i
t
u
r
e

a
v
e
c

c

i
n
c
l
i
n
e
P
a
i
r

d
e

d
e
m
i
-
c
o
l
l
i
e
r
s

D
.
3
1
1
V
i
s

c
l
.
8
.
8
M

1
0
M

1
0
M

1
0
i
1
2
,
e
3
6
,
S
p
.
3
M
1
0

x

6
5
M

1
0
,

e

3
0
M

1
0

2
9
9
M

1
0

x

6
0
D
e
n
o
m
i
n
a
z
i
o
n
e
C
o
d
e
C
o
r
p
o

e
s
t
e
r
n
o

v
a
l
v
o
l
a
D
i
s
c
o

d
i

c
h
i
u
s
u
r
a

v
a
l
v
o
l
a

G
r
.

2
7
3
D
i
s
c
o
R
o
n
d
e
l
l
a

d
i

g
u
i
d
a
B
a
r
r
a

f
i
l
e
t
t
a
t
a
R
o
n
d
e
l
l
a

b
i
s
e
l
l
a
t
a

U
N
I

6
5
9
2
D
a
d
o

e
s
a
g
o
n
a
l
e

n
o
r
m
a
l
e

U
N
I

5
5
8
8
M
o
l
l
a

c
a
r
i
c
o

t
i
p
o

M
o
l
l
a

c
a
r
i
c
o

t
i
p
o

R
o
s
e
t
t
a

p
a
r
a
V
i
t
e

a

t
e
s
t
a

e
s
a
g
o
n
a
l
e
M
o
l
l
a

c
a
r
i
c
o

t
i
p
o

S
o
f
f
i
e
t
t
o

d
i

p
r
o
t
e
z
i
o
n
e
R
o
n
d
e
l
l
a

a
p
p
o
g
g
i
o

U
N
I

6
5
9
3
C
o
p
e
r
c
h
i
o

p
e
r

f
i
l
t
r
o
G
o
l
f
a
r
o

U
N
I

2
9
4
8
T
r
o
n
c
h
e
t
t
o
G
u
a
r
n
i
z
i
o
n
e

c
o
n

u
n

l
a
t
o

i
n
c
l
i
n
a
t
o
C
o
p
p
i
a

d
i

s
e
m
i
f
a
s
c
i
e

d
i

c
h
i
u
s
u
r
a

D
.
3
1
1
V
i
t
e

T
.
C
.
E
.
I

:
c
l
a
s
s
e

8
.
8

U
N
I

5
9
3
1
2
0
6
F
W
9
V
1
A
2
0
6
F
W
9
Z
1
A
2
0
.
6
6
.
1
5
1
.
1
/
A
2
0
.
9
8
.
4
7
7
.
1
/
A
2
0
6
F
W
9
V
1
A
2
9
.
0
6
.
0
2
.
0
0
6
0
2
9
.
0
4
.
0
4
.
0
0
5
0
2
0
.
9
8
.
3
1
6
.
1
/
A
2
0
.
9
8
.
3
1
5
.
1
/
A
2
0
.
9
8
.
4
5
4
.
1
/
A
2
0
.
6
8
.
3
8
1
.
1
/
A
2
0
.
9
8
.
3
3
3
.
1
/
A
2
0
.
9
9
.
2
1
7
.
1
/
A
2
9
.
0
6
.
1
2
.
0
0
9
0
2
0
6
F
W
9
5
2
A
2
9
.
3
2
.
0
2
.
0
5
1
0
2
0
6
F
W
9
Q
1
A
2
0
.
9
9
.
2
1
9
.
1
/
A
2
0
.
6
8
.
9
0
8
.
1
/
A
2
9
.
0
2
.
0
8
.
0
7
9
0
3
VCP -
VCP -
VCP -
VCP -
03.00
03041.R. 01.03
SPARE PARTS
ERSATZTEILE
PIECES DE RECHANGE
RICAMBI
C
o
d
e
V
C
P
S
i
z
e

/

G
r
e
T
a
i
l
l
e

/

G
r
a
n
d
e
z
z
a
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E

C
O
N
T
R
O
L

S
A
F
E
T
Y

V
A
L
V
E
D
R
U
C
K
A
U
S
G
L
E
I
C
H
S
V
E
N
T
I
L
S
O
U
P
A
P
E

D
E

H
A
U
T
E

S
E
C
U
R
I
T
E
V
A
L
V
O
L
A

A
L
T
A

S
I
C
U
R
E
Z
Z
A
V
C
P

2
7
3
.
2
BB
e
n
e
n
n
u
n
g
D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
D
s
i
g
n
a
t
i
o
n
S
t
a
n
d
a
r
d
s
N
o
r
m
e
n
N
o
r
m
e
s
N
o
r
m
e
Q
u
a
n
t
.
M
e
n
g
e
Q
u
a
n
t
.
Q
u
a
n
t
.
I
t
e
m
P
o
s
.
P
o
s
.
P
o
s
.
12345678
8
a
9
1
0
1
1
1
2
1
3
1
4
1
5
1
6
1
7
1
8
1
9
111837
1
7
337114
1
0
131112
V
a
l
v
e

c
a
s
i
n
g
V
a
l
v
e

c
l
o
s
i
n
g

p
l
a
t
e

s
i
z
e

2
7
3
D
i
s
c
W
a
s
h
e
r
T
h
r
e
a
d
e
d

s
t
u
d
B
e
v
e
l
l
e
d

w
a
s
h
e
r

U
N
I

6
5
9
2
N
u
t

U
N
I

5
5
8
8
C
o
m
p
r
e
s
s
i
o
n

s
p
r
i
n
g

t
y
p
e

C
o
m
p
r
e
s
s
i
o
n

s
p
r
i
n
g

t
y
p
e

W
a
s
h
e
r
H
e
x
.

h
e
a
d

s
c
r
e
w
C
o
m
p
r
e
s
s
i
o
n

s
p
r
i
n
g

t
y
p
e

P
r
o
t
e
c
t
i
v
e

b
e
l
l
o
w
s
W
a
s
h
e
r

U
N
I

6
5
9
3
W
e
a
t
h
e
r

p
r
o
t
e
c
t
i
o
n

c
o
v
e
r
E
y
e
b
o
l
t

U
N
I

2
9
4
8
C
o
n
n
e
c
t
o
r

s
l
e
e
v
e
S
e
a
l

w
i
t
h

o
n
e

s
l
o
p
i
n
g

s
i
d
e
P
a
i
r

o
f

c
l
a
m
p
i
n
g

e
l
e
m
e
n
t
s
S
o
c
k
e
t

s
c
r
e
w

8
.
8

U
N
I

5
9
3
1
G
e
h
u
s
e
V
e
r
s
c
h
l
u
s
c
h
e
i
b
e
S
c
h
e
i
b
e
F
h
r
u
n
g
s
u
n
t
e
r
l
e
g
s
c
h
e
i
b
e
G
e
w
i
n
d
e
s
t
a
n
g
e
U
n
t
e
r
l
e
g
s
h
e
i
b
e
S
e
c
h
s
k
a
n
t
m
u
t
t
e
r
F
e
d
e
r

T
y
p

F
e
d
e
r

T
y
p

G
u
m
m
i

-

U
n
t
e
r
l
e
g
s
c
h
e
i
b
e
S
e
c
h
s
k
a
n
t
s
c
h
r
a
u
b
e
F
e
d
e
r

T
y
p

K
o
m
p
e
n
s
a
t
o
r
U
n
t
e
r
l
e
g
s
c
h
e
i
b
e
W
e
t
t
e
r
h
a
u
b
e
R
i
n
g
m
u
t
t
e
r
S
t
u
t
z
e
n
D
i
c
h
t
u
n
g

a
b
g
e
s
c
h
r
g
t
P
a
a
r

S
p
a
n
n
s
c
h
e
l
l
e
n
h
l
f
t
e
n
S
c
h
r
a
u
b
e
C
o
r
p
s

s
o
u
p
a
p
e
D
i
s
q
u
e

d
e

f
e
r
m
e
t
e
u
r
e
D
i
s
q
u
e
R
o
n
d
e
l
l
e

d
e

g
u
i
d
e
B
a
r
r
e

f
i
l
e
t
e
R
o
n
d
e
l
l
e

b
i
s
e
a
u
t
e
E
c
r
o
u

h
e
x
a
g
o
n
a
l
R
e
s
s
o
r
t

t
i
p
e

R
e
s
s
o
r
t

t
i
p
e

R
o
n
d
e
l
l
e

p
a
r
a
V
T
H
R
e
s
s
o
r
t

t
y
p
e

S
o
u
f
f
l
e
t

d
e

p
r
o
t
e
c
t
i
o
n
R
o
n
d
e
l
l
e

d
a
p
p
u
i
C
o
u
v
e
r
c
l
e
O
e
i
l
l
e
t
M
a
n
c
h
o
n
G
a
r
n
i
t
u
r
e

a
v
e
c

c

i
n
c
l
i
n
e
P
a
i
r

d
e

d
e
m
i
-
c
o
l
l
i
e
r
s

D
.
3
1
1
V
i
s

c
l
.
8
.
8
M

1
0
M

1
0
M

1
0
i
1
2
,
e
3
6
,
S
p
.
3
M
1
0

x

6
5
M

1
0
,

e

3
0
M

1
0

2
9
9
M

1
0

x

6
0
D
e
n
o
m
i
n
a
z
i
o
n
e
C
o
d
e
C
o
r
p
o

e
s
t
e
r
n
o

v
a
l
v
o
l
a
D
i
s
c
o

d
i

c
h
i
u
s
u
r
a

v
a
l
v
o
l
a

G
r
.

2
7
3
D
i
s
c
o
R
o
n
d
e
l
l
a

d
i

g
u
i
d
a
B
a
r
r
a

f
i
l
e
t
t
a
t
a
R
o
n
d
e
l
l
a

b
i
s
e
l
l
a
t
a

U
N
I

6
5
9
2
D
a
d
o

e
s
a
g
o
n
a
l
e

n
o
r
m
a
l
e

U
N
I

5
5
8
8
M
o
l
l
a

c
a
r
i
c
o

t
i
p
o

M
o
l
l
a

c
a
r
i
c
o

t
i
p
o

R
o
s
e
t
t
a

p
a
r
a
V
i
t
e

a

t
e
s
t
a

e
s
a
g
o
n
a
l
e
M
o
l
l
a

c
a
r
i
c
o

t
i
p
o

S
o
f
f
i
e
t
t
o

d
i

p
r
o
t
e
z
i
o
n
e
R
o
n
d
e
l
l
a

a
p
p
o
g
g
i
o

U
N
I

6
5
9
3
C
o
p
e
r
c
h
i
o

p
e
r

f
i
l
t
r
o
G
o
l
f
a
r
o

U
N
I

2
9
4
8
T
r
o
n
c
h
e
t
t
o
G
u
a
r
n
i
z
i
o
n
e

c
o
n

u
n

l
a
t
o

i
n
c
l
i
n
a
t
o
C
o
p
p
i
a

d
i

s
e
m
i
f
a
s
c
i
e

d
i

c
h
i
u
s
u
r
a

D
.
3
1
1
V
i
t
e

T
.
C
.
E
.
I

:
c
l
a
s
s
e

8
.
8

U
N
I

5
9
3
1
2
0
6
F
W
9
U
2
A
2
0
6
F
W
9
Z
2
A
2
0
.
6
6
.
1
5
1
.
2
/
A
2
0
.
9
8
.
4
7
7
.
2
/
A
2
0
6
F
W
9
V
2
A
3
0
0
6
0
2
0
0
5
0
3
0
0
4
0
4
0
0
5
0
2
0
.
9
8
.
3
1
6
.
1
/
A
2
0
.
9
8
.
3
1
5
.
1
/
A
2
0
.
9
8
.
4
5
4
.
1
/
A
2
0
.
6
8
.
3
8
1
.
2
/
A
2
0
.
9
8
.
3
3
3
.
1
/
A
2
0
.
9
9
.
2
1
7
.
1
/
A
3
0
0
6
1
2
0
0
9
0
2
0
6
F
W
9
5
2
A
2
9
.
3
2
.
0
2
.
0
5
1
0
2
0
6
F
W
9
Q
2
A
2
0
.
9
9
.
2
1
9
.
1
/
A
2
0
.
6
8
.
9
0
8
.
1
/
A
3
0
0
2
0
8
0
4
1
0
3
03.00
VCP -
VCP -
VCP -
VCP -
03041.R. 01.04
SPARE PARTS
ERSATZTEILE
PIECES DE RECHANGE
RICAMBI
C
o
d
e
V
C
P
S
i
z
e

/

G
r
e
T
a
i
l
l
e

/

G
r
a
n
d
e
z
z
a
P
R
E
S
S
U
R
E

C
O
N
T
R
O
L

S
A
F
E
T
Y

V
A
L
V
E
D
R
U
C
K
A
U
S
G
L
E
I
C
H
S
V
E
N
T
I
L
S
O
U
P
A
P
E

D
E

H
A
U
T
E

S
E
C
U
R
I
T
E
V
A
L
V
O
L
A

A
L
T
A

S
I
C
U
R
E
Z
Z
A
V
C
P

2
7
3
.
3
BB
e
n
e
n
n
u
n
g
D
e
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
D
s
i
g
n
a
t
i
o
n
S
t
a
n
d
a
r
d
s
N
o
r
m
e
n
N
o
r
m
e
s
N
o
r
m
e
Q
u
a
n
t
.
M
e
n
g
e
Q
u
a
n
t
.
Q
u
a
n
t
.
I
t
e
m
P
o
s
.
P
o
s
.
P
o
s
.
12345678
8
a
9
1
0
1
1
1
2
1
3
1
4
1
5
1
6
1
7
1
8
1
9
111837
1
7
337114
1
0
131112
V
a
l
v
e

c
a
s
i
n
g
V
a
l
v
e

c
l
o
s
i
n
g

p
l
a
t
e

s
i
z
e

2
7
3
D
i
s
c
W
a
s
h
e
r
T
h
r
e
a
d
e
d

s
t
u
d
B
e
v
e
l
l
e
d

w
a
s
h
e
r

U
N
I

6
5
9
2
N
u
t

U
N
I

5
5
8
8
C
o
m
p
r
e
s
s
i
o
n

s
p
r
i
n
g

t
y
p
e

C
o
m
p
r
e
s
s
i
o
n

s
p
r
i
n
g

t
y
p
e

W
a
s
h
e
r
H
e
x
.

h
e
a
d

s
c
r
e
w
C
o
m
p
r
e
s
s
i
o
n

s
p
r
i
n
g

t
y
p
e

P
r
o
t
e
c
t
i
v
e

b
e
l
l
o
w
s
W
a
s
h
e
r

U
N
I

6
5
9
3
W
e
a
t
h
e
r

p
r
o
t
e
c
t
i
o
n

c
o
v
e
r
E
y
e
b
o
l
t

U
N
I

2
9
4
8
C
o
n
n
e
c
t
o
r

s
l
e
e
v
e
S
e
a
l

w
i
t
h

o
n
e

s
l
o
p
i
n
g

s
i
d
e
P
a
i
r

o
f

c
l
a
m
p
i
n
g

e
l
e
m
e
n
t
s
S
o
c
k
e
t

s
c
r
e
w

8
.
8

U
N
I

5
9
3
1
G
e
h
u
s
e
V
e
r
s
c
h
l
u
s
c
h
e
i
b
e
S
c
h
e
i
b
e
F
h
r
u
n
g
s
u
n
t
e
r
l
e
g
s
c
h
e
i
b
e
G
e
w
i
n
d
e
s
t
a
n
g
e
U
n
t
e
r
l
e
g
s
h
e
i
b
e
S
e
c
h
s
k
a
n
t
m
u
t
t
e
r
F
e
d
e
r

T
y
p

F
e
d
e
r

T
y
p

G
u
m
m
i

-

U
n
t
e
r
l
e
g
s
c
h
e
i
b
e
S
e
c
h
s
k
a
n
t
s
c
h
r
a
u
b
e
F
e
d
e
r

T
y
p

K
o
m
p
e
n
s
a
t
o
r
U
n
t
e
r
l
e
g
s
c
h
e
i
b
e
W
e
t
t
e
r
h
a
u
b
e
R
i
n
g
m
u
t
t
e
r
S
t
u
t
z
e
n
D
i
c
h
t
u
n
g

a
b
g
e
s
c
h
r
g
t
P
a
a
r

S
p
a
n
n
s
c
h
e
l
l
e
n
h
l
f
t
e
n
S
c
h
r
a
u
b
e
C
o
r
p
s

s
o
u
p
a
p
e
D
i
s
q
u
e

d
e

f
e
r
m
e
t
e
u
r
e
D
i
s
q
u
e
R
o
n
d
e
l
l
e

d
e

g
u
i
d
e
B
a
r
r
e

f
i
l
e
t
e
R
o
n
d
e
l
l
e

b
i
s
e
a
u
t
e
E
c
r
o
u

h
e
x
a
g
o
n
a
l
R
e
s
s
o
r
t

t
i
p
e

R
e
s
s
o
r
t

t
i
p
e

R
o
n
d
e
l
l
e

p
a
r
a
V
T
H
R
e
s
s
o
r
t

t
y
p
e

S
o
u
f
f
l
e
t

d
e

p
r
o
t
e
c
t
i
o
n
R
o
n
d
e
l
l
e

d
a
p
p
u
i
C
o
u
v
e
r
c
l
e
O
e
i
l
l
e
t
M
a
n
c
h
o
n
G
a
r
n
i
t
u
r
e

a
v
e
c

c

i
n
c
l
i
n
e
P
a
i
r

d
e

d
e
m
i
-
c
o
l
l
i
e
r
s

D
.
3
1
1
V
i
s

c
l
.
8
.
8
M

1
0
M

1
0
M

1
0
i
1
2
,
e
3
6
,
S
p
.
3
M
1
0

x

6
5
M

1
0
,

e

3
0
M

1
0

2
9
9
M

1
0

x

6
0
D
e
n
o
m
i
n
a
z
i
o
n
e
C
o
d
e
C
o
r
p
o

e
s
t
e
r
n
o

v
a
l
v
o
l
a
D
i
s
c
o

d
i

c
h
i
u
s
u
r
a

v
a
l
v
o
l
a

G
r
.

2
7
3
D
i
s
c
o
R
o
n
d
e
l
l
a

d
i

g
u
i
d
a
B
a
r
r
a

f
i
l
e
t
t
a
t
a
R
o
n
d
e
l
l
a

b
i
s
e
l
l
a
t
a

U
N
I

6
5
9
2
D
a
d
o

e
s
a
g
o
n
a
l
e

n
o
r
m
a
l
e

U
N
I

5
5
8
8
M
o
l
l
a

c
a
r
i
c
o

t
i
p
o

M
o
l
l
a

c
a
r
i
c
o

t
i
p
o

R
o
s
e
t
t
a

p
a
r
a
V
i
t
e

a

t
e
s
t
a

e
s
a
g
o
n
a
l
e
M
o
l
l
a

c
a
r
i
c
o

t
i
p
o

S
o
f
f
i
e
t
t
o

d
i

p
r
o
t
e
z
i
o
n
e
R
o
n
d
e
l
l
a

a
p
p
o
g
g
i
o

U
N
I

6
5
9
3
C
o
p
e
r
c
h
i
o

p
e
r

f
i
l
t
r
o
G
o
l
f
a
r
o

U
N
I

2
9
4
8
T
r
o
n
c
h
e
t
t
o
G
u
a
r
n
i
z
i
o
n
e

c
o
n

u
n

l
a
t
o

i
n
c
l
i
n
a
t
o
C
o
p
p
i
a

d
i

s
e
m
i
f
a
s
c
i
e

d
i

c
h
i
u
s
u
r
a

D
.
3
1
1
V
i
t
e

T
.
C
.
E
.
I

:
c
l
a
s
s
e

8
.
8

U
N
I

5
9
3
1
2
0
6
F
W
9
U
3
A
2
0
6
F
W
9
Z
3
A
2
0
.
6
6
.
1
5
1
.
3
/
A
2
0
.
9
8
.
4
7
7
.
2
/
A
2
0
6
F
W
9
V
2
A
3
0
0
6
0
2
0
0
5
0
3
0
0
4
0
4
0
0
5
0
2
0
.
9
8
.
3
1
6
.
1
/
A
2
0
.
9
8
.
3
1
5
.
1
/
A
2
0
.
9
8
.
4
5
4
.
1
/
A
2
0
.
6
8
.
3
8
1
.
2
/
A
2
0
.
9
8
.
3
3
3
.
1
/
A
2
0
.
9
9
.
2
1
7
.
1
/
A
3
0
0
6
1
2
0
0
9
0
2
0
6
F
W
9
5
2
A
2
9
.
3
2
.
0
2
.
0
5
1
0
2
0
6
F
W
9
Q
2
A
2
0
.
9
9
.
2
1
9
.
1
/
A
2
0
.
6
8
.
9
0
8
.
1
/
A
3
0
0
2
0
8
0
4
1
0
3

Via Verdi, 2
24121 Bergamo
Italy

Phone: +39 035 237 196
Fax: +39 035 237 785

691612D
Ventomatic-IHI-Vietnam

Silo discharge and aeroslide transport

Technical Documentation

CP (Italiana) order n: 01/3951/06
Place of erection: BIM SON II - VIETNAM
Year of delivery: 2007
Supplier: Claudius Peters (Italiana) srl

691612D - Ventomatic-IHI-Vietnam Silo discharge and aeroslide transport

Via Verdi, 2
24121 Bergamo
Italy

Phone: +39 035 237 196
Fax: +39 035 237 785

Contents

Chapter Title

1. Principal safety references
2. Spare parts keeping
3. Equipment legend
4. Motor list and process logic
5. Mechanical equipment
5.1. Flat shut-off gate CLAUDIUS PETERS
5.2. Aeroslide shut off gate CLAUDIUS PETERS
5.3. Flow-control gate type PP CLAUDIUS PETERS
5.4. Flexible connection CLAUDIUS PETERS
5.5. Aeroslide type 1 CLAUDIUS PETERS
5.6. Shut-off flap with manual drive INTERAPP
5.7. Centrifugal fan F.LLI FERRARI

Claudius Peters
Principal safety references

596.0009.1000A/05.en

596.0009.1000A/05.en
Release 5: 03.05.2005
Page 2 of 20

Contents
1 Preface to the Safety Instructions......................................................................................... 3
2 A Note on Intellectual Property and Other Protection Rights in Accordance with DIN ISO 16016. 3
3 Basic Safety Instructions....................................................................................................... 4
3.1 Warning Signs and Symbols................................................................................................. 4
3.2 Principle / Correct Intended Use........................................................................................... 5
3.3 Organisational Procedures.................................................................................................... 5
3.4 Selection and Qualification of Personnel / Principal Responsibilities ................................... 7
3.5 Safety Instructions Governing Specific Work Phases........................................................... 8
3.5.1 Normal Operation.................................................................................................................. 8
3.5.2 Maintenance and Other Special Work .................................................................................. 9
3.6 References to Particular Dangers......................................................................................... 10
3.6.1 Electrical Energy ................................................................................................................... 10
3.6.2 Gas / Dust / Steam / Smoke.................................................................................................. 10
3.6.3 Hydraulics / Pneumatics........................................................................................................ 11
3.6.4 Noise ..................................................................................................................................... 11
3.6.5 Oil / Grease / Other Chemical Materials ............................................................................... 11
3.7 Transport / Assembly / Commissioning of Plant Sections / Machines.................................. 12
3.7.1 Transport ............................................................................................................................... 12
3.7.2 Assembly............................................................................................................................... 13
3.7.3 Commissioning...................................................................................................................... 14
3.8 Special Instructions for Coal Grinding and Metering Equipment .......................................... 16
3.8.1 General.................................................................................................................................. 16
3.8.2 Safety From Coal Dust Explosions ....................................................................................... 17
3.8.3 Explosion Protection ............................................................................................................. 18
3.8.4 Division into Zones................................................................................................................ 18
3.8.5 Surface Temperature ............................................................................................................ 19
3.8.6 Monitoring the Fine Coal Silo................................................................................................ 19
3.8.7 Electrical Equipment ............................................................................................................. 19
3.8.8 Health Hazards ..................................................................................................................... 20
3.8.9 The Workplace...................................................................................................................... 20

596.0009.1000A/05.en
Release 5: 03.05.2005
Page 3 of 20

1 Preface to the Safety Instructions
These Basic Safety Instructions apply to all Claudius Peters Technologies products, as described more
precisely in individual operating instructions.
These Basic Safety Instructions will make it easier to operate the plant or machine safely, correctly and
economically.
Like the relevant operating instructions for Claudius Peters Technologies plant and machines, these Basic
Safety Instructions contain important information. Observing them will help to avoid risks, to minimise repair
costs and downtime, and to increase the reliability and service life of the plant or machine.
These Basic Safety Instructions are to be supplemented by further instructions based on national regulations
for accident prevention and for environment protection.
These Basic Safety Instructions must be permanently available at the place of operation of the plant or
machine.
These Basic Safety Instructions must be read and used by every person charged with working with or on the
plant or machine, e.g.:
operation
including setting-up, fault rectification during the course of work, removal of production waste, care,
disposal of operating and auxiliary materials
maintenance (servicing, inspection, repair)
and/or
transport.
In addition to these Basic Safety Instructions, the following must also be observed:
the accident prevention regulations mandatory in the country of use and at the place of operation of the
plant or machine
the generally recognised and applicable technical rules for safe and professional work in the country of
use and at the place of operation of the plant or machine.
2 A Note on Intellectual Property and Other Protection Rights in
Accordance with DIN ISO 16016
Copying this document or giving it to others, along with the use or communication of its contents, are
forbidden without express authority. Offenders are liable for the payment of damages. All rights are reserved
in the event of the grant of a patent or the registration of a utility model or design.

596.0009.1000A/05.en
Release 5: 03.05.2005
Page 4 of 20

3 Basic Safety Instructions
3.1 Warning Signs and Symbols
Particularly important information is identified in the operating instructions relevant to the plant or machine as
follows:
Note:
Special information regarding economical operation of the plant or
machine.
Attention
Special information, orders or prohibitions to prevent damage. "Attention" is
printed at those locations in these Basic Safety Instructions and in the Claudius
Peters Technologies operating instructions that call for particular attention in
order to satisfy guidelines, regulations, instructions and working procedures,
and in order to prevent damage to or destruction of the machine and/or other
parts of the plant.
DANGER
INFORMATION, ORDERS OR PROHIBITIONS TO PROTECT
PERSONS AND TO PROTECT AGAINST EXTENSIVE DAMAGE
TO PROPERTY!
Observe these "DANGER" instructions, and behave with particular care under the relevant circumstances.
Also inform other users of all safety instructions. General safety and accident prevention regulations must
also be observed in addition to the instructions provided in these Basic Safety Instructions and in the
Claudius Peters Technologies operating instructions.

596.0009.1000A/05.en
Release 5: 03.05.2005
Page 5 of 20

3.2 Principle / Correct Intended Use
Equipment and machines from Claudius Peters Technologies are constructed in accordance with up-to-date
good technical practice and the recognised technical rules for safety. Nevertheless, their operation may
cause damage or injury to the user or third persons, or damage to the plant, machine or other property.
Only use the plant or machine when in proper technical condition, according to its intended purpose,
conscious of safety and possible danger, and in accordance with the instruction manual. Functional
disorders that would prejudice safety, in particular, must be removed immediately.
The plant or machine is only to be used in accordance with the "Intended Purpose" section of the relevant
operating instructions. Any use differing from or exceeding the purpose of the plant or machine is considered
to contravene the intended purpose. Claudius Peters Technologies will not be liable for any damage
resulting from misuse of the product. The risk is borne entirely by the user.
Use in accordance with its intended purpose also includes observation of the operating instructions
belonging to the plant on machine, maintenance of the inspection and servicing conditions, and the use of
original spare parts.
3.3 Organisational Procedures
Keep the instruction manual and these Basic Safety Instructions permanently on hand at place of operation
of the plant or machine (in the tool box or in the box provided for this purpose).
In addition to the instruction manual, observe and provide instructions covering generally applicable legal
and other mandatory regulations governing accident prevention and protection of the environment.
Such responsibilities may also involve, for example, the handling of dangerous materials, the provision and
wearing of personal protection equipment, or traffic regulations.
The instruction manual is to be supplemented by instructions including obligatory control, supervision and
reporting relevant to features specific to the company, e.g. with respect to work organisation, work flow and
personnel.
Before starting work, the personnel in charge of any activities relating to the use of the plant or machine must
have read and understood the instruction manual, and in particular the chapter covering "Safety
Instructions".
This applies in particular to personnel who only occasionally work with the plant or machine, e.g. during
setting-up or servicing.
It is necessary to check that personnel are working in a safety-conscious manner, aware of risks, and in
observance of the operating instructions.
Personnel must not allow long hair to hang open, and must not wear loose clothing or jewellery, including
rings. There is a risk of injury if such items become caught up or drawn into the machinery.

596.0009.1000A/05.en
Release 5: 03.05.2005
Page 6 of 20

Ensure that the working area at and around the machine is clear and clean.
regulations.
All safety and danger signs at the plant or machine must be complete and maintained in a legible condition.
In the event of safety-related modifications to the plant or machine, or if the behaviour of the plant or
machine in operation is changed, immediately stop the plant or machine using the main command
equipment and notify the responsible body or person of the malfunction.
Changes, additions and modifications to the plant or machine must not be carried out without the approval of
Claudius Peters Technologies. This also includes the fitting and adjustment of safety devices and safety
valves, and to welding at supporting structures.
Do not change plant or machine programs (software) for programmable control systems without contacting
the supplier.
Replace hydraulic hoses at the stated times, or at appropriate short intervals, even if no faults that could
endanger safety are visible.
Keep to the timetable of recurring tests and inspections specified or indicated in the instruction manual.
Regular servicing is the precondition for reliable operation of the machine or plant.
It is essential that the appropriate workshop equipment is used in order to carry out maintenance or repair
work.
areas.

596.0009.1000A/05.en
Release 5: 03.05.2005
Page 7 of 20

3.4 Selection and Qualification of Personnel / Principal Responsibilities
Any work on the plant or machine must only be performed by reliable and qualified personnel. Observe the
minimum legally permitted age.
Only use trained or instructed personnel. Make sure that the responsibilities of the personnel for operating,
setting up, servicing and repair are clearly specified.
Make sure that only personnel who have been charged with the job carry out work at the plant or machine.
Clearly specify the responsibilities of the operator of the plant or machine, and make it possible for him to
decline instructions from third parties that conflict with safety.
Personnel who are being trained, or are in the process of learning or being instructed, or who are involved in
general education may only work at the plant or machine under the constant supervision of an experienced
person.
Work on the plant or machine's electrical equipment must only be performed by an electrician or by
instructed persons under the guidance and supervision of an electrician, in accordance with electrical
Work on gas appliances (gas consumption equipment) must only be performed by specially trained
personnel.
Personnel who are operating coal grinding or coal dispensing equipment must immediately report any
changes in the fine coal system that could have an effect on safety to the works management.

596.0009.1000A/05.en
Release 5: 03.05.2005
Page 8 of 20

3.5 Safety Instructions Governing Specific Work Phases
3.5.1 Normal Operation
Take measures to ensure that the plant or machine is only operated only in a safe and properly functioning
condition.
Only operate the plant or machine if all safety devices and safety-related equipment, e.g. removable guards,
emergency stops, sound insulation or suction devices are in place and operative.
DANGER
be implemented.
Check the plant or machine for externally detectable damage or defects at least once per shift. Notify the
responsible body or person immediately of any changes (including any deviations from the operating
behaviour). If necessary, stop and safeguard the plant or machine immediately.
In case of malfunction, stop and safeguard the plant or machine immediately. Have the malfunction rectified
immediately.
instructions.
The operator may only start the machine up when he has assured himself that it is in proper condition, that
The selector switch must be positioned to NORMAL OPERATION and must be locked.
Do not switch off or remove vacuum or ventilation equipment during operation of plant or machine.

596.0009.1000A/05.en
Release 5: 03.05.2005
Page 9 of 20

3.5.2 Maintenance and Other Special Work
The timetable of adjustment, servicing and inspection tasks specified in the operating instructions must be
maintained. Observe the instructions on the exchange of parts or equipment sections. Only specialist staff
may carry out this work.
Inform operating staff before starting to carry out special and maintenance work. Nominate those responsible
for supervision.
In any work related to the operation, adaptation to manufacture, conversion or adjustment of the plant or
machine and its safety equipment, and for maintenance work, it is necessary to observe the procedures for
switching the equipment on and off in accordance with the operating instructions. Instructions must again be
followed. The procedures for switching on and for switching off and to be considered equally significant
during inspection, servicing, maintenance or repair.
Inasmuch as it may be necessary, secure plenty of room around the area where maintenance work will take
place.
If the plant or machine is completely switched off during maintenance and repair work, it must be
safeguarded against unexpectedly being switched on:
and/or
During replacement, individual parts and large and/or heavy structural components must be carefully
attached to lifting appliances and secured in order to avoid any danger. Only use appropriate and technically
appropriate lifting equipment or lifting appliances with sufficient carrying capacity. Do not enter or work in the
area underneath a suspended load.
Only charge skilled personnel with suspending loads and instructing crane operators. The instructor must
keep within view of the operator or be in voice contact with him.
been provided for the purpose or are otherwise appropriately safe. Do not use parts of the machine to climb
on. Wear safety devices to prevent falling when carrying out maintenance work at greater heights.
Clean oil, fuel or maintenance agents off the plant or machine, in particular off cable connections and
screwed joints, prior to carrying out maintenance or repair work. Do not use aggressive cleaning agents. Use
lint-free cleaning rags.
When cleaning the machine cabin, make sure that temperature sensors in the fire detection and
extinguishing appliance do not come into contact with the hot cleanser. Otherwise the fire extinguisher might
be activated.

596.0009.1000A/05.en
Release 5: 03.05.2005
Page 10 of 20

Completely remove covers and glue after cleaning.
After cleaning, check all fuel, motor oil or hydraulic oil hoses for leaks, loose joints, chafing or other damage.
Repair any faults discovered immediately.
After maintenance or repair work, always firmly tighten screwed joints that have been undone.
Should setup, servicing or repair make it necessary for safety appliances to be dismantled, the re-assembly
and checking of these safety appliances must follow as soon as the servicing and repair work has been
completed.
3.6 References to Particular Dangers
3.6.1 Electrical Energy
Only use original safety fuses with specified current rating. In case of malfunctions in the electrical energy
supply, switch off the plant or machine immediately.
Plant or machine parts on which inspection, maintenance and repair is being performed, must, if so
specified, be disconnected from the electrical power. First check that the isolated parts are not live, then
connect to earth and attach circuit shorts, as well as isolating neighbouring live parts.
The electrical equipment of a plant or machine must be inspected and checked at regular intervals. Defects
such as loose connections or scorched cables must be repaired immediately.
If work on live parts does become necessary, call in a second person who can actuate the emergency or
main switch in case of emergency. Block off the working area with a red and white safety chain and a danger
sign. Only use electrically isolated tools.
When carrying out work on high voltage assemblies, connect the supply cable to ground after isolation from
the supply, and short circuit components such as capacitors using an earthing rod.
3.6.2 Gas / Dust / Steam / Smoke
Only perform welding, torch or grinding work on the plant or machine if this has been explicitly approved. A
risk of fire or explosion can arise.
When working in small and narrow spaces, observe any national regulations that may apply.

596.0009.1000A/05.en
Release 5: 03.05.2005
Page 11 of 20

3.6.3 Hydraulics / Pneumatics
Check all conduits, hoses and screwed joints for leaks and externally visible defects at regular intervals.
Repair defects immediately. Spurting oil may cause injuries and fire.
Depressurise any parts of the system and pressure pipes (hydraulic, compressed air) that will have to be
opened, in accordance with the description of the relevant assemblies, before starting any repair work.
3.6.4 Noise
Sound insulation appliances at the plant or machine must be in their protective position during operation.
Wear prescribed ear muffs.
3.6.5 Oil / Grease / Other Chemical Materials
product.

596.0009.1000A/05.en
Release 5: 03.05.2005
Page 12 of 20

3.7 Transport / Assembly / Commissioning of Plant Sections / Machines
3.7.1 Transport
DANGER
DO NOT ENTER OR WORK IN THE AREA UNDERNEATH A
SUSPENDED LOAD!
Attention
During transport it is important to ensure that components reach the assembly
location without having been twisted or deformed through the use of unsuitable
carrying devices or attachment methods.
Only use transport vehicles, lifting gear and load supporting equipment that is in proper technical condition
and has sufficient loading capacity for loading and unloading work.
Secure the load reliably. Use appropriate attachment points.
Nominate an experienced instructor for the lifting work.
Only charge experienced personnel with suspending loads and instructing crane operators. The instructor
must keep within view of the operator or be in voice contact with him.
Closed boxes should be kept closed for as long as possible, and should be transported as close as possible
to the fitting location.
Only lift plant components or machines using professional lifting equipment in accordance with the
instruction manual (attachment points for load suspension devices, etc.).
Secure plant components or machines against unintentional changes in position, using recommended or
supplied equipment, prior to or immediately after completing the loading work. Affix relevant warning signs.
Even if a change in its position is very small, isolate the plant component or machine from every external
source of energy. Before commencing operation again, reconnect the plant component or machine properly
to the mains.
Before starting operation again, carefully dismantle any items that have been attached for transport
purposes. Before restarting operation, carefully remount any items that have been detached for transport
purposes.
Carefully remove any auxiliary equipment before starting operation again.
Proceed only in accordance with the instruction manual to restart operation.

596.0009.1000A/05.en
Release 5: 03.05.2005
Page 13 of 20

3.7.2 Assembly
Any time that plant or machine parts are transported, raised or lowered, the work must only be done whilst
observing the basic safety instructions in accordance with Section 3.7.1.
During fitting, individual parts and large and/or heavy structural components must be carefully attached to
lifting appliances and secured in order to avoid any danger. Only use appropriate and technically correct
lifting equipment or lifting appliances with sufficient carrying capacity. Do not enter or work in the area
underneath a suspended load.
areas.
be installed.
been provided for the purpose or are otherwise required for safety. Do not use parts of the machine to climb
on. Wear safety devices to prevent falling when carrying out assembly work at greater heights.
product.
trained personnel.

596.0009.1000A/05.en
Release 5: 03.05.2005
Page 14 of 20

Clean oil, fuel or other maintenance materials from connections and screwed joints. Do not use aggressive
cleaning agents. Use lint-free cleaning rags.
3.7.3 Commissioning
Commissioning should be carried out under the leadership of a commissioning engineer from Claudius
Peters Technologies.
Before commissioning, the manufacturer's operating manuals for all the drive units and the data on the type
plates must be observed.
areas.
be taken into account and implemented.
In addition to the instruction manual, observe generally applicable legal and other mandatory regulations
governing accident prevention and protection of the environment.
Before starting work, the personnel in charge of commissioning the plant or machine must have read and
understood the instruction manual, and in particular the chapter covering "Safety Instructions".

596.0009.1000A/05.en
Release 5: 03.05.2005
Page 15 of 20

For any work that cannot be reached from ground level, use stairs or working platforms that have been
provided for the purpose or are otherwise required for safety. Do not use parts of the machine to climb on.
Wear safety devices to prevent falling when working at greater heights.
regulations.
Only commence operation of the plant or machine if all safety devices and safety-related equipment, e.g.
removable guards, emergency stops, sound insulation or suction devices are in place, operative and linked
into the control system.
instructions.
The operator may only start the machine up when he has convinced himself that it is in proper condition, that
DANGER
If the plant or machine is completely switched off during commissioning, it must be safeguarded against
being switched on again unexpectedly:
and/or
Always properly tighten screwed joints that have been loosened during commissioning work.
If it is necessary to dismantle safety equipment in the course of the commissioning work, then refitting and
inspection of the safety equipment must be carried out immediately this work has been completed.

596.0009.1000A/05.en
Release 5: 03.05.2005
Page 16 of 20

product.
trained personnel.
3.8 Special Instructions for Coal Grinding and Metering Equipment
3.8.1 General
Coal dust that is stirred up into the air presents a risk of fire and explosion. Coal dust should never therefore
be agitated.
Fires in coal dust stored in bunkers or heaps must not be fought with a water jet, but only using a suitable
extinguishing procedure. Appropriate involvement of the responsible fire service is necessary.
Even small quantities of accumulated coal dust tend to ignite spontaneously; such dust must be removed
with an appropriate vacuum cleaner.
Some types of coal release gases that are intoxicating and that present a risk of explosion.
Never open manholes or explosion flaps in the grinding and bunkering equipment during operation, because
the entry of air into the partially pressurised system can create an explosively hazardous mixture of dust and
air. For the same reasons, any leaks that might arise in containers or pipelines must be rectified immediately.
Never enter bunkers full of coal dust; only enter bunkers that have been emptied after obtaining approval
from the works management, after sufficient ventilation, and in the presence of a second person. Persons
who enter must be attached to ropes, and oxygen equipment must be kept ready.
And any kind of work (such as welding!) on pipes that carry coal dust is only permitted when the equipment
is switched off, after thorough cleaning, and whilst taking strict safety precautions. Approval must be
obtained from the works management.

596.0009.1000A/05.en
Release 5: 03.05.2005
Page 17 of 20

3.8.2 Safety From Coal Dust Explosions
Dust is created industrially through grinding procedures (flour, sugar, paint, plastic or coal), or may arise as a
waste product (abrasion, grinding). If the material is combustible, i.e. if it reacts exothermically with oxygen,
the powder product is referred to as "combustible dust".
Combustible dust has a tendency to ignite spontaneously when heated. Particular safety regulations must be
observed in order to avoid explosion or fire.
The following points in particular must be taken account when designing transport equipment for coal or coal
dust, coal grinding equipment, or storage silos for coal dust:
SR Coal Dust (SR-Kohlestaub)
TRD 413
VDI 2263, 3676
VDE 0165
AD Instruction Leaflets (AD-Merkbltter)
The circumstances that make a dust explosion likely are present when the three following conditions are
simultaneously present:
1. combustible dust that is sufficiently fine
2. a source of ignition with sufficient energy
3. an oxygen concentration above the critical limit.
A dust explosion cannot occur if even one of these preconditions is absent.

596.0009.1000A/05.en
Release 5: 03.05.2005
Page 18 of 20

3.8.3 Explosion Protection
A distinction is made between primary and secondary explosion protection.
Secondary explosion protection permits and explosion to occur. What is done, in this case, is that the effects
of the explosion are prevented from presenting a danger to the life or health of persons. Secondary
explosion protection can be achieved through appropriate construction (a method of construction, for
instance, that is resistant to blast) or through explosion suppression.
Primary explosion protection implies that the occurrence of an explosion is prevented. An explosion can be
reliably prevented if any one of the three following conditions is absent:
A. combustible dust that is sufficiently fine
B. a source of ignition with sufficient energy
C. an oxygen concentration above the critical limit.
A. Combustible dust that is sufficiently fine is generally present within the parts of the metering
equipment. Condition A is therefore always present.
B. To a large extent, sources of ignition with sufficient energy can be avoided by taking specific
measures (see the electrical engineering documentation). It is not, however, possible to avoid some
residual risk. Care must be taken to see that all pipes that carry coal dust are always grounded, so
that electrostatic discharges are avoided, and that any insulation locations are bridged by an earth
strap.
C. An inert atmosphere is maintained in all parts of the equipment in which coal dust is transported or
stored under all operating conditions. The oxygen concentration is maintained below the critical limit.
This reliably prevents a coal dust explosion.
If the equipment is operated and maintained in accordance with regulations using the available techniques,
the occurrence of a coal dust explosion can be ruled out as far as it is humanly possible to judge.
3.8.4 Division into Zones
In order to estimate the extent of the measures that need to be taken, areas at risk of explosion are divided
into zones [see ATEX 118 (137)].
For combustible dusts, these are:
present continuously, or for long periods or frequently.
likely to occur in normal operation occasionally.
not likely to occur in normal operation but, if it does occur, will persist for a short period only.

596.0009.1000A/05.en
Release 5: 03.05.2005
Page 19 of 20

3.8.5 Surface Temperature
The maximum permissible surface temperature of plant components is specified according to the
smouldering temperature of the accumulated coal dust, T
GI

or the
ignition temperature of the coal dust, T
Z

For stored coal dust, the max. permissible surface temperature is (T
GI
75)C.
For hard coal dust, the lowest smouldering temperature of a layer of dust 5 mm thick is: T
GI,min
= 245 C.
The permissible surface temperature for a layer of dust 5 mm thick is therefore 170 C. If the layer of dust is
thicker, the permissible surface temperature must be further reduced.
For dust that has been stirred up, the max. permissible surface temperature is: 2/3 of the ignition
temperature T
Z
.
For hard coal dust, the lowest ignition temperature is given by T
Z,min
= 550 C.
This means that the permissible surface temperature for hard coal dust that has been stirred up is 367 C.
3.8.6 Monitoring the Fine Coal Silo
Monitoring the internal atmosphere inside the coal dust silo through continuous measurement of the
oxygen concentration.
Monitoring for the development of smouldering within the coal dust silo through continuous measurement
of the CO concentration.
Monitoring the temperature in the upper part of the coal dust silo through continuous temperature
measurement.
Supplementary injection of CO
2
into the coal dust silo if a specified limit for the CO concentration within
the silo is exceeded.
3.8.7 Electrical Equipment
Implemented to meet protection class IP 65
Within parts of the plant that carry coal dust the implementation is protected against explosion.
Surface temperatures of drives less than 120C.
All parts of the plant that carry coal dust are earthed.

596.0009.1000A/05.en
Release 5: 03.05.2005
Page 20 of 20

3.8.8 Health Hazards
Incorrect operation, servicing, assembly or conversion of the coal grinding and metering equipment can give
rise to the following hazards to personnel:
Burns through heat radiation, through touching a hot surfaces, or through the emergence of hot materials
Hearing loss through medium to high noise emission
Risk of fire or explosion through the emergence of coal dust, gas or oil
Electrical hazards through shorts to ground, short circuits or capacitative discharge
A risk of slipping, stumbling or falling presented by pools of oil, dust or coal, or through inadequate
lighting
Breathing in gases or coal dust released through faulty seals
Risks of being crushed or struck by parts of the machine, or resulting from missing protective equipment
or warnings
3.8.9 The Workplace
Throughout the entire coal grinding and metering area, work places, in the sense of workplace guidelines,
are the particularly identified, closed rooms such as control and operating rooms as well as other offices and
workshops that are not classified as being under the immediate influence of the coal grinding and metering
equipment, and which therefore must be protected from noise and dust.

691612D - Ventomatic-IHI-Vietnam Silo discharge and aeroslide transport

Via Verdi, 2
24121 Bergamo
Italy
1/1
Phone: +39 035 237 196
Fax: +39 035 237 785

2. Spare Parts Keeping

The storage of the most important spare and wear parts at the site of installation is an important prerequisite for
the continuous function and readiness of your installation, and, of course, also for the Claudius Peters
aggregates.
Only the original spare parts delivered by us are subject to :
commitment of guarantee
material and quality control
further development
an availability of more than 10 to 20 years
DIN ISO 9001

We would like to point out that obligations cannot be claimed for spare parts and accessories, which have not
been delivered by us, as described before. The installation and/or the use of not original spare parts may
have a negative influence on structural characteristics of the aggregate and/or the installation and can therefore
considerably impair the active and/or passive safety of your installation.
Claudius Peters does not take over any liability or guarantee for damages caused by the use of spare parts
and accessories which are not original.
Please note that we often have special manufacturing specifications for our products, and that we always offer
you spare parts, which are in accordance with the latest technological developments and the latest legal
regulations.
For spare parts orders please indicate the following data for the correct identification of the parts:
designation of the aggregate and type
order-confirmation number of Claudius Peters
spare parts drawing
We will try our utmost to satisfy your spare parts requirements as soon as possible!

691612D - PARTLIST
Disegno assieme: 691612D
Peso Netto Kg : 3788,59

Liv Pos Boq Codice Descrizione Qta Normativa Fornitura Disegno assieme Peso netto kg
.1 200 670210DCP
FLAT SHUT-OFF GATE SIZE 500,
MANUAL DRIVE
1 VTM 180,00
.1 300 670350DCP
DISTRIBUTOR DIAM.1050, INLET
500, OUTLET 300-6
1 LM 670310DCP 257,15
..2 10 X 670351DCP POT DIAM.1050 1 LM 120,12
..2 20 X 670352DCP INLET SOCKET SIZE 500 1 LM 28,40
..2 30 670353DCP
DISHED BOTTOM DIAM.1000/1100,
6MM THICKNESS
1 LM 50,88
..2 40 670355DCP SOCKET 2" L=56 1 LM 0,40
..2 50 X 670354DCP GRATING FOR BOTTOM 1 LM 18,75
..2 60 670356DCP
AERATION FABRIC FOR BOTTOM
DIAM.1050
1 VTM 3,80
..2 70 670357DCP
WOVEN WIRE DIAM.1100 X 1,25 X
0,4
1 LM 1,10
..2 80 X 670358DCP OUTLET SOCKET SIZE 300-6 4 LM 33,28
..2 90 HEXAGON NUT 36 VS00034 - M10 LM 0,36
..2 100 WASHER 36 VS00038 - M10 LM 0,15
..2 110
HEXAGON SOCKET C.SUNK
SCREW
6
VS00033 -
M10x20
LM 0,08
..2 120 WASHER 6 VS00038 - M10 LM 0,02
.1 400 670410DCP
PIPING AND FITTINGS DN80-DN50-
DN25-DN15
1 LM 95,00
.1 500 670503DCP
DN15
8 VTM 1,60
.1 510 670504DCP
DN50
1 VTM 1,60
.1 600 670505DCP
SHUT-OFF FLAP WITH HAND
LEVER DN80
2 VTM 9,00
.1 610 670500DCP
LEVER DN65
1 VTM 4,00
.1 620 670506DCP
LEVER DN50
1 VTM 3,40
.1 630 670502DCP
DN25
4 VTM 1,60
.1 1100 671100DCP
AEROSLIDE SHUT-OFF GATE SIZE
300
4 VTM 280,00
.1 1200 671200DCP
FLOW-CONTROL GATE SIZE 300
PNEUM.DRIVE
4 VTM 452,00
.1 1300 671300DCP DISCHARGE SPOUT SIZE 300-6 4 LM 671300DCP 124,80
..2 1 X 671303DCP DISCHARGE SPOUT SIZE 300-6 1 LM 31,20
.1 1301 671301DCP FLEXIBLE CONNECTION SIZE 300 4 VTM 60,00
.1 1302 671302DCP DEDUSTING SOCKET DN150 3 LM 671406DCP 10,68
..2 1 X 671304DCP DEDUSTING SOCKET DN150 1 LM 3,56
.1 1310 671310DCP CHUTE 1 LM 671310DCP 60,62
..2 1 X 671311DCP CHUTE 1 LM 58,94
..2 9 HEXAGON HEAD SCREW CL.8.8 28
VS00031 -
M12x40
LM 1,32
.1 1320 671320DCP CHUTE 1 LM 671310DCP 16,59
..2 1 X 671331DCP CHUTE 1 LM 15,39
VS00031 -
M12x40
LM 0,94
.1 1330 671330DCP CHUTE 1 LM 671310DCP 14,16
..2 1 X 671321DCP CHUTE 1 LM 12,96
VS00031 -
M12x40
LM 0,94
.1 1340 671340DCP CHUTE 1 LM 671310DCP 14,16
..2 1 X 671321DCP CHUTE 1 LM 12,96
VS00031 -
M12x40
LM 0,94
.1 1400 671400DCP END PLATE 4 LM 671407DCP 22,28
..2 1 X 671401DCP END PLATE 1 LM 5,57
.1 1420 671434DCP AEROSLIDE SIZE 200 L=3000 1 LM
671400DCP,
671401DCP,
671402DCP,
671405DCP,
671406DCP
96,41
..2 10 X 671432DCP
AEROSLIDE CASING - UPPER BOX
L=3000
1 LM 54,35
..2 20 X 671433DCP
AEROSLIDE CASING - LOWER BOX
L=3000
1 LM 23,54
VS00031 -
M8x20
LM 0,72
..2 110 670001DCP SPECIAL SCREW 14 VTM 0,21
..2 120 670002DCP AERATION FABRIC 250MM L=3000 1 VTM 3,00
..2 140 X 671408DCP AIR CONNECTION SOCKET DN50 1 LM 2,41
..2 160 X 671407DCP INLET CHUTE SIZE 200 1 LM 3,83
..2 180 671405DCP
INSPECTION COVER SIZE 150
DESIGN A
1 VTM 4,10
671400DCP,
671401DCP,
671404DCP
43,96
..2 10 X 671413DCP
L=1324
1 LM 25,18
..2 20 X 671414DCP
L=1324
1 LM 11,66
VS00031 -
M8x20
LM 0,34
..2 110 671406DCP
SPECIAL SCREW M8 FOR CLOSED
AEROSLIDES
14 VTM 0,28
..2 150 X 671412DCP INSPECTION SLEEVE 2" 1 LM 0,74
..2 180 671405DCP
DESIGN A
1 VTM 4,10
671400DCP,
671401DCP,
671402DCP,
671405DCP,
671406DCP
125,57
..2 10 X 671402DCP
L=4000
1 LM 71,76
..2 20 X 671403DCP
L=4000
1 LM 31,42
VS00031 -
M8x20
LM 0,96
..2 110 671406DCP
AEROSLIDES
14 VTM 0,28
..2 180 671405DCP
DESIGN A
1 VTM 4,10
671400DCP,
671401DCP
113,30
..2 10 X 671402DCP
L=4000
1 LM 71,76
..2 20 X 671403DCP
L=4000
1 LM 31,42
VS00031 -
M8x20
LM 0,96
..2 110 671406DCP
AEROSLIDES
14 VTM 0,28
..2 180 671405DCP
DESIGN A
1 VTM 4,10
671400DCP,
671401DCP,
671404DCP
76,42
..2 10 X 671419DCP
L=2723
1 LM 49,53
..2 20 X 671420DCP
L=2723
1 LM 21,91
VS00031 -
M8x20
LM 0,67
..2 110 671406DCP
AEROSLIDES
14 VTM 0,28
671400DCP,
671401DCP,
671403DCP,
671404DCP
47,57
..2 10 X 671421DCP
L=1448
1 LM 27,34
..2 20 X 671422DCP
L=1448
1 LM 12,56
VS00031 -
M8x20
LM 0,36
..2 110 671406DCP
AEROSLIDES
14 VTM 0,28
..2 180 671405DCP
DESIGN A
1 VTM 4,10
671400DCP,
671401DCP,
671402DCP,
671405DCP,
671406DCP
123,69
..2 10 X 671402DCP
L=4000
1 LM 71,76
..2 20 X 671403DCP
L=4000
1 LM 31,42
VS00031 -
M8x20
LM 0,96
..2 110 671406DCP
AEROSLIDES
14 VTM 0,28
..2 180 671405DCP
DESIGN A
1 VTM 4,10
671400DCP,
671401DCP,
671404DCP
109,94
..2 10 X 671402DCP
L=4000
1 LM 71,76
..2 20 X 671403DCP
L=4000
1 LM 31,42
VS00031 -
M8x20
LM 0,96
..2 110 671406DCP
AEROSLIDES
14 VTM 0,28
671400DCP,
671401DCP,
671402DCP
118,18
..2 10 X 671402DCP
L=4000
1 LM 71,76
..2 20 X 671403DCP
L=4000
1 LM 31,42
VS00031 -
M8x20
LM 0,96
..2 110 671406DCP
AEROSLIDES
14 VTM 0,28
..2 180 671405DCP
DESIGN A
1 VTM 4,10
671400DCP,
671401DCP
109,20
..2 10 X 671402DCP
L=4000
1 LM 71,76
..2 20 X 671403DCP
L=4000
1 LM 31,42
VS00031 -
M8x20
LM 0,96
..2 110 671406DCP
AEROSLIDES
14 VTM 0,28
671400DCP,
671401DCP,
671404DCP
37,73
..2 10 X 671423DCP
L=1240
1 LM 23,72
..2 20 X 671424DCP
L=1240
1 LM 11,09
VS00031 -
M8x20
LM 0,31
..2 110 671406DCP
AEROSLIDES
14 VTM 0,28
671400DCP,
671401DCP,
671403DCP,
671404DCP
47,57
..2 10 X 671421DCP
L=1448
1 LM 27,34
..2 20 X 671422DCP
L=1448
1 LM 12,56
VS00031 -
M8x20
LM 0,36
..2 110 671406DCP
AEROSLIDES
14 VTM 0,28
..2 180 671405DCP
DESIGN A
1 VTM 4,10
.1 1500 671500DCP
DEVIATOR DIAM.530, INLET AND
OUTLET 200-6, =135
1 LM 671500DCP0 68,30
..2 10 X 671501DCP POT DIAM.530 1 LM 39,53
..2 20 671502DCP
4,5MM THICKNESS
1 LM 9,40
..2 30 671503DCP SOCKET 1" L=43 1 LM 0,17
..2 40 X 671504DCP SUPPORT FOR FABRIC 1 LM 1,04
..2 50 671505DCP WELDING NUT M10 DIN 929 2 LM 0,04
..2 60 671506DCP
DIAM.530
1 VTM 1,30
..2 80 X 671508DCP OUTLET SOCKET SIZE 200 1 LM 7,98
..2 100 WASHER 24 VS00038 - M10 LM 0,10
..2 110
SCREW
2
VS00033 -
M10x20
LM 0,03
..2 120 WASHER 2 VS00038 - M10 LM 0,01
.1 1510 671510DCP
DEVIATOR DIAM.530, INLET AND
OUTLET 200-6, =225
1 LM 671500DCP0 68,30
..2 10 X 671501DCP POT DIAM.530 1 LM 39,53
..2 20 671502DCP
4,5MM THICKNESS
1 LM 9,40
..2 30 671503DCP SOCKET 1" L=43 1 LM 0,17
..2 40 X 671504DCP SUPPORT FOR FABRIC 1 LM 1,04
..2 50 671505DCP WELDING NUT M10 DIN 929 2 LM 0,04
..2 60 671506DCP
DIAM.530
1 VTM 1,30
..2 80 X 671508DCP OUTLET SOCKET SIZE 200 1 LM 7,98
..2 100 WASHER 24 VS00038 - M10 LM 0,10
..2 110
SCREW
2
VS00033 -
M10x20
LM 0,03
..2 120 WASHER 2 VS00038 - M10 LM 0,01
.1 1600 671600DCP DISCHARGE SPOUT SIZE 200-6 3 LM 671600DCP 47,58
..2 1 X 671610DCP DISCHARGE SPOUT SIZE 200-6 1 LM 15,86
.1 1601 671601DCP DEDUSTING SOCKET DN150 3 LM 671406DCP 10,68
.1 1620 671620DCP CHUTE 1 LM 671620DCP 37,18
..2 1 X 671621DCP CHUTE 1 LM 35,74
VS00031 -
M12x40
LM 1,13
.1 1630 671630DCP CHUTE 1 LM 671620DCP 25,46
..2 1 X 671631DCP CHUTE 1 LM 24,02
VS00031 -
M12x40
LM 1,13
.1 1640 671640DCP CHUTE 1 LM 671620DCP 14,70
..2 1 X 671641DCP CHUTE 1 LM 13,26
VS00031 -
M12x40
LM 1,13
.1 1720 671720DCP PIPING AND FITTINGS DN50 1 LM 16,00
.1 1730 671730DCP
PIPING AND FITTINGS DN100-
DN80-DN40-DN25
1 LM 140,00
.1 1740 671740DCP
PIPING AND FITTINGS DN100-
DN65-DN40-DN25
1 LM 210,00
.1 1820 671820DCP
FAN 150M3/H-61MBAR-1,5KW, WITH
FILTER
1 VTM 60,00
.1 1830 671830DCP
FAN 400M3/H-63MBAR-3KW, WITH
FILTER
1 VTM 101,00
.1 1840 671840DCP
FAN 590M3/H-63MBAR-3KW, WITH
FILTER
1 VTM 101,00
.1 1900 671900DCP SOLENOID VALVE DN25 24V DC 4 VTM 4,00
.1 2200 672200DCP
SUPPORT FOR AEROSLIDE SIZE
200 H=385 ALFA=6
1 LM 672000DCP 11,94
..2 1 X 672210DCP AEROSLIDE SUPPORT 1 LM 11,94
.1 2201 672201DCP
200 H=352 ALFA=6
1 LM 672000DCP 13,41
.1 2300 672300DCP
200 H=530
1 LM 672000DCP 13,41
.1 2301 672301DCP
200 H=460 ALFA=6
1 LM 672000DCP 12,92
.1 2302 672302DCP
200 H=586 ALFA=6
1 LM 672000DCP 13,90
.1 2303 672303DCP
200 H=670
1 LM 672000DCP 14,46
.1 2304 672304DCP
200 H=550
1 LM 672000DCP 13,29
.1 2400 672400DCP
200 H=530
1 LM 672000DCP 13,41
.1 2401 672401DCP
200 H=480 ALFA=6
1 LM 672000DCP 12,72
.1 2402 672402DCP
200 H=630 ALFA=6
1 LM 672000DCP 14,27
.1 2403 672403DCP
200 H=470
1 LM 672000DCP 12,57
.1 2404 672404DCP
200 H=1685
1 LM 672000DCP 24,17
.1 2405 672405DCP
200 H=660
1 LM 672000DCP 13,97
.1 3000 670099DCP SPECIAL GLUE 7KG 1 VTM 7,00
.1 3001 670050DCP
GASKET FOR SHUT-OFF GATE
SIZE 500
1 VTM 0,50
.1 3002 670051DCP GASKET FOR AEROSLIDE SIZE 300 4 VTM 1,60
.1 3003 670052DCP GASKET FOR AEROSLIDE SIZE 200 16 VTM 5,60
.1 3004 670053DCP
GASKET (CLOSED) FOR
AEROSLIDE SIZE 200
1 VTM 0,35
.1 3005 673005DCP
SEALING CORD ROUND, 6MM L=
40000
1 LM 2,00
.1 4000 570442Z HEXAGON HEAD SCREW CL.8.8 16
VS00031 -
M16x50
VTM 1,65
.1 4001 570534Z HEXAGON NUT 16 VS00034 - M16 VTM 0,59
.1 4002 570387Z HEXAGON HEAD SCREW CL.8.8 176
VS00031 -
M10x40
VTM 5,81
.1 4003 570054Z HEXAGON NUT 176 VS00034 - M10 VTM 1,74
.1 4004 HEXAGON HEAD SCREW CL.8.8 16
VS00031 -
M16x50
LM 1,65
.1 4005 HEXAGON NUT 16 VS00034 - M16 LM 0,59
VS00031 -
M12x40
LM 2,26
VS00031 -
M10x40
LM 2,90
VS00031 -
M8x25
LM 4,76

1200.1
1200.2
1200.3
1200.4
4
FLOW-CONTROL GATE
(" CP" -682.0000.1079A, TYPE PP-300)
IP 65
4
Electric valve 5/2 way 0,009
24 DC
4 Electric valve 5/2 way 0,009
24 DC
4 Electric valve 5/2 way 0,009
24 DC
4
LIMIT SWITCH-OPEN
4 LIMIT SWITCH-CLOSE
4 LIMIT SWITCH-INTERMEDIATE POS.
4 LIMIT SWITCH-INTERMEDIATE POS.
4 POTENTIOMETER
1900.1
1900.2
1900.3
1900.4
4 MAGNETIC VALVE (" PARKER" 123D-DN25)
4 SOLENOID VALVE 0,009 24 DC IP 65
1820 1
RADIAL FAN
(" F.LLI FERRARI" - FA 561 P4A)
1 FAN MOTOR 1,5 2900 380 AC 50 3,5 DOL+HS F+B IP 55
1 LOCAL BOX LB
CUSTOMER SUPPLY
Client
Plant
691612D
VENTOMATIC S.p.A.
691612D motor and instr.rev.1.xls Page 1/2
Client
Plant
691612D
VENTOMATIC S.p.A.
1830
1840
2
RADIAL FAN
(" F.LLI FERRARI" - FA 561 P4A)
2 FAN MOTOR 3 2900 380 AC 50 6,6 DOL+HS F+B IP 55
2 LOCAL BOX LB
CUSTOMER SUPPLY
GLOSSARY:
DOL:Standard Direct On Line Start
DY : Delta Star Start
HS : Heavy Start (Use Electronic thermal relay for start
Class 10~30" Siemens 3B1246-xx o similar)
LB :Motor Local Box for maintenance (Drawings accord.
to VTM standard device Kraus+Naimer)
691612D motor and instr.rev.1.xls Page 2/2
CC Silo aeration procedure
Procedura aerazione fondo silo CC

691611D-691612D Bim Son II - Vietnam

T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1
Start Item

VS 691612D-
1200.1 or
1200.2 or
1200.3 or
1200.4 or

S 691611D-
400

V1 691611D-
510.1

V2 691611D-
510.2

1
Second section
Secondo settore
691611D-510.2
2
T3
T3
T1 T1
Z
Periodo/
Cycle
Secondi/
Seconds
T1 300
T3 3

Cicli di aerazione -- Aerationcycle
S: Blower / Soffiante
V: Butterfly Valve
/Valvola a farfalla
VS: Flow control gate
/Valvola di scarico
T1
(1)
: Aeration time /T
aerazione
T3: Overlapping time
/T sovrapposizione

(1)
: Aeration time must
retained at each stop
and must resumed with
the next start
Il tempo di aerazione
deve essere ritenuto e
dopo ogni stop il ciclo
di aerazione deve
riprendere dove si era
interrotto.
Sudden Stop ex.
Blackout
Stop improvviso
Es.Blackout
Z
First section
Primo settore
691611D-510.1


Via Verdi, 2
24121 Bergamo
Italy
1/2
Phone: +39 035 237 196
Fax: +39 035 237 785

PROCESS LOGIC PACKING PLANT LOADING rev.1A

1. Control air available
2. Power -ON
3. Control voltage - ON
4. Packing plant release ready
5. Over-flow filter ready and working packing plant filter ready
6. Open the solenoid valve for discharge aeration (691612D-1900.1, 1900.2, 1900.3, 1900.4)
7. Open the corresponding flaps for silo bottom aeration (691611D-510.1 or 510.2)
8. Start the feeding using pushbutton (START)
9. Start the aeroslide fan if needed (691612D-1820, 1830, 1840)
10. Open the flow control gate (691612D-1200.1, 1200.2, 1200.3, 1200.4) to XX%
(note: the XX% position is corresponding to the flow rate a little bit higher than nominal capacity of
packing machine)
11. Start the silo discharge
11.1 start the blower (691611D-400) and his cooler fan ; the sectors on silo bottom are aerated
alternately by opening the flap (691611D-510.1 or -510.2). For switching over from one
sector to the other, the corresponding flap has to be opened before the other flap, which is
still opened, closes. The time of aeration will be determined during the start-up.
11.2 after a delay time (approx. 10s) open the flow control gate to YY%
12. Feeding level control
12.1 packing plant hopper empty
12.2 packing plant hopper feeding by opening the flow control gate to XX% and after a delay time
to YY%, till the max level is reached (min level is ignored)
12.3 in case the hopper level goes under min level, reopen the flow control gate to XX% and after
a delay time to YY%
12.4 in case the hopper level goes over the min level, reduce the flow rate closing, after a delay
time, the flow control gate from YY% to XX%
12.5 the flow control gate is opened on position XX% till the max hopper level has been reached
12.6 in case the hopper max level has been reached (example: feeding ON and packing machine
OFF), close the corresponding flow control gate. If it was the last flow control gate opened,
stop the silo discharge
13. Stop procedure
13.1 stop the blower (691611D-400)
13.2 close the flaps for silo bottom aeration (691611D-510.1 and -510.2)
13.3 after a delay time (approx. 5s) close the flow control gate
13.4 after a delay time (cleaning time) stop the aeroslide fan (691612D-1820, 1830, 1840)
13.5 close the solenoid valve for discharge aeration (691612D-1900.1, 1900.2, 1900.3, 1900.4)


Via Verdi, 2
24121 Bergamo
Italy
2/2
Phone: +39 035 237 196
Fax: +39 035 237 785

NOTE:
Rotation sensor (691611D-401):
alarm for blowers belt break

Claudius Peters
Flat shut-off gate H
Drive: HAND
Operating instructions
412.0009.0014A/03.en

Contents
1 Safety instructions................................................................................................................. 3
2 Description ............................................................................................................................ 3
2.1 Application............................................................................................................................. 3
2.2 Construction.......................................................................................................................... 3
3 Transport / Storage / Assembly ............................................................................................ 5
3.1 Transport ............................................................................................................................... 5
3.2 Storage.................................................................................................................................. 5
3.3 Assembly............................................................................................................................... 5
4 Operation............................................................................................................................... 5
5 Maintenance instructions ...................................................................................................... 6
5.1 Maintenance.......................................................................................................................... 6
5.2 Lubrication............................................................................................................................. 6
5.3 Trouble shooting ................................................................................................................... 6

List of figures
Fig. 1: Flat shut-off gate ................................................................................................................... 4

Annex
Dimension sheets
412.0000.0011A/NN.ED / 412.0000.0014A/NN.ED
Spare parts drawings
412.0010.0011A/NN.SV / 412.0010.0014A/NN.SV
Electric connection diagrams
412.0017.0000A/NN.ED

412.0009.0014A/03.en

Release 3: 04.01.2005
Page 2 of 6

1 Safety instructions
These safety instructions are to be read and applied by every person dealing with the operation, mainte-
nance or repair of the flat shut-off gate .
The flat shut-off gate is in accordance with the latest state of technology and safety. However, there can be
certain risks if the flat shut-off gate is handled inappropriately by untrained personnel or if the flat shut-off
gate is used for other than the intended purpose. The following risks can result:
risk of injuries;
danger to the installation and other assets of the operator;
danger to the efficient operation of the installation.
Unauthorised reconstructions or modifications of the flat shut-off gate are prohibited.
Maintenance and repair work is to be effected by skilled personnel only.
2 Description
The flat shut-off gate serves as emergency stop valve for bulk goods and is installed below silos, bins etc.
For working load and temperature see type plate.
2.1 Application
The flat shut-off gate serves as an emergency shut-off device and should mainly be used for maintenance
and repair work at devices connected behind.
With the flat shut-off gate it is not possible to seal the conveying distance from overpressure.
Pressure sealing against ambient pressure max. 250 mbar
Operating temperature max. 200 C

2.2 Construction
The slide plate (2) is led in a housing (1) through lateral supporting cams. The sealing against the adjacen-
cies is carried out by means of a stuffing box; the stuffing box packings (8) are arranged around the slide
plate.
The slide plate opens and closes through a spindle (3) and a spindle nut (5). The rotating movement of the
spindle is alternatively carried out through a handwheel (12) or through a chain wheel (13) with chain (14).
To the signaling of the final position can the flat shut-off gate with position switches are to be equipped.
412.0009.0014A/03.en

Release 3: 04.01.2005
Page 3 of 6

Figure 1: Flat shut-off gate
412.0009.0014A/03.en

Release 3: 04.01.2005
Page 4 of 6

3 Transport / Storage / Assembly
3.1 Transport
When lifting the flat shut-off gate ensure that the carrying capacity of the ropes is in accordance with the
weight of the flat shut-off gate. For lifting use the lifting lugs at the housing. For reasons of safety and in or-
der to avoid damages only the lifting lugs are to be used for transport.
3.2 Storage
The flat shut-off gate has to be stored in covered condition resp. in a dry place and in installation position.
Avoid damages e.g. by charging it or climbing on it.
3.3 Assembly
The flat shut-off gate is delivered with installed drive ready for assembly.
All flanges have to be dry and clean. Between all flanges to be connected install one sealing each which
corresponds to the size of the flanges.
The housing of the flat shut-off gate must not be twisted during assembly. If the weight of the connected
installation parts is too heavy, the parts have to be supported correspondingly.
4 Operation
The adjustment of the flat shut-off gate is carried out by means a handwheel or a chain wheel with chain.
412.0009.0014A/03.en

Release 3: 04.01.2005
Page 5 of 6

412.0009.0014A/03.en
Release 3: 04.01.2005
Page 6 of 6

5 Maintenance instructions
5.1 Maintenance
Maintenance work Intervals
Remove strong cakings from the spindle as required

5.2 Lubrication
Lubrication work Intervall
Spindle with lubricating grease (K2 K) to grease 6 months

5.3 Trouble shooting
Fault Cuse Repair
Dust leaves the stuffing box Stuffing box is not tight Increase the tension of the stuffing
box
Replace stuffing box packings, if
necessary

Claudius Peters
Aeroslide Shut-Off Gate
Drive: HAND, MOT, PNEU
Operating Instructions
643.0009.0019A/01.en
643.0009.0019A/01.en
Release 1: 04.10.2004
Page 2 of 12
Table of contents
2 Description ............................................................................................................................ 5
3 Transport / Storage / Assembly............................................................................................. 6
3.1 Transport ............................................................................................................................... 6
3.2 Storage.................................................................................................................................. 6
3.3 Assembly............................................................................................................................... 6
3.3.1 Aeroslide shut-off gate .......................................................................................................... 6
3.3.2 Control air connection (for PNEU design) ............................................................................. 7
3.3.3 Aeration connection .............................................................................................................. 7
4 Operation............................................................................................................................... 8
5.1 Maintenance.......................................................................................................................... 10
5.2 Replacement of gate sealing (dust-tight design)................................................................... 10
5.2.1 Disassembly of gate sealing ................................................................................................. 10
5.2.2 Assembly of the gate sealing ................................................................................................ 11
5.3 Trouble shooting.................................................................................................................... 11
6 Technical data....................................................................................................................... 12
6.1 General data.......................................................................................................................... 12
6.2 HAND drive ........................................................................................................................... 12
6.3 MOT drive.............................................................................................................................. 12
6.4 PNEU drive............................................................................................................................ 12
List of figures
Fig. 4-1: Pneumatic connection diagram............................................................................................. 8
Fig. 4-2: Aeroslide shut-off gate .......................................................................................................... 9
List of charts
Tab. 5-1: Trouble shooting.................................................................................................................... 11
643.0009.0019A/01.en
Release 1: 04.10.2004
Page 3 of 12
Annex
These instructions include:
Dimension sheets:
643.0000.0014A/NN.ED - Drive, top; HAND
643.0000.0015A/NN.ED - Drive, top, MOT
643.0000.0016A/NN.ED - Drive, top; PNEU
643.0000.0018A/NN.ED - Drive, side; HAND
643.0000.0020A/NN.ED - Drive, side; PNEU
Sapre parts drawings:
643.0010.0014A/NN.SV - Drive, top, HAND
643.0010.0015A/NN.SV - Drive, top; MOT
643.0010.0016A/NN.SV - Drive, top; PNEU
643.0010.0018A/NN.SV - Drive, side; HAND
643.0010.0020A/NN.SV - Drive, side; PNEU
Electric wiring diagrams:
643.0017.0014A/NN.ED - Drive, top; HAND, Drive, side; HAND
643.0017.0015A/NN.ED - Drive, top; MOT
643.0017.0016A/NN.ED - Drive, top; PNEU, Drive, side, PNEU
643.0009.0019A/01.en
Release 1: 04.10.2004
Page 4 of 12
These safety instructions are to be read and applied by every person dealing with the operation, mainte-
nance or repair of the aeroslide shut-off gate.
The aeroslide shut-off gate is in accordance with the latest state of technology and safety. However, there
can be certain risks if the aeroslide shut-off gate is handled inappropriately by untrained personnel or if the
aeroslide shut-off gate is used for other than the intended purpose. The following risks can result:
risk of injuries;
Unauthorized reconstructions or modifications of the aeroslide shut-off gate are prohibited.
The distance between slide plate and unsecured handhole cover of a connected aeroslide system has to
amount to at least 850 mm. If the handhole cover is secured the distance may be smaller.
Maintenance and repair work is to be effected by skilled personnel only.
Take preventive measures in order to avoid accidental start of the device.
For connection and disconnection of electrical equipment adhere to the valid VDE and EVU regulations.
Check electrical protective measures (earthing resistance, etc.).
Check all indicating devices for correct functioning.
In case of work at the aeroslide shut-off gate the pneumatic drive is to be kept free of pressure.
643.0009.0019A/01.en
Release 1: 04.10.2004
Page 5 of 12
2 Description
The aeroslide shut-off gate is part of a pneumatic aeroslide and is used to release or block the dustlike or
fine grained flow of material through the aeroslide. Two designs are available.
On the one hand a repair gate for erection work with disconnected aeration of the material in front of the
aeroslide shut-off gate and on the other hand a dust-tight work gate which also allows for a safe shut-off
when the material is aerated.
The aeroslide shut-off gate consists of a closed housing (10.10.10) with a length of 100 mm and a slide plate
(10.10.20) and is not aerated in the standard design. An aeroslide shut-off gate with a length of 300 mm and
an installed piece of aeroslide (20) can be delivered as option. This piece of aeroslide should be aerated.
Depending on the order, the aeroslide shut-off gate is either driven by hand via a handwheel (10.20.170) or
chain wheel (10.20.165), by a pneumatic cylinder (10.20.100) or by a gear motor (10.170). The correspond-
ing drive can be arranged either above or to the side of the aeroslide shut-off gate.
Depending on the type of design shut-off is effected by a slide plate which moves either vertically or hori-
zontally.
Sealing between slide plate and housing is effected by means of a packing (10.10.210).
In the dust-tight design the aeroslide shut-off gate is provided with a sealing frame (10.10.100) between
housing and slide gate.
If required, the aeroslide shut-off gate is equipped with 2 signal transmitters (10.220) for signalling of both
end positions.
643.0009.0019A/01.en
Release 1: 04.10.2004
Page 6 of 12
3.1 Transport
When lifting the aeroslide shut-off gate ensure that the carrying capacity of the ropes is in accordance with
the weight of the aeroslide shut-off gate. For reasons of safety and in order to avoid damages only the pro-
vided lifting lugs at the aeroslide shut-off gate are to be used for transport (refer to figure 4-2).
3.2 Storage
The aeroslide shut-off gate has to be stored in covered condition resp. in a dry place and in installation posi-
tion. Avoid damages.
3.3 Assembly
3.3.1 Aeroslide shut-off gate
The aeroslide shut-off gate is delivered with installed drive and adjusted ready for assembly.
The conveying direction, which is marked by an arrow (10.20.190) on the housing (10.10.10), has to be ob-
served by all means during assembly. Electrical lines to limit switches (10.220) are to be placed appropriately
observing the valid safety regulations.
corresponds to the size of the flange.
The cover plates are to be dismantled for screwing the slide to the aggregates connected in front and be-
hind.
The housing (10.10) of the aeroslide shut-off gate must not be twisted during assembly. If the weight of the
connected installation parts is too heavy, the parts have to be supported correspondingly.
DANGER
THERE IS THE RISK OF INJURIES IN THE AREA OF THE SWITCHING CAM
WHEN THE SLIDE PLATE IS MOVED. THE PLANT OPERATOR HAS TO IN-
STALL A CORRESPONDING WARNING AT THE SHUT-OFF GATE.
643.0009.0019A/01.en
Release 1: 04.10.2004
Page 7 of 12
3.3.2 Control air connection (for PNEU design)
A compressed air conditioner with pressure control valve and filter has to be provided in the control air pipe-
line.
Dry and clean control air (filter max. 40 m) of at least 5 to max. 6 bar overpressure has to be provided by
the customer.
The pressure dew point has to be set 10 K below the lowest ambient temperature to be expected.
3.3.3 Aeration connection
For aeration of the material, the aeroslide shut-off gate with a length of 300 mm and installed aeroslide piece
is provided with an air connection socket where compressed air with an overpressure of max. 0.5 bar has to
be connected.
In order to be able to switch off the aeration for maintenance and repair work it is convenient to install a shut-
off device in the air pipeline in front of the aeroslide shut-off gate.
643.0009.0019A/01.en
Release 1: 04.10.2004
Page 8 of 12
4 Operation
Adjustment of the slide plate (10.10.20) is realised in accordance with the selected drive.
The HAND version is driven via a handwheel (10.20.170) or in case of horizontal installation alternatively via
a chain wheel (10.20.165). The MOT version is driven via a slip-on gear motor (10.170).
The spindle driven by the handwheel, chain wheel or slip-on gear motor (10.20.70) moves the slide plate via
a nut fixed at the slide plate.
The PNEU version of the aeroslide shut-off gate is driven via a pneumatic cylinder (10.20.100) connected
directly to the slide gate. Actuation takes place via a 5/2 way solenoid valve (10.230) with spring return
mechanism and integrated throttles. In case of power failure, the spring return mechanism of the solenoid
valve switches and closes the aeroslide shut-off gate automatically (see figure 4-1). The integrated throttles
allow for adjustment of the exhaust air quantity and separate adjustment of the closing and opening time of
the gate.
Figure 4-1: Pneumatic connection diagram
For switch-off of the motor and remote indication of the position, the end positions of the slide plate can be
signalled via 2 optional signal transmitters (10.220).
643.0009.0019A/01.en
Release 1: 04.10.2004
Page 9 of 12
Figure 4-2: Aeroslide shut-off gate
643.0009.0019A/01.en
Release 1: 04.10.2004
Page 10 of 12
5.1 Maintenance
The slide plate (10.10.20) has to be checked for smooth running once every month.
In accordance with the frequency of use and the accumulation of dirt, all deposits have to be removed from
the limit switches (10.220).
In order to avoid that material emerges, it is necessary to retighten the stuffing box gland (10.10.40) in ac-
cordance with the actuation frequency of the slide plate.
Replacement of the packing (10.10.210) has to be carried out after 10000 switchings, at the latest, however,
after two years.
The sealing frame (10.10.100) of the dust-tight design of the aeroslide shut-off gate has to be replaced after
10000 switchings, however, at the latest after two years. Unfavourable random conditions may lead to pre-
mature wear.
5.2 Replacement of gate sealing (dust-tight design)
5.2.1 Disassembly of gate sealing
The gate sealing (10.10.100) has to be replaced in accordance with the instructions given in chapter 5.1.
For replacement of the sealing proceed as follows:
The material flow in the conveying line where the aeroslide shut-off gate is installed, has to be sealed off.
It has to be ensured that no material is lying in front of the shut-off gate and that no more material can
come in.
Move the aeroslide shut-off gate into position "OPEN".
Disconnect the aeroslide shut-off gate electrically / pneumatically.
Disassemble the aeroslide shut-off gate.
Loosen the screws (10.10.140) and disassemble the four cover plates (10.10.120 & 10.10.130).
Disassemble the sealing frame (10.10.100) which is fixed to the housing (1.10.) with glue.
Clean the area of the sealing at the housing. Remove the sealing and glue residues and the deposits at
the slide plate.
643.0009.0019A/01.en
Release 1: 04.10.2004
Page 11 of 12
5.2.2 Assembly of the gate sealing
Assembly of the gate sealing is carried out in inverted sequence of the disassembly. Fastening of the sealing
frame is realised with glue (silicone) with a heat resistance of up to 180 C. The glue has to be applied to that
side of the sealing frame housing which runs parallel to the slide plate in a distance of 100 mm.
It has to be ensured that the sealing frame is installed in the correct installation position. The felt side of the
sealing has to fit closely to the slide plate, while the rubber side has to be glued to that side of the sealing
frame housing housing that runs parallel to the slide plate.
Fault Cause Repair
Material escapes at stuffing box Stuffing box leaky Disconnect aeroslide shut-off gate
Unscrew cover plates at housing
upper part
Tighten stuffing box; exchange
stuffing box packing, if necessary
Aeroslide shutt-off gate does
not open / close
Slide plate blocked by foreign
matter
Disconnect aeroslide shutt-off gate
Remove foreign matter
- by repeated switching
- via cleaning cover connected
nearby
Sealing frame is worn out
(dust-tight design)
Disconnect the aeroslide shut-off
gate.
Replace the sealing frame (see
chapter 5.2)
Aeroslide shut-off gate is
leaky (dust-tight design)
Sealing frame is worn out Disconnect the aeroslide shut-off
gate.
Replace the sealing frame (see
chapter 5.2)
Pre-pressure > 0,5 bar Reduce pre-pressure to < 0,5 bar
Table 5-1: Trouble shooting
643.0009.0019A/01.en
Release 1: 04.10.2004
Page 12 of 12
6 Technical data
6.1 General data
Standard Option
Length of aeroslide shut-off
gate
100 mm 300 mm
(+200mm aeroslide)
Temperature of conveyed
material
-40...+200C
(without aeroslide)
max. 100, 140, 150, 180C
(for 200mm aeroslide)
Aeration connection max. 0,5 bar g (for 200mm
aeroslide)
Max. material pressure 0,8 bar 0,5 bar (dust-tight design)
Max. number of switchings 10000 in 2 years
Limit switches 2 pieces
Mechanic limit switch 24...500 V, IP 67, 10 A
Proximity switches 20...250 V, IP 65, 0,1 A (DC),
0,25 A (AC)
6.2 HAND drive
Standard Option
Ambient temperature -40... +90C
-30...+90C (mech. limit switch)

-25...+80C (proximity switch)
6.3 MOT drive
Standard Option
Protection type of drive IP 54 IP 55
Thermal class of drive B
Capacity of drive 0,55 kW
6.4 PNEU drive
Standard Option
Protection type solenoid
valve
IP 65 IP 67
Reaction capacity solenoid
valve
9 VA / 2 W

Claudius Peters
Rinnenabsperrschieber H
Aeroslide shut-off gate H
Vanne darret daeroglissiere H
Compuerta de aerodeslizador H

Ersatzteilzeichnung
Spare Parts Drawing
Dessin de Pieces de Rechange
Dibujo de Repuestos

643.0010.0018A/05.SV

643.0010.0018A/05.SV
Release 5: 24.01.2007
Seite / Page / Pagina 2 von / of / sur / de 4

Inhalt / Contents / Table des matires / Sumario

Aeroslide shut-off gate
Vanne darret daeroglissiere
Compuerta de aerodeslizador .............................................................................................................. 4

Abbildungsverzeichnis / List of figures / Tables des illustration / Lista de Figuras
Abb. 01: Rinnenabsperrschieber H
Fig. 01: Aeroslide shut-off gate
Fig. 01: Vanne darret daeroglissiere
Fig. 01: Compuerta de aerodeslizador ................................................................................................ 3

Achtung! / Attention! / Attention! / Atencin!
Bei Anfragen oder Bestellung bitte Auftrags-Nr., Nummer dieser Ersatzteilzeichnung, die gewnschten Pos.-
Nr. und deren Benennungen, sowie alle Angaben des Typschildes angeben.
In case of inquiries or orders, please indicate comm. no., no. of this print, the designations and no. of the
requested parts and all data stated on the nameplate.
Pour toutes les demandes de prix ou des commandes veuillez indiquer le nde la commande, le ndu des-
sin de pice de rechange, les positions souhaites et leurs dsignations ainsi que toutes les donnes de la
plaque signaltique.
En caso de demandas o pedidos indiquen, por favor, el nmero de comisin, el nmero de este dibujo de
repuestos, el nmero de la posicin requerida y su respectiva designacin y todos los datos de la placa del
tipo.

643.0010.0018A/05.SV
Release 5: 24.01.2007

Abb. 01: Rinnenabsperrschieber H
Fig. 01: Aeroslide shut-off gate
Fig. 01: Vanne darret daeroglissiere
Fig. 01: Compuerta de aerodeslizador

643.0010.0018A/05.SV
Release 5: 24.01.2007

Aeroslide shut-off gate
Vanne darret daeroglissiere
Compuerta de aerodeslizador
01
Pos. Benennung Designation Designation Denominacion
10.10.20 Schieberblech Slide plate Plaque de coulisse Chapa de compuerta
10.10.40 Stopfbuchsenbrille Stuffing box gland Bride Brida de prensaestopa
10.10.210* Packung Packing Garniture Empaquetadura
10.20.60* Mutter Nut Ecrou Tuerca
10.20.70* Spindel Spindle Broche Husillo
10.20.160* Buchse Bush Douille Casquillo
10.20.170 Handrad Hand wheel Roue a main Rueda manuel
10.220 Endschalter Limit switch Fin de course Interrupteur final
20 Rinnenstck Aeroslide piece Piece daeroglissiere Parte daerodeslizador
20.120* Gewebe Fabric Tissu Tejido
20.140 Deckeldichtung Cover gasket Joint de couvercle Junta de tapa
20.150* Drahtgewebe Wire mesh Tissu metallique Tela metalica
30 Rinnendichtung Aeroslide gasket Joint daeroglissiere Junta daerodeslizador
Staubdichte Ausfhrung / Dust tight design / Execution etanche aux poussieres / Diseno a prueba de polvo
10.10.100* Dichtungsrahmen Sealing frame Cardre detancheite Marco de empaquetadura
10.10.120 Abdeckleiste, horizontal Cover ledge, horizontal
Liston de recouvrement
horizontal
Liston recubridora
horizontal
10.10.130 Abdeckleiste, vertikal Cover ledge, vertical
Liston de recouvrement
vertical
Liston recubridora
vertical

* = Verschleissteil / wear part / pice dusure / pieza de desgaste
Claudius Peters
Flow control gate 2000.1 PP
Drive: PNEU
682.0009.1079A/02.en
682.0009.1079A/02.en
Release 2: 07.06.2004
Page 2 of 17
Contents
2 Description ............................................................................................................................ 5
2.1 Construction .......................................................................................................................... 5
3.1 Transport ............................................................................................................................... 8
3.2 Storage.................................................................................................................................. 8
3.3 Assembly............................................................................................................................... 8
3.3.1 Flow control gate................................................................................................................... 8
3.3.2 Control air connection ........................................................................................................... 8
3.3.3 Aeration connection .............................................................................................................. 9
4 Operation............................................................................................................................... 9
4.1 Pneumatic drive..................................................................................................................... 9
4.2 Manual emergency operation................................................................................................ 10
5.1 Maintenance.......................................................................................................................... 10
5.2 Lubrication............................................................................................................................. 10
5.3 Trouble shooting.................................................................................................................... 11
5.4 Repair.................................................................................................................................... 12
5.4.1 Replacement of roller sealing................................................................................................ 12
5.4.1.1 Cassette removal .................................................................................................................. 13
5.4.1.2 Exchange of roller sealing..................................................................................................... 14
5.4.1.3 Assembly of cassette ............................................................................................................ 15
5.4.2 Adjustment of spacer screws ................................................................................................ 16
6 Technical Data ...................................................................................................................... 17
682.0009.1079A/02.en
Release 2: 07.06.2004
Page 3 of 17
List of figures
Fig. 2-1: Flow control gate 2000.1 PP................................................................................................. 6
Fig. 2-2: Pneumatic circuit diagram POSITIONING............................................................................ 7
Fig. 5-1: Cassette removal .................................................................................................................. 13
Fig. 5-2: Exchange of roller sealing..................................................................................................... 14
List of tables
Tab. 2-1: Signal position....................................................................................................................... 7
Tab. 5-1: Maintenance work ................................................................................................................. 10
Tab. 5-2: Trouble shooting.................................................................................................................... 11
Tab. 5-3: Maximum adjusting torque.................................................................................................... 15
Annex
With belonging:
Dimension sheets
682.0000.1079A/NN.SV (Flow control gate PP)
682.0000.0043A/NN.SV (Flow control gate PP-HO)
Operatig instructions
697.0009.1001A/NN.en (Switching unit)
698.0026.0021A/NN.en (Pneumatic actuator)
Spare part drawings
682.0010.1079A/NN.SV (Flow control gate PP)
697.0010.1001A/NN.SV (Switching unit)
682.0009.1079A/02.en
Release 2: 07.06.2004
Page 4 of 17
These safety instructions are to be read and applied by every person dealing with the operation,
maintenance or repair of the flow control gate.
The flow control gate is in accordance with the latest state of technology and safety. However, there can be
certain risks if the machine is handled inappropriately by untrained personnel or if the machine is used for
other than the intended purpose. The following risks can result:
risk of injuries;
Unauthorized reconstructions or modifications of the flow control gate are prohibited.
The distance between flow control gate and unsecured handhole cover of an connected aeroslide installation
has to amount to at least 850 mm. If the handhole cover is retained the distance may be smaller.
Maintenance and repair work is only to be effected by skilled personnel.
For connection and disconnection of electrical equipment adhere to the valid VDE and EVU regulations.
Check electrical protective measures (earthing resistance, etc.).
In case of work at the flow control gate the pneumatic drive is to be kept free of pressure.
Take preventive measures in order to avoid accidental start of the device.
682.0009.1079A/02.en
Release 2: 07.06.2004
Page 5 of 17
2 Description
The flow control gate 2000.1 PP is pneumatically driven and positioned.
It can be used as shut-off device for fluidisable bulk materials in aeroslide installations.
2.1 Construction
The flow control gate consists of a steel housing with a mounted roller. The roller is sealed ready for
operation by means of a cassette with inserted roller sealing. The cassette and hence the roller sealing can
be easily replaced. In CLOSE-position the flow control gate shuts off the material flow.
The roller is equipped with a flow opening. By turning the roller the flow opening is changed between 0 and
100 %. A scale (30.160) shows the opening angle of the roller in percent.
Adjustment of the roller is carried out by means of a pneumatically rotating actuator (101). An
electromagnetically-operated 5/2 way valve (102) and a 5/3 way valve (103) are installed at the pneumatic
actuator. The 5/3 way valve is required for the positioning procedure. The 5/2 way valve (Y1) facilitates fast
closing of the flow control gate in no-current condition.
The connecting plate of the 5/3 way valve is equipped with an exhaust air regulator with silencer (30.190). By
means of this exhaust air regulator, the exhaust air velocity and hence the actuating velocity of during
positioning can be adjusted.
If the fast-closing function is no longer required, the 5/2 way valve (102) must not be connected electrically
but outlet 4 (30.550) has to be connected pneumatically to the side of the drive (30.200) which is normally
aerated by the 5/2 way valve. Plugs should be used to protect the connections of the 5/2 solenoid way valve
against dirt. The T-screw-in connection (30.520) has to be replaced by the angular screw-in connection
(30.500).
The flow control gate is provided with a switching unit (100) for signalling of end and intermediate positions.
The switching unit is equipped with a potentiometer and cam-controlled position switches for remote
indication. A measuring transmitter can also be used instead of a potentiometer.
For equipment and connection: Refer to separate operating instructions!
682.0009.1079A/02.en
Release 2: 07.06.2004
Page 6 of 17
Figure 2-1: Flow control gate 2000.1 PP
682.0009.1079A/02.en
Release 2: 07.06.2004
Page 7 of 17
Function * Valve
Y1 Y2 Y3
Fast-closing in case of power
failure
0 0 0
Opening 1 1 0
Intermediate position 1 0 0
Closing 1 0 1
* 0 = Voltage OFF
1 = Voltage ON
Table 2-1: Signal position
Figure 2-2: Pneumatic circuit diagram POSITIONING
682.0009.1079A/02.en
Release 2: 07.06.2004
Page 8 of 17
3.1 Transport
When lifting the flow control gate ensure that the carrying capacity of the ropes is in accordance with the
weight of the flow control gate. For lifting use the stop points at the housing. For reasons of safety and in
order to avoid damages only the stop points are to be used for transport.
3.2 Storage
The flow control gate has to be stored in covered condition resp. in a dry place and in installation position.
Avoid damages e.g. by charging it or climbing on it.
3.3 Assembly
3.3.1 Flow control gate
The flow control gate is delivered with installed drive ready for assembly.
The conveying direction, which is marked by an arrow on the housing, has to be observed by all means
during assembly.
corresponds to the size of the flanges.
The housing of the flow control gate must not be twisted during assembly. If the weight of the connected
installation parts is too heavy, the parts have to be supported correspondingly.
The energy supply lines are to be placed appropriately observing the valid safety regulations.
3.3.2 Control air connection
Dry, clean and free of oil clean control air (filter max. 40 m) of at least 5.0 to max. 6.0 bar overpressure has
to be provided by the customer.
The pressure dew point has to be appointed 10 K below the lowest ambient temperature to be expected.
682.0009.1079A/02.en
Release 2: 07.06.2004
Page 9 of 17
3.3.3 Aeration connection
The lower box of the flow control gate is equipped with an air connection socket for the connection of
compressed air with max. 0.8 bar overpressure. The air connection socket is equipped with an aperture for
quantity metering.
In order to be able to switch off the aeration for maintenance and repair work it is convenient to install a
shut-off valve in the air pipe in front of the flow control gate.
4 Operation
4.1 Pneumatic drive
The flow control gate is adjusted by means of a double acting pneumatically rotating actuator. For manual
adjustment the rotating actuator is equipped with an external square. The compressed air connections are
designed as self-locking hose couplings. The drive chambers are depressurized by pulling off the hose
couplings.
If the flow control gate has to close fast from any OPEN position, the 5/2 way valve Y1 and the connection
Y2 of the 5/3 way valve must be disconnected from current. The same effect will show if the control voltage
fail for other reasons.
The final positions of the pneumatic drive will be adjusted by means of two set screws. The set screw for the
final CLOSE-position will be relieved by stoppers within the flow control gate.
Attention
The two set screws must not be turned - they are adjusted at the works!
682.0009.1079A/02.en
Release 2: 07.06.2004
Page 10 of 17
4.2 Manual emergency operation
Refer to figure 2-1.
The flow control gate makes manual emergency operation possible. The necessary fork wrench is located at
the device.
DANGER
BEFORE ANY MANUAL EMERGENCY OPERATION ENSURE
THAT ACCIDENTAL STARTING OF THE DRIVE IS PREVENTED
BY APPROPRIATE MEASURES!
Pull off hose couplings to depressurize the drive chambers.
Turn roller into the required position. Use fork wrench (30.360) at the external square of the shaft at the
rotating actuator.
Attach hose couplings to connect the drive pneumatically again.
Attention
Normal operation is not possible if hose-couplings are pulled off!
5.1 Maintenance
Maintenance work Intervals
Check roller for smooth running 1 month
Table 5-1: Maintenance work
5.2 Lubrication
For the flow control gate no lubrication is required.
Lubrication of pneumatic drive: Refer to separate operating instructions.
682.0009.1079A/02.en
Release 2: 07.06.2004
Page 11 of 17
Fault Cause Repair
Flow control gate is leaky Roller or sealing is worn Disconnect flow control gate
Remove cassette
Check parts and exchange, if
necessary
Roller does not open and/or
close
Roller blocked by foreign
matter
Disconnect flow control gate
- by repeated switching in manual
emergency operation or
- via cleaning cover at the
distributor connected in front
Air pressure too low Adjust air pressure to 5-6 bar
Air quantity too low Clean air filter
Hose couplings are pulled off Connect hose couplings
Throttle valves are closed
and/or dirty
Open resp. clean throttle check
valves.
Roller does not reach the
preselected position or has an
extended actuating time
Position switch is misadjusted
or defect
Readjust position switch (refer to
separate operating instruction)
Roller blocked by foreign
matter
Disconnect flow control gate
- by repeated switching in manual
emergency operation or
- via cleaning cover at the
distributor connected in front
Sealing is damaged Disconnect flow control gate
Remove cassette
Check parts and replace, if
necessary
Throttle valves are dirty
and/or misadjusted
Clean resp. adjust check valves
Roller does not close during
power failure
Connections at rotating
actuator are exchanged
Connect rotating actuator correctly
(refer to pneumatic circuit diagram)
Table 5-2: Trouble shooting
682.0009.1079A/02.en
Release 2: 07.06.2004
Page 12 of 17
5.4 Repair
The repair work described in the following can be effected easily and fast. No special tools are required.
5.4.1 Replacement of roller sealing
A worn roller sealing has to be exchanged in time in order to avoid unnecessary wear of the flow control
gate.
Leakages and/or an uneven or extended actuating time indicate wear.
The cassette (10.110) has to be removed for replacing the roller sealing.
682.0009.1079A/02.en
Release 2: 07.06.2004
Page 13 of 17
5.4.1.1 Cassette removal
The shut-off gate arranged in front of the flow control gate has to be closed or the silo resp. the storage
bin has to be discharged completely.
Roller position Operation Roller position Cassette exchange
Figure 5-1: Cassette removal
Disconnect rotating actuator from pressure by pulling off the hose couplings.
Disassemble rotating actuator (101).
Mark position of roller shaft.
Disassemble lateral sealing cover.
Unscrew the 4 cassette screws (10.110.110).
Turn roller by appr. 135 past position OPEN up to the stop (10.300) into the position for cassette
removal - use provided wrench (30.360).
Disassemble cassette laterally.
Note:
The spacer screws (10.270) must not be shifted during cassette removal!
682.0009.1079A/02.en
Release 2: 07.06.2004
Page 14 of 17
5.4.1.2 Exchange of roller sealing
Loosen screws.
Remove roller sealing from the cassette.
Insert new roller sealing in the cassette.
Do not assemble the clamping frame twistedly but in a way that it ends on the same level as the
cassette.
Tighten screws evenly but not too firm (distortion of the cassette is possible).
Check the flat sealing glued to the cassette frame for firm position.
If the flat sealing has loosened, fasten it again by use of the appropriate glue.
Figure 5-2: Exchange of roller sealing
682.0009.1079A/02.en
Release 2: 07.06.2004
Page 15 of 17
5.4.1.3 Assembly of cassette
Clean feed housing.
Position cassette in the cassette opening so that the projecting ends of the feed housing will be identical
at both sides.
Tighten the 4 cassette screws (10.110.110) slightly.
Ensure that during this procedure the cassette will lie on both spacer screws (10.270). This will help to
fasten the cassette in its original height.
Turn roller back into the direction CLOSED of the operating position.
Tighten the 4 cassette screws with approx. 25 Nm.
Check for smooth turning of the roller. Use fork wrench (30.360)!
Size 200 250 300 350 400 500 630
Md [Nm] 40 45 50 60 70 90 125
Table 5-3: Maximum adjusting torque
If smooth turning cannot be reached, evenly unscrew the spacer screws (10.270) a bit and adjust them
anew, if necessary (refer to chapter 5.4.2).
Assemble lateral sealing cover.
Turn marking of the roller shaft in such a way that the roller shaft marking faces the marking at the drive.
Move rotating actuator drive (101) on the roller shaft and fasten with screws.
Connect hose couplings.
Test run of the flow control gate by means of the local control station.
682.0009.1079A/02.en
Release 2: 07.06.2004
Page 16 of 17
5.4.2 Adjustment of spacer screws
After replacing the complete cassette or through mechanic changes of the existing cassette, it might be
necessary to adjust the spacer screws (10.270) anew:
Remove cassette: Refer to chapter 5.4.1.1. Tighten the 4 cassette screws (10.50.110) so far that the
cassette is just movable.
Turn back roller into direction CLOSED against stop (10.300).
Since the cassette has not been adjusted yet, lift the cassette so far that the clamping frame will show an
even distance all around the roller.
Tighten evenly the 4 cassette screws at the perimeter (approx. 25 Nm).
Make sure that there is an even pressure of the cassette on the spacer screws by unscrewing and
tightening of the spacer screws until contact of the lower side of the cassette is established.
Secure spacer screws.
Further working steps: Refer to chapter 5.4.1.3.
682.0009.1079A/02.en
Release 2: 07.06.2004
Page 17 of 17
6 Technical Data
Standard Option
Function flow control gate POSITIONING (PP)
Power solenoid valve 9 VA / 2 W
Protection class solenoid
valve
IP67
Control air pressure 5,0...7,0 bar over pressure
Control air quality Filter max. 40 m, trocken und
sauber,
Drucktaupunkt > 10 K
Cable ducts M 16
Closing time Positioning: 3...60 sec/90
Fast closing: < 3 sec
Aeration connection Max. 0,8 bar over pressure
Temperature of material to
be conveyed
max. 140C max. 180C
Ambient temperature -15 ... +50C
Number of limit switches 5 pieces
Mikroschalter IP 40, 6 A, 24...380 V
Proximity switches PNP IP 54, 0,1 A, 10...30 V-DC
Proximity switches NAMUR IP 67, 3 mA, 8 V-DC
D
R
I
V
E

O
N

L
E
F
T

=
L
E
F
T

H
A
N
D

D
E
S
I
G
N
L
E
F
T

H
A
N
D

D
E
S
I
G
N
A
n
t
r
i
e
b

l
i
n
k
s

=
L
i
n
k
s
a
u
s
f
h
r
u
n
g
L
i
n
k
s
a
u
s
f
h
r
u
n
g
D
R
I
V
E

O
N

R
I
G
H
T

=
R
I
G
H
T

H
A
N
D

D
E
S
I
G
N
R
I
G
H
T

H
A
N
D

D
E
S
I
G
N
A
n
t
r
i
e
b

r
e
c
h
t
s

=
R
e
c
h
t
s
a
u
s
f
h
r
u
n
g
R
e
c
h
t
s
a
u
s
f
h
r
u
n
g
V
I
E
W

I
N
T
O

D
I
R
E
C
T
I
O
N

O
F

M
A
T
E
R
I
A
L
F
L
O
W
:
I
n

M
a
t
e
r
i
a
l
f
l
u
r
i
c
h
t
u
n
g

g
e
s
e
h
e
n
:
1
0
1
1
1
2
1
0
1
1
1
2
1
2
3
1
2
3
2
0
2
1
2
2
1
9
2
0
2
1
2
2
P
N
P
N
A
M
U
R
S
1
.
.
.
S
4
S
1
.
.
.
S
4
R
2
B
P
R
O
T
E
C
T
I
O
N

C
L
A
S
S
:

I
P

6
5
S
c
h
u
t
z
a
r
t
:

I
P

6
5
M

3
2
M

3
2
M

3
2
M

3
2
+
-
+
-
+
-
S
1
S
2
S
3
S
4
R
1
M

1
6
M

1
6
M

1
6
-
Y
1
-
Y
2
-
Y
3
FLOW CONTROL GATE PP, DRIVE: PNEU 01 682.0017.1079A/06.ED
Dosierwalze PP, Antrieb: PNEU
Ersatz fr: 682.0017.1075A/01.ED
REPLACE FOR: 682.0017.1075A/01.ED
1

-

b
e
t
t
i
g
t
/
A
C
T
I
V
A
T
E
D

0

-

n
i
c
h
t

b
e
t
t
i
g
t
/
N
O
T

A
C
T
I
V
A
T
E
D

*
)
n
a
c
h

B
e
d
a
r
f
/
A
S

R
E
Q
U
I
R
E
D
0
0
1
0
0
*
)
*
)
0
0
0
1
0
*
)
*
)
1
1
0
1
0
*
)
*
)
0
0
1
1
1
*
)
*
)
Y
1
Y
2
Y
3
S
1
S
2
S
3
S
4
R
I
G
H
T

-

A
N
D

L
E
F
T

H
A
N
D

D
E
S
I
G
N
R
e
c
h
t
s
-

u
n
d

L
i
n
k
s
a
u
s
f
h
r
u
n
g
S
T
A
T
E

O
F

S
I
G
N
A
L
S
i
g
n
a
l
z
u
s
t
a
n
d
0
%
0
%
1
0
0
%
S
2
S
1
W
e
r
k
s
e
i
n
s
t
e
l
l
u
n
g

S
1

+

S
2
F
A
C
T
O
R
Y

S
E
T
T
I
N
G
S

S
1

+

S
2
F
A
C
T
O
R
Y

S
E
T
T
I
N
G
S

S
1

+

S
2
+
A
-
+
-
2
3
2
2
2
1
-
4
+
5
-
2
4
+
2
5
P
O
S
I
T
I
O
N

T
R
A
N
S
M
I
T
T
E
R
(
P
A
G
E

2
)
(
P
A
G
E

2
)
S
t
e
l
l
u
n
g
s
g
e
b
e
r
(
B
l
a
t
t

2
)
(
B
l
a
t
t

2
)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
0
1
1
1
2
1
3
1
4
1
5
1
6
1
7
1
8
1
9
2
0
2
1
2
2
S
c
h
a
l
t
e
i
n
s
a
t
z
S
W
I
T
C
H
I
N
G

U
N
I
T
S
W
I
T
C
H
I
N
G

U
N
I
T
2
4

V

D
C
2

W
K
l
e
m
m
e
n
a
n
s
c
h
l
u
a
m

G
e
r
t
e
s
t
e
c
k
e
r
T
E
R
M
I
N
A
L
C
O
N
N
E
C
T
I
O
N

O
F

P
L
U
G
a
m

G
e
r
t
e
s
t
e
c
k
e
r
T
E
R
M
I
N
A
L
C
O
N
N
E
C
T
I
O
N

O
F

P
L
U
G
T
E
R
M
I
N
A
L
C
O
N
N
E
C
T
I
O
N

O
F

P
L
U
G
C
O
N
N
E
C
T
I
O
N

O
F

P
L
U
G
1
1
0

-

1
2
0

V

5
0
/
6
0

H
z
4

V
A
2
2
0

-

2
4
0

V

5
0
/
6
0

H
z
9

V
A
1
2
1
2
1
2
P
G

9
H
O
L
D
H
a
l
t
e
n
V
O
L
T
A
G
E
P
O
W
E
R
S
p
a
n
n
u
n
g
L
e
i
s
t
u
n
g

S
O
L
E
N
O
I
D

V
A
L
V
E

T
Y
P
E

1
3
x
I
S
O

V
e
n
t
i
l

G
r
.

1
2
1
G
e
r
t
e
s
t
e
c
k
e
r
P
L
U
G
P
L
U
G
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
CONNECTION DIAGRAM/Anschlussplan
CLAUDIUS PETERS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A
B
C
D
E
F
A
B
C
D
E
F
Blatt
Anschlusspl
.
.
.
.
.
.
O
P
T
I
O
N
S
T
A
N
D
A
R
D
E
M
E
R
G
E
N
C
Y

T
R
I
P

(
P
O
W
E
R

F
A
I
L
U
R
E
)
S
c
h
n
e
l
l
s
c
h
l
u

(
S
t
r
o
m
a
u
s
f
a
l
l
)
I
N
T
E
R
M
E
D
I
A
T
E

P
O
S
I
T
I
O
N
S
Z
w
i
s
c
h
e
n
p
o
s
i
t
i
o
n
e
n
C
L
O
S
I
N
G
S
c
h
l
i
e
e
n
O
P
E
N
I
N
G
f
f
n
e
n
F
U
N
C
T
I
O
N
F
u
n
k
t
io
n
E
n
d
s
c
h
a
lt
e
r
/
L
I
M
I
T
S
W
I
T
C
H
:
(
S
)
V
e
n
t
il/
S
O
L
E
N
O
I
D

V
A
L
V
E
:
(
Y
)
1
-
4
G
E
F
F
N
E
T
/
O
P
E
N
1
-
2
1
-
4
G
E
S
C
H
L
O
S
S
E
N
/
C
L
O
S
E
D
1
-
2
1
3
1
2
1
1
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
4
4
4
4
1
2
P
E
1
2
P
E
1
2
P
E
nderung Datum
Datum
Bearbeiter
Geprft
Norm Name
03.01.2006
E
r
s
t
e
llt

m
it

E
L
C
A
D

(
R
)

7
.
3
.
0
Mol
Cord
R.
TITLE 01.05 Mol 5
DIV 01.06 Mol 6
7

Claudius Peters
Switching unit
type 1001
697.0009.1001A/02.en

697.0009.1001A/02.en
Release 2: 01.02.2002
Page 2 of 14

Contents
1 Basic safety instructions........................................................................................................ 3
2 Description............................................................................................................................. 3
2.1 Adequate usage .................................................................................................................... 3
2.2 Structure and functioning....................................................................................................... 3
2.3 Technical data....................................................................................................................... 4
2.3.1 Micro switch........................................................................................................................... 4
2.3.2 Proximity switch (three-wire design)...................................................................................... 4
2.3.3 Proximity switch (two-wire design) ........................................................................................ 5
2.3.4 Potentiometer P 10 (remote indication)................................................................................. 5
2.3.5 Potentiometer PW 45 dy (control evaluation)........................................................................ 5
2.3.6 Potentiometer PW 70 dy (control evaluation)........................................................................ 6
2.3.7 Measuring transmitter (3 and 4 conductor technique)........................................................... 6
2.3.8 Measuring transmitter (2 conductor technique)..................................................................... 6
4 Operation............................................................................................................................... 8
4.1 Adjustment of the position switches ...................................................................................... 8
4.1.1 Signalling of end positions..................................................................................................... 8
4.1.2 Signalling of intermediate positions....................................................................................... 9
4.2 Adjustment of position indication........................................................................................... 9
4.2.1 Potentiometer (R) .................................................................................................................. 9
4.2.2 Measuring transmitter (B)...................................................................................................... 10
4.3 Electrical connection.............................................................................................................. 10
4.3.1 Electric drive.......................................................................................................................... 10
4.3.2 Pneumatic drive..................................................................................................................... 10

List of figures
Fig. 2-1: Switching unit ........................................................................................................................ 4
Fig. 3-1: Coupling for switching unit..................................................................................................... 7
Fig. 4-1: Connection plan for electric drive.......................................................................................... 11
Fig. 4-2: Connection plan for pneumatic drive..................................................................................... 12
Fig. 4-3: Adjustment instructions for measuring transmitter (3 and 4 conductor technique)............... 13
Fig. 4-4: Adjustment instructions for measuring transmitter (2 conductor technique)......................... 14

697.0009.1001A/02.en
Release 2: 01.02.2002
Page 3 of 14

1 Basic safety instructions
The switching unit is only to be opened by personnel who is trained to work with electrical equipment.
The drive, which is coupled to the switching unit, has to be isolated and protected against accidental starting
during all work at the switching unit.
2 Description
2.1 Adequate usage
The switching unit serves for
signalling of end and intermediate positions,
continuous position indication by means of potentiometer or measuring transmitter,
as terminal point for control valves and control signals.
2.2 Structure and functioning
The position switches (S1-S5) are installed on a base plate (50). The elements are wired up to the terminal
strip (330).
The switching unit can be equipped with max. 5 position switches. The cam rings (520) for microswitches
have a smaller diameter than the switching rings for proximity switches (530).
For position indication the switching unit can be equipped either with a potentiometer (106) or with a
measuring transmitter.
The switching elements are located in an aluminium cast housing which consists of a body (10) and a cover
(2). The motion of rotation onto cam rings and measuring transmitters will be transmitted via the shaft (80).

697.0009.1001A/02.en
Release 2: 01.02.2002
Page 4 of 14

Figure 2-1: Switching unit
2.3 Technical data
Cable inlet................................................................3 x PG 11
4 x PG 21
Protection class........................................................IP 54
Ambient temperature................................................min - 20 C
max +60 C
2.3.1 Micro switch
Switching capacity....................................................AC 230 V, 4 A
AC 400 V, 3 A
DC 60 V, 3 A
2.3.2 Proximity switch (three-wire design)
Three wires, switching plus (PNP)...........................make contact
Operating voltage.....................................................DC 10 - 30 V
Continuous current...................................................100 mA

697.0009.1001A/02.en
Release 2: 01.02.2002
Page 5 of 14

2.3.3 Proximity switch (two-wire design)
Two wires acc. to DIN 19 234 (NAMUR) .................break contact
Operating voltage.....................................................DC 5 - 25 V
2.3.4 Potentiometer P 10 (remote indication)
Type.........................................................................P 10
Resistance ...............................................................1 k 10% on 252
Blind angle ...............................................................108
Loading capacity......................................................16 W
Axle diametre...........................................................6 mm
Slider........................................................................full rotation
Liniarity.....................................................................5%
2.3.5 Potentiometer PW 45 dy (control evaluation)
Type.........................................................................PW 45 dy
Coiling angle ............................................................360
Resistance ...............................................................25 k 1% on 180
Short circuit winding.................................................beginning and end 85 each
Blind angle between short circuit winding................10
Loading capacity......................................................1.6 W
Axle diametre...........................................................6 mm
Axle length from support..........................................37 mm
Liniarity.....................................................................0.3%

697.0009.1001A/02.en
Release 2: 01.02.2002
Page 6 of 14

2.3.6 Potentiometer PW 70 dy (control evaluation)
Type.........................................................................PW 70 dy
Coiling angle ............................................................360
Resistance ...............................................................2 k 1% on 90
Short circuit winding.................................................beginning and end 15 each
Blind angle between short circuit winding................240
Loading capacity......................................................2.5 W
Axle diametre...........................................................6 mm
Axle length from support..........................................24 mm
Liniarity.....................................................................0.25%
2.3.7 Measuring transmitter (3 and 4 conductor technique)
Type.........................................................................PK620-18d-MU/i-01V
Measuring range......................................................0 up to 81/99 adjustable, full mechanic rotation,
V-characteristic
Power supply............................................................DC 18 - 33 V
Output signal ............................................................+20 .. 0/4 .. +20 mA
Output ......................................................................galvanically separated
Liniarity.....................................................................0.1%
2.3.8 Measuring transmitter (2 conductor technique)
Type.........................................................................PK620-18d-MU/i-02V
Measuring range......................................................0 up to 81/99 adjustable, mechanic full rotation,
V-characteristic
Power supply............................................................DC 18 - 33 V
Output signal ............................................................+20 .. 4 .. +20 mA
Liniarity.....................................................................0.1%

697.0009.1001A/02.en
Release 2: 01.02.2002
Page 7 of 14

3 Transport / Storage / Assembl y
In closed condition the switching unit can be transported and stored without any special measures.
If the switching unit has been dismantled ensure that during reassembly the pin of the fittings shaft locks into
the driving pin of the drive shaft (80) (refer to figure 3-1).

Figure 3-1: Coupling for switching unit

697.0009.1001A/02.en
Release 2: 01.02.2002
Page 8 of 14

4 Operation
4.1 Adjustment of the position switches
4.1.1 Signalling of end positions
The preadjustment of position switches S1 and S2 is effected at the works. If the adjustment is to be effected
at site or if the adjustment has to be corrected please proceed as follows:
Move device into position CLOSED.
Unscrew cover (20) of the switching unit.
Loosen set screw of cam ring (520) for microswitch S1 and/or of the switching ring (530) for proximity
switch S1.
Move cam ring and/or switching ring into CLOSED direction until the cam ring and/or switching ring
actuates the position switch S1:
Switching point of microswitch: switching sound is audible;
Switching point of proximity switch: illuminated diode lights up.
Turn cam ring and/or switching ring further 1 mm into CLOSED position.
Fasten again cam ring and/or switching ring by use of set screw.
Move device into OPEN position.
Loosen set screw of cam ring (520) for microswitch S2 and/or of switching ring (530) for proximity switch S2.
Move cam ring and/or switching ring into OPEN direction until the cam ring and/or switching ring actuates
the position switch S2:
Switching point of microswitch: switching sound audible;
Turn cam ring and/or switching ring further 1 mm into OPEN position.
Refasten cam ring and/or switching ring by use of set screw.
Screw cover (20) back onto switching unit.

697.0009.1001A/02.en
Release 2: 01.02.2002
Page 9 of 14

4.1.2 Signalling of intermediate positions
Position switches S3 to S5 will be adjusted at site and will be effected as follows:
Turn the device into required position.
Loosen set screw of cam ring (520) for microswitch and/or of the switching ring (530) for proximity switch.
Move cam ring and/or switching ring until the cam ring and/or switching ring actuates the position switch:
Switching point of microswitch: switching sound audible;
Fasten again cam ring and/or switching ring by use of set screw.
Screw down cover (20) onto switching unit.
4.2 Adjustment of positi on indication
4.2.1 Potentiometer (R)
Move device into center position.
Loosen set screw (250) in the drive shaft (80).
Lift potentiometer together with potentiometer holder (70) axially.
Shift slider of the potentiometer over its axle into the required position.
Insert potentiometer with holder into the bore of the drive shaft (80).
Note
Ensure that the cap nut (225) is immersed into the bore of the
potentiometer holder (70) (twist protection)!
Fasten set screw (250) in the drive shaft (80).

697.0009.1001A/02.en
Release 2: 01.02.2002
Page 10 of 14

4.2.2 Measuring transmitter (B)
Move device into CLOSED position.
Loosen set screw (250) in the drive shaft (80).
Turn axle of the measuring transmitter until the output signal 0/4 to 20 mA starts to increase.
Fasten set screw in the drive shaft (80).
Loosen screwed clamps.
Readjust beginning of increase of mA-signal by rotating the housing of the measuring transmitter.
Fasten housing with screwed clamps.
Adjust output signal to 0 resp. 4 mA by means of a zero-point trimmer.
Turn device into OPEN position.
Check whether the output signal amounts to 20 mA; if required, adjust the output signal to 20 mA by
means of a special trimmer.
Turn device into CLOSED position.
Check whether the output signal amounts to 0 resp. 4 mA; if required adjust zero-point trimmer.
4.3 Electrical connection
4.3.1 Electric drive
Switches S1 and S2 are adjusted to final positions at the works. S3 to S5 are for free disposal.
4.3.2 Pneumatic drive
Switches S1 and S2 are adjusted to final positions at the works. S3 and S4 are for free disposal. The
switches are wired to the terminals.
Depending on the design of the drive the solenoid valves Y1 to Y3 are wired to the marked terminals ready for
connection. If a solenoid valve does not belong to the scope of supply, the terminals can be used otherwise.
An electro-pneumatic 2-wire position controller (A) mounted at the supporting device is wired to the terminal
ready for connection for the external nominal value.
The measuring transmitter (B) is also wired to the terminal ready for connection.
Note
Depending on the use the terminal connexion in the switching unit can be
different for the same transmitters!

697.0009.1001A/02.en
Release 2: 01.02.2002
Page 11 of 14

Standard

Options

Adjustment at works S1 and S2

S1
1 - 2 CLOSED
1 - 4

S2
1 - 2 OPEN
1 - 4
0% 100%
S3 - S5 according to requirements
closed
open
Figure 4-1: Connection plan for electric drive

697.0009.1001A/02.en
Release 2: 01.02.2002
Page 12 of 14

Standard

Options

S1
1 - 2 CLOSED
1 - 4

S2
1 - 2 OPEN
1 - 4
0% 100%
S3 - S4 according to requirements
closed
open
Figure 4-2: Connection plan for pneumatic drive

697.0009.1001A/02.en
Release 2: 01.02.2002
Page 13 of 14

Figure 4-3: Adjustment instructions for measuring transmitter
(3 and 4 conductor technique)

697.0009.1001A/02.en
Release 2: 01.02.2002
Page 14 of 14

Figure 4-4: Adjustment instructions for measuring transmitter
(2 conductor technique)
Pneumatic actuator
698.0026.0021A/07.en
698.0026.0021A/07.en
Release 7: 07.06.2004
Page 2 of 7
Contents
2 Description ............................................................................................................................ 3
3 Assembly............................................................................................................................... 4
3.1 Quality of control air .............................................................................................................. 5
4 Maintenance.......................................................................................................................... 5
4.1 Maintenance works ............................................................................................................... 5
4.2 Repair.................................................................................................................................... 5
4.2.1 Dismounting of drive ............................................................................................................. 5
4.2.2 Assembly of wing .................................................................................................................. 6
4.2.3 Assembly of drive.................................................................................................................. 6
5 Spare parts............................................................................................................................ 7
List of figures
Fig. 2-1: Pneumatic actuator ............................................................................................................... 3
Fig. 5-1: Spare parts drawing.............................................................................................................. 7
List of tables
Tab. 5-1: Spare parts list ...................................................................................................................... 7
698.0026.0021A/07.en
Release 7: 07.06.2004
Page 3 of 7
These safety instructions are to be read and applied by every person dealing with the operation,
maintenance or repair of the pneumatic actuator.
The pneumatic actuator is in accordance with the latest state of technology and safety. However, there can
be certain risks if the pneumatic actuator is handled inappropriately by untrained personnel or if the
pneumatic actuator is used for other than the intended purpose. The following risks can result:
risk of injuries;
Unauthorized reconstructions or modifications of the pneumatic actuator are prohibited.
Maintenance and repair work is only to be effected by skilled personnel.
Take preventive measures in order to avoid accidental start of the pneumatic actuator.
2 Description
The constructional concept of the pneumatic actuator dispenses with lever arms, toothed racks and
transmissions and allows for a direct transmission of the torque without disturbing lateral forces at the drive
journal. The drives are light and compact, the degree of efficiency is high. In addition the drives require
hardly any maintenance. The life of the pneumatic can be compared to that of regular pneumatic cylinders
due to the longevity of the lip seals.
The pneumatic actuator is suited for the adjustment of an operation angle of 90 5. The exact angle of
rotation can be adjusted by means of stops integrated in the housing.
Figure 2-1: Pneumatic actuator
698.0026.0021A/07.en
Release 7: 07.06.2004
Page 4 of 7
3 Assembly
Usually, the drive is installed at the machine at works. If during maintenance works a drive had to be
dismantled it will have to be installed again as follows.
The life of drive and machine shaft as well as the tightness of the sealing depend to a large extent on
the care during erection.
Check whether the coupling piece can be moved onto the spindle of the machine and onto the drive shaft
without any efforts. Possible edges or damages at the shafts can be easily removed by means of
scrapers or files. Production tolerances can be influenced in the same way.
Note:
Never hit drive housing, drive shaft, machine spindle or coupling with a
hammer!
A light lubrication of the shaft ends before erection will facilitate assembly and will prevent possible
corrosion.
First check whether drive and machine are in the same final position.
It will be the decision of the erector whether the machine or the drive will first be screwed to the mounting
component. In any case the screws are only to be tightened loosely at first. In order to retain the screws
it is appropriate to use a liquid screw retainer (e.g. LOCTITE) during erection. As soon as mounting
component and drive are screwed to each other - do not forget to install coupling - the most critical phase
of erection approaches: the adjustment.
Note:
The quality of your work will depend to a large extent on the fact that
machine spindle and drive shaft are in alignment with each other in both
end positions of the shut-off device!
Check whether the mounting component is positioned vertically and horizontally to all respective levels or
axles of the machine. If necessary correct the position by hitting the mounting component slightly with a
mallet. Tighten assembly screws at the machine.
Check whether the drive shaft is positioned directly in the center above the machine spindle. Take care
that the shaft axles are in alignment and are not facing each other in an obtuse angle.
If necessary correct position of drive by loosening the fastening screws and by moving the drive within
the drilling tolerances of the mounting component. Tighten fastening screws.
Connect drive according to the pneumatic connection plan. Before the functional test of the drive is
effected, adjust drive to "slow" at the throttle check valves. Actuate several times and observe the
installed unit. If drive and machine move relatively to each other and the mounting component twists, this
indicates an alignment error of the two axles which has to be corrected.
The correct position of the shut-off device in its end position can be easily regulated via the two
adjustable end stops of the pneumatic actuator.
698.0026.0021A/07.en
Release 7: 07.06.2004
Page 5 of 7
3.1 Quality of control air
Dry, clean and free of oil clean control air (filter max. 40 m) of at least 5.0 to max. 6.0 bar overpressure has
to be provided by the customer. A penetration of condensate into the drive should be prevented by
appropriate means.
4 Maintenance
4.1 Maintenance works
The pneumatic actuator requires hardly any maintenance. If the drive is erected accurately and if the control
air is according to the regulations the drive can reach a durability comparable to that of regular pneumatic
cylinders.
If drives are installed e. g. at components which vibrate heavily (e.g. close to pumps) we recommend to
check all screwed connections at regular intervals for firm positioning.
If a repair of the drive should become necessary after a long time of operation refer to chapter 4.2.
4.2 Repair
Position numbers refer to figure 5-1.
4.2.1 Dismounting of drive
Dismount pneumatic actuator from mounting component.
Check both shaft ends of drive for correct edges. Flatten possible damages with file since otherwise shaft
bearings and shaft sealings will be damaged during dismounting.
Set clamping pins (11) in the lateral housing flanges back to the partition line by means of a flat ejector
drift of appropriate size.
Remove housing screws (14) and separate both housing parts by blowing-in compressed air.
Remove housing parts (10) from wing (1) without force.
Clean surface of housing and sealings.
Dismount and clean wing (1).
Check shaft bearing (13) and shaft sealings (12) and replace them if necessary.
Housings with damaged surfaces cannot be repaired completely.
Attention
Never hit housing parts or shaft ends with hammer, this could lead to damages
at the inner surfaces!
698.0026.0021A/07.en
Release 7: 07.06.2004
Page 6 of 7
4.2.2 Assembly of wing
Check whether the stud bolts (6 / 7) are located centrally and whether they are still fixed, if not readjust
using LOCTITE.
Move O-rings (9) over stud bolts.
Install wing sealings (3) and spring plates (4).
Note:
Sealing profile and wing profile have to be identical. The spring plate is
marked where it will touch the wing shaft. Lip seals and teeth of the spring
plates have to be turned away from the wing.
Install lateral plates (5) and fix with nuts (8); use a bit of LOCTITE for this procedure.
Torques for the nuts (8): 3.5 Nm
4.2.3 Assembly of drive
Lubricate lip seals, bearings and inner sliding surface of the housing slightly with MoS2 grease.
Spread sealing material slightly over both parts of the housing and distribute the material with the tops of
your fingers.
Remove excess sealing material carefully especially from the running surface.
Install wing in one of the housing parts, position second housing part on top and press down carefully
with your hands.
Do not use a hammer!
Take care that the wing seal is not damaged or jammed in between the sealing surfaces.
Press spring-type straight pins (11) carefully into the drillings of the second housing part.
Install housing screws and nuts and tighten them with 120 Nm.
Move wing manually from stop to stop into both directions in order to remove sealing paste which has
probably passed out at the inside.
After 20 minutes of drying: effect a functional test with 7 bar compressed air.
Retighten housing screws again.
Sealing material: commercial silocon caoutchouc mass,
e.g. Silastic 732 RTV by Wacker Chemie AG
Grease: non-saponifying and acid-free high-performance grease,
e.g. MoS
2
grease by CASTROL
698.0026.0021A/07.en
Release 7: 07.06.2004
Page 7 of 7
5 Spare parts
Figure 5-1: Spare parts drawing
Part no. Quantity Designation
- Set Wear parts, complete
1 1 Wing, complete
2 1 Wing
3 2 Sealing
4 2 Spring plate
5 2 Lateral plate
6 Set Stud bolt or screw, short
7 Set Stud bolt or screw, long
8 Set Nuts for pos. 6 + 7
9 Set O-rings
10 1 Housing (upper and lower part)
11 Set Straight pin
12 4 Shaft sealing
13 2 Shaft bearing
14 Set Housing screws and nuts
15 2 End stop complete, adjustable
16 2 O-ring
21 1 Coupling (not used when installed to flow control gate)
Table 5-1: Spare parts list

Claudius Peters
Aeroslides Type 1
Assembl y Instructions
621.0009.0000A/04.en

621.0009.0000A/04.en
Release 4: 01.02.2002
Page 2 of 4

Contents
1 Description............................................................................................................................. 3
1.1 Assembly............................................................................................................................... 3
1.2 Inspection cover .................................................................................................................... 3
1.3 Aeration line........................................................................................................................... 4
1.4 Welding work......................................................................................................................... 4

621.0009.0000A/04.en
Release 4: 01.02.2002
Page 3 of 4

1 Description
Before start of the assembly, check that all parts required for the aeroslide assembly are available at site.
Any damage which may have been caused to the parts by improper transport should first be rectified (e.g.
slightly bent flanges should be straightened).
1.1 Assembl y
Beginning at the silo connection, place the aeroslides in accordance with the assembly drawing. The aeros-
lide gasket should be inserted on one side with a sealing compound (e.g. Curil, Fermit). The screws of the
flange connection should be tightened up evenly crosswise. The inclination, which depends on the flowability
of the conveyed material, should be checked immediately after the first part of the aeroslide has been in-
stalled.
If there are aluminium components in the aersolide assembly (such as e.g. flow control gate, lateral dis-
charger), it is essential to make sure that no distortion results during the installation work.
The aeroslide supports and the suspensions must not be rigidly connected to the aeroslide as temperature
differences can cause changes in length. The maximum distance between the individual supports must not
exceed 5 m.
1.2 Inspection cover
According to the safety regulations, inspection covers with quick closure must be at least 850 mm distant
from a source of danger (such as e.g. flow control gate, flap of the lateral discharger). In the case of covers
which are screwed, and can only be opened with a tool, the distance can be less.

621.0009.0000A/04.en
Release 4: 01.02.2002
Page 4 of 4

1.3 Aeration line
The aeration line must be of sufficiently large crosssection to avoid excessive pressure drop. The necessary
pressure reduction should take place immediately ahead of the aeroslide. The aeration pressure most suit-
able for the conveyed material should be determined by the engineering department. For long aeroslide as-
semblies, air dividers should be fitted in the lower box in accordance with the assembly drawing. Instead of
the normal aeroslide gasket, an air divider gasket will be used here. Since the outer dimensions of the air
divider are larger than those of normal aeroslide gaskets, the position of the air dividers is immediately ap-
parent in a completely assembled aeroslide assembly.
Please note:
The venting lines should be laid as steepl y as possible so as to avoid the
accumulation of material deposits.

1.4 Welding work
Attention!
If it is necesary to do welding work on the aeroslides at the place of assembly,
for example if an inspection cover is to be subsequently fitted, the fabric mate-
rial must be carefully covered to prevent its being damaged by welding spatter.

Claudius Peters
Fabric for
Aeration Elements
Description
621.0009.0022A/10.en

Contents

621.0009.0022A/10.en

Release 10: 28.04.2006
Page 2 of 5

1 Polyester fabric
smooth surface
it does not rot
621.0009.0022A/10.en

Release 10: 28.04.2006
Page 3 of 5

of up to 250C.
smooth surface
high solidity
it does not rot
free of asbestos
621.0009.0022A/10.en

Release 10: 28.04.2006
Page 4 of 5

3 Sealing compound
Characteristics
ointment like
non-drying
poisonless

621.0009.0022A/10.en

Release 10: 28.04.2006
Page 5 of 5

Claudius Peters
Aeroslides Type 1
Assembl y Instructions
621.0009.0000A/04.en

621.0009.0000A/04.en
Release 4: 01.02.2002
Page 2 of 4

Contents
1 Description............................................................................................................................. 3
1.1 Assembly............................................................................................................................... 3
1.2 Inspection cover .................................................................................................................... 3
1.3 Aeration line........................................................................................................................... 4
1.4 Welding work......................................................................................................................... 4

621.0009.0000A/04.en
Release 4: 01.02.2002
Page 3 of 4

1 Description
Before start of the assembly, check that all parts required for the aeroslide assembly are available at site.
Any damage which may have been caused to the parts by improper transport should first be rectified (e.g.
slightly bent flanges should be straightened).
1.1 Assembl y
Beginning at the silo connection, place the aeroslides in accordance with the assembly drawing. The aeros-
lide gasket should be inserted on one side with a sealing compound (e.g. Curil, Fermit). The screws of the
flange connection should be tightened up evenly crosswise. The inclination, which depends on the flowability
of the conveyed material, should be checked immediately after the first part of the aeroslide has been in-
stalled.
If there are aluminium components in the aersolide assembly (such as e.g. flow control gate, lateral dis-
charger), it is essential to make sure that no distortion results during the installation work.
The aeroslide supports and the suspensions must not be rigidly connected to the aeroslide as temperature
differences can cause changes in length. The maximum distance between the individual supports must not
exceed 5 m.
1.2 Inspection cover
According to the safety regulations, inspection covers with quick closure must be at least 850 mm distant
from a source of danger (such as e.g. flow control gate, flap of the lateral discharger). In the case of covers
which are screwed, and can only be opened with a tool, the distance can be less.

621.0009.0000A/04.en
Release 4: 01.02.2002
Page 4 of 4

1.3 Aeration line
The aeration line must be of sufficiently large crosssection to avoid excessive pressure drop. The necessary
pressure reduction should take place immediately ahead of the aeroslide. The aeration pressure most suit-
able for the conveyed material should be determined by the engineering department. For long aeroslide as-
semblies, air dividers should be fitted in the lower box in accordance with the assembly drawing. Instead of
the normal aeroslide gasket, an air divider gasket will be used here. Since the outer dimensions of the air
divider are larger than those of normal aeroslide gaskets, the position of the air dividers is immediately ap-
parent in a completely assembled aeroslide assembly.
Please note:
The venting lines should be laid as steepl y as possible so as to avoid the
accumulation of material deposits.

1.4 Welding work
Attention!
If it is necesary to do welding work on the aeroslides at the place of assembly,
for example if an inspection cover is to be subsequently fitted, the fabric mate-
rial must be carefully covered to prevent its being damaged by welding spatter.

Claudius Peters
Fabric for
Aeration Elements
Description
621.0009.0022A/10.en

Contents

621.0009.0022A/10.en

Release 10: 28.04.2006
Page 2 of 5

1 Polyester fabric
smooth surface
it does not rot
621.0009.0022A/10.en

Release 10: 28.04.2006
Page 3 of 5

of up to 250C.
smooth surface
high solidity
it does not rot
free of asbestos
621.0009.0022A/10.en

Release 10: 28.04.2006
Page 4 of 5

3 Sealing compound
Characteristics
ointment like
non-drying
poisonless

621.0009.0022A/10.en

Release 10: 28.04.2006
Page 5 of 5

Copyright by InterApp DESPONIA 0609
Investments in our
products pay off
DESPONIA
InterApp AG Tel. +41 (0)41 798 22 33
Butterfy valve
DESPONIA
DN 25 - 400 DN 450 - 1400
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
InterApp AG Tel. +41 (0)41 798 22 33
Characteristics:
Construction:
O
Body (extended valve neck allowing insulation)
O
Blow out proof shaft with position indication
O
Disc
O
Exchangeable liner with sealing grooves on the tightening face
O
Shaft bearing (DN25-400 rilsan, DN450-1400 bronze)
O
Square driven disc
O
External shaft sealing
O
Retaining washer (blow out protection)
DESPONIA Centric butterfy valve with elastomer liner
Application felds For liquids and gases in the industrial range, general services, water treatment, ...
Body construction
D1 Wafer DN 25-800 D3 LUG DN 25-400 D4 U-section DN 150-1400
Face to face dimension according to ISO 5752/20, EN 558-1/20
Top fange according to EN ISO 5211
Max. working pressure 10/16 bar
Rating PN6, PN10, PN16, ANSI cl. 150
Temperature range
Standard -10C 95C with EPDM liner, max. -10C 200C according to material,
other temperatures on request
Tightness test according to EN 12266-1/P12 leakage rate A, test fuid water
The butterfy valves DESPONIA meet the safety requirements of the pressure Equipments Directive 97/23/EC
(PED) appendix 1 for fuids of the groups 1 and 2.
DESPONIA
D1 0100 . 33 - 2AR . 4A . 2AR . E
O O OO O O O O
DESPONIA DN 2
5
3
2
4
0
5
0
6
5
8
0
1
0
0
1
2
5
1
5
0
2
0
0
2
5
0
3
0
0
3
5
0
4
0
0
4
5
0
5
0
0
6
0
0
7
0
0
8
0
0
9
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
2
0
0
1
4
0
0
D1
PN6 3
PN10 3 2
PN16 3
D3
PN10 3 2
PN16 3
D4
PN10 3 2
PN16 3
InterApp AG Tel. +41 (0)41 798 22 33
Code key:
**
Rating (Code)
*
Working pressure (Code)
O
Body type
D1 Wafer DN25-800
D3 LUG body DN25-400
D4 U-section body DN150-1400
O
Nominal diameter 0025-1400 mm
O
Working pressure
1 6 bar (special execution with reduced disc diameter)
*
10/16 bar, see table below
O
Rating
**
PN6/10/16 see table below. Other ratings on request
O
Body
1AR Cast iron GG25, Rilsan coated 250 DN250-400
1AE Cast iron GG25, Epoxy coated 70 DN450-1400
2AR Ductile iron GGG40, Rilsan coated 250 DN25-400
O
Shaft
4A Stainless steel 1.4028, AISI420
4B Stainless steel 1.4401, AISI316
O
Disc
2AR Ductile iron GGG40, Rilsan coated 250 (max.90C) DN25-700
2AC Ductile iron GGG40, Chrome coated
4C0 Stainless steel 1.4408, AISI316
4CP Stainless steel 1.4408, AISI316, polished
4CH Stainless steel 1.4408, AISI316, Halar coated min.600
4D0 Uranus B6
5C0 Alubronze G-Cu Al 10 Fe
7H0 Hastelloy C
O
Liner
E EPDM (max.95C) N Nitrile (NBR) B Butyl SV Silicone for steam
EW EPDM KTW NC Nitrile carboxylit H Hypalon SA Silicone for food industry
(max.130C) RN Natural rubber S Silicone V Viton
Other materials and white liners on request
When mounting the valve at the end of a line please note:
- Body type D3 or D4 (D4 only PN10/16 possible)
- Body material 2A (GGG40)
- Medium only for liquids, 1030C
- Max. working pressure DN25-200 10 bar
DN250-600 6 bar
DN700-1400 2,5 bar
- no water hammer !!!
please consult our document Flanges
Other executions on request !
Pressure and temperature limits of application
are dependent of the working conditions.
Body material DN 2
5
3
2
4
0
5
0
6
5
8
0
1
0
0
1
2
5
1
5
0
2
0
0
2
5
0
3
0
0
3
5
0
4
0
0
4
5
0
5
0
0
6
0
0
7
0
0
8
0
0
9
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
2
0
0
1
4
0
0
GG25 (1A) 10 bar 2
GGG40 (2A)
10 bar 2
16 bar 3
DESPONIA
25/32 110 50 30 72 19 17,0 1,4
40 130 60 33 86 19 27,0 2,0
50 135 72 43 101 19 30,0 3,0
65 150 82 46 121 19 49,0 3,6
80 160 92 46 138 19 68,5 4,0
100 180 102 52 160 19 88,5 5,5
125 195 120 56 189 19 114,5 7,5
150 210 133 56 214 19 142,0 8,6
200 240 163 60 272 25 193,5 12,7
250 280 196 68 324 32 243,5 22,2
300 315 232 78 378 32 292,5 30,8
350 330 257 78 425 40 329,5 41,5
400 365 292 102 475 40 375,5 57,2
450 400 359 114 538 65 426 95,0
500 440 397 127 595 65 477 125
600 525 467 154 695 80 572 180
700 565 518 165 800 80 663 280
800 632 562 190 908 80 780 387
DN 25/32 DN 40/50/65 DN 80/100 DN 125/150/200
DN 450-800 DN 250-400
DN 25/32 40 50 65 80 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1200 1400
kv 40 50 100 210 360 650 1050 1770 3400 5090 7360 9800 12900 16800 21700 29800 35100 45900 59300 82100 102700 170000
InterApp AG Tel. +41 (0)41 798 22 33
D1 Wafer, DN 25-800
* When using plastic stubs please check dimension H to avoid damaging of disc
Kv values m
3
/h
DESPONIA
25/32 110 50 30 72 19 17,0 1,4
40 130 60 33 86 19 27,0 2,0
50 135 72 43 117 19 30,0 3,2
65 150 82 46 130 19 49,0 4,0
80 160 88 46 188 19 68,5 6,1
100 180 102 52 219 19 88,5 8,5
125 195 116 56 248 19 114,5 10,0
150 210 128 56 274 19 142,0 11,0
200 240 161 60 332 25 193,5 19,6
250 280 199 68 402 32 243,5 28,7
300 315 234 78 472 32 292,5 41,2
350 330 258 78 520 40 329,5 55,0
400 365 290 102 584 40 375,5 75,0
DN A B4 C D4 H* J E [kg]
150 210 143 56 285 142,0 10,0 19 15,0
200 240 170 60 340 193,5 12,5 25 19,5
250 280 200 68 406 243,5 15,0 32 30,5
300 315 239 78 482 292,5 15,0 32 44,0
350 330 265 78 533 329,5 18,0 40 59,0
400 365 296 102 596 375,5 20,0 40 82,0
450 400 359 114 640 426 24,0 65 118
500 440 397 127 715 477 26,0 65 175
600 525 467 154 840 572 28,5 80 260
700 565 503 165 927 663 31,5 80 345
(750) 590 541 170 985 712 34,0 80 435
800 630 580 190 1060 780 36,5 80 510
900 695 650 203 1170 855 38,0 100 660
1000 748 696 216 1255 960 44,0 100 790
(1100) 768 738 218 1340 1055 44,0 100 850
1200 882 809 254 1485 1150 47,0 120 1180
1400 990 938 280 1680 1340 40,0 120 1350
DN E G d e f ISO a b n x y
25/32 19 O 8 - - 12 F07 90 70 4 x 9
40 19 O 8 - - 12 F07 90 70 4 x 9
50 19 O 11 - - 12 F07 90 70 4 x 9
65 19 O 11 - - 12 F07 90 70 4 x 9
80 19 O 11 - - 12 F07 90 70 4 x 9
100 19 O 11 - - 12 F07 90 70 4 x 9
125 19 O 14 - - 12 F07 90 70 4 x 9
150 19 O 14 - - 12 F07 90 70 4 x 9
200 25 O 17 - - 12 F07 90 70 4 x 9
250 32 O 22 - - 18 F10 125 102 4 x 10
300 32 O 22 - - 18 F10 125 102 4 x 10
350 40 O 22 - - 18 F12 155 125 4 x 13
400 40 O 27 - - 18 F12 155 125 4 x 13
450 65 45 14 9 25 F14 175 140 4 x 18
500 65 45 14 9 25 F14 175 140 4 x 18
600 80 70 20 12 25 F16 220 165 4 x 22
700 80 70 20 12 25 F25 300 254 8 x 18
(750) 80 70 20 12 30 F25 300 254 8 x 18
800 80 70 20 12 30 F25 300 254 8 x 18
900 100 80 22 14 30 F30 350 298 8 x 22
1000 100 80 22 14 30 F30 350 298 8 x 22
(1100) 100 80 22 14 30 F30 350 298 8 x 22
1200 120 100 28 16 30 F30 350 298 8 x 22
1400 120 120 32 18 35 F30 350 298 8 x 22
DN 450-1400 DN 25-400
InterApp AG Tel. +41 (0)41 798 22 33
D3 LUG body, DN 25-400
D4 U-section body, DN 150-1400
Top fange according to ISO 5211
DESPONIA
DN A B C (kg)
25-40 HLA.F0708.180 180 45,5 41 0,4
50-65 HLA.F0711.180 180 45,5 41 0,4
80-100 HLA.F0711.240 243 45,5 43 0,5
125-150 HLA.F0714.340 340 45,5 51 0,6
200 HLA.F0717.340 340 45,5 51 0,6
250-300 HLA.F1022.500 500 77,5 40 2,2
DN A B C (kg)
25-40 HLP.F0708.240 243 45,5 41 0,3
50-65 HLP.F0711.240 243 45,5 41 0,3
80-100 HLP.F0711.240 243 45,5 43 0,3
125-150 HLP.F0714.340 340 45,5 51 0,5
200 HLP.F0717.340 340 45,5 51 0,5
DN G H
25-40 PO.F0708.30 30 65
50-100 PO.F0711.30 30 65
125-150 PO.F0714.30 30 65
200 PO.F0717.30 30 65
DN I J
25-40 HW.F0708.200 200 52
50-100 HW.F0711.200 200 52
125-150 HW.F0714.250 250 52
HLA / HLP
InterApp AG Tel. +41 (0)41 798 22 33
Handlever (DN25-300):
Aluminium, Epoxy coated
Plumber square (DN25-200):
Handwheel (DN25-150):
Polyamide PA 6, 30% glass fbers reinforced
DESPONIA
DN A B C D E H R n* [kg]
25-40 GB232-05.F05-F0711.100(R08) 80 110,5 42,5 44,5 109 52 100 10 0,8
50-100 GB232-05.F05-F0711.100 80 110,5 42,5 44,5 109 52 100 10 0,8
125-150 GB232-05.F05-F0714.100 80 110,5 42,5 44,5 109 52 100 10 0,8
200 GB232-07.F05-F0717.160 100 133 50 58 130 58 160 9,25 1,8
250-300 GB232-10.F10-F1222.250 148 177,5 60 82,5 205 75 250 11,25 3,3
350 GB232-12.F10-F1222.315 175 218 80 91 229 88 315 10 7
400 GB232-12.F10-F1227.315 175 218 80 91 229 88 315 10 7
450 GB880N.F1445.500-SH100 200 227 86 101 305 92 500 9,5 14
500 GB1250N.F1445.400-SH100 220 258 105 110 426 100 400 13,75 22
600 GB1250N.F1665.600-SH100 220 258 105 110 446 100 600 13,75 22
700 GB1950N/HR.F2570.400-SH100 285 402,5 211 142,5 467 155 400 21 32
750 GB1950N/HR.F2570.400-SH100 285 402,5 211 142,5 467 155 400 21 32
800 GB1950N/HR.F2570.500-SH100 285 402,5 211 142,5 487 155 500 21 32
900 GB6800N/SP4.F3080.500 370 482 263 170 500 160 500 79,25 70
1000 GB6800N/SP4.F3080.500 370 482 263 170 500 160 500 79,25 70
1100 GB6800N/SP4.F3080.500 370 482 263 170 500 160 500 79,25 70
1200 GB6800N/SP4.F30100.500 370 482 263 170 500 160 500 79,25 70
1400 GB6800N/SP9.F30120.500 370 584 357 170 578 160 500 176 100
http://www.interapp.net
GB 232
GB880-6800
InterApp AG Tel. +41 (0)41 798 22 33
Gearbox:
* n = Handwheel turns ON/OFF Material:
GB232 : Aluminium, Polyurethan coated
GB880-GB6800 : Cast iron, Polyurethan coated
pmax DN25-200 ...16 bar, DN250-1400 ... 10 bar
Further documentation: - pneumatic actuators
- electric actuators
- Accessories
according separate data sheets
Important guides: - Installation guide
- Maintenance guide
- Flanges
Please consult these guides for the installation and maintenance of our butterfy valves
You can fnd most of these documents as well as the declaration of conformity and other certifcates in several langua-
ges at our homepage
InterApp AG Tel. +41 (0)41 798 22 33
CH-6343 Rotkreuz
A-1230 Wien
Via A. Gramsci 18 Fax +39 02 33 93 7200
Igarsa 40 Fax +34 (0)91 6581430
Bcsi t 100 Fax +36 (1) 250 9252
H-1034 Budapest
ventilatori industriali S.p.A.

1 of 40

E
d
i
t
i
o
n

0
1
-
2
0
0
1

r
e
v
.
0
0

Main Index
1 INTRODUCTION 4
1.1 Purpose of this manual 4
1.2 General safety symbols used 4
2 GENERAL INFORMATION 5
2.1 Basic principles and terminology used 5
2.2 Mechanical layout of centrifugal fans 6
2.2.1 Motor positions in different installation types 6
2.2.2 Fan orientation 6
2.2.3 Standard motor positions for given fan orientations 7
2.3 Mechanical layout of axial fans 8
2.3.1 Motor positions in different installation types 8
2.3.2 Flow designation 8
2.4 Fan identification 9
3 WARNINGS AND MAIN SAFETY INDICATIONS 10
3.1 Installation 10
3.2 Risks involved in incorrect handling or use 11
3.3 Other risks related to fans 12
3.3.1 Specific risks involved in transporting and installation 12
3.3.2 Specific risks involved in fan maintenance 12
4 TRANSPORT AND INSTALLATION 13
4.1 Transport and lifting 13
4.2 Storage in a warehouse 13
4.3 Lifting methods for fans 14
4.3.1 Lifting centrifugal fans in arrangement 1 14
4.3.3 Lifting double intake centrifugal fans 15
4.3.4 Lifting axial fans in arrangement 9 15
4.3.5 Lifting axial fans in arrangement 4 15
4.3.7 Lifting fans packed in crates 15
4.4 Installation 16
4.4.1 Minimum distances between components 16
4.5 General warnings for lifting and installing parts disconnected from the fan for shipping 17
4.5.1 Single intake centrifugal fans 17
4.5.2 Centrifugal fans with double intake 19
4.5.3 Axial fans 20
4.6 Installing and adjusting belt drives and final checks 21
4.7 Electrical connections 22
4.8 Connections to pipes 23

2 of 40

E
d
i
t
i
o
n

0
1
-
2
0
0
1

r
e
v
.
0
0

5 CHECKS TO BE MADE BEFORE AND AFTER STARTING 24
5.1 Preliminary checks 24
5.2 Checks to be carried out with the fan running 24
6 MALFUNCTIONS AND CAUSES 25
6.1 Centrifugal and axial fans 25
7 MAINTENANCE 27
7.1 Bearing lubrication 28
7.2 Checking pivoted roller bearings 30
7.3 Belt tension adjustment and cleaning 31
7.4 Flexible couplings 32
7.5 Checking and cleaning parts in contact with the fluid 33
8 TECHNICAL TABLES 34
8.1 ST Supports in installation types A-AL-B-BL 34
8.2 SN Supports in installation types B BL BL/B 35
8.3 Supports and bearings fitted as standard in belt driven fans 36
9 DISASSEMBLY 37
9.1 Intake nozzles 37
9.2 Housing 37
9.3 Fan rotor 38
9.4 Pulleys 38
9.5 Support 38
10 SCRAPPING THE FAN 39
11 TECHNICAL ENCLOSURES 40
11.1 Tightening torques for nuts and bolts 40
11.1.1 Tightening torques M for bolts with ISO metric thread 40

3 of 40

E
d
i
t
i
o
n

0
1
-
2
0
0
1

r
e
v
.
0
0

Index of Figures

Fig. 2.1 Centrifugal fan installation types 6
Fig. 2.2 Fan orientation 6
Fig. 2.3 Standard motor positions for given fan orientations 7
Fig. 2.4 Standard installation types with axial fans 8
Fig. 2.5 Flow designation 8
Fig. 2.6 Example of an identification plate 9
Fig. 2.7 Fan identification 9
Fig. 4.1 Example of lifting centrifugal fans in arrangement 1 14
Fig. 4.3 Example of lifting double intake centrifugal fans 15
Fig. 4.4 Example of lifting axial fans in arrangement 9 15
Fig. 4.5 Example of lifting axial fans in arrangement 4 15
Fig. 4.7 Example of lifting fans packed in crates 15
Fig. 4.8 Minimum installation distances with intake pipe 16
Fig. 4.9 Minimum installation distances with open intake 16
Fig. 4.10 Assembly of a fan in arrangement 12 18
Fig. 4.11 Assembly of a double intake centrifugal fan 19
Fig. 4.12 Assembly of an axial fan 20
Fig. 4.13 Electrical connection layouts for one and two-speed electric motors 22
Fig. 4.14 Minimum installation distances with intake pipe 23
Fig. 4.15 Minimum installation distances with open intake 23
Fig. 7.1 Checking the radial free play of the bearings 30
Fig. 7.2 Checking the belt tension 31
Fig. 7.3 Setting the belt tension 31
Fig. 7.4 Axial slipping 32
Fig. 7.5 Angular misalignment 32
Fig. 7.6 Parallel misalignment 32
Fig. 8.1 ST Supports in installation types A-AL-B-BL 34
Fig. 8.2 SN Supports in installation types B BL BL/B 35

Index of Tables

Table 7.1 Types of support and bearing and relative re-lubrication intervals and amounts of grease
used for
til t i i d t i li S A
fans 29
Table 7.2 Checking the radial free play of the bearings 30
Table 7.3 Setting the belt tension: test load and deflection 31
Table 7.4 Technical specifications of elastic couplings 32
Table 8.1 ST Supports in installation types A-AL-B-BL 34
Table 8.2 SN Supports in installation types B BL BL/B 35
Table 8.3 Supports and bearings fitted as standard in belt driven fans 36


4 of 40

E
d
i
t
i
o
n

0
1
-
2
0
0
1

r
e
v
.
0
0

1 INTRODUCTION

1.1 Purpose of this manual
This manual contains instructions and warnings
and constitutes the documentation that must be
supplied and kept together with the product,
otherwise the product would be lacking in one of
its fundamental safety requisites.
The manual must be kept with care and made
available to all persons involved in operating the
equipment.
The warnings are intended to ensure the safety of
persons exposed to the risks inherent in the
operation and handling of this equipment.
The instructions in this manual describe how to
use the fan correctly as intended by the
manufacturer.

IMPORTANT: The safety measures
adopted for using the fan must also
be tailored to suit the specific
applications for which the fan will be
used.
The safety measures taken differ
depending on the type of fan
installation, as specified in
paragraph 3.1.
Therefore, the information in this
manual is indispensable for the
appropriate and hazard-free use of
the fan

This manual may not, even in part, be copied,
reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any
electronic, mechanical, photographic or any other
means without the express permission of
.

The
Technical Department is
at your complete service to clarify any
query.

1.2 General safety symbols used
In this Manual, certain particularly important
pieces of information may be preceded by one of
the following symbols:

DANGER: This symbol indicates
possible causes of personal injury.

DANGER: Electrified components.

IMPORTANT: This symbol indicates
particularly important information of
general interest

! !
i
i
! !
i

5 of 40

E
d
i
t
i
o
n

0
1
-
2
0
0
1

r
e
v
.
0
0

2 GENERAL INFORMATION

2.1 Basic principles and terminology
used
ventilatori industriali S.p.A. fans can be divided into the following
categories:
Radial (or centrifugal) fans: these fans are so
called because the fluid enters the fan axially
and exits it radially. The fan blades can have
the following different configurations: negative
(the rear, or convex face of the blade works on
the fluid), positive (the front, or concave face of
the blade works on the fluid), radial (straight,
the blade can work on the fluid with the same
efficiency with its front and its rear face. Neither
side of the blade has particular reinforcement);
Axial fans: these fans are so called because
the fluid enters the fan radially and exits it
axially. The fan blades are in aluminium and
have a wing type profile.
The basic dimensions that determine a fans
characteristics are as follows:
Volumetric flow rate: this is the volume of fluid
passing through the fan in a certain length
of time: per second (m3/s), per minute
(m3/min), or per hour (m3/h);
Static pressure: this is the force exerted by the
fan blade to overcome the resistance that the
fluid encounters as it flows through a circuit
(measure in mm WC or Pascal=Pa);
Dynamic pressure: this is the force that the fluid
has due to the kinetic energy conferred to it by
the rotating fan rotor as it exits the fan outlet
(measured in mm WC or Pa);
Total pressure: this is the algebraic sum of the
static pressure and the dynamic pressure
(measured in mm WC or Pa);
RPM: this is the speed of the fan rotor in
revolutions per minute;
Efficiency: this is the ratio, expressed as a
percentage, between the amount of energy that
the fan confers to the fluid and the energy
supplied to the fan rotor by the motor. This
value depends on the fan rotor configuration
and is dimensionless;
Power absorption: this is the power required
(supplied by the motor) for the fan to work. It is
expressed in kW;
Nominal motor power: this is the nominal power
that the motor is able to supply. This value
must always be greater than the power
absorption value for the fan, and is expressed
in kW;
Sound pressure level: this is the energy
transmitted into the outer ear, which generates
vibrations in the eardrum: in other words, this is
the noise level of the fan and is measured on
the decibel A scale (this scale evaluates the
effects of sound on the human ear in relation to
its frequency).

6 of 40

E
d
i
t
i
o
n

0
1
-
2
0
0
1

r
e
v
.
0
0

2.2 Mechanical layout of centrifugal
fans
2.2.1 Motor positions in different installation
types

Arrangement type 1
Belt drive. Overhanging fan
rotor fitted onto the shaft. Shaft
supports mounted on the frame
outside the air flow. Maximum
air temperature, 60C without
cooling fan, 300C with cooling.

Arrangement type 4
Direct drive. Fan rotor fitted
directly onto the motor shaft.
Motor supported by the frame.
Maximum air temperature,
60C. Up to 150C for special
applications.

Arrangement type 8
Flexible coupling drive.
Overhanging fan rotor fitted onto
the shaft. Shaft supports and
motor mounted on the frame
outside the air flow. Maximum
air temperature, 60C without

Arrangement type 9
Belt drive. This layout is the
same as installation type 1, but
has the motor supported at the
side of the frame. Maximum air
temperature, 60C without

Arrangement type 12
Belt drive. This layout is the
same as installation type 1, but
the fan and motor are supported
by the machine foundation.
Maximum air temperature, 60C
without cooling fan, 300C with
cooling.

Plan view showing
motor position
designation with belt
drive.
(positions X and Y are
only possible if special
equipment is fitted)

Fig. 2.1 Centrifugal fan installation types

2.2.2 Fan orientation
Centrifugal fans can be built in 16 different
orientations (8 rotated clockwise, RD, and 8
rotated anticlockwise, LG).
The orientation of a fan is expressed as seen from
the transmission side.

Orientations RD, LG 180 and 225 are only
possible if special mechanical modifications are
made.

Fig. 2.2 Fan orientation

CLOCKWISE
ROTATED FANS
RD
ANTICLOCKWISE
ROTATED FANS
LG

7 of 40

E
d
i
t
i
o
n

0
1
-
2
0
0
1

r
e
v
.
0
0

2.2.3 Standard motor positions for given fan
orientations
ventilatori industriali S.p.A. uses the standard motor positions
shown in Fig. 2.3; for space reasons, the DFR-
DFS series fits motors in position W with a fan
orientation of LG90-LG135 and fits motors in
position Z with a fan orientation of RD90 RD135.

Fig. 2.3 Standard motor positions for given fan orientations

ANTICLOCKWISE
ROTATED FANS
LG
CLOCKWISE
ROTATED FANS
RD

8 of 40

E
d
i
t
i
o
n

0
1
-
2
0
0
1

r
e
v
.
0
0

2.3 Mechanical layout of axial fans
2.3.1 Motor positions in different installation
types

ARRANGEMENT TYPE 1 ARRANGEMENT TYPE 4

ARRANGEMENT TYPE 9 ARRANGEMENT TYPE 12

Standard position motor at 0
Fig. 2.4 Standard arrangement types with axial fans

2.3.2 Flow designation

This figure refers to arrangement type 4,
but also applies to all other installation
types:

A = Flow from the motor towards the
fan rotor
B = Flow from the fan rotor towards the
motor
U = Flow moving upwards
D = Flow moving downwards

Fig. 2.5 Flow designation

0
45
90
135
180
225
270
315

9 of 40

E
d
i
t
i
o
n

0
1
-
2
0
0
1

r
e
v
.
0
0

2.4 Fan identification
The identification plate is the only means of
identifying the fan that is recognised by the
manufacturer. This plate must be kept in good
condition over time and no modifications may be
made to it. Fig. 2.6 shows the plate fitted to the
fan.

Via Marchetti, 28 - 36071 Arzignano
VICENZA-ITALY
Tel. +39 0444 471100 Fax +39 0444 471105
e-mail: flliferrari@ferrariventilatori.it

Fig. 2.6 Example of an identification plate

Via Marchetti, 28 - 36071 Arzignano
VICENZA-ITALY
Tel. +39 0444 471100 Fax +39 0444 471105
e-mail: flliferrari@ferrariventilatori.it

F
i
g
.

2
.
7

F
a
n

i
d
e
n
t
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n

Y
e
a
r

o
f

m
a
n
u
f
a
c
t
u
r
e

2
0
0
0

0
0
1
3
4
6
0
G
R
.

1
3
2
.
.
.
.
7
,
5
0

k
W
.
.
.
.
4

P
H
A
S
E
.
.
.
.
5
0

H
z

E
S
O
9
0
5
F
0
4
A
A
0
2

E
L
V
E
.
.
.
.
E
S
.
.
.
.

9
0
5
/
F
.
.
.
.

4
A
/
A
.
.
.
.

1
3
2
M
A

til
t
ii
d
t
i
liS
A
Client
Code (optional)
tiltiidtiliSA Client Contract Number (o pt
i
o
n
a
l
) tiltiidtiliSA
Client Item
N (optional)
Type and
specifications of
motor installed
Flow capacity
(optional)
T
o
t
a
l

f
a
n

p
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
(
o
p
t
i
o
n
a
l
)

Serial number
Fan identification
code
This specifies the
type of coupling to
the motor (optional)
Fan series
Fan size
Installation/flow
type Size of
motor
installed

10 of 40

E
d
i
t
i
o
n

0
1
-
2
0
0
1

r
e
v
.
0
0

3 WARNINGS AND MAIN SAFETY
INDICATIONS

3.1 Installation

There are four possible installation
types, in compliance with UNI 10615
specifications:
- Type A: open intake and outlet;
- Type B: open intake and outlet
connected to a pipe;
- Type C: intake connected to a
pipe and open outlet;
- Type D: intake and outlet
connected to a pipe.

Clearly ventilatori industriali S.p.A. cannot be aware of which of
these four installation types will be used by
the user. Therefore, the installer or end client
themselves must analyse the risks involved
for the chosen installation type used in the
specific application.
Depending on the applications that the client
intends to use the fan for in the factory and on the
type of installation chosen, the following safety
shields must be fitted:
- Type A installation: fixed shields at the intake
and outlet;
- Type B installation: shield fitted only at the
outlet;
- Type C installation: shield fitted only at the
intake;
- Type D installation: no shield at either the
intake or outlet.

The user or the installer of the fan must ensure
that adequate shielding is fitted to the pipe
system, at the points where it connects to the
working pipes, as follows:
- Type A installation: no shield necessary;
- Type B installation: shield fitted to the outlet
pipe;
- Type C installation: shield fitted to the intake
pipe;
- Type D installation D: shields fitted to the
intake and outlet pipes.
i

11 of 40

E
d
i
t
i
o
n

0
1
-
2
0
0
1

r
e
v
.
0
0

The shielding must be constructed to impede
access to the parts of the fan that could cause
injury. It must be robustly built enough to stand
the vibrations and stress caused by the machine
and by environmental conditions. It must be
securely fixed in position by devices that will not
become loosened by vibrations and that cannot
be removed without the use of tools.
It is, in any case, the person installing the fan who
is responsible for ensuring that adequate
measures have been taken to prevent accidental
contact with the fans moving parts.
The installer and the user must also take into
account other types of risks present, in particular
those caused by foreign matter entering the fan
and the aspiration of explosive, inflammable or
toxic gases at high temperatures.
The user must also bear in mind the risks inherent
in maintenance work, which must always be
carried out in conditions of the utmost safety, and
with the fan separated from the motor or isolated
using suitable equipment.

Once the installer and/or user has decided
which installation type is to be used and all
the above procedures have been applied, the
machine can now be considered a complete
machine as described by machine use
regulations. An overall risk evaluation
must be made and a declaration of
compliance with enclosure IIA of EC directive
98/37/CE must be drawn up.

3.2 Risks involved in incorrect
handling or use
Never, for any reason whatsoever, disable,
remove, modify or render inoperative in any
other way any of the safety, protective or
control devices of any single component or of
the fan itself.
Never place hands, arms or any other part of
the body near any moving part.
Never extend any part of the body past the
limits of the safety barriers. Do not use any
means that will increase normal accessibility
to the fan components.
Never use the fan in atmospheres where
there is a risk of explosion.
Unauthorised operators must not attempt to
rectify any malfunction of the fan and/or
modify the functional characteristics or
installation type.
After any unprogrammed maintenance
operation that required the removal of shields,
barriers or any other protective device, before
restarting the fan ensure that all these
components have been refitted and are fully
functional.
All protective and safety devices must be kept
in perfect working order at all times. All
indicative and warning plates fixed to the fan
must also be kept in perfect condition at all
times and must never be removed or moved
from their original position.
When troubleshooting for the cause of any
malfunction of the fan, ensure that all
precautions described in this manual have
been taken to prevent personal injury and/or
damage to property.
Remember to tighten every screw, bolt and
lock ring of every component subject to
adjustment or maintenance.
Before starting the fan, ensure that all safety
devices have been correctly installed and are
in perfect working order; if the above is not the
case, do not start the fan and inform the head
of safety or department manager immediately.
The operator must be equipped with Personal
protection Equipments in accordance with
current legislation; the use of bulky clothing
and accessories (ties, loose sleeves, etc.) is
prohibited.

12 of 40

E
d
i
t
i
o
n

0
1
-
2
0
0
1

r
e
v
.
0
0

3.3 Other risks related to fans

The following is a list of specific hazards related to
the fans mechanical characteristics.

A person may receive injuries as a
result of:
a) becoming caught up between a
moving part and a stationary part,
for example, between a fan rotor and
the fan housing or any other
stationary fan component;
b) becoming caught up between two
moving parts, for example, between
a belt and a pulley;
c) suction of a part of the body into
the fan and subsequent contact with
the shaft or rotor;
d) contact with a moving part, such
as the rotor;
e) an object becoming sucked into
the intake of the fan and expelled at
high speed from the outlet of the fan;
f) contact with surfaces of the fan at
dangerous temperatures, for
example, temperatures below -20 C
or above +50 C;
g) hazards caused by the overspeed
of a fan component, which can lead
to the breakage of parts of the
machine;
h) the aspiration of air at
temperatures above the specified
operating range, which can lead to
the deformation and breakage of the
housing.

3.3.1 Specific risks involved in transporting
and installation
Before installation, the user must prepare a
perfectly level surface onto which the fan will
be mounted. If this surface is not perfectly
level, this can cause abnormal vibrations in
the fan. This can, over time, lead to the
deformation and/or breakage of fan
components with the subsequent expulsion at
speed of broken parts: these expelled parts
can cause even fatal injuries to any persons
exposed.
Before installation, the user must also prepare
adequate connections to earth for the fan
case or for the fan structure to prevent the
build-up of electrostatic charges.

All installed protective devices must remain
fixed to the fan together with their respective
fixings (screws, bolts, etc.). The removal of
one or more fixing may compromise the
functionality and tightness of the safety shield.
In its standard form, the fan is not intended for
use in a potentially explosive environment.
The installation location of the fan must be
kept clean at all times. Any eventual oil or
water spillages not caused by the fan must be
removed immediately.
The minimum installation distances specified
in the manual must always be respected to
ensure correct functionality without any further
hazards. The incorrect positioning of a
component can compromise the functionality
of the fan.

3.3.2 Specific risks involved in fan
maintenance
During maintenance and cleaning of the fan
rotor, be particular careful of the rotor.
This can lead to parts of the body becoming
trapped and seriously injured between
the rotor itself and fixed parts of the fan
housing.
Even when the fan is disconnected from the
power supply, the rotating parts can still turn
due to any air movement through the fan. This
air flow may be natural or may be caused by
the current induced by another fan installed
elsewhere in the connected tubing system.
This can also lead to parts of the body
becoming trapped and seriously injured
between the rotor itself and fixed parts of the
fan housing.
A fan maintenance program must be drawn
up and followed to prevent the mechanical
failure or breakage due to wear or insufficient
maintenance.

DANGER: IT IS ABSOLUTELY
FORBIDDEN TO:
Carry out any maintenance work
without first ensuring that the fan
rotor is effectively stationary.
Start any maintenance work on
the fan (including lubrication)
without first disconnecting the
fan from the mains power
supply.
Clean the fan while it is running.
Open any shield or inspection
hatch while the fan is running.
! !
! !

13 of 40

E
d
i
t
i
o
n

0
1
-
2
0
0
1

r
e
v
.
0
0

4 TRANSPORT AND INSTALLATION

Lifting and handling the fan may create
hazards for any persons in the vicinity; it is
therefore important to follow the indications given
by ventilatori industriali S.p.A. and to use suitable equipment.
All installation and assembly work must be carried
out only by specialised technicians.

4.1 Transport and lifting

Therefore, all operations involving the lifting and
handling of the fan must be carried out with
the utmost caution, avoiding any knocks that
could compromise the functionality or damage the
fan components.
Use only the specific lifting points on the fan and
ensure that the fans weight is distributed evenly.

THE USER IS RESPONSIBLE FOR THE
SELECTION OF EQUIPMENT, ROPES, BELTS
AND CHAINS BEST SUITED FOR BOTH LOAD
AND FUNCTIONALITY.

4.2 Storage in a warehouse
Should it be necessary to store the fan in a
warehouse, it must be protected from atmospheric
conditions, humidity, dust and any harmful
substances present in the air.
We recommend that you periodically check that
the fan is in a good condition and turn the fan
rotor manually approximately once a month to
prevent the deformation of its bearings.

! !

14 of 40

E
d
i
t
i
o
n

0
1
-
2
0
0
1

r
e
v
.
0
0

4.3 Lifting methods for fans
4.3.1 Lifting centrifugal fans in arrangement 1

Fans in installation type 1 are not fitted with a
motor, To lift these fans, use the specific lifting
holes in the fan structure itself (as shown Fig. 4.1)

Fig. 4.1 Example of lifting centrifugal fans in arrangement 1


Fans in installation type 4 are equipped with a
motor. When lifting these fans, as well as using
the specific holes in fan structure, the eyebolt for
lifting the motor must also be used (as shown Fig.
4.2).

Fig. 4.2 Example of lifting centrifugal fans in arrangement 4


15 of 40

E
d
i
t
i
o
n

0
1
-
2
0
0
1

r
e
v
.
0
0

4.3.3 Lifting double intake centrifugal fans

Fig. 4.3 Example of lifting double intake
centrifugal fans
4.3.4 Lifting axial fans in arrangement 9

Fig. 4.4 Example of lifting axial fans in arrangement 9

4.3.5 Lifting axial fans in arrangement 4

Fig. 4.5 Example of lifting axial fans in arrangement 4


Fig. 4.6 Example of lifting centrifugal fans in
arrangement 8
4.3.7 Lifting fans packed in crates
The weight of the crate is indicated on its side.

Fig. 4.7 Example of lifting fans packed in crates

THE EXAMPLES GIVEN ABOVE ARE
GENERIC EXAMPLES, AS IT IS IMPOSSIBLE
TO KNOW IN ADVANCE EVERY POSSIBLE
CONFIGURATION FOR LIFTING A
FAN.

ANY OTHER LIFTING POINT NOT SHOWN
ABOVE IS INDICATED BY THIS SYMBOL.

! !

16 of 40

E
d
i
t
i
o
n

0
1
-
2
0
0
1

r
e
v
.
0
0

4.4 Installation
The fan does not require the preparation of a
special machine bed for its installation. A well-
levelled concrete surface that can support the
weight of the fan is sufficient.

ALWAYS USE ANTI-VIBRATION SUPPORTS
AND COUPLINGS TO PREVENT THE
TRANSMISSION OF VIBRATIONS WHILE THE
FAN IS RUNNING.

The support base must be perfectly level and flat
to prevent any torsional effects or misalignment of
the supports: if necessary, install metal shims
between the machine base and the concrete
surface to ensure a perfect fit. Use the factory-
fitted anchoring points and take care not to deform
the fan structure while tightening bolts.
All connecting tubing must be supported
separately and must be axially aligned with the
fans intake and outlet nozzles, to prevent any
deformation occurring while tightening the bolts.

ALL INSTALLATION WORK MUST ONLY BE
CARRIED OUT BY QUALIFIED AND
AUTHORISED PERSONNEL USING SUITABLE
EQUIPMENT

4.4.1 Minimum distances between
components
If the available space permits, in installations
where the intake is connected to a pipe, we
recommend fitting a straight length of pipe with a
length approximately 2.5 times the diameter of the
fan rotor, to guarantee correct air flow into the
intake.

Fig. 4.8 Minimum installation distances with intake
pipe

With installations with an open air intake, we
recommend leaving a distance equal to
approximately 1.5 times the diameter of the fan
rotor between the fain intake and the nearest wall
or machine.

Fig. 4.9 Minimum installation distances with open
intake

! !
i

17 of 40

E
d
i
t
i
o
n

0
1
-
2
0
0
1

r
e
v
.
0
0

4.5 General warnings for lifting and
installing parts disconnected from
the fan for shipping

For transport purposes, the fan may be delivered
with a number of its components disconnected.

WARNING: ALL TRANSPORT, INSTALLATION
AND ASSEMBLY OPERATIONS MUST ONLY
BE CARRIED OUT BY QUALIFIED
PERSONNEL.
WARNING: DISCONNECTED OR
DISASSEMBLED COMPONENTS MUST ONLY
BE HANDLED AND HANDLED USING
SUITABLE TRANSPORT EQUIPMENT

USUALLY, NO SPECIAL OR DEDICATED
EQUIPMENT IS REQUIRED FOR LIFTING AND
REFITTING THE FAN COMPONENTS.

SHOULD THE INSTALLATION OF A
COMPONENT REQUIRE A SPECIAL
PROCEDURE,
WILL SUPPLY THE
SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION NEEDED
FOR A CORRECT INSTALLATION.

4.5.1 Single intake centrifugal fans
For fans in installation types 1-8-9-12, which are
supplied disassembled in two or more parts, carry
out the following procedures (the numbers given
refer to Fig. 4.10):

STEP 1: Positioning the housing [1] (or
positioning the lower part of the housing if it has
been disassembed into two or more parts).

The housing must be positioned correctly on the
concrete surface so that tightening its fixing bolts
will not cause tension o deformation. If necessary,
fit shims at the fixing points.

STEP 2: Positioning the frame [2] (where the
frame is supplied dismounted from the housing).
Proceed as described in step 1.

STEP 3: Positioning the supports [3].
fans are fitted with one of the following
types of support:
Single-block construction ST supports, with ball
and/or roller bearings (see Table 8.1 ST-Supports
in installation types A-AL-B-BL, on page 34).

SN type upright supports with self-aligning ball
and/or roller bearings (see Table 8.1 "SN
Supports in installation types BBLBL/B", on
page 35).

While installing the bearings on the shaft, we
recommend that you follow the guidelines given
below:
When installing upright supports with ball or roller
bearings, fit the bearings into position on the shaft
without securing them.
Position the lower part of the support on the frame
and fit the securing bolts without tightening them.
Position the shaft so that the bearing fits into its
seating in the support. Secure the bearing and
check the free play against the values given in
Table 7.2 "Checking the radial free play of the
bearings" while securing the conical bushings.
The bearing caps in upright supports are not
interchangeable. Finally, secure the support to
the frame by tightening the bolts.
The support must be positioned so that the shaft
can be subsequently levelled and so that the rotor
position can be set at the right distance from the
nozzle (see step 7).

STEP 4: Fitting the fan rotor onto the shaft [4].
Ensure that all the mating surfaces are free of any
or burrs or imperfections. If necessary, remove
with a fine file or an abrasive cloth. Position the
key into the special slot and lubricate the shaft
with a light layer of grease. Fit the rotor onto the
shaft, ensuring that it is kept perpendicular to
the motor shaft or support centre line. It is of
vital importance that no resistance should be
encountered during this operation and the
rotor must be fixed in place by the action of
the securing screw alone. Do not tighten the
securing screw in the rotor hub completely until
final alignment has been performed.
STEP 5: Completion of assembly of the
housing (only where the housing was supplied in
more than one piece).
This is carried out after fitting the rotor. Spread
adhesive on the mating surfaces and fit the
sealing cord (supplied with the fan). Position all
the components of the housing and tighten all the
bolts.

WHEN PUTTING THE COMPONENTS INTO
POSITION, TAKE CARE NOT TO KNOCK THE
ROTOR, AS THIS COULD COMPROMISE ITS
BALANCE.

i
! !
! !
i

18 of 40

E
d
i
t
i
o
n

0
1
-
2
0
0
1

r
e
v
.
0
0

STEP 6: Fitting the intake nozzle [5] (only for
fans fitted with one).
The nozzle must be secured between the side of
the housing and the intake pipe flange. It can be
moved horizontally and vertically to align it
perfectly with the rotor.

Tighten the bolts only after the nozzle has been
correctly aligned with the rotor and after turning
the rotor manually to ensure that there is no
contact between the two components. With fans
with separate frames for high temperature
operation (over 300 C), the free play between the
lower part of the nozzle and the counterdisc of the
rotor must be kept as low as possible.
On FR, FS and DFR series fans with a two-part
housing, if the nozzle has been fitted directly by
ventilatori industriali S.p.A. , once it is centered, Allen reference
screws are installed to maintain the original
centered position during any subsequent
disassembly and reassembly.

STEP 7: Levelling the shaft
This operation must be carried out with all bolts
tightened completely. Check that the shaft is
perpendicular relative to the housing and that it is
level. Check that distance between the rotor and
the nozzle is exactly correct and remains
constant. The exact position is achieved by lifting
and shifting the supports slightly. All the bearings
are self-aligning, however, to ensure perfect fan
operation and that the gaskets seal properly, the
shaft must be perfectly aligned in its seats in
upright supports.

STEP 8: Fitting and tensioning pulleys and
belts [6] (Only for installation types 1, 9 and 12,
see Fig. 4.10 and see section 7.3 for tensioning
procedure).

Fig. 4.10 Assembly of a fan in arrangement type 12


19 of 40

E
d
i
t
i
o
n

0
1
-
2
0
0
1

r
e
v
.
0
0

4.5.2 Centrifugal fans with double intake

To install fans in installation type 3D, proceed as
follows:

STEP 1: Positioning the housing [1] (or
positioning the lower part of the housing if it has
been disassembed into two or more parts).
Proceed as described in step 1 for the installation
of single intake centrifugal fans.

STEP 2: Completion of assembly of the
housing (only where the housing was supplied in
more than one piece).
See step 5 in the previous description.

STEP 3: Positioning the nozzle [6] and the
support holder drum [7].
Install the above components on the transmission
side.

STEP 4: Positioning the supports [3]
This installation type is always fitted with SN type
upright supports (follow the indications given in
step 3 of the installation of single intake
centrifugal fans).

STEP 5: Installation of the shaft [8].
Fit the shaft with the rotor already installed onto it
into the housing.

STEP 6: Positioning the nozzle [9] and the
support holder drum [10].
Install the above components on the side opposite
the transmission.

STEP 7: Levelling the shaft.
Proceed as described in step 7 for the installation
of single intake centrifugal fans.

belts [11] (Only for installation types 3D and 11D,
see Fig. 4.11 and see section 7.3 for tensioning
procedure).

Fig. 4.11 Assembly of a double intake centrifugal fan


20 of 40

E
d
i
t
i
o
n

0
1
-
2
0
0
1

r
e
v
.
0
0

4.5.3 Axial fans

STEP 1: Positioning the motor [1]

STEP 2: Positioning the support [2] (only for
installation types 9 and 12).
Belt driven axial ventilatori industriali S.p.A. fans are all fitted with
mono-block construction ST supports (see Table
8.1 "ST-Supports in installation types A-AL-B-
BL"). The indications for installation are the same
as those given for single intake centrifugal fans
(see step 3).

belts [4] (Only for installation types 9 and 12, see
section 7.3 for tensioning procedure).

STEP 4: Fitting the rotor [3] onto the shaft
Check that the rotor is coaxially aligned with the
drum. If necessary, fit the compensator shims.
Tighten the securing nuts completely.

Fig. 4.12 Assembly of an axial fan


21 of 40

E
d
i
t
i
o
n

0
1
-
2
0
0
1

r
e
v
.
0
0

4.6 Installing and adjusting belt
drives and final checks

If the fan is fitted with V-belt drive, install the
transmission as follows:
Clean the conical components and the hole in the
bushing carefully before fitting into the pulley.
Fit the bushing into the pulley, ensure that the
threaded half-holes in the pulley match up with the
non-threaded half-holes in the bushing.
Hand-tighten only the screws.
Fit the whole unit onto the shaft, after having
cleaned it thoRoughly.
Position the pulleys and check their alignment
with a ruler.
Secure the unit tightening all screws diagonally.
Fit the belts.
Do not use a lever to force the belt into place, as
this could break the belts internal reinforcing
fibres.
Before tensioning the belt, mark off a known
length along the tensioned side (e.g. 100 mm).
Then tension the belt gradually while turning the
transmission (as described in section 7.3 "Belt
tension adjustment and cleaning") until the belt
has been extended by:
0.8% with uniform torque;
1% with irregular torque.

EXCESSIVE BELT TENSION CAN DAMAGE
THE BEARINGS AND LEAD TO THE
BREAKAGE OF THE SHAFT.

With flexible coupling type transmissions, the
alignment must be checked before the fan is run,
as the frame may have been subjected to
distorsion due to transport or loosening of the
foundation bolts.

i

22 of 40

E
d
i
t
i
o
n

0
1
-
2
0
0
1

r
e
v
.
0
0

4.7 Electrical connections

The fans power supply line must have a
sufficiently high power rating.
Connection to tha mains power grid must only be
carried out by qualified personnel. Also, the client
is responsible for the entire electrical system up to
motor terminal board.
We remind you of the importance of installing a
safe connection to earth for the fan.
The earth connection system must comply with
legislation in effect in the country of installation
and must be periodically checked by qualified
personnel.

Make the connection to earth before any other
connection.
Check that the connection layout (see Fig. 4.13) is
suited to the mains power voltage.
Usually, standard electric motors can run in both
directions indifferently. To invert the direction of
rotation, simply swap over any two power cables
directly on the terminal board.
The client must also install an electrical
disconnecting device near the fan so that
maintenance personnel can have direct control
over the power supply to the fan.

CAUTION: THE CLIENT AND/OR THE
INSTALLER OF THE ELECTRIC SYSTEM IS
RESPONSIBLE FOR CHOOSING THE
EQUIPMENT AND CABLES USED FOR
CONNECTING THE FAN ELECTRICALLY,
BASED ON THE DIMENSIONS OF THE MOTOR
INSTALLED AND THE CHARACTERISTICS OF
THE MAINS POWER SUPPLY.

All work performed on the electrical system must
only be carried out with the fan at rest and
electrically disconnected from the mains.
Before installing/starting up, ensure that the
information on the identification plate on the motor
is compatible with the mains power supply.

Delta connections

Delta connection with a single-
speed motor
Connection for high speed operation with
single winding in a Dahlander or PAM type
connection
Connection for high speed operation with
two separate windings
Star connections

Star connection for single-
speed motor
Connection for low speed operation with
single winding in a Dahlander or PAM type
connection
Connection for low speed operation with
two separate windings
Fig. 4.13 Electrical connection layouts for one and two-speed electric motors

! !

23 of 40

E
d
i
t
i
o
n

0
1
-
2
0
0
1

r
e
v
.
0
0

4.8 Connections to pipes

Connections between the fan and pipes must be
made ensuring that all components are correctly
aligned and that there are no obstructions in the
tubing caused by gaskets or flexible parts. The
weight of the tubing must not be supported by the
fan and care must be taken not to deform any part
of the fan during tightening of the connections to
the pipes.
If the available space permits, in installations
where the intake is connected to a pipe, we
recommend fitting a straight length of pipe with a
length approximately 2.5 times the diameter of the
fan rotor, to guarantee correct air flow into the
intake.

Fig. 4.14 Minimum installation distances with
intake pipe

With installations with an open air intake, we
recommend leaving a distance equal to
approximately 1.5 times the diameter of the fan
rotor between the fain intake and the nearest wall
or machine.

Fig. 4.15 Minimum installation distances with open
intake

24 of 40

E
d
i
t
i
o
n

0
1
-
2
0
0
1

r
e
v
.
0
0

5 CHECKS TO BE MADE BEFORE
AND AFTER STARTING

5.1 Preliminary checks

PRELIMINARY CHECKS MUST ONLY BE
PERFORMED WITH THE FAN AT REST AND
DISCONNECTED FROM THE POWER SUPPLY
When starting the fan for the first time, the
following preliminary checks are necessary:
Check that all bolts are correctly tightened
(rotor, supports, foundation bolts,
transmission components).
Check the lubrication of the fan and motor
bearings; if necessary, regrease (see section
7 Maintenance).
Check that all rotating parts can turn freely.
Check that there are not foreign objects inside
the fan.
Check that the fan turns in the correct
direction: power the motor for a brief moment
to see if it turns in correct direction indicated
by the arrow on the fan housing; if necessary,
invert the direction of rotation (see Electrical
connections).
You may now start the fan. With centrifugal fans,
close off the air intake partially to reduce the
power peak at start-up and the motor starting
time. Axial fans must never be run with completely
closed nozzles.

5.2 Checks to be carried out with the
fan running
Check that the power absorption does not exceed
the value indicated on the motor identification
plate, if it does, stop the fan immediately and
contact the manufacturer.
The fan must run without excessive vibration and
noise.
Check, with the fan at rest and at an outside air
temperature of 20C, that the bearings do not
exceed the maximum operating temperature
(maximum bearing temperature 70C). During the
first few hours of operation, it is normal for the
bearings to reach slightly higher temperatures, as
long as they later stabilise at a lower value. In the
event of overheating of the bearings, contact the
technical assistance department.
After 3-4 operating hours, with the fan at rest and
disconnected from the power supply, check again
that all bolts are correctly tightened, the bearing
temperature, and, with belt driven fans, the
temperature and tension of the belts.

! !

25 of 40

E
d
i
t
i
o
n

0
1
-
2
0
0
1

r
e
v
.
0
0

6 MALFUNCTIONS AND CAUSES

6.1 Centrifugal and axial fans
The following table lists the main problems
that you may encounter using a fan. For
problems that are not common to both types
of fan, we have specified whether it is
specific to centrifugal or axial fans.

PROBLEM REASON CAUSE
Power absorption much lower
than nominal value
Insufficient air flow
(centrifugal fans only)
Rotational speed too low
Nozzle or tubing partially
obstructed (centrifugal fans
only)
Fan rotor partially obstructed
Pressure resistance offered by
the system higher than the
design value (centrifugal fans
only)
Fluid density higher than the
design value
Inverted direction of rotation
High power absorption
Excessive air flow
Excessive rotational speed
Pressure resistance offered by
the system lower than the
design value (centrifugal fans
only)
Fluid density higher than the
design value
High power absorption
Air flow already rotating in the
opposite direction to the fan
rotation direction
Motor power supply voltage
lower than the value indicated
on the identification plate
Faults in the motor windings
Air flow value lower than the
design value (axial fans only)
Insufficient pressure
Rotational speed too low
Fluid density lower than the
design value
Inverted direction of rotation
(axial fans only)
Air flow value higher than the
design value (axial fans only)

26 of 40

E
d
i
t
i
o
n

0
1
-
2
0
0
1

r
e
v
.
0
0

PROBLEM REASON CAUSE
Fluctuating fan operation Unstable air flow
Low air flow
Fluctuations in air flow due to
fans working in parallel
Vortices in the air induced by
equipment near the air intake
Vibrations Fluctuating fan operation (see previous cause)
Vibrations Unbalanced rotating components
Fan rotor wear
Deposits on the fan rotor
Vibrations Mechanical malfunction or defects
Contact between moving and
stationary components
Intrinsic fault in the bearings
Malfunction of the bearings
due to unbalanced rotor or
excessive belt tension
Excessive noise
Contact between moving and
stationary components
Vibrations
Fluctuating fan operation
Electromagnetic fault in motor
Orifices or sharp angles in
tubing


27 of 40

E
d
i
t
i
o
n

0
1
-
2
0
0
1

r
e
v
.
0
0

7 MAINTENANCE

Read this section carefully before starting any
maintenance work on the fan: these indications
will ensure safer working conditions for the
personnel involved and more reliable results of
the maintenance work carried out.
Safety procedures adopted during fan
maintenance must take into account the following:
Maintenance and lubrication operations must
only be carried out by qualified and expert
personnel, authorised by the factory technical
management department in accordance with
safety directives and regulations and using
only suitable tools, equipments and materials
for the job.
While performing maintenance work, all
personnel involved must wear appropriate
clothing, such as tight fitting work overalls and
accident prevention shoes. Loose fitting
clothes or clothes with hanging parts must be
avoided at all costs.
During maintenance, cordon off the fan and
place signs around the fan indicating FAN
UNDERGOING MAINTENANCE

During any maintenance procedure, the fan
must be:
disconnected and insulated from the
electric power supply;
disconnected from elastic coupling to
the motor, if fitted;
disconnected from the drive belts by
removing the belts from the pulleys,
where fitted.

The head of maintenance must set up a team
made up of persons capable working in a
coordinated fashion and ensuring the utmost
safety of those surrounding them. All persons
involved in maintenance must be in constant
visual contact among themselves to be able to
warn each other of any hazards present.

C A U T I O N : A N Y T R A N S P O R T I N G
O P E R A T I O N O F P A R T S
D I S M A N T L E D F R O M T H E F A N
O R T O B E F I T T E D T O T H E F A N
M U S T O N L Y B E C A R R I E D O U T
WI T H S U I T A B L E T R A N S P O R T
E Q U I P M E N T

USUALLY, NO SPECIAL OR DEDICATED
EQUIPMENT IS REQUIRED FOR LIFTING AND
REFITTING THE FAN COMPONENTS.

! !
i

28 of 40

E
d
i
t
i
o
n

0
1
-
2
0
0
1

r
e
v
.
0
0

AN INTEGRATED MAINTENANCE PROGRAM
IS NECESSARY FOR NORMAL AND CORRECT
OPERATION OF THE FAN, AND ALSO
ENSURES GREATER SAFETY FOR THE
OPERATOR.

REGULAR CLEANING AND MAINTENANCE,
TOGETHER WITH LUBRICATION, ARE VITAL
FOR ENSURING CORRECT OPERATION AND
GREATER DURABILITY OF THE FAN

7.1 Bearing lubrication

Check and follow the programmed lubrication
intervals correctly.
The bearings installed in the supports of
transmission driven fans must be lubricated
according to a program of lubrication intervals with
the amount of grease indicated on the
transmission specifications enclosed with the
documentation delivered together with fans
supplied with transmissions. For fan installation
types 1 or 3D (exposed shaft, no transmission),
consult Table 7.1 for the correct lubrication
intervals. Perform lubrication using the grease
specified or an equivalent. Lubricating intervals
must be reduced if the fan is operated in a dusty,
hot, humid or corrosive environment, by
approximately 40% or more relative to the value
indicated in the transmission specifications list,
depending on actual operating conditions. An
excessive quantity of grease caused overheating
of the bearings, therefore do not fill the supports
with more grease than is specified.
Unless stated otherwise, the following grease is
used as standard during the construction of
fans:

SHELL ALBIDA GREASE RL2

This is a lithium soap complex based grease and
has a dropping point of 260 C (IP 132/ ASTM
D566) and a working penetration value at 25 C -
0.1 mm (IP50/ ASTM D217) of 265295.
Kinematic viscosity (IP 71/ ASTM D445): at 40 C,
100 cSt ; at 100 C, 11.3 cSt.

The following greases have compatible
characteristics:

S.R.I. GREASE 2

ALETIUM GREASE 2

MOBIPLEX 47

RUBENS

GP GREASE

CERAN WR 2

CASTROL SUPER GREASE 2

Usually, the bearings fitted on motors up to size
160 are lubricated for life and therefore do not
require re-greasing. Check and follow the
programmed lubrication intervals specified by the
motor manufacturer. However, we recommend
periodically replacing the bearings with the type
indicated on the motor identification plate.

i
i
v
e
n
t
i
l
a
t
o
r
i

i
n
d
u
s
t
r
i
a
l
i

S
.
p
.
A
.

2
9
o
f

4
0

E d i t i o n 0 1 - 2 0 0 1 r e v . 0 0
T
a
b
l
e

7
.
1

T
y
p
e
s

o
f

s
u
p
p
o
r
t

a
n
d

b
e
a
r
i
n
g

a
n
d

r
e
l
a
t
i
v
e

r
e
-
l
u
b
r
i
c
a
t
i
o
n

i
n
t
e
r
v
a
l
s

a
n
d

a
m
o
u
n
t
s

o
f

g
r
e
a
s
e

u
s
e
d

f
o
r

v
e
n
tila
to
ri in
d
u
s
tria
li S
.p
.A
.

f
a
n
s

S
U
P
P
O
R
T

B
E
A
R
I
N
G

T
Y
P
E

R
E
-
L
U
B
R
I
C
A
T
I
N
G

I
N
T
E
R
V
A
L

I
N

H
O
U
R
S

A
M
O
U
N
T

O
F

G
R
E
A
S
E

B
E
A
R
I
N
G

T
Y
P
E

(
O
P
P
O
S
I
T
E

S
I
D
E

T
O

R
E
-
L
U
B
R
I
C
A
T
I
N
G

I
N
T
E
R
V
A
L

I
N

H
O
U
R
S

A
M
O
U
N
T

O
F

G
R
E
A
S
E

T
Y
P
E

(
P
U
L
L
E
Y

S
I
D
E
)

1
0
6
0

1
5
0
0

2
1
2
0

3
0
0
0

4
2
5
0

(
G
R
A
M
S
)

P
U
L
L
E
Y
)

1
0
6
0

1
5
0
0

2
1
2
0

3
0
0
0

4
2
5
0

(
G
R
A
M
S
)

S
T

4
7

A
-
A
L

6
2
0
4

Z

1
2
5
0
0

8
0
0
0

6
3
0
0

4
0
0
0

3
1
5
0

4

6
2
0
4

Z

1
2
5
0
0

8
0
0
0

6
3
0
0

4
0
0
0

3
1
5
0

4

S
T

6
2

A
-
A
L

6
3
0
5

Z

1
1
2
0
0

7
1
0
0

5
6
0
0

3
5
5
0

2
8
0
0

5

6
3
0
5

Z

1
1
2
0
0

7
1
0
0

5
6
0
0

3
5
5
0

2
8
0
0

5

S
T

8
0

A
-
A
L

6
3
0
7

Z

1
0
0
0
0

6
3
0
0

5
0
0
0

3
1
5
0

2
5
0
0

7

6
3
0
7

Z

1
0
0
0
0

6
3
0
0

5
0
0
0

3
1
5
0

2
5
0
0

7

S
T

9
0

A
-
A
L

6
3
0
8

Z

9
0
0
0

5
6
0
0

4
5
0
0

2
8
0
0

2
2
4
0

9

6
3
0
8

Z

9
0
0
0

5
6
0
0

4
5
0
0

2
8
0
0

2
2
4
0

9

S
T

9
0

B
-
B
L

N
U

3
0
8

E
C
P

4
5
0
0

2
8
0
0

2
2
5
0

1
4
0
0

1
1
2
0

9

6
3
0
8

Z

9
0
0
0

5
6
0
0

4
5
0
0

2
8
0
0

2
2
4
0

9

S
T

1
0
0

A
-
A
L

6
3
0
9

Z

8
0
0
0

5
0
0
0

4
0
0
0

2
5
0
0

2
0
0
0

1
1

6
3
0
9

Z

8
0
0
0

5
0
0
0

4
0
0
0

2
5
0
0

2
0
0
0

1
1

S
T

1
0
0

B
-
B
L

N
U

3
0
9

E
C
P

4
0
0
0

2
5
0
0

2
0
0
0

1
2
5
0

1
0
0
0

1
1

6
3
0
9

Z

8
0
0
0

5
0
0
0

4
0
0
0

2
5
0
0

2
0
0
0

1
1

S
T

1
1
0

A
-
A
L

6
3
1
0

Z

7
1
0
0

4
5
0
0

3
5
5
0

2
2
4
0

1
8
0
0

1
4

6
3
1
0

Z

7
1
0
0

4
5
0
0

3
5
5
0

2
2
5
0

1
8
0
0

1
4

S
T

1
1
0

B
-
B
L

N
U

3
1
0

E
C
P

3
5
5
0

2
2
5
0

1
8
0
0

1
1
2
0

9
0
0

1
4

6
3
1
0

Z

7
1
0
0

4
5
0
0

3
5
5
0

2
2
5
0

1
8
0
0

1
4

S
T

1
2
0

A
-
A
L

6
3
1
1

Z

6
3
0
0

4
0
0
0

3
1
5
0

2
0
0
0

1
6
0
0

1
8

6
3
1
1

Z

6
3
0
0

4
0
0
0

3
1
5
0

2
0
0
0

1
6
0
0

1
8

S
T

1
2
0

B
-
B
L

N
U

3
1
1

E
C
P

3
1
5
0

2
0
0
0

1
6
0
0

1
0
0
0

-

1
8

6
3
1
1

Z

6
3
0
0

4
0
0
0

3
1
5
0

2
0
0
0

1
6
0
0

1
8

S
T

1
3
0

A
-
A
L

6
3
1
2

Z

5
6
0
0

3
5
5
0

2
8
0
0

1
8
0
0

-

2
2

6
3
1
2

Z

5
6
0
0

3
5
5
0

2
8
0
0

1
8
0
0

-

2
2

S
T

1
3
0

B
-
B
L

N
U

3
1
2

E
C
P

2
8
0
0

1
8
0
0

1
4
0
0

9
0
0

-

2
2

6
3
1
2

Z

5
6
0
0

3
5
5
0

2
8
0
0

1
8
0
0

-

2
2

S
T

1
5
0

A
-
A
L

6
3
1
4

Z

5
0
0
0

3
1
5
0

2
5
0
0

1
6
0
0

-

2
8

6
3
1
4

Z

5
0
0
0

3
1
5
0

2
5
0
0

1
6
0
0

-

2
8

S
T

1
5
0

B
-
B
L

N
U

3
1
4

E
C
P

2
5
0
0

1
6
0
0

1
2
5
0

8
0
0

-

2
8

6
3
1
4

Z

5
0
0
0

3
1
5
0

2
5
0
0

1
6
0
0

-

2
8

S
T

1
8
0

A
-
A
L

6
3
1
7

4
5
0
0

2
8
0
0

2
2
4
0

1
4
0
0

-

3
6

6
3
1
7

Z

4
5
0
0

2
8
0
0

2
2
4
0

1
4
0
0

-

3
6

S
T

1
8
0

B
-
B
L

N
U

3
1
7

E
C
P

2
2
5
0

1
4
0
0

1
1
2
0

-

-

3
6

6
3
1
7

Z

4
5
0
0

2
8
0
0

2
2
4
0

1
4
0
0

-

3
6

S
T

2
0
0

A
-
A
L

6
3
1
9

4
0
0
0

2
5
0
0

2
0
0
0

-

-

4
5

6
3
1
9

Z

4
0
0
0

2
5
0
0

2
0
0
0

-

-

4
5

S
T

2
0
0

B
-
B
L

N
U

3
1
9

E
C
P

2
0
0
0

1
2
5
0

1
0
0
0

-

-

4
5

6
3
1
9

Z

4
0
0
0

2
5
0
0

2
0
0
0

-

-

4
5

S
U
P
P
O
R
T

B
E
A
R
I
N
G

T
Y
P
E

R
E
-
L
U
B
R
I
C
A
T
I
N
G

I
N
T
E
R
V
A
L

I
N

H
O
U
R
S

A
M
O
U
N
T

O
F

G
R
E
A
S
E

B
E
A
R
I
N
G

T
Y
P
E

(
O
P
P
O
S
I
T
E

S
I
D
E

T
O

R
E
-
L
U
B
R
I
C
A
T
I
N
G

I
N
T
E
R
V
A
L

I
N

H
O
U
R
S

A
M
O
U
N
T

O
F

G
R
E
A
S
E

T
Y
P
E

(
P
U
L
L
E
Y

S
I
D
E
)

7
5
0

1
0
6
0

1
5
0
0

2
1
2
0

3
0
0
0

(
G
R
A
M
S
)

P
U
L
L
E
Y
)

7
5
0

1
0
6
0

1
5
0
0

2
1
2
0

3
0
0
0

(
G
R
A
M
S
)

S
N

5
0
7

B
-
B
L

2
2
2
0
7

E
K

4
0
0
0

2
5
0
0

1
6
0
0

1
0
0
0

6
7
0

6

2
2
2
0
7

E
K

4
0
0
0

2
5
0
0

1
6
0
0

1
0
0
0

6
7
0

6

S
N

5
0
8

B
-
B
L

2
2
2
0
8

E
K

3
7
5
0

2
3
6
0

1
5
0
0

9
5
0

6
0
0

7

2
2
2
0
8

E
K

3
7
5
0

2
3
6
0

1
5
0
0

9
5
0

6
0
0

7

S
N

5
0
9

B
-
B
L

2
2
2
0
9

E
K

3
5
5
0

2
2
5
0

1
4
0
0

9
0
0

5
6
0

9

2
2
2
0
9

E
K

3
5
5
0

2
2
5
0

1
4
0
0

9
0
0

5
6
0

9

S
N

5
0
9

C
-
C
R
-
C
S

2
2
2
0
9

E
K

3
5
5
0

2
2
5
0

1
4
0
0

9
0
0

5
6
0

9

2
2
0
9

E
K

7
1
0
0

4
5
0
0

2
8
0
0

1
8
0
0

1
1
2
0

9

S
N

5
1
0

B
-
B
L

2
2
2
1
0

E
K

3
3
5
0

2
1
2
0

1
3
2
0

8
5
0

5
3
0

1
1

2
2
2
1
0

E
K

3
3
5
0

2
1
2
0

1
3
2
0

8
5
0

5
3
0

1
1

S
N

5
1
0

C
-
C
R
-
C
S

2
2
2
1
0

E
K

3
3
5
0

2
1
2
0

1
3
2
0

8
5
0

5
3
0

1
1

2
2
1
0

E
K

6
7
0
0

4
2
5
0

2
6
5
0

1
7
0
0

1
0
6
0

1
1

S
N

5
1
1

C
-
C
R
-
C
S

2
2
2
1
1

E
K

3
1
5
0

2
0
0
0

1
2
5
0

8
0
0

5
0
0

1
3

2
2
1
1

E
K

6
3
0
0

4
0
0
0

2
5
0
0

1
6
0
0

1
0
0
0

1
3

S
N

5
1
2

B
-
B
L

2
2
2
1
2

E
K

3
0
0
0

1
9
0
0

1
1
8
0

7
5
0

4
7
5

1
8

2
2
2
1
2

E
K

3
0
0
0

1
9
0
0

1
1
8
0

7
5
0

4
7
5

1
8

S
N

5
1
2

C
-
C
R
-
C
S

2
2
2
1
2

E
K

3
0
0
0

1
9
0
0

1
1
8
0

7
5
0

4
7
5

1
8

2
2
1
2

E
K

6
0
0
0

3
7
5
0

2
3
6
0

1
5
0
0

9
5
0

1
8

S
N

5
1
3

B
-
B
L

2
2
2
1
3

E
K

2
8
0
0

1
8
0
0

1
1
2
0

7
1
0

4
5
0

2
2

2
2
2
1
3

E
K

2
8
0
0

1
8
0
0

1
1
2
0

7
1
0

4
5
0

2
2

S
N

5
1
3

C
-
C
R
-
C
S

2
2
2
1
3

E
K

2
8
0
0

1
8
0
0

1
1
2
0

7
1
0

4
5
0

2
2

2
2
1
3

E
K

5
6
0
0

3
5
5
0

2
2
1
0

1
4
0
0

9
0
0

2
2

S
N

5
1
6

B
-
B
L

2
2
2
1
6

E
K

2
5
0
0

1
6
0
0

1
0
0
0

6
3
0

-

2
8

2
2
2
1
6

E
K

2
5
0
0

1
6
0
0

1
0
0
0

6
3
0

-

2
8

S
N

5
1
6

C
-
C
R
-
C
S

2
2
2
1
6

E
K

2
5
0
0

1
6
0
0

1
0
0
0

6
3
0

-

2
8

2
2
1
6

E
K

5
0
0
0

3
1
5
0

2
0
0
0

1
2
5
0

-

2
8

S
N

5
1
7

C
-
C
R
-
C
S

2
2
2
1
7

E
K

2
3
6
0

1
5
0
0

9
5
0

6
0
0

-

3
2

2
2
1
7

E
K

4
7
5
0

3
0
0
0

1
9
0
0

1
1
8
0

-

3
2

S
N

5
1
8

B
-
B
L

2
2
2
1
8

E
K

2
2
5
0

1
4
0
0

9
0
0

5
6
0

-

3
4

2
2
2
1
8

E
K

2
2
5
0

1
4
0
0

9
0
0

5
6
0

-

3
4

S
N

5
1
8

C
-
C
L
-
C
R
-
C
R
L
-
C
S
-
C
S
L

2
2
2
1
8

E
K

2
2
5
0

1
4
0
0

9
0
0

5
6
0

-

3
4

2
2
1
8

E
K

4
5
0
0

2
8
0
0

1
8
0
0

1
1
2
0

-

3
4

S
N

5
2
0

B
-
B
L
-
C

2
2
2
2
0

E
K

2
0
0
0

1
2
5
0

8
0
0

-

-

4
0

2
2
2
2
0

E
K

2
0
0
0

1
2
5
0

8
0
0

-

-

4
0

S
N

5
2
2

B
-
B
L
-
C

2
2
2
2
2

E
K

1
8
0
0

1
1
2
0

7
1
0

-

-

5
0

2
2
2
2
2

E
K

1
8
0
0

1
1
2
0

7
1
0

-

-

5
0

S
N

5
2
4

B
-
B
L
-
C

2
2
2
2
4

E
K

1
6
0
0

1
0
0
0

6
3
0

-

-

6
0

2
2
2
2
4

E
K

1
6
0
0

1
0
0
0

6
3
0

-

-

6
0

S
N

5
2
6

C

2
2
2
2
6

E
K

1
5
0
0

9
5
0

6
0
0

-

-

7
0

2
2
2
2
6

E
K

1
5
0
0

9
5
0

6
0
0

-

-

7
0

S
N

5
2
8

B
-
B
L
-
C

2
2
2
2
8

C
C
K
/
W
3
3

1
3
2
0

8
5
0

-

-

-

8
0

2
2
2
2
8

C
C
K
/
W
3
3

1
3
2
0

8
5
0

-

-

-

8
0

S
N

5
3
0

C

2
2
2
3
0

C
C
K
/
W
3
3

1
1
8
0

7
5
0

-

-

-

9
0

2
2
2
3
0

C
C
K
/
W
3
3

1
1
8
0

7
5
0

-

-

-

9
0

N
O
T
E
S
:

T
h
e

r
e
-
l
u
b
r
i
c
a
t
i
o
n

i
n
t
e
r
v
a
l
s

g
i
v
e
n

h
a
v
e

b
e
e
n

c
a
l
c
u
l
a
t
e
d

i
n

a
c
c
o
r
d
a
n
c
e

w
i
t
h

t
h
e

d
i
a
g
r
a
m

g
i
v
e
n

i
n

t
h
e

m
a
i
n
t
e
n
a
n
c
e

m
a
n
u
a
l

f
o
r

S
K
F

b
e
a
r
i
n
g
s

w
i
t
h

a

t
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e

a
t

t
h
e

o
u
t
e
r

r
a
c
e

o
f

7
0

C
.

A
m
o
u
n
t

o
f

g
r
e
a
s
e

i
n

g
r
a
m
s

c
a
l
c
u
l
a
t
e
d

i
n

a
c
c
o
r
d
a
n
c
e

w
i
t
h

S
K
F

s
t
a
n
d
a
r
d
s
.

G
r
e
a
s
e

u
s
e
d

f
o
r

r
e
-
l
u
b
r
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
:

S
H
E
L
L

A
L
B
I
D
A

G
R
E
A
S
E

R
L
2

G
r
e
a
s
e
s

w
i
t
h

c
o
m
p
a
t
i
b
l
e

c
h
a
r
a
c
t
e
r
i
s
t
i
c
s
:

S
h
e
l
l
:

E
l
f
,

S
.
r
.
i
.

g
r
e
a
s
e

2
,

Q
8

R
u
b
e
n
s
,

E
s
s
o
-
G
P

G
r
e
a
s
e
,

F
i
n
a
-
C
e
r
a
n

W
R

2
,

I
P
-
A
l
e
t
i
u
m

g
r
e
a
s
e

2
,

M
o
b
i
l

M
o
b
i
p
l
e
x

4
7
,

C
a
s
t
r
o
l

S
u
p
e
r

g
r
e
a
s
e

2
.


30 of 40

E
d
i
t
i
o
n

0
1
-
2
0
0
1

r
e
v
.
0
0

7.2 Checking spherical roller bearings

Before fitting a bearing, the internal radial free
play under the highest roller must be measured
with a feeler gauge (see Fig. /.1.).
During installation, check repeatedly the reduction
in internal free play under the lowest roller.

Correct installtion requires the reduction of the
internal free play and a residual minimum free
play value as specified in Table 7.2.

Table 7.2 Checking the radial free play of the bearings
BEARING TYPE REDUCTION IN RADIAL FREE PLAY
(mm)
RESIDUAL MINIMUM FREE
PLAY AFTER INSTALLATION
(mm)
22216 EK da 0.040 a 0.050 0.025
22218 EK da 0.045 a 0.060 0.035
22220 EK da 0.045 a 0.060 0.035
22222 EK da 0.050 a 0.070 0.050
22224 EK da 0.050 a 0.070 0.050
22228 CCK/W33 da 0.065 a 0.090 0.055

Fig. 7.1 Checking the radial free play of the bearings


31 of 40

E
d
i
t
i
o
n

0
1
-
2
0
0
1

r
e
v
.
0
0

7.3 Belt tension adjustment and
cleaning
The following is a simplified method for setting the
tension of V-belts: consult Table 7.3 to determine
the profile type and, for the diameter of the
smallest pulley, the load for each belt value, P.
The same table also gives you the L value.

Using the formula:
100
LxI
L
e
=

where:
L
e
= deflection in [mm] at the centre point of the
length between pulley axes I
L= deflection per 100 mm of length between
pulley axes
I = length between pulley axes [mm]
Calculate the value L
e
by applying a load P
perpendicularly to the section of belt (Fig. 7.2 and
7.3), the transmission should reach the calculated
deflection value L
e
.

Fig. 7.2 Checking the belt tension

Fig. 7.3 Setting the belt tension
Table 7.3 Setting the belt tension: test load and
deflection
Profile Load per
belt
P [N]
Smallest pulley
diameter d [mm]
Deflection per
100 mm of length
between pulley
axes L
SPZ 25
from 63 to 71
from 75 to 90
from 95 to 125
over 125

2.45
2.20
2.05
1.90
SPA 50
from 100 to 140
from 150 to 200
over 200

2.75
2.55
2.45

SPB 75
from 160 to 224
from 236 to 355
over 355

2.55
2.22
2.10
SPC 125
from 224 to 250
from 265 to 355
from 400 to 560
over 560

2.55
2.20
2.00
1.90

As a general rule, check the belt tension after the
first 8 operating hours and then after every 800
operating hours. Reset if necessary.
Replace all belts if their wear is liable to
compromise correct operation of the transmission
due to an insufficient pretension value or due to
slippage over 4-5%. Belt wear depends on many
factors, among which environmental conditions,
number of operating hours and how many start-
ups the fan has undergone. Manufacturers of
standard V-belts recommend that they should not
be used at environmental temperatures over 80
C, special belts are required for operation at
higher temperatures. Dirty belts must not be
cleaned with solvents such as petrol or benzene,
turpentine etc., or with abrasive or sharp objects.

When cleaning belts, we recommend the use of a
1:10 mixture of alcohol and glycerine.
Transmissions fitted on
ventilatori industriali S p A
fans have two
or more belts.

IN THE EVENT OF THE BREAKAGE OF ONE
OR MORE BELTS, WE RECOMMEND THE
REPLACEMENT OF ALL THE BELTS IN THE
TRANSMISSION.

L
e

I
I/2
i

32 di 40

E
d
i
t
i
o
n

0
1
-
2
0
0
1

r
e
v
.
0
0

7.4 Flexible couplings

Periodically, and in accordance with operating
conditions, check the axial free play S, the angular
alignment A
max
-A
min
and the parallel alignment R
(Fig. 7.4, 7.5, 7.6) of flexible couplings. Check the
condition of hubs and lubricate every 3000
operating hours, using the recommended types
and quantities of lubricant (see table). The
couplings normally used are Falk Steelflex T10
and Hansen Ecoflex BT (for further information,
contact the respective manufacturer).

Fig. 7.4 Axial slipping Fig. 7.5 Angular misalignment Fig. 7.6 Parallel misalignment
Table 7.4 Technical specifications of elastic couplings
Manufacturer Type S min
[ mm]
A
max
-A
min

max[ mm]
R max
[ mm]
Max. speed
[rpm]
Lubricant [Kg] Recommended
lubricant
BT4 2 0.15 0.15 5000 -
BT6 2 0.20 0.20 5000 -
BT10 2 0.20 0.20 5000 -
BT15 2 0.20 0.20 5000 -
BT22 2 0.20 0.20 5000 -
BT30 2 0.25 0.25 5000 -
BT40 2 0.25 0.25 5000 -
BT55 2 0.30 0.30 4900 -
BT85 2 0.30 0.30 4300 -
BT135 2 0.35 0.35 3700 -
BT200 2 0.40 0.40 3400 -

Hansen
Ecoflex*
BT300 3 0.45 0.45 3000 -

Do not require
lubrication
1020 5.33 0.25 0.30 4500 0.027
1030 5.03 0.30 0.30 4500 0.04
1040 5.36 0.33 0.30 4500 0.054
1050 5.38 0.41 0.41 4500 0.073
1060 6.55 0.46 0.41 4350 0.090
1070 6.58 0.51 0.41 4125 0.110
1080 7.32 0.61 0.41 3600 0.170
1090 7.26 0.71 0.41 3600 0.25
1100 10.9 0.84 0.51 2440 0.430
1110 10.9 0.91 0.51 2250 0.510
1120 14.2 1.02 0.56 2025 0.740
1130 14 1.19 0.56 1800 0.910

Falk Transfluid
T10*
1140 15.5 1.35 0.56 1650 1.140
Agip
FI FIN 360
Amoco
Amolith grease # 2
Chevron USA
Chevron Dura-Lith
EP2
Gulf
Gulf crown grease # 2
Esso Italia
Shield 2500
Mobil
Mobilux EP 11
Shell Italia
Cardium Compound
Texaco
Starplex HD 2
Valvoline
Val-Lith EP
* The details given in the tables in this manual have been taken directly from the technical catalogues of the respective manufacturers.

S
A
min

A
max

R

33 of 40

E
d
i
t
i
o
n

0
1
-
2
0
0
1

r
e
v
.
0
0

7.5 Checki ng and cl eani ng parts in
contact with the fluid
The fan rotor should be cleaned regularly to
prevent vibration caused by dust accumulating on
the blades during operation.
I f the fan i s used to pump even slightl y dusty
ai r, ai r contai ni ng abrasi ve powders or for the
pneumati c transport material, the cleanliness
and wear of the fan rotor must be checked
regularly.
Dirt deposits on the rotor or wear of parts of the
rotor can cause undesirable vibrations during fan
operation.
If any part of the rotor is excessively worn, it is
imperative that the rotor be replaced (for this you
must contact ventilatori industriali S.p.A. Technical Assistance
Service).

For any i nformati on and before carryi ng out
any modification to one of our fans, please
contact the ventilatori industriali S.p.A. technical department
and quote the seri al number found on the fan
identification plate.


34 di 40

E
d
i
t
i
o
n

0
1
-
2
0
0
1

r
e
v
.
0
0

8 TECHNI CAL TABLES
8.1 ST Supports in installation types A-AL-B-BL

L
L
=
L F
U =
C
G
F
D
D S
F1
I NST. TYPES A-B
I NST. TYPES. AL-BL
C
G
F
COOLI NG FAN FOR
AI R TEMPS. FROM
60 300C

Ph9
Z
NxO
B
E
I R
H
UNI 7663 TYPE A
GREASER
Q
V
A
A

Fig. 8.1 ST Supports in installation types A-AL-B-BL
SUPPORT DIMENSIONS mm WEIGHT
TYPE A B C D J6 E F F1 G H I L NxO PxQ R S U V Z kgf.
ST 47 A
ST 47 AL
342
369
135 161 19 100 50.5 77.5 40 40 37.5 40 10x15 6x6 21.5 112 30 M6 16
5
5.05
ST 62 A
ST 62 AL
422
454
160 210 24 125 56 88 45 55 40 50 13x18 8x7 27 112 40 M8 18
9.6
9.7
ST 80 A
ST 80 AL
575
615
200 308 28 155 73.5 113.5 55 70 50 60 15x20 8x7 31 140 50 M10 21
18
18.3
ST 90 A-B
ST 90 AL-BL
615
655
200 308 38 155 73.5 113.5 55 70 50 80 15x20 10x8 41 140 60 M12 21
20
20.4
ST 100 A-B
ST 100 AL-BL
753
793
230 378 42 175 77.5 117.5 65 80 60 110 18x25 12x8 45 160 80 M16 24
33
33.5
ST 110 A-B
ST 110 AL-BL
753
793
230 378 48 175 77.5 117.5 65 80 60 110 18x25 14x9 51.5 160 80 M16 24
34
34.6
ST 120 A-B
ST 120 AL-BL
823
883
260 423 48 200 90 150 80 95 65 110 20x30 14x9 51.5 200 90 M16 26
53
54
ST 130 A-B
ST 130 AL-BL
823
883
260 423 55 200 90 150 80 95 65 110 20x30 16x10 59 200 90 M20 26
54
55.3
ST 150 A-B
ST 150 AL-BL
974
1034
290 470 65 210 112 172 90 105 80 140 22x35 18x11 69 250 120 M20 27
100
101.8
ST 180 A-B
ST 180 AL-BL
1095
1165
340 520 80 260 117.5 187.5 90 125 100 170 25x35 22x14 85 315 140 M20 32
150
153
ST 200 A-B
ST 200 AL-BL
1164
1234
370 564 90 290 130 200 100 140 105 170 25x35 25x14 95 315 140 M20 35
260
264
* INSTALLATION TYPES
Installation type A short shaft, ball bearings.
Installation type AL long shaft, ball bearings.

Installation type B short shaft, ball bearings on rotor side, roller bearings on transmission side.
Installation type BL long shaft, ball bearings on rotor side, roller bearings on transmission side.
Table 8.1 ST Supports in installation types A-AL-B-BL

35 of 40

E
d
i
t
i
o
n

0
1
-
2
0
0
1

r
e
v
.
0
0

8.2 SN Supports in installation types B BL BL/B

Fig. 8.2 SN Supports in installation types B BL BL/B
DIMENSI ONS I N mm
TYPE A B C C1 D j6 E F F1 F2 G H L NxO PxQ R S U V
WEIGHT

Kg
SN 507
B-BL 24
422 185 211 171 24 150 53 58 98 52 50 50 15x20 8x7 27 140 40 M8 8
SN 508
B-BL 28
575 205 344 304 28 170 53 58 98 60 60 60 15x20 8x7 31 140 50 M10 12
SN 509
B-BL 38
615 205 335 295 38 170 57 63 103 60 60 80 15x20 10x8 41 160 60 M12 16
SN 510
B-BL 42
753 205 413 373 42 170 57 63 103 60 60 110 15x20 12x8 45 160 90 M16 20
SN 512
B-BL 48
865 255 510 450 48 210 63 72 132 70 70 110 18x24 14x9 51.5 200 90 M16 30
SN 513
B-BL 55
895 275 535 475 55 230 65 75 135 80 80 110 18x24 16x10 59 200 90 M20 35
SN 516
B-BL 65
995 315 560 500 65 260 75 80 140 90 95 140 22x28 18x11 69 250 120 M20 56
SN 518
B-BL 75
1180 345 725 650 75 290 83 92 167 100 100 140 22x28 20x12 79.5 315 120 M20 81
SN 520
B-BL 80
1285 380 755 680 80 320 90 100 175 110 112 170 26x32 22x14 85 315 140 M20 112
SN 522
B-BL 90
1460 410 900 825 90 350 108 112 187 120 125 170 26x32 25x14 95 400 140 M20 150
SN 524
B-BL100
1540 410 900 825 100 350 108 112 187 120 140 210 26x32 28x16 106 400 180 M24 200
SN 528
B-BL110
1750 500 1090 1015 110 420 118 122 197 150 150 210 35x42 28x16 116 400 180 M24 280
Table 8.2 SN Supports in installation types B BL BL/B

ROTOR SIDE
PULLEY SIDE
v
e
n
t
i
l
a
t
o
r
i

i
n
d
u
s
t
r
i
a
l
i

S
.
p
.
A
.

3
6

o
f

4
0

E d i t i o n 0 1 - 2 0 0 0 r e v . 0 0
8
.
3

S
u
p
p
o
r
t
s

a
n
d

b
e
a
r
i
n
g
s

f
i
t
t
e
d

a
s

s
t
a
n
d
a
r
d

i
n

b
e
l
t

d
r
i
v
e
n

f
a
n
s

S
U
P
P
O
R
T

B
E
A
R
I
N
G

+

B
U
S
H
I
N
G

F
A

P
1

K

P
1

F
C

P
1

F
C

N
1

K
A

P
1

F
E

P
1

F
E

N
1

K
B

P
1

F
G

P
1

F
G

N
1

V
C
M

N
1

F
I

N
1

E
F
C

E
B
C

S
U
P
P
O
R
T

B
E
A
R
I
N
G

+

B
U
S
H
I
N
G

A
R
T

N
1

K
C

R
1
*

F
P

N
1

M
E
C

N
1

F
Q

K
M

R
1
*

F
R

N
1

F
S

P
1

S
U
P
P
O
R
T

B
E
A
R
I
N
G

+

B
U
S
H
I
N
G

D
F
R

N

S
T

4
7

A

1
9

6
2
0
4

-

Z

3
5
1

5
0
1

3
1
4
/
I

3
5
4
/
H

4
0
4
/
G

4
5
4
/
H

S
T

4
7

A
L

1
9

6
2
0
4

-

Z

2
5
1

2
5
1

2
0
1

2
2
1

2
5
1

2
8

S
N

5
0
9

C

4
2

-
-

3
8

H

3
0
9

2
2
0
9
E
K

2
2
2
0
9
E
K

1

4
0
1

-
-

2
-
3

S
T

6
2

A

2
4

6
3
0
5

-

Z

6
3
1

4
0
1

4
5
1

4
0
1

4
5
1

3
5
1

5
0
4
/
G

5
6
4
/
H

S
T

6
2

A
L

2
4

6
3
0
5

-

Z

2
8
1

3
1
1

2
8
1

3
1
1

2
8
1

3
1
1

3
2

S
N

5
1
0

C

4
8

-
-

4
2

H

3
1
0

2
2
1
0
E
K

2
2
2
1
0
E
K

1

4
5
1

-
-

2
-
3

S
T

8
0

A

2
8

6
3
0
7

-

Z

7
1
1

8
0
1

5
0
1

5
6
1

5
0
1

5
6
1

5
0
1

5
6
1

4
0
1

4
0
1

4
0
1

6
3
4
/
G

7
1
4
/
H

S
T

8
0

A
L

2
8

6
3
0
7

-

Z

3
5
1

3
5
1

3
5
1

3
5
1

3
8

S
N

5
1
1

C

5
5

-
-

4
8

H

3
1
1

2
2
1
1
E
K

2
2
2
1
1
E
K

1

5
0
1

-
-

2
-
3

S
T

9
0

A

3
8

6
3
0
8

-

Z

9
0
1

6
3
1

6
3
1

6
3
1

4
5
1

5
0
1

4
5
1

5
0
1

4
5
1

5
0
1

8
0
4
/
G

9
0
4
/
I

S
T

9
0

A
L

3
8

6
3
0
8

-

Z

4
0
1

4
5
1

4
0
1

4
5
1

4
0
1

4
5
1

4
0
1

4
5
1

4
0
1

4
5
1

3
8

S
N

5
1
2

C

6
0

-
-

4
8

H

3
1
2

2
2
1
2
E
K

2
2
2
1
2
E
K

1

5
6
1

-
-

2
-
3

S
T

1
0
0

A

4
2

6
3
0
9

-

Z

7
1
1

8
0
1

7
1
1

8
0
1

7
1
1

8
0
1

5
6
1

5
6
1

5
6
1

1
0
0
4
/
H

S
T

1
0
0

A
L

4
2

6
3
0
9

-

Z

5
0
1

5
0
1

5
0
1

5
0
1

5
0
1

4
2

S
N

5
1
3

C

6
5

-
-

5
5

H

3
1
3

2
2
1
3
E
K

2
2
2
1
3
E
K

1

6
3
1

-
-

2
-
3

A

S
T

1
1
0

-
-

4
8

B

N
U

3
1
0

E
C
P

6
3
1
0

-

Z

B

9
0
1

B

9
0
1

B

9
0
1

B

6
3
1

B

6
3
1

B

6
3
1

A
1
1
2
4
/
G

A
1
1
2
4
/
H

A
L

S
T

1
1
0

-
-
-
-

4
8

B
L

N
U

3
1
0

E
C
P

6
3
1
0

-

Z

A
L

5
6
1

A
L

6
3
1

A
L

5
6
1

B
L

6
3
1

A
L

5
6
1

A
L

6
3
1

A
L

5
6
1

A
L

6
3
1

A
L

5
6
1

A
L

6
3
1

4
8

S
N

5
1
6

C

7
5

-
-

6
0

H

3
1
6

2
2
1
6
E
K

2
2
2
1
6
E
K

1

7
1
1

-
-

2
-
3

A

S
T

1
2
0

-
-

4
8

B

N
U

3
1
1

E
C
P

6
3
1
1

-

Z

B

1
0
0
1

B

1
0
0
1

B

1
0
0
1

B

7
1
1

B

7
1
1

B

7
1
1

A
1
2
5
5
/
F

A
1
2
5
4
/
H

S
T

1
2
0

B
L

4
8

N
U

3
1
1

E
C
P

6
3
1
1

-

Z

7
1
1

7
1
1

7
1
1

7
1
1

7
1
1

5
5

S
N

5
1
7

C

8
0

-
-

6
5

H

3
1
7

2
2
1
7
K

2
2
2
1
7
E
K

1

8
0
1

-
-

2
-
3

A

S
T

1
3
0

-
-

5
5

B

N
U

3
1
2

E
C
P

6
3
1
2

-

Z

B

1
1
2
1

B

1
1
2
1

B

8
0
1

B

8
0
1

B

8
0
1

A
1
4
0
6
/
E

A
1
4
0
4
/
H

S
T

1
3
0

B
L

5
5

N
U

3
1
2

E
C
P

6
3
1
2

-

Z

8
0
1

9
0
1

8
0
1

8
0
1

9
0
1

8
0
1

9
0
1

8
0
1

9
0
1

6
0

S
N

5
1
8

C

9
0

-
-

7
5

H

3
1
8

2
2
1
8
K

2
2
2
1
8
E
K

1

9
0
1

-
-

2
-
3

S
T

1
5
0

B

6
5

N
U

3
1
4

E
C
P

6
3
1
4

-

Z

9
0
1

9
0
1

9
0
1

A
1
6
0
4
/
H

S
T

1
5
0

B

6
5

N
U

3
1
4

E
C
P

6
3
1
4

-

Z

9
0
1

6
5

S
N

5
1
8

C
L

9
0

-
-

7
5

H

3
1
8

2
2
1
8
K

2
2
2
1
8
E
K

1

1
0
0
1

-
-

2
-
3

S
T

1
8
0

B

8
0

N
U

3
1
7

E
C
P

6
3
1
7

-

Z

1
0
0
1

1
0
0
1

1
1
2
1

1
0
0
1

1
1
2
1

A
1
8
0
4
/
H

S
N

5
1
6

B
L

6
5

H

3
1
6

2
2
2
1
6

E
K

1
0
0
1

1
0
0
1

1
0
0
1

1
0
0
1

7
5

S
N

5
2
0

C

1
0
0

-
-

8
0

H

3
2
0

2
2
2
2
0
E
K

1

1
1
2
1

-
-

2
-
3

S
T

2
0
0

B

9
0

N
U

3
1
9

E
C
P

6
3
1
9

-

Z

1
2
5
1

1
2
5
1

A
2
0
0
4
/
H

S
N

5
1
8

B
L

7
5

H

3
1
8

2
2
2
1
8

E
K

1
1
2
1

1
2
5
1

1
0
0
1

1
1
2
1

1
2
5
1

1
1
2
1

1
2
5
1

8
0

S
N

5
2
2

C

1
1
0

-
-

9
0

H

3
2
2

2
2
2
2
2
E
K

1

1
2
5
1

-
-

2
-
3

S
N

5
2
0

B

8
0

H

3
2
0

2
2
2
2
0

E
K

1
4
0
1

1
4
0
1

S
N

5
2
0

B

8
0

H

3
2
0

2
2
2
2
0

E
K

1
4
0
1

1
1
2
1

1
2
5
1

1
4
0
1

1
4
0
1

9
0

S
N

5
2
4

C

1
2
0

-
-

1
0
0

H

3
1
2
4

2
2
2
2
4
E
K

1

1
4
0
1

-
-

2
-
3

S
N

5
2
2

B

9
0

H

3
2
2

2
2
2
2
2

E
K

1
6
0
1

1
6
0
1

S
N

5
2
2

B

9
0

H

3
2
2

2
2
2
2
2

E
K

1
6
0
1

1
4
0
1

1
6
0
1

1
6
0
1

1
0
0

S
N

5
2
6

C

1
3
0

-
-

1
1
0

H

3
1
2
6

2
2
2
2
6
E
K

1

1
6
0
1

-
-

2
-
3

S
N

5
2
4

B

1
0
0

H

3
1
2
4

2
2
2
2
4

E
K

1
8
0
1

2
0
0
1

1
8
0
1

2
0
0
1

S
N

5
2
4

B

1
0
0

H

3
1
2
4

2
2
2
2
4

E
K

1
8
0
1

2
0
0
1

1
6
0
1

1
8
0
1

1
8
0
1

2
0
0
1

1
8
0
1

2
0
0
1

1
1
0

S
N

5
2
8

C

1
4
0

-
-

1
2
0

H

3
1
2
8

2
2
2
2
8
C
C
K
/
W
3
3

1

1
8
0
1

-
-

2
-
3

S
N

5
2
8

B

1
1
0

H

3
1
2
8

2
2
2
2
8

C
C
K
/
W
3
3

2
0
0
1

1
2
0

S
N

5
3
0

C

1
6
0

-
-

1
3
0

H

3
1
3
0

2
2
2
3
0
C
C
K
/
W
3
3

1

2
0
0
1

-
-

2
-
3

1

R
O
L
L
E
R

B
E
A
R
I
N
G
S

W
I
T
H

E
C
P

R
E
T
A
I
N
E
R

F
O
R

U
S
E

U
P

T
O

M
A
X
.

-
2
0
%

R
P
M

S
P
E
C
I
F
I
E
D

I
N

T
H
E

C
A
T
A
L
O
G
U
E

-

R
O
L
L
E
R

B
E
A
R
I
N
G
S

W
I
T
H

E
C
M

R
E
T
A
I
N
E
R

F
O
R

U
S
E

U
P

T
O

T
H
E

M
A
X
.

R
P
M

S
P
E
C
I
F
I
E
D

I
N

T
H
E

C
A
T
A
L
O
G
U
E

2

E
F
C

B
A
L
L

B
E
A
R
I
N
G
S

W
I
T
H

2
R
S
1

S
L
I
D
I
N
G

S
E
A
L
S

-

E
B
C

S
P
E
C
I
A
L

B
E
A
R
I
N
G

S
H
A
F
T
,

F
R
E
E

P
L
A
Y
:

C
3

T
a
b
l
e

8
.
3

S
u
p
p
o
r
t
s

a
n
d

b
e
a
r
i
n
g
s

f
i
t
t
e
d

a
s

s
t
a
n
d
a
r
d

i
n

b
e
l
t

d
r
i
v
e
n

f
a
n
s

*
K
C
-

K
M

o
n
l
y

u
p

t
o

s
i
z
e

1
0
0
1


37 of 40

E
d
i
t
i
o
n

0
1
-
2
0
0
1

r
e
v
.
0
0

9 DI SASSEMBLY

ALL THE DISASSEMBLY AND RE-ASSEMBLY
OPERATIONS DESCRIBED BELOW MUST
ONLY BE CARRIED OUT BY QUALIFIED AND
AUTHORISED PERSONNEL. FOR NO REASON
WHATSOEVER MUST THE OPERATOR OR
FACTORY MAINTENANCE PERSONNEL
CARRY OUT THESE OPERATIONS.
CAUTION: ALL DISASSEMBLY AND
RE-ASSEMBLY WORK MUST BE
CARRIED OUT WITH THE
FOLLOWING CONDITIONS:

A) YOU MUST BE ABSOLUTELY CERTAIN THAT THE
FAN IS COMPLETELY STATIONARY (FAN ROTOR AT
REST); DISCONNECT THE ELECTRICAL POWER AT
THE MAIN PANEL WITH THE SWITCH, LOCK THE
SWITCH WITH A PADLOCK AND HAND THE KEY OF
THE LOCK TO THE HEAD OF MAINTENANCE
B) THE WORKING ENVIRONMENT MUST BE
EQUIPPED WITH EVERY TOOL NECESSARY AND
MUST BE FREE OF ANY HAZARDS
C) EVERY PIECE TO BE REFITTED MUST BE
THOROUGHLY CLEANED, DEGREASED AND
LUBRICATED AS NECESSARY BEFORE REFITTING.

9.1 Intake nozzles
Undo the nozzle securing nuts from the fan
housing. Slide out the nozzle.

9.2 Housi ng
With all orientable fans, the housing is secured to
the frame by bolts. Simply undo the securing nuts
at the frame plate.
With non-orientable fans with single-piece
housings, the housing cannot be disassembled.
The housing in certain fan types may be divided
into two or more pieces, secured together by
bolts.

! !

38 di 40

E
d
i
z
i
o
n
e

0
1
-
2
0
0
1

r
e
v
.
0
0

9.3 Fan rotor
Remove the nozzle and, where possible, the fan
housing.
With si ngl e i ntake fans: remove the screw
together with the lock-ring and use a suitably
sized extractor.
We recommend setting up a support for the rotor
before extracting it completely.
With double intake fans: remove the drive belts
and pulley. Remove the securing bolts from the
supports and remove the nozzle from the
transmission side. This operation requires the
support on the transmission side to be held up
using the eyebolt, which must be screwed into the
threaded hole at the end of the shaft. Extract the
support complete with the rotor. Loosen the lock
ring and slide off the rotor.
With axial fans: unscrew the lock nut, remove the
conical bushing and slide out the rotor, using an
extractor if necessary.
In any event, this operation must always be
carried out with great care, avoiding any knocks
that could alter the balance of the rotor or deform
it.

9.4 Pulleys
The pulleys installed on transmission-fitted
ventilatori industriali S p A
fans are PBT belts for taper lock type
conical bushings. To remove a pulley, remove the
locking screw and fit another one in the free hole.
Screw this screw in until the hub is free.

9.5 Support
If the support is fitted with a two-piece cooling fan,
loosen the bolts and remove it.
With single-bl ock constructi on supports:
remove the securing screws for the covers and
slide tha shaft out. Slide the bearings out with an
extractor.
With upri ght supports: remove the screws and
open the upper covers. Remove the arrestor half-
rings, loosen the ring from the safety washer and
slide out the traction bushing.

39 of 40

E
d
i
t
i
o
n

0
1
-
2
0
0
1

r
e
v
.
0
0

10 SCRAPPI NG THE FAN

At the end of the fans useful life, the user
company is responsible for scrapping the fan,
taking care in particular of emptying all lubricating
liquids, generally cleaning all components and
then separating the fans parts into components
and electrical material. Different materials must be
collected separately, for example: electric motors
(copper windings), metal components (structural
components, etc.), plastics, etc., and then
correctly disposed of separately.


40 of 40

E
d
i
t
i
o
n

0
1
-
2
0
0
1

r
e
v
.
0
0

11 TECHNI CAL ENCLOSURES

11.1 Tightening torques for nuts and bolts

The tightening torques M given in the table are applicable in the following conditions:
- Hexagonal head UNI 5737 type screws, cylindrical head UNI 5931 and UNI 6107 type screws,
in the normal conditions in which they are supplied.
- Tightening torques must be applied slowly using a torque wrench.

While maintaining the same pre-load values, tightening torques must be modified as described
below in the following cases:
- Increased by 5% for wide-head UNI 5712 screws
- Reduced by 10% for zinc plated oiled screws
- Reduced by 20% for phosphor coated oiled screws
- Reduced by 10% if the screw is tightened with an impulse tightener.

11.1.1 Ti ghteni ng torques M for bol ts with ISO metric thread

8.8 10.9 12.9
d
x
pitch
mm

Sr

mm
M
Nm
M
Nm
M
Nm
6 x 1 20,1 10,4 15,3 17,9
7 x 1 28,9 17,2 25 30
8 x 1,25 36,6 25 37 44
10 x 1,5 58 50 73 86
12 x 1,75 84,3 86 127 148
14 x 2 115 137 201 235
16 x 2 157 214 314 368
18 x 2,5 192 306 435 509
20 x 2,5 245 432 615 719
22 x 2,5 303 592 843 987
24 x 3 353 744 1060 1240
27 x 3 459 1100 1570 1840
30 x 3,5 561 1500 2130 2500

S.p.A.
36071 ARZIGNANO (VI) Italy - Via Marchetti, 28 - Tel. 0444 471100 r.a. - Telefax 0444 471105
www.ferrariventilatori.com www.ferrariventilatori.it e-mail: flliferrari@ferrariventilatori.it
Cl l i rENSl 0Nl [ ] ' | NGOMBF0 E PESI SERI E
"t "
OVEBALT t]IMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS SERIES
"fA"
DIMENSIONS D'ENCOMBREMENT EI POIDS SERIE
"TA"
MASSE UND GEWICHTE SERIE
"FT"
I motori con un tempo di avvi amsnl o a bocca chi usa i nferi ore a 12 secondi possono sopportare N.3 av-
vi amenti aouemente ri parti ti nsl l ' arco di un' ora parl ando con i l motore a l empel atura ambi ente, oppure N.
2 dvramenli in un oB con il motore a regime. l motori con empo di avviamento superiore a 12 secondi
possonosoppona eN 1 avvi ament o af r eddo.
* Moton con pol enza suoenore a quel l a di cal al ogo
Motors wi th sarti ng ttme l sss than' f2 sconds, may stand 3 subsequ6nt startangs, uni formol y dj sl ri buted
each hol r wi l h motor at ambi enl temprature, or 2 each hour wi th mol or al l un tsmperai ure (tan oul l el
cl ossd). Motors wi h starti ng trme oyer' 12 soconds may stand onl y 1 starl l ng wi th motor al ambi enl tem-
0eratufe
* Votors wLl h power hi gher than n l he catal ogue
Avc spi rati on ou refoul ement frm. l ss moteurs avec un l emps de dmarrage i nfri our 12 secondes
peuvsnt supporter
j usqu' 3 dmarragss par heure qui l abl ment rparti s dans l ' heurs avec un mol eur a
tempratur ambi ante: ou bi an 2 dmarragas par hguro avoc l e mol ur dj chaud. Lss motaurs avec
temps d dmarrage supri eur 12 sconds pouvent supponer 1 seul dmarrage par heure avec mo-
teur froi d
* Moteurs avec pu' ssance mal or oar rappon au catal ogue
Di e Motoren mi t Anri ebszei t, bei geschl oss6n6r Saugsei te, di e ni adfl ger al s t2 Sekunden i st, knnn ent-
wed6r 3 Antri be rn der Zi tsoanne ei ner Stunde bei Faumtmperaturmotor, od6r 2 Antri ebo i n ei ner
Sunde be Vol orendrenzehl , vertragon. Di 6 Motoren mi t Antri ebszei r, di e hhr al s 12 Sekundn i st, kn-
nen 1 Kal l anl aul veri ragen.
* Mol ofen qroBer al s i m Kal al og.
N . 4 S o r e s a
4 Eohr ungen o
Tlpo wnllatora
Fan Type
Typ \nlalaut
yp V.ntilator
gi ri / mi n,
r-p. .
n | (sec)
FA 3t I B4A/ RD270
-
6382 0 2 5 27AO 6
FA 35r F4A/RD270
-
718 0 3 7 2810 6
FA 401 R4A/ FD270
- 7142 0, 55 2820
FA 45r F4A/ 8O270
-
S0A2 0 7 5 2830 l 0
FA 501 F4A/FD270
"
8082 2840 l 0
FA 561 R4A/PO27o
-
9052 5 2840 r 0
FA 632 R4A/RO270
-
90L2 2850 t o
FA 631 R4A/RO'o
-
9012 28s0 0
FA 712 B4A/R0Z|0
-
10oLA2 3 2900
a7124NFO270
-
t00LA2 * 3.8 290C o
F^ 711 {^|RDZ0
-
112M2 29i 0
F^711 B4NAO270 12M2 * 291 0 0
F^ AO2 e4NO270
-
112A2 4 2 9 : 0
FA802R4A/ RO270
'
I 12M2 * 291 0 1 0
FA 801 B4AnO270
- 132542 2890
FA 801 n4A/RD270 32342 * 2900 t 0
FA 902 B4A/RO270
-
1 32M82 I 2900 6
FA 902 n,1A/nO270
- l32Ma2 * 5 2900 l l
FA 901 F4A/ RD270 . 160MR2 2930 t 6
FA 90't F4A/RO270
-
r60IR2 * 2930
I rpo/l ypa
Ventilalore
I
u",,!,ii.", I
YP
Molore
Motor
Moteu r
vent | l at of e
Fan
Vent i l at eu.
Venttlator
A I B 1 c l o i E l F l G
H 2
Basamento
Base
Chassi s
Sockel
L I M i N O I P ] O
Flangia aspirante
l nl et f l ange
Bride a l'aspiration
Fl ansch saugsei t E
d i d l I d 2 i n ' l o i mx t
Fl angi a prement e
Out l et f l ange
Bride en refoulement
Fl ansch drucksert t ng
a a l a 2 l n ' l o
Peso
Wei ght
Pods
G*rcht
PD2
GD2
Kof m'
FA 31 1 R4A
FA 351 R4A 71 A2
285
310
5t 5 520 270 220 I 35 31 I 280
158
193
45
45 1U
t 4
1 4
'18'l
1 0
1 0
:.:t:14,ll:
M6X16
54 84 04 4 i E
22
25
0, 15
,!,24
0, 54
0. 74
FA, 4A'
FA 45'
FA 50'
re 5o-
R4A
R4A
R4A
n,i r
R4A
71 82
80 A2
3 1 0
340 670 350 300 I 35 355
I 3
203
203
45
45
45
'f
34
144
1U
1 4
1 4
203
203
10
1 0
, , ool t r t , t ' ' o
r i e sr I sl ror
I
- l
u.
i ,, '0.
4 8 39
42
90 s2
90 s2
390
390 780 I 80{i r405 425 239 55 167 r 17 260 zra
j
ro ;.1 ,;, ,,,
i
,
l,
4 8 64
1 , 1
1 8
2 1
t 1 2 1 0 0 t 2
112 2
itz u1
132 SA2
450
5qo
500
580
880 I 900 455 475 291 30 23 324 2S9 t u o l r * r t ] r i * 66 102 126 4 l 8
94
1 0 1
- ' i 1'
8, 8
1 0 I
FA 802 R4A
FA 801 R4A
9Bo roro I sos 530
360
352
467
30
40 23
324
372
289
66 102 t 26
153
211
FA 902 R4A
FA 901 R4A
132 MB2
160 MR2 710
4, "" i . , , ^ 1. , ^
" . " " " - t - ' " uoo
I
uo1 600
40
50
289 372 337
' t 4
1 s 4 l 2 1 s , 2 s 1 i B l B 83 1 1 8 143
Peso vent i l al of e I n kt ( compl t o dl mol or a)
Fan wei ght i n kgf ( i nc udr ng mol o4
Pot ds du v6nt i l at eur en kgf ( compl et avec ool eu4
Venl r at or gowi cht i ^ kgl { mi t Mot or )
T b e l a n o n i mp e n a l r v a
The abov dal a ar e unbt ndr ng
I a b l 6 a u s a o s e n g a g e me n l
Un v o r b l n d l c h o a b c l l 6
03
4t 2c
I b l c
1q
DIMENSIONI []' ING()MSR(] E PESI SERIT
"FC'
OVERATL OIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS SERIES'F8"
DIMENSIONS I]'ENCOMBREMENT ET POIDS SFRIE
'TC"
MASSE UNt) OFWICHTF SERIE'FC'
N. 4 F o n t
N. a Bo. oE s
N. 4 For ur g o
4 Bohrungen 6
r l pl yp
Ventlatore
I
Far
I
ver'llateur
I
Var*ilalnr I
vp
l,1ot0ro
Mol(T
Motsuf
Molfr
YgruEICf8
Fan
Ventllsleur
Ventilator
I I a I c D l E I F I G I H ?
usatgnto
Baso
Chassis
Sockel
I L I M l N l 0 l P l 0
l-E9r0 6sprrafi6
Iniet lnge
Bri A laspifatjcfl
Fl$sch saugseig
d i { i i l d 2 l n ' l o l ml
Flan$a premerte
0uietflsnge
Bnde n rfoLdoment
Flansch drucksgrtng
a I o I a t l b 1 l a 2 l b 2 l n 1 D I n z o l n ' l o
Wsi$t
Poids
06nicht
Kof
?D2
GD2
Kolm,
FC 501 P4A 90 s2 39t 715 E00 335
1 1
2U 1( 144 182 8
M6X2O
105 70 13! 1 1 0 r65 13[ 6/ 1. t .
l -c b01 P4A
FC 561 P4A
90 L2
100 LAi
420
,tAn
805 890 375JYJ 50 47 500
zt
263
OJ
30
rq0
210
t t tov
324
tc
28S
I U
12
164200 2U I 117 85 51 1 1 9177145
101
1 1 0
1, 8
1 n
FC E3? P4A
FC 632 P4A
FC 631 P4A
FC 631 P4A
FC 631 P4A
] UU LAI
112 t \ 12
100 LAz
11? i ,rl ?
1 1 1
q A)
530
490
530
550
910 1 000 J O 53 560
280
280
280
m0
330
30
30
30
30
40
221
227
227
287
23
23
i ^
I J
324
324
324
izq
372
?89
,n0
289
2s
337
1 2
12
12
12
12
18{ 2U I I 131 95 t of , 191155 1- 100 6 10
t t v
132
137
' 151
l , c
3, 1
3, 1
3 1
c 11? P4A
FC 712 PAA
FC 712 P4A
FC 711 P4A
FC 711 P4A
FC 711 P4A
112 M2
132 SA?
132 S82
132 SA?
132 SB2
132 MB2
! / u
630
630
630
630
630
101 5 1120475 49700 58630
w
304
364
364
304
364
w
40
40
40
40
40
301
301
?ni
301
301
23
IJ
23
23
372
372
171
J t I
312
289
J J T
l J l
J J I
337
1?
t 1
12
12
12
12
2M241 214 I I 146 105 r821392161t3 1-1126 12
t 04
117
183
181
187
196
4, y
4,9
4.9
( 0
6 0
I -L UUl I ' 44
FC 802 P4A
FC 802 P4A
FC 801
p4A
FC 801 P4A
FC 801 P4A
132 MB2
160 MR2
132 M82
160 MR2
160 f/2
FU
MO
725
XU
t t t
725
1 140 126053056068 64 710
304
364
415
304
415
475
4U
40
50
40
50
50
301
301
3S7
301
397
23
28
23
28
28
J I I
372
440
372
MO
440
J J T
J J I
395
337
JS
3S5
12
1i2
14
12
14
t 2 265 ?98 I I 164 117 200151 187 1-1126 12
221
229
253
258
) M
7,4
7,4
1 0 3
1 0 3
1 n
FC 902 P4A
FC 902 P4A
FC 902 P4A
FC 901 P4A
FC
gOJ
P4A
FC 901 P4A
160 MR?
160 r2
160 L2
160 M2
160 L2
180 M2
/35
735
/35
i 35
716
780
1 285 1420600631 74 72800
q t J
475
475
475
5)0
w
s
50
50
70
JVr
J Y/
397
397
397
417
z
28
28
m
28
u0
440
440
440
ann
cvc
305
39s
395
395
434
11
1l
1t
29 2925t q 8 10
M8X?5
183131215 165 253201 1. 112o 1 i
J0u
368
i tt
372
383
405
t l
12,8
12,8
r 6 1
t ( 1
t sr
FC 1OO2 P4A
FC 1001 P4A
FC 1001 P4A
FC 1001 P4A
18 M2
200 t2
180 M2
200 L2
200 L2
uu{.1
0r(
800
925
925
' 1430
1590670 70i 85 83 s0(
552
512
592
80
70
80
80
433
409
433
473
JJ
JJ
39
39
4UU
568
488
568
616
4J4
500
434
506
556
1;
' t(
1
1{
1{
?85JJI 365 o 10 205146241 182 216 t . l t l 1, 1128 1
4il
33f,
470
575
585
1 9 1
t o 1
t f
23,1
I J
P& v6nt i l st or l n kgf (compl t o di mot or)
Fan wel ghl i n kgl (l ncl udi ng mot or)
Pol d6 du wnt l l El cut on kgf (cohpl 6t av$ not eur)
Vsnt i l at oroewl cht i n kgf (mi t Mot or)
Tabllr non lmpegnatiw
Ths above dala are unbinding
Tadau aan! angagomen
unYerblndllcho Tab.lle
A A
CARAITFRISTICHE IN PREMEIITI VENTIt,A'IORI SERIE
'TA"
CARACTERISTIOUES OES VENTILATEURS DE tA SERIE
"fT'
ORTVAII
EII SOUT'TTOE)
SPECIFICATI[)NS FOR FANS SERIES
"T'
ITI DISCHAROE SIAGE EGENSCHAFTEN SERIE
"TA"
OER VENTITATOREN ORUCKSEIIG
o, o, i o, o. i o, o. l o, ou ] o, ou l o, o, l o, or l o, or l
o, ' ' o
i o, , t J o, t . l o, , r l
o, , r
1
o' , e
l o, t t I
or t o: .
i
o' , 0
a. 22 0, 25 2780 I 55
"ii l .l-r'o-l .
FA 311 n4A I
63 82
I '
FA 351 R4A : 7l A2
FA 401 B4A I 71 82
*- ot t nool eo oz
ryg,
R4-!
_9n J3
FA s61 R4A
|
90 52
FA 632 R4A
FA 712 R4A I r O0 LA2
F A8 0 2 R4 A 1 1 2 M2
FA 8 0 1 R4 A 1 3 2 SA2
FA 902 R4A 132182
F A S O ] R 4 A 1 MMF 2
tr
--f
.s f 2seo I uo
to Loran2a s! la tumoGil + 3 d8/A Tone 6!rnryead e6re r 3 d&a
' Tubdrce
solo in prmnl
Na * ' ave ro,crarce * 3 d& ro6iz ScblPgd + 3 d&A Piping onlv on dschatg sd
Ba@d& unaFmanla reldennl T&ran?a sE Ph I 5"i
Fohitung nur h dr#ilig Crycrly bleaG r 5ol.
CARATIEBISIICHE IN PREMEIITE VENTILATOBI SERIE
"FC"
CARACTERISTIOUES t)ES VENIILATEURS I]E LA SERIE
'FC"
(TRAVAIT EII SOUFTI.AGE)
SPECIFICATIONS FOR FANS SERIES
"TC"
III IISCIIARGE STAGE EIOENSCHAFEN SERIE' TC" DER VENTILAIOREN ORUGKSEIIG
f l 9 9 l f y p e / f y g
V.ntllaltro Motor.
Fr n l l ot or
vgnl l l r l cur Hol aur
Vcnllltor llotor
o , o " ] 0 , , 0 o , , l o , , . i o . r . ] o . r r l o . , n o , r , ] o , r . l o , r . l o , " o l o . . . l o , . r l o , o r i o , o t l o , . . o . u o l o , u t i o , r , o . t u i o n u
FC 1 P4A i 90 52
FC 561 PA r 90 L2
----
FC 561 P4A
I r0o LAz
61 3 627
FC 63r
p4A 112 M2
FC 631 P4A I r 32 SA2
i c " i t * l , ' i *
i c z, zo*f u se:
r c i r z p +r l , s z s e :
* zr
pdl-r.,
JAi
FC 711 P4A 132 SB2
FC 71 ! P4r
' 32
MA2
FC 802 P4A 132 SA2
FC S02p4A 132M82
FC 802
p4A
I
160 MR2
FC 902 P4A t 6O MR2
FC 902 P4A t 60 M2
i c goz pl
I ,eo ra
Fc ao1 P4a i 160 M2
rc sor
pan] ffi rJ
FC 1002 P4A
FC 1002
p4a
790
-t;
875
g1
799
789
88
:T
8 7 6
8 0 5 1 8 1 1 I 8 1 4
r 1 3 2 i 1 1 4 6 i 1 1 5 8
8. 5 I 2900 86
l 2 f Ol 1 2 2 0 1 r 2 3 0
iil iiio i rzs
21 8 22 294A
r s 75 16061 1626i 164s
17A8 17 12
' Barll *!T r rr tTt r36-i, rrtG6,
1921 1936i 1952i 1969
3 4 , 3 7 2 9 6 0 1
9 1
ToleEn za s! lle rutu rosila + 3 d &A Torarce slr nrveau s$ors + 3 d&A
'
Iu btlon solo n prgmor !
\ols rvd io e raee + 3 d8/A loleta.z Schalpgel + 3 d8/A Prpi ng on y on di$harge sido
Ra@rd uiqmenla rclodemanl Tdb.arza sllla Fnala r 5%
Rfibdsq n!n duckseilE Ceoac' ly l*ra@ r 5%
*
I * x
q +
'._.
= E 9
t s E
V ' F 6 =
6 * ; t :
"
= o :
a X ;
! ! :
o o h :
? r F
6
o o o o o o o o
D b o o t o o o
D * O h N O @ @
A O d N N R
l l e l l l l r l
I t - t t t t '
t t o t t t t l l
r l f r l l l l l l
N l n O D N 6 @
N N N 6 @ @ 0 D
I
I
-3
-R
- N
l o
t-8
l N
I
r-
l-e
I '
r
t ^
F=
f :
r
r
r
l<
I t
I
I
l-3
t -
r
I
I
FO
l d
r
I
I
r
l o
qJ
ac
I
r)
ao
N
o o o
o 6 0
o o
O O O
o o o
- N O
o
:
- .
; g H
= ^
l - 1 -
9 + -
= o " . - *
= r 6 > X
- : : E
f r l Hr
: = c c
! ( q
( , ' : z
o i o
N i
E
o o 0 o 6 0 0 0
< o Q o o e o o o
{ o o o o o o o o
-
@ f o 0 6 N b h
t
o o
o o
o o
F
O-
F
(ft
ll':t
CJ
l!
=
a
E EE
E fi BA
E = = E
, r . - # 9
E S
F E
g E
= E
. - E g
9 q 3 e
? 5 = . s g
E E E
E F E
s
I

g
i - *
= 3 e
9 c r !
t s S =
: e J g
V ' F :
-
d - L . g
c 2 > ! : 5
^ o R
8 S . * f
l ? ; :
E
t
o s
E E
-3
F3
r *
- l
-
f o
rE
Fg
. F
: F o
:B
FB
- l
13 F
;R
TF
: I
. t
-g E:
i t
.
! F 6
. l
:o Fg
: t
-N
l-
: t
. t
: F
E
N
o
@
, o
o o o o o o o o o
o n F o 0 l o o o
O b i 6 O d e o G
f O O N N N N $
l l l o l l l l l l
l t t 6 l t t r r r
l l l - l l l l l l
I t - l l l l l l
N { i O h N
@ @ @ n b
t t t l t l I
- t
O 6 -
9 9 9
o o o
o o
- N
o
V / 1 l

= - N : E E E
' 6
E o
: : + +
! : t : e
: Y e
' -
n X F - *
= ; ! ;
i i s
g
o@
g
! 9 r
c s o F d
. : = =:
t , t , l
o o o o o o o o o g o
6 O O O O O O O O O O O O O
& o o o o o o a o o o r o @
t o o @ N @ n l o d
E
6
rF
O.
F
ct
lcl
CJ
IL
F
a
E EE
E B A
s = = E
E
g
E = E
E E = E
- s t l !
. = g n
f ; E l s
EEEE
E ' E E A
F F . = '
CJ C'' (J g

UM10724G00

Transféré par

Informations du document

Description originale:

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

UM10724G00

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Claudius Peters (Italiana) srl

InterApp AG Tel. +41 (0)41 798 22 33

InterApp AG Tel. +41 (0)41 798 22 33

coated (RAL 5021).

Actuator size IA050 - IA700

Mounting face for valve F03 - F16 According to EN ISO5211

Shaft connection [mm] Dimension of shaft connection

coated (RAL 5021)

limit switch type

-30...+90C (mech. limit switch)

Vous aimerez peut-être aussi